Service Manual: Digital Full Color Printer Laser Printer

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXC400PS2E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR PRINTER

LASER PRINTER
MX-C400P/C380P
MODEL MX-B400P/B380P
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[14] SIGNAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
[15] ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Paper feed tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. Paper transport and switchback section . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 5. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
6. Note for handling the drum cartridge, the transfer unit, 6. Photo-conductor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
the developer cartridge, and the fusing unit. . . . . . . . . . iii 7. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 8. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
1. MX-C400P/C380P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 9. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
2. MX-B400P/B380P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 10. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
11. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
12. Process control sensor,
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
image registration sensor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
13. Electrical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
4. Life end conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 [9] MAINTENANCE
5. Life end display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 1. Necessary work for maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
6. Recommended color paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2. Maintenance timing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
7. Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
3. Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 4. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
5. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 5. Paper transport, switchback section . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
6. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
7. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 7. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
8. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 8. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
9. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 9. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10. Fans and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 10. Transfer section (MX-C400P/C380P). . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
11. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 11. Transfer section (MX-B400P/B380P) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
12. Fuses and Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
13. Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 13. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
14. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 14. Drive section (MX-C400P/C380P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
15. Drive section (MX-B400P/B380P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
[4] ADJUSTMENTS
16. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
17. Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
18. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
19. Process control sensor, registration sensor . . . . . . . 10-68
[5] SIMULATION 20. Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
1. Necessary works when replacing the PWB
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
[13] SPECIFICATIONS
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[14] SIGNAL LIST
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1. MX-C400P/C380P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
2. MX-B400P/B380P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
[15] ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM
1. Image process (MFPC, LSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
2. Operation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
3. Paper feed transport, Process drive, Front,
High voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
4. Right door, Frame fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
5. Process, DV, RESI, Paper exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
6. Power source, Frame electrical fitting, Option . . . . . . 15-9
7. AC, Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
NOTE
MX-C400P
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
• Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, • Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only)
It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
result.
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
grounding must be made.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted. • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following
items.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect
the power plug from the power outlet.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all
the parts including the cover installed and perform the opera-
tion check.
4) Do not modify the LSU.
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper-
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the
eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is
performed, safety may not be assured.
6. Note for handling the drum cartridge, the

transfer unit, the developer cartridge, and
the fusing unit
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel-
oper unit, strictly observe the following items.
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
copy and print image quality.
(Drum cartridge)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights
for a long time.
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10
sheets of paper to cover it.)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
eign material on the OPC drum surface.
(Transfer unit)
eign material on the transfer belt and the transfer roller.
(Developer cartridge)
eign material on the developer unit.
(Fusing unit)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt.
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time.
NOTE:
This manual describes the contents common to the both models of the MX-C400P/C380P and
the MX-B400P/B380P.
The contents, in this manual, which include a model name, differ between the MX-C400P/C380P and
the MX-B400P/B380P.
The other contents which do not include a model name are common to the both models.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. MX-C400P/C380P
A. System configuration
MX-CV10
Finisher cover
MX-FN12
Finisher
MX-C400P/C380P
Digital full color printer
MX-SCX1
Staple cartridge
MX-CSX1
500 sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2
500 sheet paper feed unit 500 sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2 MX-CSX2

500 sheet paper feed unit 500 sheet paper feed unit 500 sheet paper feed unit
AR-PF1 MX-FR20U MX-PUX1 MX-SMX3

Barcode font kit Data security kit XPS expansion kit Expansion memory board
(Commercial version) (1GB)
B. Machine configuration
MX-C400P/C380P
Main body LCD 4.3 Inch color LCD
Automatic duplex STD
HDD 80GB
System memory 1GB
Local memory 512MB
Codec memory 256MB
PCL printer STD
PS printer STD
Network printer STD
Filing STD
Security OPT *1
OSA STD
STD: Standard provision, OPT: Option, *1: Product key target
C. Option list
Model Name Model name MX-C400P/C380P Product key target
Paper feed system 500-sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX1 OPT –
500-sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX2 OPT –
Paper exit system Finisher MX-FN12 OPT *2 –
Finisher cover MX-CV10 OPT –
Electrical system (ROM) Barcode font kit AR-PF1 OPT –
Data security kit MX-FR20U OPT Yes
Electrical system (Software) XPS expansion kit MX-PUX1 OPT * 1 Yes
Memory (1GB) Expansion memory board MX-SMX3 OPT –
OPT: Option, –: No setting

*1: To install the MX-PUX1, the MX-SMX3 is required.
*2: To install the finisher (MX-FN12), the finisher cover (MX-CV10) is required.
When installing the MX-FN12, the MX-CV10 must be installed together.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. MX-B400P/B380P
A. System configuration
MX-CV10
Finisher cover
MX-FN12
Finisher MX-B400P
MX-B380P
Laser printer
MX-SCX1
Staple cartridge
MX-CSX1
500-sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2
500-sheet paper feed unit 500-sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2 MX-CSX2

500-sheet paper feed unit 500-sheet paper feed unit 500-sheet paper feed unit
AR-PF1 MX-FR21U MX-PUX1 MX-SMX3

Barcode font kit Data security kit XPS expansion kit Expansion memory board
(Commercial version) (1GB)
B. Machine configuration
MX-B400P/B380P
Main body LCD 4.3 Inch color LCD
Automatic duplex STD
HDD 80GB
System memory 512MB
Local memory 512MB
PCL printer STD
PS printer STD
Network printer STD
Filing STD
Security OPT *1
OSA STD
STD: Standard provision, OPT: Option, *1: Product key target
C. Option list
Model Name Model name MX-B400P/B380P Product key target
Paper feed system 500-sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX1 OPT –
500-sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX2 OPT –
Paper exit system Finisher MX-FN12 OPT *2 –
Finisher cover MX-CV10 OPT –
Electrical system (ROM) Barcode font kit AR-PF1 OPT –
Data security kit MX-FR21U OPT Yes
Electrical system (Software) XPS expansion kit MX-PUX1 OPT * 1 Yes
Memory (1GB) Expansion memory board MX-SMX3 OPT –
OPT: Option, –: No setting

*1: To install the MX-PUX1, the MX-SMX3 is required.
*2: To install the finisher (MX-FN12), the finisher cover (MX-CV10) is required.
When installing the MX-FN12, the MX-CV10 must be installed together.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. MX-C400P/C380P
(1) USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-C400P)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C40NTB 10
(Black toner : Net 215g)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C40NTC 10
(Cyan toner : Net 195g)
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C40NTM 10
(Magenta toner : Net 195g)
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C40NTY 10
(Yellow toner : Net 195g)
5 Developer Cartridge (Black) Developer Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C40NVB 10
(Black developer : Net 185g)
6 Developer Cartridge (Cyan) Developer Cartridge (Cyan) x1 30K *2 MX-C40NVC 10
(Cyan developer : Net 185g)
7 Developer Cartridge (Magenta) Developer Cartridge (Magenta) x1 30K *2 MX-C40NVM 10
(Magenta developer : Net 185g)
8 Developer Cartridge (Yellow) Developer Cartridge (Yellow) x1 30K *2 MX-C40NVY 10
(Yellow developer : Net 185g)
9 Drum Cartridge (Black) Drum Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C40NRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
10 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge (Common to C, M, Y) x1 30K *2 MX-C40NRS 10
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) * 3 cartridges are required for one machine.
*1: Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 8K for A4/Letter 6%)
The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
*2: Life: A4/Letter size in 4-sheet continuous print within 550K of the cartridge rotations.
(2) Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand (MX-C380P)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38GTB 10
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38GTC 10
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38GTM 10
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38GTY 10
5 Developer Cartridge (Black) Developer Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38GVB 10
6 Developer Cartridge (Cyan) Developer Cartridge (Cyan) x1 30K *2 MX-C38GVC 10
7 Developer Cartridge (Magenta) Developer Cartridge (Magenta) x1 30K *2 MX-C38GVM 10
8 Developer Cartridge (Yellow) Developer Cartridge (Yellow) x1 30K *2 MX-C38GVY 10
9 Drum Cartridge (Black) Drum Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38GRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
10 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge (Common to C, M, Y) x1 30K *2 MX-C38GRS 10
The life of toner cartridges packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

(3) Asia/SRH (MX-C380P)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38ATB 10
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38ATC 10
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38ATM 10
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38ATY 10
5 Developer Cartridge (Black) Developer Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38AVB 10
6 Developer Cartridge (Cyan) Developer Cartridge (Cyan) x1 30K *2 MX-C38AVC 10
7 Developer Cartridge (Magenta) Developer Cartridge (Magenta) x1 30K *2 MX-C38AVM 10
8 Developer Cartridge (Yellow) Developer Cartridge (Yellow) x1 30K *2 MX-C38AVY 10
9 Drum Cartridge (Black) Drum Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38ARB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
10 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge (Common to C, M, Y) x1 30K *2 MX-C38ARS 10
(4) SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-C380P)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTB 10
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTC 10
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTM 10
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTY 10
5 Developer Cartridge (Black) Developer Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38FVB 10
6 Developer Cartridge (Cyan) Developer Cartridge (Cyan) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVC 10
7 Developer Cartridge (Magenta) Developer Cartridge (Magenta) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVM 10
8 Developer Cartridge (Yellow) Developer Cartridge (Yellow) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVY 10
9 Drum Cartridge (Black) Drum Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38FRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
10 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge (Common to C, M, Y) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FRS 10

B. MX-B400P/B380P
(1) USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-B400P)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner : Net 215g) x1 10K *1 MX-B40NT1 10
2 Developer Cartridge Developer Cartridge (Developer : Net 185g) x1 72K *2 MX-C40NVB 10
3 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge x1 72K *2 MX-C40NRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
*2: 72K sheets or 550K rotations (For details, refer to item 4, "Life end conditions.")
The life of the above Developer Cartridge and the Drum Cartridge is 72K only when they are installed to the MX-B400P.
(2) Europe (MX-B380P)
Quantity in
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge with IC Chip (Toner : Net 215g) x1 10K *1 MX-C38GTB 10
2 Developer Cartridge Developer Cartridge (Developer : Net 185g) x1 72K *2 MX-C38GVB 10
3 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge x1 72K *2 MX-C38GRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
The life of toner cartridge packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
*2: 72K sheets or 550K rotations (For details, refer to item 4, "Life end conditions.")
The life of the above Developer Cartridge and the Drum Cartridge is 72K only when they are installed to the MX-B380P.
2. Maintenance parts list

A. MX-C400P/C380P
(1) USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-C400P)
No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

1 Heat roller kit MX-C31HK Upper heat roller assembly 1 120K 5
Lower heat roller assembly 1
External heating unit 1
Separation pawl lower 2
Separation pawl lower spring 2
Upper thermistor retainer 1
Upper thermistor 1
Lower thermistor 1
2 Primary transfer kit MX-C31Y1 Intermediate transfer belt F 1 120K 5
Primary transfer roller F 4
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner assembly 1
PTC cleaner B AS 1
Primary transfer drive coupling 1
3 Primary transfer belt unit MX-C31U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 120K 1
4 Secondary transfer roller unit MX-C31U2 Secondary transfer roller unit 1 60K 1
5-1 Fusing unit MX-C31FU1 Fusing unit (Heater lamp 120V) 1 120K 1
Ozone filter 1
5-2 Fusing unit MX-C31FU Fusing unit (Heater lamp 230V) 1 120K 1
Ozone filter 1
6 Filter kit MX-C31FL Ozone filter 1 120K 10
7 Toner collection container MX-C31HB Toner collection container 2 30K 5
LSU cleaner 2 (15K x 2) *1
8 Paper feed roller kit MX-C31RT Paper feed roller FT 1 Replace as 10 Reference: About 100K
Take-up roller FT 1 needed. (Commonly used for the
Separation roller FT 1 MX-CSX1/MX-CSX2.)
9 Manual paper feed roller kit MX-C31MR MF paper feed roller 1 Replace as 10 Reference: About 100K
Manual paper feed separation pad unit 1 needed.
10 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times 20 Consumable part of the
x3 MX-FN12 (option)
*1: The life is estimated with 5% coverage of each color and 25% color ratio. It differs depending on the use conditions of the machine.

(2) Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand (MX-C380P)

Upper thermistor 1
Lower thermistor 1
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner B AS 1
5 Fusing unit MX-C31FU Fusing unit (Heater lamp 230V) 1 120K 1
Ozone filter 1
x3 MX-FN12 (option)
(3) Asia/Middle East/Africa/Agency (MX-C380P)

Upper thermistor 1
Lower thermistor 1
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner B AS 1
Ozone filter 1
Ozone filter 1
x3 MX-FN12 (option)

B. MX-B400P/B380P
(1) USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-B400P)

Upper thermistor 1
Lower thermistor 1
2 Primary transfer kit MX-B40Y1 Intermediate transfer belt F 1 120K 5
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner B AS 1
3 Primary transfer belt unit MX-B40U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 120K 1
Ozone filter 1
Ozone filter 1
7 Toner collection container MX-B40HB Toner collection container 2 45K for 5
LSU cleaner 2 one *1
8 Paper feed roller kit MX-C31RT Paper feed roller FT 1 Replace 10 Reference: About 100K
Take-up roller FT 1 as needed. (Commonly used for the
9 Manual paper feed roller kit MX-C31MR MF paper feed roller 1 Replace 10 Reference: About 100K
Manual paper feed separation pad unit 1 as needed.
x3 MX-FN12 (option)
*1: The life is estimated with 5% coverage. It differs depending on the use conditions of the machine.
(2) Europe (MX-B380P)

Upper thermistor 1
Lower thermistor 1
2 Primary transfer kit MX-B38Y1 Intermediate transfer belt F 1 120K 5
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner B AS 1
3 Primary transfer belt unit MX-B38U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 120K 1
5 Fusing unit MX-C31FU Fusing unit (Heater lamp 230V) 1 120K 1
Ozone filter 1
7 Toner collection container MX-B38HB Toner collection container 2 45K for 5
LSU cleaner 2 one *1
8 Paper feed roller kit MX-C31RT Paper feed roller FT 1 Replace 10 Reference: About 100K
Take-up roller FT 1 as needed. (Commonly used for the
9 Manual paper feed roller kit MX-C31MR MF paper feed roller 1 Replace 10 Reference: About 100K
Manual paper feed separation pad unit 1 as needed.
x3 MX-FN12 (option)
*1: The life is estimated with 5% coverage. It differs depending on the use conditions of the machine.

3. Production number identification 4. Life end conditions
A. Developer cartridge A. MX-C400P/C380P
(1) Toner cartridge
After detecting near end, when the toner density is lowered to the
specified level or lower and the toner sensor detects toner LOW
continuously for a certain time, it is judged as toner end.
(2) Developer cartridge/Drum cartridge
• When the developer (developer cartridge)/drum counter exceeds
the specified number of sheets.
• When the rpm of the developer cartridge/drum cartridge exceeds
the specified number.
If one of the above two exceeds the specified level, it is judged as
life end.
In an actual use, the ratio of the color output may be extremely
greater than the monochrome output, and vice versa.
For a document or data with monochrome and color components, it
may be outputted in the color mode in order to prevent against fall
‫غغغغغغغغغغغغغ‬㧙٠٠㧙ً㧙ٟ in the job efficiency.
㧙٨㧙٤٤٤٤٤㧙٧٧٧٧٧٧㧙ٌ In addition to during the output operation, the developer cartridge
and the drum are rotated during the correction operation and the
warm-up operation.
: Unit code/Model name Because of these factors, the consumption degree of the developer
: Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE) cartridge and the drum cartridge cannot be determined only with
the print quantity. When, therefore, the number of rotations of the
: Destination
cartridge exceeds the specified level, it is judged as life end.
: Skating
: Production place Number of rotations of
Developer (Developer
{: Production date (YYYYMMDD) cartridge)/Drum counter
cartridge)/Drum
: Serial number Black-White Full color Black-White Full color
: Version number Developer 60K 30K 550K 550K
(Developer rotations rotations
cartridge)/Drum
B. Toner cartridge
The accumulated number of rotations of each developer (developer
cartridge)/drum can be displayed with SIM 22-1 as the reference
for the drum/developer (developer cartridge) life. The value dis-
played with SIM 22-1 indicates the reached level (%) when the
developer (developer cartridge)/drum life is 100%.
Example) Life 550K, used number of rotations 385K
385/550 x 100 = 70 (%)
70,000
Numbers of printable quantity
60,000
50,000
40,000 Black drum
30,000 Color drum
20,000
10,000
0
ti
ti
ti
ti
ul
ul
ul
ul
m
m
m
m
ts
le
s
ts
t
ee
ng
ee
ee
sh
Si
sh
sh
4
2
Black drum Color drum

Single multi 31,000 20,000
2 sheets multi 46,000 26,000
3 sheets multi 54,000 28,000
The indications of a lot number are the same as those of the devel- 4 sheets multi 60,000 30,000
oper cartridge.

B. MX-B400P/B380P As the reference for the drum/developer (developer cartridge) life.
the accumulated number of rotations can be displayed with SIM 22-
(1) Toner cartridge 1. The value displayed with SIM 22-1 indicates the reached level in
After detecting near end, when the toner density is lowered to the percent (%) when the developer (developer cartridge)/drum life is
specified level or lower and the toner sensor detects toner LOW 100%.
continuously for a certain time, it is judged as toner end. Example) Life 550K, used number of rotations 385K
(2) Developer cartridge/Drum cartridge 385/550 x 100 = 70 (%)
• When the developer (developer cartridge)/drum counter exceeds
the specified number of sheets.
80,000
• When the rpm of the developer cartridge/drum cartridge exceeds
the specified number. 70,000
Numbers of printable quantity

In an actual use, in the correction operation and the warm-up oper- 60,000
ation as well as the output operation, the developer cartridge and 50,000
the drum rotate idly.
40,000
If the correction operation and the warm-up operation are made fre-
30,000
quently, idle rotations of the developer cartridge and the drum are
increased accordingly. 20,000
Because of these factors, the consumption degree of the developer 10,000
cartridge and the drum cartridge cannot be determined only with 0
the print quantity. When, therefore, the number of rotations of the
ti
ti
ti
ti
cartridge exceeds the specified level, it is judged as life end.
ul
ul
ul
ul
m
m
le
ts
s
et
et
ng
ee
e
Number of rotations of
Si
sh
sh
sh
4
cartridge)/Drum counter
cartridge)/Drum
Black-White Black-White
Developer 72K 550K rotations Single multi 33,000
(Developer 2 sheets multi 52,000
cartridge)/Drum 3 sheets multi 64,000
4 sheets multi 72,000
5. Life end display

A. MX-C400P/C380P
(1) Drum cartridge
For Bk C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job Enable/
Display content SIM26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: DK Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DC Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DM Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DY Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: DK When 60K + 1K is reached Disable
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
When 550K rotation + 430Kmm Disable
is reached
Maintenance required. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached by either Enable for Black/White
Code: DC/DM/DY Drum cartridge print counter (M) counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) by either counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
*2: When the black drum cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color drum cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
• When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation
number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the drum cartridge is replaced, SIM24-7 must be executed to clear the print counter, the
accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter.

(2) Developer cartridge
Display condition
Print job
Display content SIM26-38-F
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: VK Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VC Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VM Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VY Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: VK When 60K + 1K is reached Disable
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
is reached
Maintenance required. 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable for Black/White
Code: VC/VM/VY Developer cartridge print counter (M) Disable for Color
Developer cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) Disable for Color
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
• When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared, and the initial setting of the toner density is automatically exe-
cuted.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the developer cartridge is replaced, the initial setting of the toner density must be executed
with the SIM25-2.
(3) Toner cartridge

Display condition
Print job
Display content SIM26-38-A Remaining
Status Enable/Disable
set value quantity display *1
Y/M/C/BK *2 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
1 (Print stop)
0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of Enable
1 (Print stop) XX sheets. *3
Change3 the toner cartridge. BK 0 (Print continue) 0% When the black toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
1 (Print stop)
Change3 the toner cartridge. 0 (Display) 0% When the color toner cartridge reaches toner end. Enable for Black/White
Y/M/C 1 (No display) Disable for Color
*4
No display — 50-25% Toner remaining quantity is 49 - 25%. Enable
No display — 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100-75%. Enable
Install the toner cartridge. — No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
Y/M/C/BK When a toner cartridge of a different color is installed.
Improper cartridge. Code: F2-04 — No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error. Code: F2-05 — No display CRUM trouble Disable
Toner cartridge connector contact trouble
*1: Detected by the toner motor rotation number and the pixel count (The value of larger life percentage is employed.)
Since the life of the toner cartridge which is packed when shipping from the factory is 2.5K, the remaining quantity of the toner cartridge,
though it is a new one, is displayed as 25-0%.
*2: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with SIM26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*3: Setting can be made with SIM26-69. (Default: 0 sheet)
*4: When the black toner cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color toner cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be

B. MX-B400P/B380P
(1) Drum cartridge
Display condition Print job

Display content SIM26-38-E Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: DK 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: DK 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
When 72K + 1K is reached Disable
When 550K rotation + 430Kmm is Disable
reached

Display content SIM26-38-F Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: VK 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
reached
cuted.
• When SIM26-55 setting is set to ENABLE, the initial setting of the toner density is executed.
with the SIM25-2.
(3) Toner cartridge

Display content Remaining Enable/
Status
quantity display *1 Disable
Prepare a new toner *2 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of XX sheets. *3 Enable
Change the toner cartridge 0% When the toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
No display 50-25% Toner remaining quantity is 49 - 25%. Enable
No display 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100 -75%. Enable
Install the toner cartridge. No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
Improper cartridge. Code: F2-04 No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error. Code: F2-05 No display CRUM trouble Disable

6. Recommended color paper
The following kinds of color print paper can be recommended.
When these recommended color paper is used, a satisfactory
image quality can be obtained.
If a kind of paper other than the recommended ones is used, nor-
mal image quality (color reproduction) may not be obtained.
Model Supplier Specification

Hammermill Hammermill [11" x 8.5", 90g/m2]
LASER PRINT [11" x 17", 90g/m2]
Mondi Mondi [A4, 90g/m2]
Color Copy (90g/m2) [A3, 90g/m2]
7. Environment conditions
A. Operating environment conditions
Temperature: 10 - 35qC
Humidity: 20 - 85% RH
Atmospheric pressure: 590 - 1013hPa (Altitude: 0 - 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
Temperature
B. Transit environment conditions

(term: 2 weeks)
-20 - 45qC (Free from dew)
C. Storage environment conditions (unopened)

-10 - 40qC (Free from dew)
D. Disposal standard
Toner cartridge/developer cartridge: 24 months (unopened) from
the production month.
Drum cartridge: 36 months from the production month

[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. External view
11
12
3
5
7 10
8
13
9 10
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Operation panel Used to enter an input of various settings.
2 Paper exit tray (Center tray) Printed paper is discharged to this tray.
3 Finisher *1 Delivers stapled paper, and allows offset discharge of paper.
4 Front cover This is opened when replacing toner cartridges or the waste toner box.
5 Tray 1 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
6 Tray 2 (with the MX-CSX1 installed) *1 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
9 Main power switch Turns on the power of the machine.
10 Handle Use this handle to lift the main unit for transit.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove paper jam, lift this lever and open the right side cover.
12 Manual paper feed tray For manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R paper is set, extend the
auxiliary tray.
13 One-stage paper feed unit side cover To remove paper jam in tray 2, 3, or 4, open this cover.
(with the MX-CSX1/2 installed)
*1: Option
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

2. Internal structure
A. MX-C400P/C380P
1 6 7 8
2
4
PE
T
11
11
PET 5
9 10
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Toner cartridges When toner is exhausted in a cartridge, remove the cartridge and replace it
with a new one.
2 Drum cartridges This cartridge stores a drum. When the specified life is reached, replace it
with a new cartridge.
3 Developer cartridges This cartridge stores developer. When the specified life is reached, replace it
4 MC cleaning rod insertion port When the print quality is degraded by dirt on the MC unit, the rod to clean the One for each color
MC unit is inserted into this port.
5 LSU cleaning rod insertion port When the print quality is degraded by dirt on the LSU, the rod to clean the One for each color
LSU is inserted into this port.
6 Fusing section Fuses images transferred on paper by heat. Note: The fusing section is heated
to a high temperature. Be careful
not to burn when paper jam.
7 Transfer belt In full color print, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the Do not touch or scratch. It may
transfer belt. In black print, black toner images are shifted to the transfer belt. cause degraded images.
8 Right side cover Opened when a paper jam is generated.
9 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when printing. The waste toner box is collected
by the servicemen.
10 Waste toner box release lever When the waste toner box is removed, this lever is rotated to release lock.
11 Drum positioning plate unit release Releases lock of the drum positioning plate unit. When a drum cartridge or a
lever developer cartridge is replaced, rotate this lever to open the drum positioning
plate unit.

B. MX-B400P/C380P
1 6 7 8
4
2
11
5 11
9 10
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Toner cartridge When toner is exhausted in a cartridge, remove the cartridge and replace it
with a new one.
2 Drum cartridge This cartridge stores a drum. When the specified life is reached, replace it
3 Developer cartridge This cartridge stores developer. When the specified life is reached, replace it
4 MC cleaning rod insertion port When the copy quality is degraded by dirt on the MC unit, the rod to clean the
MC unit is inserted into this port.
5 LSU cleaning rod insertion port When the copy quality is degraded by dirt on the LSU, the rod to clean the
LSU is inserted into this port.
6 Fusing section Fuses images transferred on paper by heat. Note: The fusing section is heated
to a high temperature. Be careful
not to burn when paper jam.
7 Transfer belt The transfer belt transfers toner on the drum. Do not touch or scratch. It may
cause degraded images.
8 Right side cover Opened when a paper jam is generated.
9 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when copying or printing. The waste toner box is collected
by the servicemen.
10 Waste toner box release lever When the waste toner box is removed, this lever is rotated to release lock.
11 Drum positioning plate unit release Releases lock of the drum positioning plate unit. When a drum cartridge or a
lever developer cartridge is replaced, rotate this lever to open the drum positioning
plate unit.

3. Connectors
6
1
2 5
3
4

1 USB connector (Type A) *1 Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory. This connector cannot be used when shipping from the factory.
2 LAN connector Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.
3 USB connector (Type B) Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
4 Connector This connector is used by the serviceman.
5 Inner finisher connection connector This connector is used to connect the inner finisher and the main unit when the inner finisher (option) is installed.
6 USB connector (Type A) *1 Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
*1: When using the USB port, be careful of the total current consumption not to exceed 500mA.
4. Operation panel
2
3 BACK OK READY
4 DATA
10
PRINT
5 JOB
STATUS
11
6
7 12
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
LOGOUT 13
8 14
9

1 Display Messages and keys appear in the display.
Use the arrow keys and the [OK] key to select displayed items and perform various operations.
2 [OK] key Press this key to enter a selected setting.
3 [BACK] key Press this key to return to the previous screen without discarding your settings.
4 [PRINT] key When you wish to print a print hold job, press this key to switch to print mode.
5 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel
jobs.
6 Sharp OSA shortcut key Press this key to display a shortcut key to Sharp OSA mode.
7 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
8 [LOGOUT] key Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine.
9 Arrow keys Press these keys to move the selection frame that is used to select setting keys and items in the display.
10 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
11 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
12 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
13 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key indicator blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
14 [STOP] key Press this key to stop a printing job.

5. Sensors and detectors
A. MX-C400P/C380P
TFD2
POD2
POD1
RTH_EX1 APPD1
HLPCD
RTH_EX2 RTH_Sub
1TUD_K RTH_Main RTH_Low

1TUD_CL REGS_F
REGS_R
DHPD_CL DHPD_K
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K PPD2
MPLD1
PPD1 MPWS
CPED1 CPFD1 MPED
CLUD1
TH/HUD
CSPD1
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation detector CL Transmission type Detects position of the transfer belt. High voltage PWB
Detects initialization of the primary transfer unit. holder unit
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation detector BK Transmission type Detects position of the transfer belt. Frame unit
Detects initialization of the primary transfer unit.
APPD1 ADU transport path detector 1 Transmission type Detects paper pass in the upper stream of the Right door unit
switchback section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass in the middle stream of the Right door unit
switchback section.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detector Transmission type Detects that the top surface of the paper stored in the Paper feed unit
tray 1 is lifted to the top.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detector Transmission type Detects that paper is stored in the tray 1. Paper feed unit
CPFD1 Paper transport detector 1 Reflection type Detects paper when passes the transport roller 1. Paper feed unit
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity Transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity in the tray 1. Lift-up unit
detector
DHPD_CL Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector Transmission type Detects the rotating state of the color drum cartridge. Main drive unit
DHPD_K Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector Transmission type Detects the rotating state of the black drum cartridge. Main drive unit
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detector Transmission type Detects separation of the upper and the lower heat Fusing unit
rollers.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Transmission type Detects paper empty in the manual paper feed tray. Manual paper feed unit
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Transmission type Detects the length of paper in the manual paper feed Manual paper feed unit
tray.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width Volume resistor Detects the width of the paper guide in the manual Manual paper feed unit
sensor paper feed tray.
POD1 Fusing rear detector Transmission type Detects paper exit from the fusing section. Frame fusing unit
POD2 Paper exit detector Transmission type Detects paper which is discharged. Paper exit lower PG unit
PPD1 Paper transport detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper when passes the transport roller 2. Paper feed unit
PPD2 Paper transport detector 3 Reflection type Detects paper in front of the registration roller. Frame unit
REGS_F Registration sensor Reflection type Detects registration shift. Registration unit
REGS_R
RTH_EX1 External heat roller contact thermistor 1 Thermistor Detects the temperature of the external heat roller. Fusing unit
RTH_EX2 External heat roller contact thermistor 2 Thermistor
RTH_Low Lower heat roller contact thermistor Thermistor Detects the temperature of the lower heat roller. Fusing unit
RTH_Main Upper heat roller non-contact Non-contact Detects the temperature of the upper heat roller. Fusing unit
thermistor thermistor
RTH_Sub Upper heat roller contact thermistor Thermistor
TCS_C Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density in the developing cartridge. Developing cartridge
(C)

TCS_K Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density in the developing cartridge. Developing cartridge
(K)
TCS_M Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density in the developing cartridge. Developing cartridge
(M)
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density in the developing cartridge. Developing cartridge
(Y)
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Transmission type Detects the full state of the paper exit tray. Paper exit upper PG unit
TH/HUD Temperature humidity sensor Temperature Detects the temperature and the humidity around the Right door unit
humidity sensor machine.
B. MX-B400P/B380P
TFD2
POD2
POD1
RTH_EX1 APPD1
HLPCD
RTH_EX2 RTH_Sub
1TUD_K RTH_Main RTH_Low

1TUD_CL
REGS_R
APPD2
TCS_K PPD2
MPLD1
PPD1 MPWS
CPED1 CPFD1 MPED
CLUD1
TH/HUD
CSPD1

1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation detector CL Transmission type Detects position of the transfer belt. High voltage PWB
holder unit
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation detector BK Transmission type Detects initialization of the primary transfer unit. Frame unit
APPD1 ADU transport path detector 1 Transmission type Detects paper pass in the upper stream of the Right door unit
switchback section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass in the middle stream of the Right door unit
switchback section.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detector Transmission type Detects that the top surface of the paper stored in the Paper feed unit
tray 1 is lifted to the top.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detector Transmission type Detects that paper is stored in the tray 1. Paper feed unit
CPFD1 Paper transport detector 1 Reflection type Detects paper when passes the transport roller 1. Paper feed unit
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity Transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity in the tray 1. Lift-up unit
detector
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detector Transmission type Detects separation of the upper and the lower heat Fusing unit
rollers.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Transmission type Detects paper empty in the manual paper feed tray. Manual paper feed unit
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Transmission type Detects the length of paper in the manual paper feed Manual paper feed unit
tray.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width Volume resistor Detects the width of the paper guide in the manual Manual paper feed unit
sensor paper feed tray.
POD1 Fusing rear detector Transmission type Detects paper exit from the fusing section. Frame fusing unit
POD2 Paper exit detector Transmission type Detects paper which is discharged. Paper exit lower PG unit
PPD1 Paper transport detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper when passes the transport roller 2. Paper feed unit
PPD2 Paper transport detector 3 Reflection type Detects paper in front of the registration roller. Frame unit
REGS_R Registration sensor Reflection type Detects the toner patch density. Detects open/close of Registration unit
the reference reflection plate, the secondary transfer
roller transfer position, and the non-transfer position.

RTH_EX1 External heat roller contact thermistor 1 Thermistor Detects the temperature of the external heat roller. Fusing unit
RTH_EX2 External heat roller contact thermistor 2 Thermistor
RTH_Low Lower heat roller contact thermistor Thermistor Detects the temperature of the lower heat roller. Fusing unit
RTH_Main Upper heat roller non-contact Non-contact Detects the temperature of the upper heat roller. Fusing unit
thermistor thermistor
RTH_Sub Upper heat roller contact thermistor Thermistor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density in the developing cartridge. Developing cartridge
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Transmission type Detects the full state of the paper exit tray. Paper exit upper PG unit
TH/HUD Temperature humidity sensor Temperature Detects the temperature and the humidity around the Right door unit
humidity sensor machine.
6. Switches
A. MX-C400P/C380P
DSW-R
DSW-F PWRSW
DRCRU_Y
DRCRU_M
DRCRU_C
DRCRU_K
1TNFD
MSW
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Micro switch Detects the waste toner full.
DRCRU_C OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector (C) Micro switch Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DRCRU_K OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector (BK) Micro switch Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DRCRU_M OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector (M) Micro switch Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DRCRU_Y OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector (Y) Micro switch Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing, the motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door unit, and turns ON/OFF the power
line of the fusing, the motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.

B. MX-B400P/B380P
DSW-R
PWRSW
DSW-F
DRCRU_K
1TNFD
MSW

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Micro switch Detects the waste toner full.
DRCRU_K OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector (BK) Micro switch Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing, the motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door unit, and turns ON/OFF the power
line of the fusing, the motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.

7. Clutches and solenoids
A. MX-C400P/C380P
ADUC1
HLPCS 1TURC_2
1TURC
2TURC
MPFS
CPUC1
CPFC

1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls open/close of the resist sensor cover.
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the switchback section.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the tray paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Tray paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the tray paper feed section.
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the pressure applied to the upper and the lower heat rollers in the
fusing section.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the pick-up operation of the paper feed roller in the
(Manual paper feed) manual paper feed section.

B. MX-B400P/B380P
ADUC1
HLPCC
1TURC_1
2TURC
MPFS
CPUC1
CPFC

1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls open/close of the resist sensor cover.
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the switchback section.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the tray paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Tray paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the tray paper feed section.
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the pressure applied to the upper and the lower heat rollers in the
fusing section.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the pick-up operation of the paper feed roller in the
(Manual paper feed) manual paper feed section.

8. Drive motors
A. MX-C400P/C380P
TNM_Y
TNM_M
POM TNM_C
TNM_K
FUM
PGM1
DVM_CL
DVM_K
RRM
CPFM
CLUM

CLUM Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPFM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the paper feed section.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the development cartridge (color) and the drum cartridge (color).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the development cartridge (black), the drum cartridge (black), the
primary transfer unit, and the secondary transfer unit.
Also separates the primary transfer unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor DC brush motor Drives the fusing unit.
PGM1 Polygon motor 1 DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_C Toner motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.

B. MX-B400P/B380P
POM
TNM_K
FUM
PGM1
DVM_K
RRM
CPFM
CLUM

CLUM Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPFM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the paper feed section.
DVM_K Developing drive motor Brush-less motor Drives the development cartridge, the drum cartridge, the primary transfer
unit, and the secondary transfer unit.
Also separates the primary transfer unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor DC brush motor Drives the fusing unit.
PGM1 Polygon motor 1 DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_K Toner motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.

9. Lamps
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
HL_EX
DL_K
HL_EX2
HL_Main
HL_Sub

CCFT LCD back-light CCFT cool cathode ray tube Back-light for the CCD
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_EX External heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_EX2 External heater lamp 2 Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_Main Upper heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_Sub Lower heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)

10. Fans and filter
PROFM1
POFM
FUFM
HDDFAN
PROFM2
LSUFM PSFM
Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper exit section.
PROFM1 Process fan motor 1 Cools the process section.
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Exhausts ozone.
PSFM Power PWB cooling fan motor Cools the power PWB.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.

11. PWB
1 2
3
16
15
14
4
13 5
12 6
11 7
10
8

1 OPU-P PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
2 OPU control PWB Control the operation panel section. (Key and Display)
3 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
4 DV initial PWB Detects the DV model.
5 MFPC PWB Controls images and the whole machine.
6 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
7 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
8 AC/DC power PWB Controls the primary side power source and outputs the secondary side voltage.
9 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size in the tray 1.
10 MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
14 LSU MOTHER PWB Controls the LSU. Interfaces the MFPC PWB and PCU PWB.
15 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
16 TC PWB Generates each transfer voltage and separation voltage.

12. Fuses and Thermostats
RDTCT_EX2
RDTCT_EX
RDTCT_Main
RDTCT_Low
F401 F405
F404
F402
F403
F301
F201
F101 F002
F004 F001
F003
Signal name Name Specifications Section

F001 Fuse AC250V T10AH (200V series) AC/DC power PWB
AC250V 20A (120V series)
F002 Fuse AC250V T10AH (200V series) (Not provided in 120V series) AC/DC power PWB
F003 Fuse AC250V T2AH (Common in 200V series and 120V series) AC/DC power PWB
F004 Fuse AC250V T2AH (200V series) (Not provided in 120V series) AC/DC power PWB
F402 Fuse AC250V T6.3AH (Common in 200V series and 120V series) AC/DC power PWB
RDTCT_EX External thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
RDTCT_EX2 External thermostat 2 Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
RDTCT_Low Lower thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
RDTCT_Main Upper thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit

13. Gates

1 Switchback gate Guides paper which is switched back by the paper exit roller to the switchback section in the duplex print mode.

14. Rollers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges the paper. / Transports the paper to the switchback section.
2 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to the paper and the paper exit roller to give a transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
3 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to the paper and the transport roller to give a transport power of the transport roller to
the paper.
4 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports the paper switched back by the paper exit roller to the transport roller 5.
5 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports the paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller.
the paper.
7 Fusing roller (Heating) Heats and presses toner on the paper to fuse on the paper.
8 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
9 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 4 to the transport roller 2.
the paper.
11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to the paper and the resist roller, giving a transport power of the resist roller to the
paper.
12 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the paper transport timing, and adjusts the relative
relations between images and paper.
the paper.
14 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Transports paper to the transport roller 2.
15 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 to the resist roller.
16 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper which was fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 2.
the paper.
18 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Transport paper to the paper transport section.
19 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
20 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Transports paper to the paper feed roller.

[4] ADJUSTMENTS
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values (*1) 1A Adjust the main charger grid voltage (MX-C400P/C380P) 8-2
(MX-C400P/C380P) 1B Adjust the developing bias voltage (MX-C400P/C380P) 8-1
1C Transfer voltage adjustment (MX-C400P/C380P) 8-6
ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values (*2) 1A Adjust the main charger grid voltage (MX-B400P/B380P) 8-2
(MX-C400P/C380P) 1B Adjust the developing bias voltage (MX-B400P/B380P) 8-1
1C Transfer voltage adjustment (MX-B400P/B380P) 8-6
ADJ 2 Image density sensor (image 2A Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration (*1) 44-13/44-61
registration sensor) adjustment (MX-C400P/C380P)
2B Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black image density sensor 44-2
(image registration sensor R) adjustment
ADJ 3 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 61-4
ADJ 4 OPC drum phase adjustment (*1) 4A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ 5 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 6 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 7 Image registration adjustment 7A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) 50-22
(Print engine section) (*1) (Auto adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P)
(MX-C400P/C380P) 7B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-20
(MX-C400P/C380P)
7C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-20
(MX-C400P/C380P)
ADJ 8 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
ADJ 10 Printer color balance/density 10A Manual color balance adjustment - 1 (MX-C400P/C380P) 67-22
adjustment (*1) 10B Manual color balance adjustment - 2 (MX-C400P/C380P) 67-25
(MX-C400P/C380P) 10C Simple color balance adjustment (Gray balance adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P) 67-21
10D Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) 67-36
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) (MX-C400P/C380P)
10E Printer high density part density correction setting (high density part tone gap 67-34
countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change) (MX-C400P/C380P)
ADJ 10 Printer density and gradation 10A Manual density and gradation adjustment - 1 (MX-B400P/B380P) 67-22
adjustment (*2) 10B Manual density and gradation adjustment - 2 (MX-B400P/B380P) 67-25
(MX-B400P/B380P) 10C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) 67-36
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) (MX-B400P/B380P)
10D Printer high density part density correction setting (high density part tone gap 67-34
countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change) (MX-B400P/B380P)
ADJ 11 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
(*1): Color model only

(*2): Monochrome model only
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 1

3. Details of adjustment
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values SPEED GB_K value at middle speed
B MIDDLE C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
(MX-C400P/C380P) SPEED GB_C value at middle speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
1-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage SPEED GB_M value at middle speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
(MX-C400P/C380P) SPEED GB_Y value at middle speed
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced. GB_K value at low speed
* U2 trouble has occurred. B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_C value at low speed
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. GB_M value at low speed
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode. D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_Y value at low speed
0$,1
.(< When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
tain relationship.
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ NOTE: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a
%˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the output
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0
must be made by checking the print image quality.
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 1-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

& (MX-C400P/C380P)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted. * When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
3) Set the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed * U2 trouble has occurred.
mode. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
shortcut key.) * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed, 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.
the voltage corresponding to the value entered in procedure 3)
is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed. 0$,1
.(<
With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
the simulation is terminated. 7(67
'96(77,1*$1'287387
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB. $˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖
NOTE: Normally when an adjustment value is set, there is no need %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
to press [EXECUTE] button. If [EXECUTE] button should ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the '˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
OPC drum stopped, affecting an adverse effect on the
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
OPC drum. Be careful of that.
&
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.

3) Set the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA
shortcut key.)
When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed,
is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed.
the simulation is terminated.
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
NOTE: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the
NOTE: Normally when an adjustment value is set, there is no need
MC high voltage power PWB.
to press [EXECUTE] button. If [EXECUTE] button should
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to OPC drum stopped, affecting an adverse effect on the
check the adjustment value. OPC drum. Be careful of that.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable
to put down the adjustment value in advance.

MC high voltage power PWB. 1-C Transfer voltage adjustment
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC (MX-C400P/C380P)
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
check the adjustment value. * When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable * U2 trouble has occurred.
to put down the adjustment value in advance. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
Setting * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
Mode Item/Display Content
range 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-6.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
DVB_K value at middle speed 0$,1
.(<
B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
DVB_C value at middle speed ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias set 0-600 7+96(77,1*$1'287387
DVB_M value at middle speed
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600 $˖
DVB_Y value at middle speed
%˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias set 0-600 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&
DVB_K value at low speed
'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
B LOW SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
DVB_C value at low speed (;(&87(
C LOW SPEED M developing bias set 0-600 &
DVB_M value at low speed
D LOW SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
DVB_Y value at low speed 2) Select an item to be adjusted.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto- shortcut key.)
tain relationship.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified out-
put is provided.
be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the
OPC drum and the transfer belt. Be careful of that.
NOTE: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a


Default value
Adjustment Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary Color mode K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
transfer bias mode
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
value mode
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode mode
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color mode Standard paper Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
transfer bias mode mode
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment Back surface 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
value mode
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode mode
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color mode Heavy paper Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
S TC2 OHP CL OHP Color mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
T TC2 OHP BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
W TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
X TC2 THIN BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
Y TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
Z TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning bias Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
adjustment
value
AE PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL output Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AG PTC LOW SPEED BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AI CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AJ CASE VOLT MID CL voltage Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AK CASE VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AM PEEL VOLT LOW CL Separation Color mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AN PEEL VOLT MIDDLE CL discharge Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AO PEEL VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AP PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V

ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values Mode
MIDDLE A
Item/Display
MIDDLE
Content
K charging/grid bias set
Setting range
150 - 850
(MX-B400P/B380P) SPEED GB_K value at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_K value at low speed
1-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
(MX-B400P/B380P) When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
tain relationship.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. must be made by checking the print image quality.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
0$,1 1-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

.(< (MX-B400P/B380P)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387 * When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B. * U2 trouble has occurred.
$˖ * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
˷̚˹ * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 0$,1
.(<
&
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
3) Set the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed $˖
shortcut key.) ˷̚˹
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
&
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB. 3) Set the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
shortcut key.)
be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed,
OPC drum stopped, affecting an adverse effect on the the voltage corresponding to the value entered in procedure 3)
OPC drum. Be careful of that. is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed.
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the
OPC drum. Be careful of that.
MC high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
NOTE: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the check the adjustment value.
MC high voltage power PWB. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC to put down the adjustment value in advance.
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
check the adjustment value. Setting
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable range
to put down the adjustment value in advance. MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
DVB_K value at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
DVB_K value at low speed

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
tain relationship.

2) Select an item to be adjusted.

1-C Transfer voltage adjustment
(MX-B400P/B380P) mode. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: shortcut key.)
* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced. When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed,
* U2 trouble has occurred. the voltage corresponding to the value entered in procedure 3)
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified out-
0$,1 put is provided.
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387 be pressed, a high voltage would be outputted with the
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:. OPC drum stopped, affecting an adverse effect on the
$˖ OPC drum and the transfer belt. Be careful of that.
%˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
'˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
(;(&87(
&
Default value
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Primary transfer bias Low speed mode 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K reference value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
C TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Secondary transfer Standard Front surface mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
D TC2 PLAIN BW DPX bias reference value paper mode Back surface mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
E TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface mode 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
F TC2 HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface mode 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
G TC2 OHP BW OHP 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
H TC2 ENVELOPE BW Envelope 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
I TC2 THIN BW Thin paper 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
J TC2 GLOSSY BW Gloss paper 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
K TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
L TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
M TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
N TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
O PTC LOW SPEED BW PTC current output Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
P PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW reference value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
Q CASE VOLT LOW BW PTC case voltage Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
R CASE VOLT MID BW reference value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
S PEEL VOLT LOW BW Separation discharge Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
T PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW reference value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V

(Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) cal-
ADJ 2 Image density sensor (image ibration value setting (Method by SIM44-61))
registration sensor) adjustment 1) Enter the SIM44-61 mode.
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor sec- 0$,1
.(<
tion. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17˄,1387
* When the color image density sensor (image registration sensor $˖ ˖3&6B&/&$5%287
F) is replaced. $˖ %˖ ˖3&6B&//('$'-
* When the image registration sensor unit is replace. ˷̚˹
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
&
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor
(image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment 2) Select an item to be set.
methods.
Setting Default
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibra- Item/Display Content
range value
tion SIM44-13 A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108
* Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra- value
tion value setting (SIM44-61) B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
emitting quantity
* Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) cali-
adjustment value
bration SIM44-2
NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density 3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
and image registration on front frame side, the black image OSA shortcut key.)
density sensor detects black image density and image reg- The set value is the specified on the label attached to the reg-
istration on rear frame side. That is, two functions is istration sensor unit.
assigned to each one sensor.
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the fol-
lowing items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
istration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image
registration sensor R) are clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
2-A Color image density sensor (image

registration sensor F) calibration
(MX-C400P/C380P) (Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) cal-
ibration (Method by SIM44-13))
Perform the color image density sensor (image registration sensor
F) calibration in one of the following methods. 1) Enter the SIM44-13 mode.
* Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra- 0$,1

tion value setting (Method by SIM44-61) .(<
When the registration sensor unit is replaced, the calibration ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

7(67 &/26(
value is set manually with this method. The calibration jig is not 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
required. 3&6B&/&$5%287
When, however, the color image density senor itself is replaced, 3&6B&//('$'-
use the calibration jig and execute SIM44-13 to perform calibra-
tion.
* Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra-
tion value setting (Method by SIM44-13) (;(&87(
When the color image density sensor itself is replaced, use the 㩷㪈㪆㩷㪈
calibration jig and perform calibration with this method.
2) With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key.
The shutter plate of the color image density sensor (Image
registration sensor F) is opened, and the message that the pri-
mary transfer unit is removed is displayed.

3) Open the front cover. 7) Hold the handle, push the lock on the left side of the primary
Check to confirm that the belt tension of the primary transfer transfer unit and remove the primary transfer unit.
unit is released (the separation lever of the primary transfer
unit is under the state shown in the figure).
If the belt tension is not released, turn the separation lever to
the state shown in the figure.
CAUTION: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer

8) Install the color image density sensor (image registration sen-
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after
sor F) calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing
completion of the work. This procedure initializes the
section.
transfer roller to return it to the home position.
Engage the calibration jig in the sensor housing groove, and
4) Turn the lock lever until it stops to release the lock, and
slide it to the rear frame side.
remove the waste toner box.
9) Install the waste toner box, and close the right door and the
front cover.
5) Open the right door. Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is
automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the
6) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and pull out the
adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns
primary transfer unit until it stops.
to the normal display.
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default
value range
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 108
CARB OUT LED current adjustment
target value
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 21
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

When an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again.
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
* Image density sensor calibration plate
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.

De-
2-B Color image density sensor (image Mode Display/Item Content Range
fault
registration sensor F), black image density Adjustment G PCS_K Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
sensor (image registration sensor R) value for BELT MIN belt base detection
adjustment process level
control H PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of operation BELT DIF level difference
registration adjustment operation and process control oper- mode (Item E - Item F)
ation as well as SIM44-2. Adjustment I REG_F Image registration 1 - 255 32
Normally, therefore, it is not required to perform this adjust- value for LED ADJ sensor light emitting
image quantity adjustment
ment. It is performed only when the sensor is replaced or
registration value F
when the adjustment result is checked.
operation J REG_R Image registration 1 - 255 0
1) Enter SIM44-2 mode. mode LED ADJ sensor light emitting
• MX-C400P/C380P quantity adjustment
value R
0$,1 K REG_F Image registration 0 - 255 0
.(< DARK sensor dark voltage
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( F
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17 L REG_R Image registration 0 - 255 32
DARK sensor dark voltage
3&6B&//('$'- 3&6B.*51'
R
3&6B./('$'- 3&6B.%(/70$; M REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
3&6B&/'$5. 3&6B.%(/70,1 GRND level when
completion of Item I
3&6B.'$5. 3&6B.%(/7',)
adjustment
(;(&87( N REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 256 0
GRND level when
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪊 completion of Item J
adjustment
• MX-B400P/B380P O REG_F Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
BELT belt base detection
0$,1 MAX level (F side)
.(< P REG_F Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( BELT belt base detection
7(67
MIN level (F side)
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
Q REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
3&6B./('$'- 3&6B.%(/70,1 BELT level difference
3&6B.'$5. 3&6B.%(/7',) DIF (Item O - Item P)
3&6B.*51' 5(*B5/('$'-
R REG_R Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5'$5. MAX level (R side)
(;(&87(
S REG_R Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪊 MIN level (R side)
T REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
BELT level difference
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. DIF (Item R - Item S)
The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), U REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) PATCH F for check (K)
are automatically adjusted. (K)
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is V REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (C)
displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal dis-
(C)
play.
W REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
• MX-C400P/C380P PATCH F for check (M)
(M)
De- X REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
Mode Display/Item Content Range
fault PATCH F for check (Y)
Adjustment A PCS_CL Color image sensor 1 - 255 21 (Y)
value for LED ADJ light emitting quantity Y REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 55 0
process adjustment value PATCH R for check (K)
control B PCS_K Black image sensor 1 - 255 21 (K)
operation LED ADJ light emitting quantity Z REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
mode adjustment value PATCH R for check (C)
C PCS_CL Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0 (C)
DARK AA REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
D PCS_K Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0 PATCH R for check (M)
DARK (M)
E PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 AB REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
GRND level when PATCH R for check (Y)
completion of Item B (Y)
adjustment
F PCS_K Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
MAX level

If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Mode Error display Error content Error name Error content

Adjustment BK_SEN_ADJ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error Image density sensor PCS_K LED ADJ error
value for _ERR density (The target value is not adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
process sensor obtained after retried Substrate scan PCS_K GRND error
control adjustment three times.) abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
operation abnormality lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
mode CL_SEN_ADJ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ outside the range
_ERR sensor error (The target value Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
adjustment is not obtained after adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
abnormality retried three times.) Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
_ERR surface (The surface detection lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
reading level is maximum or outside the range
abnormality the minimum value
difference is outside a
reference range.) Error display Error content
Adjustment REG_SEN_F Registration REG_F LED ADJ error BK_SEN_ADJ Image density PCS_K LED ADJ error (The
value for _ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not _ERR sensor adjustment target value is not obtained after
image adjustment obtained after retried abnormality retried three times.)
registration abnormality three times.) BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error (The surface
operation REG_SEN_R Registration REG_R LED ADJ _ERR surface reading detection level is maximum or the
mode _ADJ_ERR sensor R error (The target value abnormality minimum value difference is
adjustment is not obtained after outside a reference range.)
abnormality retried three times.) REG_SEN_R Sensor adjustment REG_R LED ADJ error (The
REG_BELT_F F side REG_F GRND error _ADJ_ERR abnormality target value is not obtained after
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection retried three times.)
surface level is maximum or REG_BELT_R Transfer belt REG_R GRND error (The surface
reading the minimum value _READ_ERR surface reading detection level is maximum or the
abnormality difference is outside a abnormality minimum value difference is
reference range.) outside a reference range.)
REG_BELT_R R side REG_R GRND error
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any abnor-
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
surface level is maximum or mality.
reading the minimum value • Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
abnormality difference is outside a • Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
reference range.)
• PCU PWB
• MX-B400P/B380P • Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
• Transfer belt cleaner
Display/Item Content Range Default
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor light 1 - 255 32 • Color image sensor calibration plate
emitting quantity If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
adjustment value If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
B PCS_K DARK Dark voltage 0 - 255 0
C PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0
when completion of Item A
adjustment ADJ 3 Image skew adjustment
D PCS_K BELT MAX Maximum value of belt 0 - 255 0 (LSU unit)
base detection level
E PCS_K BELT MIN Minimum value of belt 0 - 255 0 x MX-C400P/C380P
base detection level This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
F PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0
* When the color shift occurs.
difference
(Item D - Item E) * When the LSU unit is replaced.
G REG_R LED ADJ Image density sensor light 1 - 255 32 * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
emitting quantity * When a color image registration mistake occurs.
adjustment value
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
H REG_R DARK Image density sensor dark 0 - 255 0
voltage (Required depending on the cases.)
I REG_R GRND Belt base detection level 0 - 256 0 * When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
when completion of Item balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
G adjustment * When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
J REG_R BELT MAX Maximum value of belt 0 - 255 0 adjustment.
base detection level
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
K REG_R BELT MIN Minimum value of belt 0 - 255 0
base detection level * When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
L REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0 The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is performed by changing
difference (Item J - Item K) the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
M REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level for 0 - 255 0
check NOTE: Before execution of the this adjustment, perform the follow-
ing procedures in advance for better efficiency of the
adjustment.
The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly
adjusted for that.

1) In the SIM50-22 mode, select ALL mode to perform the auto- 2) Select the tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in it.
matic image registration adjustment. 3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
2) The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display The check pattern is printed out.
menu.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
3) Put down the displayed skew level value.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
(Meaning of the skew level value) for any skew (right angle).
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn the skew adjust- Method 1:
ment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value (angle). Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn the skew adjust- pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
ment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value (angle). for judgment of good or no good
NOTE: The K (Black) image skew level cannot be checked with Method 2:
SIM50-22. Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the
1) Enter SIM61-4 mode. rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper for judgment of good or no good.
0$,1 (NOTE)
.(<
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17 be used in advance.
$˖ ˖08/7,&2817
$˖ %˖ ˖3$3(5&6
˷̚˹
(;(&87(
&
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print pattern.
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the following range.
C – D = r0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there is no need to adjust.

(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper to the long side of the rectangle print pattern.
Lead edge inclination ( 0.5mm or less) Rear edge inclination ( 0.5mm or less)
A B A B
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distances (left and right) are 0.5mm or less, there is no need to adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box. 7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
6) Turn the LSU unit image skew adjustment screw (K) to adjust. 8) Perform the procedures 3) - 4).
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any (Perform the procedures 3) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance) obtained.)
Diagonal line C is longer than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust- 9) Enter the SIM50-22 mode to select the adjustment item of
ment screw clockwise. ALL, and press [EXECUTE] button.
Diagonal line C is shorter than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust- The image registration adjustment is automatically performed
ment screw counterclockwise. and the adjustment data are displayed. Write down the display
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any contents of SKEW C, M, and Y.
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance) 10) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
When the image is skewed in the arrow direction A, turn the adjust.
adjustment screw clockwise. When the image is skewed in the (When the adjustment is performed with the skew level
arrow direction B, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. value of SIM50-22 as the reference)
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value of SKEW, turn the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number
(angle).
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value of SKEW, turn the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number
(angle).
b a

11) Enter the SIM61-4 mode and perform the procedures of 2) - 3).
Check the printed color image skew pattern.
F side Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment reference frame)
section (Rough adjustment)
A-sub
A-main B-main
R side
The sub scan rough adjustment color image shifts
on the R side and the F side are in the same balance
both in the rough adjustment check section and
the fine adjustment check section B-sub Color image shift check
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern scale (Fine adjustment)
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the F side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and check to confirm
that the front frame side and the rear frame side are in the same condition.
Rough adjustment pattern check:
Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check section on the R side and the F side of each color, use the black scale of "0"
as the center reference, and check the balance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive and the negative directions. The
balance in the R side must be the same as that in the F side.
Fine adjustment pattern check:
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each color. (Normally five sections of high density can be seen.) Check the sub
scanning direction position of the center area of high density (one of the above five sections). These must be on the same position on the
R side and the F side.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check scale (fine adjustment) as the reference.
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount.
Check that the difference in the center position of the dark density section is within r2 step.
The positional relations of the front and the rear frame of the print color patterns of a same color are compared. There is no need that all
the colors are in the same state. Compare only the positional relations of color patterns of a same color.
If the above condition is not met, do the following:
12) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
Relationship between the adjustment screw rotating angle and
the change in the adjustment image position:
Adjustment screw rotating angle (degree) = Image shift
amount (Adjustment scale) x 10
Y M C
b a
Repeat procedures 11) - 12) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

NOTE: The "change in the adjustment image position" in proce-
dure 12) is the scale amount on the color image skew pat-
tern, and is different from the value displayed with SIM50-
22.

x MX-B400P/B380P (Method 2)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: a) Fit the side of A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper to the long side of the
* When the LSU unit is replaced. rectangle print pattern.
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is performed by changing
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum. Comparison line
1) Enter SIM64-2 mode.
Set the set items to the values shown below.
0.5mm or ress
A: 1 B: 1 C: 254 D: 255
0$,1
.(< Direction A Direction B
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;(',)$

(;(&87(
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
& and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distances (left and right) are 0.5mm or less,
2) Select the tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in it. there is no need to adjust.
3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. If not, execute the following procedures.
The check pattern is printed out. 5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
4) Check the printed image for any skew. 6) Turn the LSU unit image skew adjustment screw to adjust.
There are following two methods of checking the image for any (When Method 1 is used to check the image for any skew
skew (right angle). (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
Method 1: Diagonal line C is longer than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust-
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print ment screw clockwise.
pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines Diagonal line C is shorter than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust-
for judgment of good or no good ment screw counterclockwise.
Method 2: (When Method 2 is used to check the image for any skew
Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A4 (11" x
When the image is skewed in the arrow direction A, turn the
8.5") paper for judgment of good or no good.
adjustment screw clockwise. When the image is skewed in the
(NOTE) arrow direction B, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
A B
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8) Perform the procedures 3) - 4).
(Perform the procedures 3) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C

and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range.
C – D = r0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.

2) Select [ALL] button, and press [OK] key.
ADJ 4 OPC drum phase adjustment (The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
* When the photo-conductor drum is replaced. adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit. and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registra-
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled. tion adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
adjustment are executed automatically.
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) is
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and
replaced.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjust-
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor R) is ment result is displayed.
replaced.
* When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" and the content are dis-
* When the registration sensor unit is replaced. played.
* For details, refer to SIM50-22.
4-A OPC drum phase adjustment When an error occurs, check the following conditions.
(Auto adjustment) • OPC drum drive section
• Transfer belt drive section
0$,1 • Paper feed drive section
.(< • Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(: ADJ 5 Print engine image
&ǂ/1* magnification ratio adjustment
052. (BK) (Main scanning direction)
</2.
(Print engine section) (Manual
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87( adjustment)
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed
[OK] key * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
0$,1 * When the color shift occurs.
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 0$,1
.(<
12:(;(&87,1*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ %˖ ˖0$,10)7
(;(&87( ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(;(&87(
Abnormal end
&
0$,1
.(< 2) Select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
The check pattern is printed out.
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
4) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 140 r
0.5mm. (MX-C400P/C380P)
(55257211(5(037<
Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 120 r
0.5mm. (MX-B400P/B380P)
(;(&87(

(MX-C400P/C380P) (Note)
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
item.
* Check that the print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly adjusted.
0$,1
140 0.5mm .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ %˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(MX-B400P/B380P) (;(&87(
&
2) Select a target paper feed tray to be adjusted with the scroll

keys.
Setting
range
120 0.5mm A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100
magnification ratio BK
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2)
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. value (Tray 3)
5) Change the set value of set item A BK-MAG. F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
(Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut value (Tray 4)
key.) G MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (ADU)
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm. NOTE: Before execution of
this adjustment,
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
check to insure that
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
the adjustment
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the items A - F have
main scanning direction is decreased. been properly
Repeat procedures 2) - 5) until a satisfactory result is obtained. adjusted. If not, this
adjustment cannot
be made properly.
ADJ 6 Image off-center adjustment H SUB-MFT Registration

motor ON
Manual
paper feed
1 - 99 50
(Print engine section) I SUB-CS1 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50

adjustment tray
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: J SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. K SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
* When a paper tray is replaced. L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
selection feed
* When [ADJ 5] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main CS1 Tray 1 2
scanning direction) is performed. CS2 Tray 2 3
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. CS3 Tray 3 4
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. CS4 Tray 4 5
* When the switchback section is disassembled. N DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. selection
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.

5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position. 7-A Image registration adjustment (Main
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that (Auto adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P)
all the following conditions are satisfied. In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
RV
3.0 2.0mm cuted simultaneously and automatically.
0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&ǂ/1*
052.
</2.
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(

FV
3.0 2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA EXECUTE

FV: FRONT VOID AREA Adjustment completed
[OK] key
RV + FV d 8.0mm
RV = 3.0 r 2.0mm
0$,1
FV = 3.0 r 2.0mm .(<
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
6) Change the adjustment value. $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
(Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut 12:(;(&87,1*
key.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is (;(&87(
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 5) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
Abnormal end
ADJ 7 Image registration adjustment 0$,1

.(<
(Print engine section) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(MX-C400P/C380P) $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21

35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning (;(&87(
direction occurs.

* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs 2) Select the [ALL] adjustment mode.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. 3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the image registration
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, auto adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
etc.) [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the
* When [ADJ 5] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main adjustment result is displayed.
scanning direction) is performed. It takes about 20 sec to complete the adjustment.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" and the content are
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. displayed.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * For details, refer to SIM50-22.
Note before adjustment (To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments registration adjustment mode below.)
must have been completed.) * Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
* [ADJ 3] image skew adjustment (LSU unit) adjustment) (SIM50-20)
* [ADJ 5] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scan- * Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
ning direction) (print engine section) adjustment) (SIM50-20)

7-B Image registration adjustment (Main
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
(MX-C400P/C380P)
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must
be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits).
0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$˖ ˖&<$1)5217
$˖ %˖ ˖&<$15($5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$*(17$)5217
'˖ ˖0$*(17$5($5
(;(&87(
&
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

The image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
F side Color image registration check C (Image registration fine adjustment reference frame)
A-sub
A-main B-main
R side
The color image registrations of all the colors on the F side
and on the R side must be within the specified range.
B-sub Color image registration

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check scale
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Fine adjustment)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Fine adjustment pattern check:
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Check to confirm that the dark area (one of the five areas
frame sides. which are normally to be seen) is at the center of the image
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, registration fine adjustment reference frame in the square
and measure the shift amount. frame.
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are In this case, use the color image registration check scale (fine
adjusted independently. adjustment) as the reference.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front Check to confirm that the center position of the dark section is
frame side and the rear frame side individually. within r2 step.
Rough adjustment pattern check: (If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
Check the color image registration check section, and use the r2 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust-
black scale of "0" as the center reference, and check the bal- ment is not required.)
ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
and the negative directions. With the scale of "0" as the center adjustment item A - F to be adjusted and change the adjust-
reference, the color image line on the positive side must be on ment value to adjust.
the symmetrical position of that on the negative side.

Display/Item Content
Adjustment
Default
7-C Image registration adjustment (Sub
value range scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(FRONT) adjustment value
(MX-C400P/C380P)
(Main scanning direction) NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
(Cyan) (F side) control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
B CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100 executed automatically and updates the result in each
(REAR) adjustment value
case.
(Main scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side) In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhib-
C MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100 its) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1.
(FRONT) adjustment value 1) Enter SIM50-20 mode.
(Magenta) (F side) 0$,1
D MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100 .(<
(REAR) adjustment value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
(Magenta) (R side)
E YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100 $˖ ˖&<$1)5217
(FRONT) adjustment value
$˖ %˖ ˖&<$15($5
(Main scanning direction) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$*(17$)5217
(Yellow) (F side)
F YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100 '˖ ˖0$*(17$5($5
(REAR) adjustment value (;(&87(
(Yellow) (R side) &
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the
other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

The image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
F side Color image registration check C (Image registration fine adjustment reference frame)
A-sub
A-main B-main
R side
The color image registrations of all the colors on the F side

and on the R side must be within the specified range.
B-sub Color image registration

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check scale
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Fine adjustment)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Rough adjustment pattern check:
tern positions of each color on the front frame side and on the Check the color image registration check section, and use the
rear frame side. black scale of "0" as the center reference, and check the bal-
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount. and the negative directions. With the scale of "0" as the center
The image registration on the front frame side and that on the reference, the color image line on the positive side must be on
rear frame side are independently adjusted. the symmetrical position of that on the negative side.
To check the image registration, therefore, check each of the
front frame side and the rear frame side.

Fine adjustment pattern check: 2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray of the adjust-
Check to confirm that the dark area (one of the five areas ment target.
which are normally to be seen) is at the center of the image 3) Select the paper feed tray of the adjustment target.
registration fine adjustment reference frame in the square 4) With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key.
frame. The adjustment pattern is printed.
In this case, use the color image registration check scale (fine 5) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
adjustment) as the reference. are in the range of the standard values.
Check to confirm that the center position of the dark section is
within r2 step. Content Standard adjustment value
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 X Lead edge void area 3.0 r 1.0mm
r2 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
ment is not required.) Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 3.0 r 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A - F to be adjusted, and change the adjust- Z1
3.0 2.0mm
ment value to adjust.
Adjustment
value range
G CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(SUB) adjustment value
(Sub scanning direction) X Y
3.0 1.0mm 2.0 5.0mm
(Cyan)
I MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
(Sub scanning direction)
(Magenta)
H YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
(Yellow)
Z2
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained. 3.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
ADJ 8 Print area (Void area) (Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
adjustment 6) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1.
(Print engine section) 0$,1
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
* When a paper tray is replaced.
$˖ ˖55&$
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the switchback section is disassembled. '˖ ˖55&%0)7
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.

* U2 trouble has occurred. &
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 7) Select adjustment items, DEN A, DEN B, and FRONT/REAR,
and enter the adjustment values. Then press [OK] key and
NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
press OSA shortcut key.
ADJ 5 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) in Setting De-
advance. Display/Item Content
range fault
1) Enter SIM50-10 mode. A Lead RRCB-CS1 Resist Standard 1 - 99 60
edge motor ON Tray
0$,1 B adjust- RRCB-DSK timing Desk 1 - 99 50
.(< ment adjust-
C RRCB-MFT Manual 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( value ment paper
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 feed
D RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 adjust- adjustment
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 F ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
(;(&87( REAR area adjustment
&

Setting De-
Display/Item Content Setting
range fault Display/Item Content Default
range
H Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
A DEN-C Printer lead edge 1 - 99 30
scanning correction value
image position
I direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
print area value
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
J correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
value value
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
K DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 area adjustment
value
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50
L DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 void area adjustment
value correction value
M DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50 E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
correction value
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area is decreased.
area adjustment
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is correction value
changed by 0.1mm. G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
correction value
as follows:
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area area adjustment
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between correction value
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
M, N, O, P, Q, R (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
correction value
The adjustment item I (DENB) have a effect on the paper of J MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
all paper feed tray. K PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
Adjustment value of item M, N, O, P, Q, R (DENB-XXX) fine selection paper feed
adjusts to adjustment item I (DENB) for each paper tray. CS1 Tray 1 2
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 5) to check CS2 Tray 2 3
that the void area is within the specified range. CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
L DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
NO print No 1
adjustment value of RRCB-CS1, RRCB-DSK, RRCB-MFT, RRCB-
selection
ADUB (RRCB-XXX) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. 3) With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position pattern to the image lead edge.
adjustment (Printer mode) Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r 2.0mm
(Print engine section)

* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
3.0 2.0mm
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge image position (standard value: 3mm).
1) Enter the simulation 50-5 mode.
0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( If an adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
$˖ ˖'(1& ment item DENC.
$˖ 6) Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.
%˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
(;(&87( When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
& by about 0.1mm.
Perform the procedures 4) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
2) Select the set item K, and enter the value corresponding to the obtained.
paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in it.
(Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut
key.)

(Method 1)
ADJ 10 Printer color balance/density Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
adjustment (MX-C400P/C380P) The print density of the patch must be changed gradually from the
lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
(1) Note before execution of the printer image quality adjust- not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at
ment the same level.
a. Requisite condition before execution of the printer image At that time, set the SIM64-5 set values to the default values.
quality adjustment
The following adjustment items which affect the image quality must
be properly set.
(Adjustment items which affect the image quality and must be
checked or adjusted always before execution of the image
quality adjustment.)
Adjustment Item List Simulation
ADJ Image density 2A Color image density sensor 44-13/
2 sensor (image registration sensor F) 44-61
(image calibration
registration 2B Color image density sensor 44-2
sensor) (image registration sensor F),
adjustment black image density sensor
(image registration sensor R)
adjustment
ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 61-4
3
ADJ OPC drum 4A OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22
(Method 2)
4 phase (Auto adjustment)
adjustment Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance manual adjustment check
ADJ Image 7A Image registration adjustment 50-22 sheet and compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance
7 registration (Main scanning direction, sub and the black patch to check the color balance adjustment.
adjustment scanning direction) (Auto
(Print engine adjustment)
section) 7B Image registration adjustment 50-20
(Main scanning direction) Low density High density
(Manual adjustment)
7C Image registration adjustment 50-20 ;
(Manual adjustment) /
(Adjustment items which affect the image quality, but may not
%
be adjusted frequently. When, however, a trouble occurs, this
items must be checked or adjusted.)
$M
Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ Adjusting 1A Adjust the main charger grid 8-2 CMY
1 high voltage voltage Blend
3
values 1B Adjust the developing bias 8-1 /CZ
voltage # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
1C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
b. Cases when this adjustment is required 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and

BK is very slightly copied.
In the following cases, this adjustment is required.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and
1) When maintenance is executed: BK are not copied.
2) When repair or maintenance (on consumable parts such as
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
developer, the OPC drum, and the transfer belt) is executed:
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
(2) Printer color balance/density check The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
[Note] The patch density is changed gradually.
Before checking the printer color balance and the density, be sure
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to execute the following procedures in advance.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) reversed.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* The halftone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
Patch B may not be copied.
* For the color balance check and adjustment, use the normal
Patch A must not be copied.
white paper.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
If the other kind of paper is used, the proper image quality (color
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
balance, density) may not be obtained.
proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the neutral gray
* Since color appearance may differ depending on the light source, color balance by the color table.
the environment for check and adjustments must be maintained
constant.

(Method 3) 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
1) Use SIM67-23 to print the color balance check sheet, and (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the color
check to confirm that the density of each patch is at the same balance adjustment pattern is printed.)
level as that of the color chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ).
At the same time, check to confirm that the gray patch is at the Color Balance Testpage
Low Density Mid Density High Density
neutral level. C M Y Bk C M Y Bk C M Y Bk Adjustment number
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
Color Balance Adjustment Level *1 8 8
Low Density Mid Density High Density 7 7
C M Y Bk C M Y Bk C M Y Bk 6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Easy Calibration Adjustment Level Check to confirm that the density of
Low Density Mid Density High Density each patch is at the same level of
the test chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ).
Check to confirm that each patch is *1: "Pattern patch 8" encircled with a red frame on the
natural gray. Testpage above indicates the current adjustment color
balance. This is varied at every adjustment.
3) Find out the patch which is closest to the patch reference den-
(3) Color balance adjustment mode sity of the color chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ) in the Low Density
This machine is provided with the following color balance adjust- area, the Mid Density area, and the High Density area among
ment modes. Use either one of them to adjust. the patches of printed color balance adjustment pattern.
a. Manual color balance adjustment - 1 4) Enter the adjust number of the color balance adjustment pat-
This adjustment is executed with SIM67-22. tern patch which was found in procedure 3) as the adjustment
value.
Use this simulation to print the Color Balance Testpage, and com-
pare it with the reference density of each color on the color chart Select the adjustment density area (LOW, MID, HIGH), and
(UKOG-0331FCZZ) to find the patch whose density is the closest select the adjustment target color (K, C, M, Y), and enter the
to the reference density. Then enter the number of that patch. adjustment number as the adjustment value and press OSA
shortcut key.
Execute the above procedures for each of the low density area, the
middle density area, and the high density area. Adjustment density area Adjustment target color
b. Manual color balance adjustment - 2 LOW K, C, M, Y
This adjustment is executed with SIM67-25. MID K, C, M, Y
When a satisfactory result cannot be obtained with the manual HIGH K, C, M, Y
color balance adjustment - 1 or when a request for changing (cus-
tomizing) the color balance is made by the user, this adjustment is 0$,1
.(<
executed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
The adjustment value of 17-point density level of each of C, M, Y, 7(67
and K is entered for adjustment. *5$<%$/$1&(
c. Simple color balance adjustment (Gray balance adjustment) $˖ ˖/2:'(16,7<

$˖
This adjustment is executed with SIM67-21. %˖ ˖0,''/('(16,7<
Use this simulation to print the Easy Calibration Testpage, and ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+,*+'(16,7<
enter the coordinate value of the patch whose gray balance is best.
. (;(&87(
10-A Manual color balance adjustment - 1
(MX-C400P/C380P) &

5) Select [EXECUTE] button on the display, and press [OK] key.
0$,1 6) After completion of registration of the adjustment data, "Please
.(< push stop key" is displayed. Press [STOP] key to cancel
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( SIM67-22.
*5$<%$/$1&(
0$,1
352&21(;(&87,1* .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
*5$<%$/$1&(
3OHDVHSXVKVWRSNH\
(;(&87(
7) Check the adjustment result by using either of the printer color

balance and density check method 1 or 2.

5) Enter the adjustment value and press OSA shortcut key.
10-B Manual color balance adjustment - 2
(Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
(MX-C400P/C380P) ment value is fixed and the color balance adjustment pattern is
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. printed.)
0$,1
The adjustment value is set in the range of 1 - 99.
.(< To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
%˖ ˖32,17
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
'˖ ˖32,17 Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
. (;(&87( way of adjustment.
& Referring to the process gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the process gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Press [STOP] key to cancel SIM67-25.
(A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected.)
7) Check the adjustment result by using either of the printer color
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
10-C Simple color balance adjustment
(Gray balance adjustment)
(MX-C400P/C380P)
Low density High density
0$,1
; .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
/ ($6<&$/,%5$7,21
352&21(;(&87,1*
%
$M
CMY
Blend (;(&87(
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2

2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the sim-
BK is very slightly copied.
ple color balance adjustment pattern is printed.)
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and
BK are not copied.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted 3) Find out the patch which is closest to the neutral gray among
into the neutral gray color balance by the color table. the patches of the printed simple color balance adjustment pat-
4) Select the color and the adjustment point to be adjusted. tern.

4) Enter the X and Y coordinate values of the simple color bal- 2) Enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key and OSA
ance adjustment pattern patch which was found in procedure shortcut key.
3) as the adjustment values. In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
Enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key and OSA increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
shortcut key. on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
0$,1
.(< 10-E Printer high density part density correction
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( setting (high density part tone gap
($6<&$/,%5$7,21
countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to
$˖ ˖;
the setting change) (MX-C400P/C380P)
$˖ This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in
%˖ ˖<
printer mode.
˷̚˹
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case
of following, change the setting.
(;(&87( * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
& * When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of
high density.
5) Select [EXECUTE] button on the display, and press [OK] key. * U2 trouble has occurred.
6) "Please push stop key" is displayed, and press [STOP] key to * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
cancel SIM67-21. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
0$,1
.(< 1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,1
($6<&$/,%5$7,21 .(<
3OHDVHSXVKVWRSNH\ ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-02'()2535,17(5
$˖ ˖.(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖
˷̚˹
7) Check the adjustment result by using either of the printer color &
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
10-D Printer density adjustment
(low density part density adjustment) Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
range
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
(MX-C400P/C380P) (0: ENABLE density correction mode
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in 1:DISABLE) Enable
printer mode. 1 CMY engine maximum
density correction mode
Adjust to reproduction (not reproduction) setting of the low density
Disable
image.
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
This adjustment is required in the following cases. (0:ENABLE density correction mode
* When reproduction of low density image is required. When repro- 1: DISABLE) Enable
duction of low density image is not required, conversely. 1 K engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 3) Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.
* When there is request from the user. * If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A
and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the
0$,1 tone gap is better.
.(<
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part,
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( set 1 to item A and B.
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17 The tone gap may occur in high density part.
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖
˷̚˹
&

(Method 2)
ADJ 10 Printer density and gradation Use SIM 67-25 to print the density and gradation manual adjust-
adjustment (MX-B400P/B380P) ment check sheet, and check the black patch to check to confirm
that the density and gradation are proper or not.
(1) Note before execution of the printer image quality adjust-
ment PRINTER CALIBRATION
a. Requisite condition before execution of the printer image

quality adjustment The max density patch is not blurred
The following adjustment items which affect the image quality must The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
be properly set. The patch density is changed gradually.
(Adjustment items which affect the image quality and must be Patch A or B slightly printed
checked or adjusted always before execution of the image
quality adjustment.)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Adjustment Item List Simulation
ADJ 2 Image density 2B Black image density sensor 44-2
sensor adjustment Q (Max)
adjustment Low density High density
ADJ 3 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 61-4
(Adjustment items which affect the image quality, but may not
be adjusted frequently. When, however, a trouble occurs, this The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
items must be checked or adjusted.) to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
Adjustment item list Simulation reversed.
ADJ 1 Adjusting high 1A Adjust the main charger grid 8-2 Patch B may not be copied.
voltage values voltage Patch A must not be copied.
1B Adjust the developing bias 8-1
voltage
1C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6 (3) Density and gradation adjustment mode
This machine is provided with the following density and gradation
b. Cases when this adjustment is required adjustment modes. Use either one of them to adjust.
In the following cases, this adjustment is required. a. Manual density and gradation adjustment - 1
1) When maintenance is executed: This adjustment is executed with SIM67-22.
2) When repair or maintenance (on consumable parts such as Use this simulation to print the Testpage, and compare it with the
developer, the OPC drum, and the transfer belt) is executed: reference density of BLACK on the color chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ)
to find the patch whose density is the closest to the reference den-
(2) Printer density and gradation check sity. Then enter the number of that patch.
[Note] Execute the above procedures for each of the Low Density area,
Before checking the printer density and gradation, be sure to exe- the Middle Density area, and the High Density area.
cute the following procedures in advance. b. Manual density and gradation adjustment - 2
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) This adjustment is executed with SIM67-25.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) When a satisfactory result cannot be obtained with the manual den-
* The halftone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) sity and gradation adjustment - 1 or when a request for changing
* For the density and gradation check and adjustment, use the rec- (customizing) the density and gradation is made by the user, exe-
ommended paper. cute this adjustment.
If the other kind of paper is used, the proper image quality (den- The adjustment value of 17-point density level is entered for this
sity and gradation) may not be obtained. adjustment.
(Method 1)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
10-A Manual density and gradation
The print density of the patch must be changed gradually from the
lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must adjustment - 1 (MX-B400P/B380P)
not be reversed. 1) Enter the SIM 67-22 mode.
At that time, set the SIM64-5 set values to the default values. 0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
*5$<%$/$1&(
352&21(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

10-B Manual density and gradation
(A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the color
balance adjustment pattern is printed.) adjustment - 2 (MX-B400P/B380P)
Gray Balance Testpage
Low Density Mid Density High Density
0$,1
Bk Bk Bk Adjustment number .(<
15 15
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
14 14
13 13 35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
12 12
11 11 $˖ ˖32,17
10 10 $˖
9 9 %˖ ˖32,17
8 8
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
7 7
6 6
'˖ ˖32,17
5 5
4 4
. (;(&87(
3 3
2 2
&
1 1

(A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected.)
3) Check the printed density and gradation adjustment pattern to The density and gradation adjustment pattern is printed.
find out the patch which is closest to the patch reference den- 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density
sity of the color chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ) in the Low Density and the gradation is satisfactory.
area, the Mid Density area, and the High Density area.
4) Enter the adjust number of the density and gradation adjust-
ment pattern patch which was found in procedure 3) as the PRINTER CALIBRATION
adjustment value.
Select the adjustment density area (LOW, MID, HIGH), and The max density patch is not blurred
enter the adjustment number as the adjustment value.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• Adjustment density area The patch density is changed gradually.
LOW Patch A or B slightly printed
MID
HIGH
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
0$,1
.(<
Q (Max)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Low density High density
*5$<%$/$1&(
$˖ ˖/2:'(16,7<
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/('(16,7<
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+,*+'(16,7< level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
. (;(&87( Patch B may not be copied.
&
When, however, the density and gradation are adjusted
according to a request from the user, there is no need to set to
5) Select [EXECUTE] button on the display, and press [OK] key.
the standard color balance stated above.
6) After completion of registration of the adjustment data, "Please
4) Select the adjustment point to be adjusted.
push stop key" is displayed. Press [STOP] key to cancel
SIM67-22. 5) Enter the adjustment value and press OSA shortcut key.
(Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
0$,1 ment value is fixed and the density and gradation adjustment
.(<
pattern is printed.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 The adjustment value is set in the range of 1 - 99.
*5$<%$/$1&( To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
3OHDVHSXVKVWRSNH\ decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
7) Check the adjustment result by using either of the printer den- 6) Press [STOP] key to cancel SIM67-25.
sity and gradation check method 1 or 2. 7) Check the adjustment result by using either of the printer den-
sity and gradation check method 1 or 2.

10-C Printer density adjustment Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
(low density part density adjustment) range
A K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) (0:ENABLE correction mode Enable
(MX-B400P/B380P) 1: 1 K engine maximum density
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in DISABLE) correction mode Disable
printer mode.
2) Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.
Adjust to reproduction (not reproduction) setting of the low density
* If a tone gap is generated in the high density area, set to "0."
image.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
tone gap is better.
* When reproduction of low density image is required. When repro-
* To increase the density in the high density area further more,
duction of low density image is not required, conversely.
set to "1."
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When there is request from the user. ADJ 11 Manual paper feed tray paper
size (width) sensor adjustment
0$,1 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
.(<
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖ * The PCU PWB has been replaced.

˷̚˹
0$,1
.(<
& ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
2) Enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key and OSA
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
shortcut key.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value. (;(&87(
10-D Printer high density part density correction

EXECUTE
setting (high density part tone gap
[OK] key
countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to
the setting change) (MX-B400P/B380P) 0$,1
.(<
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
printer mode. 7(67
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17
of following, change the setting.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of
high density.
(;(&87(
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. EXECUTE
a. Adjustment procedure [OK] key
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
0$,1 the A5R width MIN POSITION.
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 0$,1
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-02'()2535,17(5 .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖.(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
˷̚˹
& (;(&87(

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fixing screw of the fusing paper guide so that the
paper guide can be moved freely in the directions of A and B.
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.

[EXECUTE] button is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.
display.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
A
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
display. B
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
The standard fixing position is the bottom of the marking scale.
Change the position according to the situation.
* When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
in the arrow direction B.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
arrow direction A.
Normally, the hole on the fusing paper guide standard fixing
position is used to fix the fusing paper guide.

display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

[5] SIMULATION
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Function and purpose in the simulation

Key
mode
1. General [JOB STATUS] key

Mode key
Not used in the simulation mode.
Not used in the simulation mode.
The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Used to shift the menu to the one-step
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes upper stage menu in the simulation mode.
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments Scroll key UP • Used to scroll upward. (Item selection)
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine. (Cursor key) scroll key • Used to switch to the next screen.
(Cursor key)
1) Various adjustments
DOWN • Used to scroll downward.
2) Setting of the specifications and functions scroll key (Item selection)
3) Canceling troubles (Cursor key) • Used to switch to the previous screen.
LEFT Used to select an item or a button on the
4) Operation check
scroll key simulation menu in the "MAIN" mode.
5) Counters check, setting, clear (Cursor key) (To the left). Used to select a numeral
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data value, * key, # key, or C key on the
check, clear. simulation screen in the "10KEY" mode.
RIGHT Used to select an item or a button on the
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
scroll key simulation menu in the "MAIN" mode.
transport.
(Cursor key) (To the right). Used to select a numeral
A. Basic operation (operation and procedure) value, * key, # key, or C key on the
simulation screen in the "10KEY" mode.
(1) Entering the simulation mode [OK] key Used to fix the selected button, to enter a
Enter the simulation mode by the following key operations. numeral, * key, # key, or C key, and to
execute the simulation operation.
[STOP] key ON o [LOGOUT] key ON o [BACK] key ON o
[BACK] key Used to enter the simulation mode. Used
[LOGOUT] key ON o (Ready for input of a main code of simula- to switch between the "10KEY" mode
tion) (value input) and the "MAIN" mode (item
(Simulation mode menu) selection).
[STOP] key Used to enter the simulation mode, and to
cancel the simulation mode.
[LOGOUT] key Used to enter the simulation mode.
[POWER SAVE] key Not used in the simulation mode.
[POWER] key Not used in the simulation mode.
OSA shortcut key Used to fix the simulation number,
adjustment values, or set values after
entering them.
b. Buttons on the simulation menu
0$,1
.(<
& ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
When [STOP] key is pressed, the simulation mode is canceled and '96(77,1*$1'287387
the machine returns to the normal mode. $˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
(Note for the simulation mode) $˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
machine is in the simulation mode.
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main
power source. &
(2) Keys and functions used in the simulation mode

Selection area of [EXECUTE] button
a. Mechanical key numeral, , , and & All plus button
All minus button
Buttons on the simulation Function and purpose in the simulation

menu mode
Selection area of numeral, • Input of numerals or codes
*, #, and C • C key: Used to clear input values or
codes.
[EXECUTE] button • Operates corresponding to the selected
button or item.
[BACK] key
• Also used to settle the adjustment value
Mode key BACK OK READY
and the set value depending on the
DATA
PRINT [OK] key
[JOB STATUS] key JOB
simulation content.
OSA shortcut key
STATUS Select this button and press [OK] key to
[POWER] key execute the simulation.
SYSTEM
SETTINGS All plus button All the set values and the adjustment
LOGOUT values are increased together.
[POWER SAVE] key
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key All minus button All the set values and the adjustment
[STOP] key
values are decreased together.
[LOGOUT] key
[SCROLL] key
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P SIMULATION 5 – 1

(3) Operating procedures in the simulation mode b. Scroll keys functions and procedures
a. Entering the main code menu and the sub code menu The scroll keys are used to select a numeral, a button, or an item
on the simulation menu.
In the simulation mode, press [BACK] key to select the "10KEY"
mode. (When selecting a button or an item)
* Use [BACK] key to switch between the "10KEY" mode (numeral 1) Use [BACK] key to select the "MAIN" mode.
input) and the "MAIN" mode (item selection). 2) Use the up/down scroll keys to select an item.
To select an item or a button, select the "MAIN" mode. To enter a 3) Use the right/left scroll keys to select an item or a button.
numeral, select the "10KEY" (numeral input) mode. (Example)
0$,1 0$,1
.(< .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387 '96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B. $˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B& %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B< '˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
& &
NOTE: The buttons, different from the touch panel, on the display (When entering a numeral, and when selecting * key, # key, or C
of this machine cannot be operated directly. key)
(Entering the main code menu) 1) Use [BACK] key to select the "10KEY" mode.
1) Select a numeral with the right and left scroll keys and press 2) Use the right/left scroll keys to select an item or a button, a
[OK] key. numeral, * key, # key, or C key on the simulation menu.
For a numeral of 2 digits, repeat the above procedure twice. (Example)
(First enter the upper digit, then enter the lower digit.)
2) Press OSA shortcut key. 0$,1
.(<
With the above procedure, the machine enters the main code
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
menu.
'96(77,1*$1'287387
(Example)
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
&
(When switching the menu pages)

1) There are several menu pages. To switch the menu pages, use
the up/down scroll keys.
& (Example)
(Entering the sub code menu) 0$,1
1) In the main code menu mode, select a numeral with the right .(<
and left scroll keys and press [OK] key. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
For a numeral of 2 digits, repeat the above procedure twice. )(('287387&+(&.

(First enter the upper digit, then enter the lower digit.) 3)0 550 320) 3205
2) Press OSA shortcut key. )80 &3)0 260 :710
With the above procedure, the machine enters the sub code &3)& 785& 3&66 /6866
menu. /6866 &/80 &38& &/80
(Example) (;(&87(
&
&

2) Use the up/down scroll keys to switch the menu pages. Use the right/left scroll keys to select 0 and press [OK] key.
0$,1 0$,1
.(< .(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 7(67 &/26(
)(('287387&+(&. '96(77,1*$1'287387
03)6 03*6
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
(;(&87(
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
&
&
c. Entering the set value and the adjustment value

1) Use [BACK] key to select the "MAIN" mode. 5) After entering the adjustment value or the set value, press
OSA shortcut key to fix the adjustment value or the set value.
2) Select an adjustment mode and an adjustment item. (Select an
adjustment mode and an adjustment item with the scroll keys Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
and press [OK] key.) ment value or the set value is fixed and the simulation is exe-
cuted.
(Example) Adjust the developing bias voltage
NOTE: Normally the set value is fixed by pressing OSA shortcut
0$,1 key. In some kinds of simulations, however, the set value is
.(< set by selecting [EXECUTE] button and pressing [OK] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (Example)
'96(77,1*$1'287387 The following is the case where the adjustment value or the set
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B. value is fixed by selecting [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B& 0$,1
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0 .(<
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B< ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

7(67 &/26(
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( )$;62)76:6(77,1*
& 6:12 6:1R

'$7$
3) Use [BACK] key to select the "10KEY" mode.
4) Select a numeral with the right and left scroll keys and press
[OK] key.
(;(&87(
For a number of two or more digits, repeat the above proce-
dures for the number of times equal to the number of digits. &
(First enter the top digit, then enter the lower digits sequen-
tially.)
d. Item selection by the item number
(Example)When setting the adjustment value to 450
A target item on the simulation menu is selected by the number
Use the right/left scroll keys to select 4 and press [OK] key.
which is assigned to the item.
0$,1 Example of an load operation check
.(<
1) Use [BACK] key to select the "10KEY" mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387 0$,1
.(<
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
$˖ 7(67
%˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B& )(('287387&+(&.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0 3)0 550 320) 3205
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B< )80 &3)0 260 :710
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( &3)& 785& 3&66 /6866
& /6866 &/80 &38& &/80
(;(&87(
Use the right/left scroll keys to select 5 and press [OK] key.
&
0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
&

2) Enter the number indicated on the left side of the target item. 3) Press OSA shortcut key to fix the target item.
Select the number of the target item number with the right/left 4) The selected target item is highlighted.
scroll keys and press [OK] key.
0$,1
For a numeral of 2 digits, repeat the above procedure twice. .(<
(First enter the upper digit, then enter the lower digit.) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,1 )(('287387&+(&.
.(< 3)0 550 320) 3205
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( )80 &3)0 260 :710
)(('287387&+(&.
&3)& 785& 3&66 /6866
3)0 550 320) 3205 /6866 &/80 &38& &/80
)80 &3)0 260 :710
(;(&87(
&3)& 785& 3&66 /6866
&
/6866 &/80 &38& &/80
(;(&87(
5) With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key, and the sim-
& ulation of the selected item is executed.
The entered number of the target item is displayed on the left In the "10KEY" mode, however, this operation cannot be exe-
under corner of the screen. cuted.
There are several simulation menu pages. To switch the simulation
menu pages, use the up/down scroll keys.
2. List of simulation codes

NOTE: In this simulation, some functions of "COPY" and "FAX" which are not provided in this model may be displayed.
They are only displayed by the program, but they do not work.
This manual does not describe the contents of SIM66-1/2/3/61 (items related to FAX).
Main Sub Functions Section

3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit of Paper feed tray (Option)
those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit of those. Paper feed tray
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed tray unit paper transport clutch (DTRC). Paper feed tray unit
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
6 Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Fusing
51 Used to forcibly cut down the initial fuse of the developer unit and the fusing unit. Developing, fusing unit
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the switchback section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.

22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total numbers of mis-feed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check mis-feed positions and the mis-feed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point
by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output various adjustment/setting data (simulations, FAX soft switch counter), the firmware
version, the counter list, the process control data, and SIM50-24 data.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed. (If the number of troubles of mis-feed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After
completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
34 Used to initialize the set items of SIM26-32.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photo-conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
26 2 Used to set the paper weight type. Paper feed
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set display or non-display of the system setting menu.
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
55 Used to set Enable/Disable of the automatic color calibration (automatic color balance adjustment) when
replacing a consumable part. (In this simulation, the menu is displayed but it does not work.)
65 Used to set the staple process restriction.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
27 5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed

43 1 Used to set the fusing reference temperature of each operation mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photo-conductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photo-conductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photo-conductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
13 Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Developing system
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsorily. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
61 Used to set the calibration data of the color image sensor (image registration sensor F).
46 21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
48 6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
50 1 Print image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is
made separately for each paper feed section.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Manual adjustment)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC
drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20 and 22.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the resist roller. (This adjustment is
performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the
device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the print hold data (document filling data) to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory.
2 Used to set the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)

62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data.
11 Used to delete the print hold data (document filing data).
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode) (MX-C400P/C380P)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to the test print. (Self print). (This function is not used in the market.)
65 5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
67 17 Used to reset the printer controller. Printer
21 Printer color balance adjustment (Simplified adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P) Printer
22 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)/Printer density and gradation adjustment (Manual Printer
adjustment)
23 Used to print the printer color balance check sheet. (MX-C400P/C380P) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)/Printer density and gradation adjustment (Manual Printer
adjustment)
30 Used to set Enable/Disable of printer calibration data transfer. (Though this simulation menu is displayed, it Printer
does not work.)
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section Printer
tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
52 Used to reset the printer color balance adjustment (adjustment for each dither) to the default value. (The
set values of SIM67-33 is set to the default values.)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP PWB
3. Details of simulation
3
3-2 3-3
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
sors and the detectors in the finisher and the finisher and the control circuit.
the control circuit. Section Finisher
Section Finisher Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be operation checked.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
played. The selected load performs the operation.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and
are highlighted. the simulation is terminated.
FPPD1 Finisher paper pass detector FPGS Finisher paper gate solenoid
FPLD Finisher paper level detector FPDM Finisher paper delivery motor
FDTULS Finisher delivery tray upper limit sensor FPS Finisher paddle solenoid
FDTLLS Finisher delivery tray lower limit sensor FARLS Finisher alignment roller lift solenoid
FDRPS Finisher delivery roller position sensor FPTM Finisher paper transport motor
FPRD-F Finisher paper rear edge detector F FDRLM Finisher delivery roller lift motor
FPRD-C Finisher paper rear edge detector C FPAM-F Finisher paper alignment motor F
FPRD-R Finisher paper rear edge detector R FPAM-R Finisher paper alignment motor R
FAPHPS-F Finisher paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSM Finisher staple motor
FAPHPS-R Finisher paper alignment plate home position sensor R FTLM Finisher tray lift motor
FSTPD Finisher staple tray paper detector FSCF Finisher stapler cooling fan
FSHPS Finisher staple home position sensor FBCF Finisher control board cooling fan
FSED Finisher staple empty detector
FSLD Finisher staple lead detector
FSSW Finisher safety switch

D2PPD Paper feed tray 3 paper transport detector
3-10
D2ULD Paper feed tray 3 upper limit detector
Purpose Adjustment D2PED Paper feed tray 3 paper empty detector
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. D2PQD Paper feed tray 3 paper remaining quantity detector
Section Finisher D2PRED1 Paper feed tray 3 paper rear edge detector 1
D2PRED2 Paper feed tray 3 paper rear edge detector 2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted. D2COCS Paper feed tray 3 cover open/close sensor
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and D3MDC Paper feed tray 4 installation detection connector
OSA shortcut key.) D3PPD Paper feed tray 4 paper transport detector
(The set value is saved.) D3ULD Paper feed tray 4 upper limit detector
D3PED Paper feed tray 4 paper empty detector
Setting Default D3PQD Paper feed tray 4 paper remaining quantity detector
Item/Display Content
range value D3PRED1 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 1
A FPAM ADJUST Paper alignment width 40 - 60 50 D3PRED2 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 2
adjustment *1 D3PRED3 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 3
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper delivery roller 40 - 60 50 D3COCS Paper feed tray 4 cover open/close sensor
descending position
adjustment
Item A:
4-3
• When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the alignment
plate F/R width is narrowed by 0.419mm in alignment operation. Purpose Operation test/check
• When the adjustment value is decreased by 1, the alignment Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
plate F/R width is widened by 0.419mm in alignment operation. in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit
of those.
• The alignment plate F and the alignment plate R cannot be
adjusted separately. The shift amount on the F side and that on Section Paper feed tray
the R side are alternatively corrected every time the adjustment Operation/Procedure
value is increased by 1. (Correction with 51 for the F side, and 52 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check.
for the R side. ... 59 for the F aide, and 60 for the R side. Similar
when the set value is decreased.)
The selected load performs the operation.
Item B:
• When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the shift amount of
the paper delivery roller is changed by 0.11mm toward the pres-
sure increasing side (*1). DPFM Transport motor
• When the adjustment value is decreased by 1, the shift amount D1LM Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor
of the paper delivery roller is changed by 0.11mm toward the D1PFC Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch
pressure decreasing side (*1). D1PTC Paper feed tray 1 paper transport clutch
*1: D2LM Paper feed tray 2 lift-up motor
The pressure increasing side means the direction to increase the D2PFC Paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch
paper delivery roller pressure onto paper, and the pressure D2PTC Paper feed tray 2 paper transport clutch
decrease side means the direction to decrease the paper deliv- D3LM Paper feed tray 3 lift-up motor
ery roller pressure onto paper. D3PFC Paper feed tray 3 paper feed clutch
D3PTC Paper feed tray 3 paper transport clutch
4 4-5
Purpose Operation test/check
4-2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
Purpose Operation test/check feed tray unit paper transport clutch
(DTRC).
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the paper feed tray, Section Paper feed tray unit
and the control circuit of those. Operation/Procedure
Section Paper feed tray (Option) (Check the ON operation)
Operation/Procedure Select the button of the code to be checked for the ON operation,
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- and press [OK] key.
played. Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
are highlighted. highlighted.
(Check the OFF operation)
D1PPD Paper feed tray 2 paper transport detector Select the highlighted code button in the ON operation, and press
D1ULD Paper feed tray 2 upper limit detector [OK] key.
D1PED Paper feed tray 2 paper empty detector
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
D1PQD Paper feed tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
D1COCS Paper feed tray 2 cover open/close sensor
D2MDC Paper feed tray 3 installation detection connector

5 6
5-1
6-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
the paper transport system (clutches and
cuit.
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Section Operation panel
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
1) Select the item to be operation checked.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
5-2
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Purpose Operation test/check sound.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit. Section Item/Display Content
Transport/ RRM Registration motor
Section Fusing process POMF * Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
Operation/Procedure POMR * Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
1) Select the item to be operation checked. FUM Fusing drive motor
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. CPFM Paper feed motor
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
HLPCS Fusing pressure release/pressing
With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and solenoid
the simulation is terminated. Paper feed CLUM1 Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor
CPUC1 Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch
HL_UM Heater lamp upper (main)
MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid
HL_LM Heater lamp lower (main)
HL_E Heater lamp (external) * If two or more are selected at a time, it makes "Normal rotation."
5-4 6-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
charge lamp and the control circuit. motor and its control circuit.
Section Process Section Others

Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check. 1) Select the item to be operation checked.
When [ALL] button is pressed, all the items are selected. 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. The selected load performs the operation.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and
With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and the simulation is terminated.
the simulation is terminated. Press [ALL] button to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method:
DL_K Discharge lamp K The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
DL_C Discharge lamp C there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
DL_M Discharge lamp M sound.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
PSFM Power PWB cooling fan motor
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
PROFM1 Process fan motor 1
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor

6-3 6-6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
transfer unit and the control circuit. separation.
Section Process (Transfer) Section Fusing
1) Select the operation mode. 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. 2) Fusing pressure applying and fusing pressure release are
3) The transfer unit repeats operations in the mode selected in repeated.
procedure 1. During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
During this operation, the transfer unit status (the operation mode played.
position) is displayed. With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and the
With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and the simulation is terminated.
simulation is terminated.
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying o Fusing
• MX-C400P/C380P applying pressure release o (Fusing pressure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
Mode Transfer
Display Operation release
select key mode
TC1 BLACK Black mode The switching Primary
position operations are transfer
COLOR Color mode repeated as (Normal
follows: Black rotation of the
6-51
position
FREE Drum mode position o mode select Purpose Setting
separation Color mode gear)
Function (Purpose) Used to forcibly cut down the initial fuse of
position position o Black
mode position o
the developer unit and the fusing unit.
Drum separation Section Developing, fusing unit
position
Operation/Procedure
TC1_R BLACK Black mode The switching Primary
1) Select a target unit.
FREE Drum repeated as (Reverse 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
separation follows: Black rotation of the The initial detection fuse is blown-off.
position mode position o mode select
COLOR Color mode Drum separation gear) Item/Display Content
position position o Color
Initial DVCRU_K Developing K initial detection fuse blow-off
mode position
detection operation
TC2 PRINT Print The switching Secondary
DVCRU_C Developing C initial detection fuse blow-off
operation
FREE Drum repeated as (Driven by the
DVCRU_M Developing M initial detection fuse blow-off
separation follows: Print fusing motor)
operation
position position o Drum
separation DVCRU_Y Developing Y initial detection fuse blow-off
position operation
FUCRU Fusing initial detection fuse blow-off operation
• MX-B400P/B380P
Key Display Content Remark

TC1 BLACK Black mode
position Black mode position
The operation
7
FREE Drum
is repeated.
separation Drum separation position
position 7-1
TC2 PRINT Print Purpose Setting
position Print position Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
FREE Drum The operation
is repeated. aging.
separation Drum separation position
position Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target to be set.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup

Setting
7-6 Mode Item/Display Content
range
Purpose Setting LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging DVB_K value at low speed
cycle. B LOW SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
DVB_C value at low speed
Section
C LOW SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
Operation/Procedure DVB_M value at low speed
1) Set the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec). (Enter the D LOW SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.) DVB_Y value at low speed
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- 8-2
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
7-8 printer mode and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation display * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time. low speed are also adjusted simulta-
neously.
Section
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
1) Select the process speed.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed 2) Select a target item to be adjusted.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] button is inhib- 3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
ited. OSA shortcut key.)
(The value specified on the label of the high voltage PWB must
be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
8 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed, the
voltage corresponding to the value entered in procedure 3) is out-
8-1 putted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed.
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and the
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of simulation is terminated.
the developing voltage in each print mode
Setting
and the control circuit. Mode Item/Display Content
range
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
low speed are also adjusted simulta-
GB_K value at middle speed
neously.
B MIDDLE SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
Section Process (Developing) GB_C value at middle speed
Operation/Procedure C MIDDLE SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_M value at middle speed
D MIDDLE SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
2) Select a target item to be adjusted. GB_Y value at middle speed
3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
OSA shortcut key.) GB_K value at low speed
(The value specified on the label of the high voltage PWB must B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_C value at low speed
be entered.)
C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each GB_M value at low speed
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
When [EXECUTE] button is selected and [OK] key is pressed, the GB_Y value at low speed
voltage corresponding to the value entered in procedure 3) is out-
putted for 30 sec and the set value is fixed.
With [EXECUTE] button selected, press [OK] key again, and the
simulation is terminated. 8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Setting
Mode Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
range
the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
DVB_K value at middle speed Section Process (Transport)
B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias set 0-600 Operation/Procedure
DVB_C value at middle speed
1) Select a target item to be adjusted.
C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
DVB_M value at middle speed 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600 OSA shortcut key.)
DVB_Y value at middle speed The initial values (default values) specified on the list below
are set.

• MX-C400P/C380P
Default value
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary Color mode K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
transfer bias mode
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K reference Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
value mode
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode mode
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color mode Standard paper Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
transfer bias mode mode
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX reference Back surface 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
value mode
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode mode
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color mode Heavy paper Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
S TC2 OHP CL OHP Color mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
T TC2 OHP BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
W TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
X TC2 THIN BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
Y TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
Z TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
bias
reference
value
AE PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL output Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AG PTC LOW SPEED BW reference Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AI CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AJ CASE VOLT MID CL voltage Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AK CASE VOLT LOW BW reference Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AM PEEL VOLT LOW CL Separation Color mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AN PEEL VOLT MIDDLE CL discharge Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AO PEEL VOLT LOW BW reference Black/White mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AP PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V

• MX-B400P/B380P
Default value
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Primary transfer bias Low speed mode 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K reference value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
C TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Secondary transfer Standard Front surface mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
D TC2 PLAIN BW DPX bias reference value paper mode Back surface mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
E TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface mode 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
F TC2 HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface mode 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
G TC2 OHP BW OHP 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
H TC2 ENVELOPE BW Envelope 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
I TC2 THIN BW Thin paper 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
J TC2 GLOSSY BW Gloss paper 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
K TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
L TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
M TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
N TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
O PTC LOW SPEED BW PTC current output Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
P PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW reference value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
Q CASE VOLT LOW BW PTC case voltage Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
R CASE VOLT MID BW reference value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
S PEEL VOLT LOW BW Separation discharge Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
T PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW reference value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
9 10
9-2 10-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the paper reverse supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
section (duplex section) and its control cir- related circuit.
cuit. Section Process (Developing)
Section Duplex Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When [ALL] button is pressed, all the items are selected.
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
are highlighted.
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1 the simulation is terminated.
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2 NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
9-3
unit, resulting in over toner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in tridges installed, over toner state may be deleted by mak-
the switchback section (duplex section) and ing a few black background copy in the single color copy
its control circuit. mode of the target color.
Section Duplex
TNM_K Toner motor K
Operation/Procedure
TNM_C Toner motor C
1) Select the item to be operation checked. TNM_M Toner motor M
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. TNM_Y Toner motor Y
ADUC1 Switchback (ADU) paper transport clutch 1

13 Item/Display Content Setting range
Default
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 60K
13-- COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 30K
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(COLOR) (Color) 999 : Free
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
22
22-1
14 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
14-- Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Change the display page with [n] [p] key.
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. Display
Item Content NOTE
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. (Counter)
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
quantity (BW) quantity of black jams
and white
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
16 (COL) quantity of color jams
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self
16--
print, excluding
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) jams)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of full color (including self
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB print, excluding
Operation/Procedure jams)
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. TOTAL (2COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of 2-color (including self
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. print, excluding
jams)
TOTAL (3COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of 3-color (including self
17 print, excluding
jams)
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
17-- (SGL_COL) of single color (including self
print, excluding
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) jams)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
Section print counter (excluding self
print)
Operation/Procedure PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. counter (excluding self
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. print)
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
counter (excluding self
print)
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
21 counter (excluding self
print)
PRINT Single color print Billing target
21-1 (SGL_COL) counter (excluding self
Purpose Setting print)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting.
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
OSA shortcut key.)

Display Display
Item Content NOTE Item Content NOTE
(Counter) (Counter)
Print hold PRINT HOLD Black and white Billing target Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
(BW) print hold counter (excluding self life meter number of (Unit: r1%)
print) developer
PRINT HOLD Color print hold Billing target rotations (K)
(COL) counter (excluding self DEVE LIFE (C) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
print) number of (Unit: r1%)
PRINT HOLD 2-color print hold Billing target developer
(2COL) counter (excluding self rotations (C)
print) DEVE LIFE (M) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
PRINT HOLD Single color print Billing target number of (Unit: r1%)
(SCOL) hold counter (excluding self developer
print) rotations (M)
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity DEVE LIFE (Y) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
other counter number of (Unit: r1%)
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity developer
counter rotations (Y)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance Toner TONER Toner number 0 - 255
counter ALL counter (Total) number NUMBER (K) counter (K)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter TONER Toner number 0 - 255
COL counter (Color) NUMBER (C) counter (C)
Transfer unit TC1 UNIT Primary transfer TONER Toner number 0 - 255
unit print counter NUMBER (M) counter (M)
TC1 UNIT Primary transfer TONER Toner number 0 - 255
RANGE unit accumulated NUMBER (Y) counter (Y)
traveling distance Toner near TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
(cm) end number END (K) number counter
TC1 UNIT DAY Use day of counter (K)
primary transfer TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
unit (Day) END (C) number counter
TC2 UNIT Secondary (C)
transfer unit print TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
counter END (M) number counter
TC2 UNIT Secondary (M)
RANGE transfer unit TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
accumulated END (Y) number counter
traveling distance (Y)
(cm) Remaining TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
TC2 UNIT DAY Use day of toner RESIDUAL (K) quantity (K) 25 - 50%
secondary quantity 50 - 75%
transfer unit (Day) 75 - 100%
Fusing unit FUSER Fusing unit print TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
UNIT(U) counter (Heat RESIDUAL (C) quantity (C) 25 - 50%
roller upper)
50 - 75%
FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print
75 - 100%
(L&E) counter (Heat
TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
roller lower and
RESIDUAL (M) quantity (M) 25 - 50%
external)
FUSER AC DY Use day of fusing 50 - 75%
(U) unit (Heat roller 75 - 100%
upper) TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
FUSER AC DY Use day of fusing RESIDUAL (Y) quantity (Y) 25 - 50%
(L&E) unit (Heat roller 50 - 75%
lower and 75 - 100%
external)
Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
meter number of drum (Unit: r1%)
rotations (K) 22-2
DRUM LIFE (C) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
number of drum (Unit: r1%)
rotations (C) Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of mis-
DRUM LIFE (M) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%) feed and troubles. (When the number of
number of drum (Unit: r1%) total jam is considerably great, it is judged
rotations (M) as necessary for repair.)
DRUM LIFE (Y) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
Section
number of drum (Unit: r1%)
rotations (Y) Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
Display/Item Content
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter

JAM code Content
22-3
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Paper feed tray lower stage) paper feed
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check JAM
Function (Purpose) Used to check mis-feed positions and the DPFD2_N4 DPFD2 not-reached JAM
mis-feed count of each position. (Paper feed tray lower stage)
* Presumption of the faulty point by this DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM
data is possible. (Paper feed tray lower stage)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (PPD1 not-reached)
Section
DPFD3_S4 DPFD3 remaining JAM
Operation/Procedure (Paper feed tray lower stage)
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
JAM code Content MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
TRAY1 Machine cassette 1 paper feed JAM FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM) FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Machine cassette) FSTPLJ Staple JAM
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) FIN_TIME Finisher paper fast delivery JAM
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) FSTPD_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) FPRD_N Finisher compiler not-reached JAM
CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) FPRD_S Finisher compiler remaining JAM
CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) CPFD1_DESK CPFD1 JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 (Paper feed tray upper stage) paper feed (Paper feed tray communication abnormality detection)
JAM PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM
DPFD1_S2 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) (Finisher communication abnormality detection)
DPFD1_N3 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) STOP_JAM Control error JAM
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Machine cassette) ICU_REQ Control error JAM
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray) 22-4
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU again) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Machine cassette)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage)
tory.
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) Section
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray) Operation/Procedure
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU again) The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Machine cassette) (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage)
* For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "[6] SELF DIAG AND
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
TROUBLE CODE".
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU again)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Machine cassette) 22-5
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) Purpose Others
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage)
unit (section).
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU again)
Section Firmware
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait time out) Operation/Procedure
PPD2_DRUM PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection) The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
POD1_FUS POD1 JAM (Detection of twining to fusing)
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM S/N Serial No.
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM LANGUAGE Language support data version
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC Flash ROM data
TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Paper feed tray middle stage) paper feed COLOR PROFILE Color profile
JAM PCU PCU
DPFD2_S3 DPFD2 remaining JAM DESK Desk unit
(Paper feed tray middle stage) FINISHER Finisher
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM NIC NIC
(Paper feed tray lower stage) POWER-CON Power controller
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
(Paper feed tray middle stage) ESCP ESCP font ROM
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM PDL PDL font ROM
(Paper feed tray lower stage)
OPU OPU (Operation panel)

Operation/Procedure
22-6
The system configuration is displayed.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to output various adjustment/setting played.)
data (simulations, FAX soft switch counter),
• MX-C400P/C380P
the firmware version, the counter list, the
process control data, and SIM50-24 data. MACHINE MX-C400P Main unit
Section MX-C380P
Operation/Procedure DESK MX-CSX1 500 sheet paper feed unit A
FINISHER MX-FN12 Inner finisher
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
SECURITY MX-FR20U Data security kit
1) Select the print list mode. (commercial version)
AIM Application integration module
Print list None
Item/Display Print content
mode
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version,
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
counter data, etc.
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
2 SIM50-24 data
NIC STANDARD NIC
3 Data related to the process
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
control
ACM STANDARD Application communication module
2) Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and printing of EAM STANDARD External account module
the print list mode selected in procedure 1) is executed. PRINTER STANDARD Printer unit
NOTE: When the printing operation is interrupted during list data • MX-B400P/B380P
printing, cancel the simulation and check for any error.
MACHINE MX-B400P Main unit
MX-B380P
22-8 DESK MX-CSX1 500 sheet paper feed unit A
FINISHER MX-FN12 Inner finisher
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, SECURITY MX-FR21U Data security kit
and the scan (reading) unit. (commercial version)
Section AIM Application integration module
None
Operation/Procedure SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
The counter value of the finisher is displayed. SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
STAPLER Staple counter NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
ACM STANDARD Application communication module
EAM STANDARD External account module
22-9
PRINTER STANDARD Printer unit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
22-13
Section Paper feed, ADU
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter cartridge).
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter Section Process
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter Operation/Procedure
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
displayed.
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
ADU ADU paper feed counter DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
(Paper reverse section)
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
(K)
DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
22-10
(C)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration (M)
(option, internal hardware). DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
(Y)
Section DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K)
DRUM TURN C Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C)

DRUM TURN M Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY) (*)
DRUM TURN Y Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) (K) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
DRUM DAY C Number of day that used drum (Day) (C) (*)
DRUM DAY M Number of day that used drum (Day) (M) ADMIN. SET LIST (PRTHLD)
DRUM DAY Y Number of day that used drum (Day) (Y) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C) ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M) Receive rejection number ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST (*)
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y) table
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
(cm) (K) address domain table (*)
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance To E-mail Transfer table list INBOUND ROUTING LIST
(cm) (C) To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
(cm) (M) Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (Y) *: Though the menu is displayed, it does not work.
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
(K)
DEVE TURN C Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
DEVE TURN M
(C)
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
23
(M)
DEVE TURN Y Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number 23-2
(Y)
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used Developer (Day) (K)
DEVE DAY C Number of day that used Developer (Day) (C) Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
DEVE DAY M Number of day that used Developer (Day) (M) paper jam and mis-feed. (If the number of
DEVE DAY Y Number of day that used Developer (Day) (Y) troubles of mis-feed is considerably great,
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K) the judgment is made that repair is
TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C) required.)
TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M) Section
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y) Operation/Procedure
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K)
Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the trouble his-
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (C)
tory list of paper jam and mis-feed is printed.
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (M)
TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (Y)
23-80
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
22-90
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check tion and the paper transport section. Used
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists. to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
Section
feed section and the paper transport sec-
Operation/Procedure tion.
1) Change the display with [n] [p] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
3) Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and list printing
Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the list of paper
is executed.
feed and paper transport timing is printed.
All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST (*) Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST in the paper feed and transport section.
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST latest job on the final paper is printed.
PS FONT LIST Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
PS KANJI FONT LIST on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
NIC PAGE
Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LIST SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
GROUP LIST operation or load operation name)
PROGRAM LIST STANDARD Reference value (ms)
MEMORY BOX LIST CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST final paper
Print hold PRINT HOLD FOLDER LIST (*) PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job
(Document filling) on the final paper
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.

24-4
24
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
24-1
printer counters of the transport unit and
Purpose Data clear the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou- nance, clear the counters.)
ble counter. (After completion of mainte- Section
nance, clear the counters.)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the item to be cleared.
Operation/Procedure 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared. 3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared. MAINT ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
MAINT COL Maintenance counter (Color)
MACHINE Machine JAM counter TC1 UNIT Primary transport unit print counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter TC1 UNIT RN Primary transport unit accumulated traveling distance
(cm)
TC1 UNIT DY Use day of primary transport unit (Day)
TC2 UNIT Secondary transport unit print counter
24-2 TC2 UNIT RN Secondary transport unit accumulated traveling distance
(cm)
Purpose Data clear
TC2 UNIT DY Use day of secondary transport unit (Day)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num- FUS UN(U) Fusing unit (heat roller upper) print counter
ber of prints) of each paper feed section. FUS UN(E) Fusing unit (heat roller lower & external) print counter
Section FUS DY(U) Use day of fusing unit (heat roller upper) (Day)
Operation/Procedure FUS DY(E) Use day of fusing unit (heat roller lower & external) (Day)
1) Select the item to be cleared.

3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. 24-5
The target counter is cleared. Purpose Data clear

Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter Section
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) Operation/Procedure
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) 1) Select the item to be cleared.
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
ADU ADU paper path counter 3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically.
24-3
The developer rotation number accumulation counter is not
Purpose Data clear displayed on the LCD screen, but cleared in conjunction
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher counter. with execution of this simulation.
Section
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Operation/Procedure
K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
1) Select the item to be cleared. Number of day that used developer (Day) K
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. Developer cartridge print counter (C)
3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
STAPLER Staple counter M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y

24-7 24-31
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
replacement of the OPC drum, clear the word.
counter.) Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared. 2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. The service mode password is initialized.
3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to
The target counter is cleared. set the password to "service" (default).
The drum rotation number accumulation counter is not displayed
on the LCD screen, but cleared in conjunction with execution of this
simulation. 24-34
Drum cartridge print counter (K)

Purpose Data initialization
K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the set items of SIM26-32.
Number of day that used drum (Day) K Section
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Operation/Procedure
C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used drum (Day) C
Drum cartridge print counter (M) 2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used drum (Day) M
Drum cartridge print counter (Y) 25
Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
25-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
24-9
oping section.
Purpose Data clear
Section Process (Developing section)
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter Operation/Procedure
and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
1) Select the item to be cleared. minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. played.
TCD_K Toner density sensor K
TCD_C Toner density sensor C
TCD_M Toner density sensor M
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)
TCD_Y Toner density sensor Y
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR)
TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors)
TCV_C Toner density sensor control voltage level C
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors)
TCV_M Toner density sensor control voltage level M
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color)
TCV_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level Y
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR)
LOW Process speed: Low speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Middle speed
24-30
Purpose Data clear
25-2
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word. Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner

density when replacing developer. (Auto-
Operation/Procedure
matic adjustment)
Section Image process (Photo-conductor/Develop-
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
The administrator password is initialized. Operation/Procedure
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is 1) Select a color to be adjusted.
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
(default).
The developing motor rotates, and the toner density sensor makes
sampling of the toner density. The detected level is displayed.

After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
Set value
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con- Destinations
G/LBS SET
trol level.
U.S.A. LBS
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the CANADA LBS
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when INCH LBS
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref- JAPAN GRAM
erence toner density level is not set normally. AB_B GRAM
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup- EUROPE GRAM
plied. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over toner may U.K. GRAM
occur, causing a trouble. AUS. GRAM
AB_A GRAM
<Display during operation>
CHINA GRAM
TCD_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
TCD_C Toner density sensor control voltage level C
TCD_M Toner density sensor control voltage level M
TCD_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level Y 26-6
TCV_K Toner density sensor control level K
Purpose Setting
TCV_C Toner density sensor control level C
TCV_M Toner density sensor control level M
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
TCV_Y Toner density sensor control level Y magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Section
<Display after completion of the adjustment> Operation/Procedure
Mode Display Range 1) Select an item to be set.
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255
adjustment value in the low AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255
speed process mode The selected set content is saved.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255
U.S.A. United States of America
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255
CANADA Canada
adjustment value in the medium AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255
INCH Inch series, other destinations
speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255
JAPAN Japan
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Toner density sensor control AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255
EUROPE Europe
voltage level in the low speed AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255
U.K. United Kingdom
process mode AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255
AUS. Australia
AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
Toner density sensor control AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255
CHINA China
voltage level in the medium AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255
speed process mode AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255
AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255
26-18
Display and condition in case of an error
Purpose Setting
Error
Error name Error details Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
display
EE-EL EL error The sensor output level is lower than 77, or save mode operation.
the control voltage level is higher than 207. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
EE-EU EU error The sensor output level is higher then 177, Section
or the control voltage level is lower than 52.
Operation/Procedure
EE-EC EC error The sensor output level is out of 128r10.
OSA shortcut key.)
Default
Display Content
value
26 PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
26-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper weight type. 26-30
Section Paper feed Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
1) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
OSA shortcut key.) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
Section
1 LBS
Operation/Procedure
This setting is linked with SIM26-6. When the set value (destina- 1) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
tion) of SIM26-6 is changed, this setting is also changed accord- OSA shortcut key.)
ingly.
To set a desirable type without linking with the destination, use this 0 Control allowed
simulation. 1 Control inhibited

* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due to the Setting Default
power frequency, etc. Item Display Content
range value
F ERR MSG Error message screen display 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) SET (When set to ON, "Call for
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported) service" is displayed in case of
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported) an error.)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported) Error message screen display 1 (OFF)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported) (When set to OFF, "Please
refer to operation manual" is
displayed in case of an error.)
When set to 0, it is displayed on the system setting screen. When

26-32
set to 1, it is not displayed on the system setting screen.
Purpose Setting *: Though the menu is displayed, it does not work.
Function (Purpose) Used to set display or non-display of the
system setting menu.
Section 26-35
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Select an item to be set. Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and trouble history when a same trouble
OSA shortcut key.) occurred repeatedly. There are two display
Display or non-display of the following menu of the system set- modes: display as one trouble and display
ting menu is set. as several series of troubles.
Set to ON for use of CRU, and set to OFF for use of SRU. Section
When it is set to ON, the following menu is displayed on the Operation/Procedure
system setting menu screen to allow the operation of the 1) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
menu. OSA shortcut key.)
Setting Default 0 Only once display.

Item Display Content
range value 1 Any time display.
A FAX ADJ FAX setting screen (dial tone 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SET (*) detection, speed setting)
display (Select this setting
when the user himself
26-38
performs FAX dial tone
detection or speed setting.) Purpose Setting
FAX setting screen (dial tone 1 (OFF) Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
detection, speed setting) maintenance life is reached.
non-display
B CLEANING Fusing cleaning print pattern 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) Section
PRINT SET print screen display (Select Operation/Procedure
this setting when the user
1) Select an item to be set.
himself prints the print pattern
for cleaning the fusing roller. 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
V characters are printed on all OSA shortcut key.)
the surface to remove foreign
material and residual toner Default
Item Display Content
from the fusing roller.) value
Fusing cleaning print pattern 1 (OFF) A M LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable/Disable setting 0
print screen non-display (0: CONTINUE when the maintenance timing is
C IMG SELF Picture quality check self print 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) 1: STOP) over (Print Continue)
PRINT SET screen display (Select this 1 Print Enable/Disable setting
setting when the user himself when the maintenance timing is
checks the engine print picture over (Print Stop)
quality. Two kinds of print B TC1 LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the primary 0
patterns of SIM64-4 are (0: CONTINUE transfer unit life is over.
printed.) 1: STOP) (Print Continue)
Picture quality check self print 1 (OFF) 1 Print Disable when the primary
execution screen non-display transfer unit life is over.
D LIST Machine data list (various 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) (Print Stop)
PRINT SET setting data) print screen C TC2 LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the 0
display (0: CONTINUE secondary transfer unit life is
Machine data list (various 1 (OFF) 1: STOP) over. (Print Continue)
setting data) print screen 1 Print Disable when the
non-display secondary transfer unit life is
E UPDATE Firmware update execution 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) over. (Print Stop)
SET screen display (Select this D FUS LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the fusing 0
setting when the user himself (0: CONTINUE unit life is over. (Print Continue)
updates the firmware. When 1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the fusing
this menu is executed, the unit life is over. (Print Stop)
guidance is displayed to guide E DR LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the drum 0
the user to execute update.) (0: CONTINUE unit life is over. (Print Continue)
Firmware update execution 1 (OFF) 1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the drum
screen non-display unit life is over. (Print Stop)

Default
Item Display Content Item/Display Set value Content
value
A (0: YES 1: NO) 0 White sheet count-up setting
F DV LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the DV unit 0
(Count)
(0: CONTINUE life is over. (Print Continue)
1 White sheet count-up setting
1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the DV unit
(Not Count)
life is over. (Print Stop)
This setting is linked with SIM26-6. When the set value (destina-
tion) of SIM26-6 is changed, this setting is also changed accord-
ingly.
26-50
To set a desirable operation without linking with the destination, use
Purpose Setting this simulation.
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Destination Default
Section
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
Operation/Procedure CANADA 0 (Counted)
1) Select an item to be set. INCH 0 (Counted)
2) Set the set value according to the operating conditions. (Enter JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.) AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
Default U.K. 0 (Counted)
value AUS. 1 (Not counted)
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse print Disable Refer AB_A 0 (Counted)
1 BW reverse print Enable to *1 CHINA 0 (Counted)
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is (*2)
limited.
1 Finisher special paper 26-55
The number of paper exit is not
limited. Purpose Setting
C COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the auto-
(PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1 matic color calibration (automatic color bal-
1 All are displayed except for the 3- ance adjustment) when replacing a
color print counter. consumable part. (In this simulation, the
2 Monochrome and full color print menu is displayed but it does not work.)
counters are displayed.
Section
(*1) Default values for each destination of item B Operation/Procedure
Destination Item A Item B Item C NOTE: Never change the set values, which must be fixed to Dis-
USA 1 0 2 able (default).
CANADA 1 0 2 1) Select the replacement condition of a target consumable part
INCH 1 0 2 to which the auto color calibration (color balance adjustment)
JAPAN 1 7 2 is applied.
AB_B 1 0 2 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
EUROPE 1 0 2
UK 0 0 2 Default
Display Content Set value
AUS 1 0 2 value
AB_A 1 0 2 DV Enable/Disable setting when Normal Disable
CHINA 1 0 2 replacing developer (Disable: 1:
DR Enable/Disable setting when NO) Disable
(*2) replacing the OPC drum
When set to 0: TC1 Enable/Disable setting when Reverse Disable
replacing the primary transfer unit (Enable: 0:
Postcard 100 sheets
TC2 Enable/Disable setting when YES) Disable
Envelope 20 sheets
replacing the secondary transfer unit
When set to 1: FUSER Enable/Disable setting when Disable
Stops when the paper exit tray lower sensor detects the lower limit replacing the fusing unit
of the paper exit tray (paper full).
When it is set to Enable, the guidance for execution of the auto
color calibration (auto color balance adjustment) is displayed after
replacing the target consumable part.
26-52
Follow the guidance and perform the auto color calibration (auto
Purpose Setting color balance adjustment).
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
or not.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the set value according to the counting operation condi-
tions. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA short-
cut key.)

Default
26-65 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting I TC2 NEAR END 0 The secondary transfer near end 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the staple process restriction. DISP message is displayed.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The secondary transfer near end
Section
message is not displayed.
Operation/Procedure J FUS NEAR END 0 The fusing near end message is 1
Select a set item and a set condition, and press [OK] key and OSA DISP displayed.
shortcut key. (0: YES 1: NO) 1 The fusing near end message is
not displayed.
Set Default
Item Content <List of Default values and set values for each destination>
value value
LIMIT COPIES ON Number of sets of stapling: Limited ON Set value
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Destination Toner preparation
Not Limited Toner near end message
message
LIMIT SHT (L) 15 Number of sheets of stapling: 30 U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Max. 15 CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
30 Number of sheets of stapling: INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Max. 30 JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
[Target paper size] AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
The staple capacity other than the above is fixed to 30 sheets. AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
26-69
(Contents of set items)
Purpose Setting
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
toner near end.
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
Section when the toner near end status is reached.
Operation/Procedure C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
1) Select an item to be set. end status is reached.
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
OSA shortcut key.) the setting value.
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of print after displaying the mes-
Default sage when item B is set to "0" (the message is displayed at toner
value near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
A TONER 0 The toner preparation message
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
PREPARATION is displayed.
(0: YES 1 : NO)
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
1 The toner preparation message
is not displayed.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end message is
size and the print ratio.)
END displayed.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The toner near end message is Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
not displayed. 1: Print Disable after toner near end
C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in TONER 3
2: 20 sheets print Enable after toner near end
END
2 Operation STOP in TONER END 3: 40 sheets print Enable after toner near end
3 Operation STOP in TONER END 4: 80 sheets print Enable after toner near end
D TONER END Setting of the number of copy/print/ 1 5: 160 sheets print Enable after toner near end
COUNT FAX outputs Enable after TONER
NEAR END.
F. Enable/Disable setting of the near end message display when
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low status send of 0
ALART E-mail alert
the developing unit reaches near end.
When the toner preparation G. Enable/Disable setting of the near end message display when
message is displayed (in near the OPC drum unit reaches near end.
near toner end) H. Enable/Disable setting of the near end message display when
1 Condition for Low status send of the primary transfer unit reaches near end.
E-mail alert
I. Enable/Disable setting of the near end message display when the
When near toner end
secondary transfer unit reaches near end.
F DV NEAR END 0 The developer near end 1
DISP message is displayed. J. Enable/Disable setting of the near end message display when
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The developer near end the fusing unit reaches near end.
message is not displayed. (Items F, G, H, I, J: When the life center reaches 90% of the speci-
G DR NEAR END 0 The drum near end message is 1 fied life, it is judged as near end.)
DISP displayed.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The drum near end message is
NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
not displayed. printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
H TC1 NEAR END 0 The primary transfer near end 1 ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be
DISP message is displayed. resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The primary transfer near end is set to "1", printing is disabled after toner near end. In this
message is not displayed. case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
tus, and print outputs are disabled.

26-74 27-9
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
Section ing YES/NO threshold value.
(FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section
OSA shortcut key.) Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
range value
OSA shortcut key.)
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
MODE OSA trial mode.
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper transport
(0 : YES 1 : NO) 1 OSA trial mode is time between sensors (Main unit)
canceled. (50: Default)
B JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
The functions other than OPEN USB can be used.
occurrence of continuous jams
Use limit: 18,000 sheets JOB Alert judgment threshold value for
occurrence of continuous jams (Setting
of the number of times of continuous
jams as the alert for continuous jams)
26-78
(Default: 10 times)
Purpose Setting
* Item A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
operation panel.
Section
Operation/Procedure
27-10
1) Enter a password. (5 - 8 digits)
Purpose Data clear
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
To change the entered password, select "C" (clear) on the
information. (FSS function)
menu and press [OK] key, then delete the password digit by
digit. Section
2) Select [SET] button, and press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
27 Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
27-5 Halftone process control error history
Purpose Setting Automatic registration adjustment error history
Paper transport time between sensors
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
tion allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.) (FSS function)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) 27-11
Operation/Procedure Purpose Others
1) Enter the tag No. (max. 8 digits). Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key ment retry number history. (FSS function)
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. Section
2) Select [SET] button, and press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Display Item
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits

27-12 HV_ERR1 High density error history 1
Purpose Others HV_ERR2 High density error history 2
HV_ERR3 High density error history 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history.
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone error history 1
(FSS Function)
H_TONE ERR2 Halftone error history 2
Section H_TONE ERR3 Halftone error history 3
Operation/Procedure H_TONE ERR4 Halftone error history 4
The high density, the halftone, and the automatic registration H_TONE ERR5 Halftone error history 5
adjustment error history are displayed. AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [n] [p] key.
Code
Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time
passing time
sensors
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
30 PPD1
PPD2
Resist pre-detection
Resist detection
POD1 Detects the paper exit from fusing.
30-1 POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
Purpose Operation test/check TFD2 Paper exit tray full detection
DSW_R Right door open/close detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
sors and the detectors in other than the
DHPD_K OPC drum phase detection (K)
paper feed section and the control circuits.
DHPD_CL OPC drum phase detection (Color)
Section 1TNFD Waste toner full detection
Operation/Procedure HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation detection
played. 1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation detection (K)
(MX-C400P/C380P)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- Primary transfer unit initial detection (MX-B400P/B380P)
lighted. DRSET Drum detection
DRCRU_K Drum K initial detection
DRCRU_C Drum C initial detection
DRCRU_M Drum M initial detection
DRCRU_Y Drum Y initial detection
DVCRU_K Developer K initial detection
DVCRU_C Developer C initial detection
DVCRU_M Developer M initial detection
DVCRU_Y Developer Y initial detection
FUCRU Fusing initial detection
2TCCRU Secondary transfer unit initial detection

30-2 40-7
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
sors and the detectors in the paper feed manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
section and the control circuits. Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target adjustment item.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
played. OSA shortcut key.)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted. Default
Item
value
CPFD1 Paper feed tray 1 paper transport detection A MAX POSITION Manual paper feed guide maximum 193
CLUD1 Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detection width position
CPED1 Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detection B P1 POSITION Manual paper feed guide P1 width 187
CSPD1 Paper feed tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection position (A4R)
CSS1 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 1 C P2 POSITION Manual paper feed guide P2 width 133
position (A5R)
CSS2 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 2
D MIN POSITION Manual paper feed guide minimum 84
CSS3 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 3
width position
MPLD Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
MPED Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
43
40
43-1
40-2 Purpose Setting
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing reference tempera-
ture of each operation mode.
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment. Section
Section Paper feed Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set.
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
OSA shortcut key.)
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. NOTE: The set value is the reference value, and it may differ from
the actual fusing temperature depending on the operating
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).
conditions.
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R).
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION Manual paper feed guide maximum width position

P1 (A4R) POSITION Manual paper feed guide P1 width position (A4R)
P2 (A5R) POSITION Manual paper feed guide P2 width position (A5R)
MIN POSITION Manual paper feed guide minimum width position
Display Content
COMPLETE Adjustment completed
ERROR Adjustment error

• MX-C400P/C380P
Setting Group A Group B Group C

range SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
C HL_E READY Ready standby TH_E set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 195 190 195 190 195
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 125 140 135 140 135 140
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 195 190 195 190 195
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 130 145 140 145 140 145
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 30 - 200 150
K WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor pre-rotation end time 0 - 255 30
L WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 30 - 255 83 110 83 110 83 110
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
R HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 150
U HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 - 230 215
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 165 165 165
Z HL_E E-STAR Preheating TH_E set value 30 - 200 165 165 165
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready 30 - 200 170 170 170
temperature)
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 115 115 115
AC HL_UM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or less)
AD HL_LM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or less)
AE HL_E WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225
120qC or less)
AF LO_WARMUP_TIME AC - AE applying time (Time for shifting from the ready state 0 - 255 5
to the normal control temperature (sec))
AG HL_UM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or above)
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or above)
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225
120qC or above)
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 5
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP TH_E temperature for FM to start rotation in warming up 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
(when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha qC or
above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature 0 - 255 40 40 40 40 40 40
in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 70 - 230 170 185 180 185 170 185
above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AK - AM 1 - 119 70
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 70 - 230 175 195 185 195 180 195
(when the fusing temperature in warming up is alpha qC or
below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 0 - 255 5
• MX-B400P/B380P

A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
C HL_E READY Ready standby TH_E set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 195 190 195 190 195
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 125 140 135 140 135 140
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW Plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
G WARMUP FUMON HL_E T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 30 - 200 150

H WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor pre-rotation end time TH_LM set value 0 - 255 30
I WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 30 - 255 83 110 83 110 83 110
J HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
K HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
L HL_E HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
M HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180
N HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
O HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
P HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195
Q HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 150
R HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 - 230 215
S HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
T HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
U HL_E GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
V HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 165
W HL_E E-STAR Preheating TH_E set value 30 - 200 165
X HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready 30 - 200 170
temperature)
Y HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 115
Z HL_UM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or less)
AA HL_LM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or less)
AB HL_E WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 225
120qC or less)
AC LO_WARMUP_TIME Z - AB applying time 0 - 255 5
(Time for shifting from the ready state to the normal control
temperature (sec))
AD HL_UM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or above)
AE HL_LM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or above)
AF HL_E WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225
120qC or above)
AG HI_WARMUP_TIME AD - AF applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 5
AH HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP TH_E temperature for FM to start rotation in warming up 30 - 200 130
above)
AI HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature 0 - 255 40
in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
AJ HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 70 - 230 170 185 180 185 170 185
above)
AK HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AH - AJ 1 - 119 70
AL LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 70 - 230 175 195 185 195 180 195
(When the fusing temperature in warming up is alpha qC or
below.)
AM JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 0 - 255 5
<Code descriptions> Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with
SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.)
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor (center)
TH_LM Fusing lower thermistor SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system set-
TH_E Fusing thermistor (external heat roller) ting/device setting/fusing control setting.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system set-
HL_LM Heater lamp lower ting/device setting/fusing control setting.
HL_E Heater lamp (external heat roller) The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/
Group Destination device setting/fusing control setting.
Group A Japan China AB_B – (Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch – device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is dis-
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A played.
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after chang-
ing this set value, the set values of the destination link
items are reset to the default.

43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)
NOTE: The set value is the reference value, and it may differ from
the actual fusing temperature depending on the operating
conditions.
• MX-C400P/C380P
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 125 120 125 120 125
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White plain paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
application start image screen number
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 125 120 125 120 125
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White heavy paper duplex fusing 0 - 60 1
temperature application start image screen
number
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color heavy paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 1
• MX-B400P/B380P
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 125 120 125 120 125
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Plain paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Plain paper duplex fusing temperature application 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
start image screen number
E HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
F HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120
G HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
H HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application 0 - 60 1
start image screen number
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor (center) Group A Japan China AB_B –
TH_LM Fusing lower thermistor Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
TH_E Fusing thermistor (external heat roller) Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
HL_UM Heater lamp upper
HL_LM Heater lamp lower
HL_E Heater lamp (external heat roller)

43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
• MX-C400P/C380P
Setting Group Group Group

range A B C
A HL_UM READY LL Ready standby TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
B HL_LM READY LL Ready standby TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
C HL_E READY LL Ready standby TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW LL Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW LL Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW LL Black-White plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL LL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL LL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL LL Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T LL Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 1 - 99 45
K WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor pre-rotation end time 1 - 99 50
L WARMUP END TIME LL Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 1 - 99 80
(*1)
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HL_UM OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
R HL_E OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
T HL_LM ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
U HL_E ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
Y HL_UM E-STAR LL Preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
Z HL_E E-STAR LL Preheating TH_E set value 1 - 99 55
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) 1 - 99 55
AB HL_LM E-STAR LL Preheating TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
AC HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 55
AD HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 55
AE HL_E WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AF LO_WARMUP_TIME LL AC - AE applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in 1 - 99 50
warm-up to the normal control temperature)
AG HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 55
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 55
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME LL AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP LL Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 45
alpha qC or above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME LL Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
(*1) alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 55
alpha qC or above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER LL Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AK - AM 1 - 99 50
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up (when the fusing 1 - 99 55
temperature in warming up is alpha qC or below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)
*1: 1 Count = 1sec Change

• MX-B400P/B380P

range A B C
A HL_UM READY LL Ready standby TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
B HL_LM READY LL Ready standby TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
C HL_E READY LL Ready standby TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW LL Plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW LL Plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW LL Plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
G WARMUP FUMON HL_E T LL Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 1 - 99 45
H WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor pre-rotation end time TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
I WARMUP END TIME LL Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 1 - 99 80
(*1)
J HL_UM HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
K HL_LM HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
L HL_E HEAVY PAPER LL Heavy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
M HL_UM OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
O HL_E OHP PAPER LL OHP-TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HL_UM ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
Q HL_LM ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
R HL_E ENV PAPER LL Envelope TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
T HL_LM GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
U HL_E GLOSS PAPER LL Glossy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
V HL_UM E-STAR LL Preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
W HL_E E-STAR LL Preheating TH_E set value 1 - 99 55
X HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) 1 - 99 55
Y HL_LM E-STAR LL Preheating TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
Z HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 55
AA HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 55
AB HL_E WARMUP_120L LL Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AC LO_WARMUP_TIME LL Z - AB applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in warm- 1 - 99 50
up to the normal control temperature)
AD HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 55
AE HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 55
AF HL_E WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AG HI_WARMUP_TIME LL AD - AF applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AH HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP LL Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha 1 - 99 45
qC or above)
AI HI_WU_END_TIME LL Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha 1 - 99 50
(*1) qC or above)
AJ HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 55
alpha qC or above)
AK HI_WARMUP_BORDER LL Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AH - AJ 1 - 99 50
AL LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 1 - 99 55
(when the fusing temperature in warming up is alpha qC or below.)
AM JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)
<Code descriptions>
TH_LM Fusing lower thermistor
TH_E Fusing thermistor (external heat roller)
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A

43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
• MX-C400P/C380P

range A B C
A HL_UM READY HH Ready standby TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
B HL_LM READY HH Ready standby TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
C HL_E READY HH Ready standby TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW HH Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW HH Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW HH Black-White plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL HH Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL HH Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL HH Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T HH Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
K WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor pre-rotation end time 1 - 99 50
L WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 1 - 99 50
(*1)
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HL_UM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
R HL_E OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
T HL_LM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
U HL_E ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
Z HL_E E-STAR HH Preheating TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) 1 - 99 50
AB HL_LM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
AC HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AD HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AE HL_E WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AF LO_WARMUP_TIME HH AC - AE applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in 1 - 99 50
(*1) warm-up to the normal control temperature)
AG HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME HH AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
(*1) alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER HH Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AK - AM 1 - 99 50
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up (When the fusing 1 - 99 50
temperature in warming up is alpha qC or below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)

• MX-B400P/B380P

range A B C
A HL_UM READY HH Ready standby TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
B HL_LM READY HH Ready standby TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
C HL_E READY HH Ready standby TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW HH Plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW HH Plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW HH Plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
G WARMUP FUMON HL_E T HH Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
H WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor pre-rotation end time TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
I WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 1 - 99 50
(*1)
J HL_UM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
K HL_LM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
L HL_E HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
M HL_UM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
O HL_E OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HL_UM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
Q HL_LM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
R HL_E ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
T HL_LM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
U HL_E GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
V HL_UM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
W HL_E E-STAR HH Preheating TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
X HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) 1 - 99 50
Y HL_LM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
Z HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AA HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AB HL_E WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AC LO_WARMUP_TIME HH Z - AB applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in 1 - 99 50
(*1) warm-up to the normal control temperature)
AD HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AE HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AF HL_E WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AG HI_WARMUP_TIME HH AD - AF applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AH HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AI HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha 1 - 99 50
(*1) qC or above)
AJ HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AK HI_WARMUP_BORDER HH Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AH - AJ 1 - 99 50
AL LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH TH_UM temperature to enable a job during warming up 1 - 99 50
(When the fusing temperature in warming up is alpha qC or below.)
AM JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination

43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
• MX-C400P/C380P

range A B C
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT LL Black-White plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start 1 - 99 50 50 50
image screen number
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP LL Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP LL Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP LL Color plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT LL Color plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start image 1 - 99 50 50 50
screen number
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT LL Black-White heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start 1 - 99 50
image screen number
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP LL Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP LL Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP LL Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT LL Color heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start image 1 - 99 50
screen number
• MX-B400P/B380P

range A B C
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP LL Plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55 55 55
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT LL Plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start image screen 1 - 99 50 50 50
number
E HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
F HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
G HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP LL Heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 55
H HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT LL Heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start image screen 1 - 99 50
number
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination

43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
• MX-C400P/C380P

range A B C
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HH Black-White plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start image 1 - 99 50 50 50
screen number
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP HH Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP HH Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP HH Color plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT HH Color plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start image 1 - 99 50 50 50
screen number
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HH Black-White heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start 1 - 99 50
image screen number
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HH Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HH Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HH Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT HH Color heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start image 1 - 99 50
screen number
• MX-B400P/B380P

range A B C
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HH Plain paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HH Plain paper duplex fusing temperature application start image screen 1 - 99 50 50 50
number
E HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
F HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
G HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HH Heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
H HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HH Heavy paper duplex fusing temperature application start image screen 1 - 99 50
number
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination

43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
• MX-C400P/C380P

A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-4-A, E at 120qC or less in 1 - 99 50
N/N-Warm Up
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-4-B, F at 120qC or less in 1 - 99 50
N/N-Warm Up
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-22-A, E at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-22-B, F at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-23-A, E at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-23-B, F at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-A, B, M 1 - 60 5
(Setting of the number of sheets at which application is
started)
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-C, D, N 1 - 60 10
started)
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-E, F, O 1 - 60 5
started)
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time heavy paper (Time (sec) required to 1 - 60 15
(*1) return to the plain paper fusing temperature)
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool-down time OHP (Time (sec) required to return to 1 - 60 30
(*1) the plain paper fusing temperature)
L COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool-down time envelope (Time (sec) required to 1 - 60 40
M NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-4-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in N/N-Warm Up
N LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-22-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
O HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-23-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
P HL_UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 165
Q HL_LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 120
R HL_E THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 195
S HL_UM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_UM 70 - 230 165
T HL_LM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_LM 30 - 200 120
U HL_E THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_E 70 - 230 195
V HL_UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 170
W HL_UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 185
X HL_LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 125
Y HL_E REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 220
Z HL_UM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_UM 70 - 230 185
AA HL_LM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_LM 30 - 200 130
AB HL_E REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_E 70 - 230 220
AC HL_UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 180

• MX-B400P/B380P

A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-4-A, E at 120qC or less in 1 - 99 50
N/N-Warm Up
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-4-B, F at 120qC or less in 1 - 99 50
N/N-Warm Up
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-22-A, E at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-22-B, F at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction amount for SIM43-23-A, E at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction amount for SIM43-23-B, F at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-A, B, M 1 - 60 5
started)
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-C, D, N 1 - 60 10
started)
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Number of sheets of application of SIM43-24-E, F, O 1 - 60 5
started)
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time heavy paper (Time (sec) required to 1 - 60 15
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool-down time OHP (Time (sec) required to return to 1 - 60 30
(*1) the plain paper fusing temperature)
L COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool-down time envelope (Time (sec) required to 1 - 60 40
M NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-4-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in N/N-Warm Up
N LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-22-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in L/L-Warm Up
O HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_E Correction amount for SIM43-23-C, G at 120qC or less 1 - 99 50
in H/H-Warm Up
P HL_UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 165
Q HL_LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 120
R HL_E THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 195
S HL_UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 170
T HL_UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 185
U HL_LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 125
V HL_E REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 220
W HL_UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 180
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination

Setting Default
44 Item/Display Content
range value
NOTE
PHT 1pixel halftone process Normal Disable

control correction (Disable
44-1 Enable/Disable setting : 1 : NO)
Purpose Setting AR_AUTO Auto registration Reverse Enable
adjustment (Enable :
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
Enable/Disable setting 0 : YES)
tion in the image forming (process) section.
AR_ERROR Auto registration Enable
Section Image process (Photo-conductor/Develop- adjustment execution
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) error check
Operation/Procedure Enable/Disable setting
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable
Enable/Disable setting
2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. (The set value SENSITIVITY Toner density Disable
is saved.) correction
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
PRT_HT Halftone process Enable
cially required.
control printer
• MX-C400P/C380P correction feedback
Setting Default PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable:
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value correction Correc-
HV Normal operation high Normal Enable Enable/Disable setting tion ON
density process control (Disable PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable Enable:
Enable/Disable setting : 1 : NO) Enable/Disable setting Correc-
HT Normal operation Reverse Enable tion ON
halftone process (Enable :
control Enable/Disable 0 : YES)
setting • MX-B400P/B380P
TC Transfer output Enable
correction Setting Default
Enable/Disable setting Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
MD VG Membrane decrease Enable HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
grid voltage correction density process control (Disable:
Enable/Disable setting Enable/Disable setting 1: NO)
MD LD Membrane laser power Enable HT Normal operation half Reverse Enable
voltage correction tone process control (Enable:
Enable/Disable setting Enable/Disable setting 0: YES)
MD EV Membrane decrease Enable TC Transfer output Enable
environment grid correction
voltage correction Enable/Disable setting
Enable/Disable setting MD VG Membrane decrease Enable
MD DL Membrane decrease Enable grid voltage correction
discharge light quantity Enable/Disable setting
correction MD LD Membrane laser power Disable
Enable/Disable setting voltage correction
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable Enable/Disable setting
environment discharge MD EV Membrane decrease Enable
light quantity environment grid
correction voltage correction
Enable/Disable setting Enable/Disable setting
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Enable MD DL Membrane decrease Enable
correction discharge light quantity
Enable/Disable setting correction
TN_AREA Toner density area Enable Enable/Disable setting
correction MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable
Enable/Disable setting environment discharge
TN_LIFE Toner density life Enable light quantity
correction correction
TN_COV Toner density print Enable TN_HUM Toner density humidity Enable
ratio correction correction
TN_PROCON Toner density process Enable TN_AREA Toner density area Enable
control correction correction
TN_ENV Toner density Enable TN_LIFE Toner density life Enable
environment correction correction
TN_DRIP Toner density Enable TN_COV Toner density print Enable
correction ratio correction
unconditional supply Enable/Disable setting
Enable/Disable setting TN_PROCON Toner density process Enable
TN_SPEND Toner forcible Enable control correction
consumption mode Enable/Disable setting

Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE Item/Display Content
range value range value
TN_ENV Toner density Normal Enable N REG_R GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 256 0
environment correction (Disable: the item J adjustment
Enable/Disable setting 1: NO) is completed.
TN_DRIP Toner density Reverse Enable O REG_F BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
correction (Enable: max. value (F side)
unconditional supply 0: YES) P REG_F BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
Enable/Disable setting min. value (F side)
TN_SPEND Toner forcible Disable Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
consumption mode difference
Enable/Disable setting (Item O - Item P)
SENSITIVITY Toner density Disable R REG_R BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
correction max. value (R side)
Enable/Disable setting S REG_R BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
PRT_HT Half tone process Enable min. value (R side)
control printer T REG_R BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
correction feedback difference
Enable/Disable setting (Item R - Item S)
PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable: U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
correction Correc- potential F(K)
Enable/Disable setting tion ON V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable Enable: potential F(C)
Enable/Disable setting Correc- W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
tion ON potential F(M)
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential F(Y)
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
44-2 potential R(K)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image potential R(C)
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor).
potential R(M)
Section Process AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Operation/Procedure potential R(Y)
Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key (the adjustment is
executed automatically). Error name Error content
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- Black sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
played.
Color sensor adjustment PCS_CL LED ADJ error
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
• MX-C400P/C380P Substrate scan PCS_K GRND error
abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
Setting Default lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
range value outside the range
A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 Registration sensor F REG_F LED ADJ error
emitting quantity adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
adjustment value Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light 1 - 255 21 adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
emitting quantity Registration substrate F REG_F GRND error
adjustment value scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
C PCS_CL DARK Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0 lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
D PCS_K DARK Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0 outside the range
E PCS_K GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0 Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
the item B adjustment scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
is completed. lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 outside the range
max. value
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
min. value • MX-B400P/B380P
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
difference Display/Item Content Range Default
(Item E - Item F) A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor light 1 - 255 32
I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 32 emitting quantity
light emitting quantity adjustment value
adjustment value F B PCS_K DARK Dark voltage 0 - 255 0
J REG_F DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0 C PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0
dark voltage F when completion of Item A
K REG_F GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0 adjustment
the item I adjustment D PCS_K BELT MAX Maximum value of belt 0 - 255 0
is completed. base detection level
L REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 32 E PCS_K BELT MIN Minimum value of belt 0 - 255 0
light emitting quantity base detection level
adjustment value R F PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0
M REG_R DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0 difference
dark voltage R (Item D - Item E)

Display/Item Content Range Default Setting Default
G REG_R LED ADJ Image density sensor light 1 - 255 32 range value
emitting quantity J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 115
adjustment value value (yellow)
H REG_R DARK Image density sensor dark 0 - 255 0 K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 124
voltage value (magenta)
I REG_R GRND Belt base detection level 0 - 256 0 L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 111
when completion of Item value (cyan)
G adjustment M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 4
J REG_R BELT MAX Maximum value of belt 0 - 255 0 value (black)
base detection level N HV BK_GROUND Patch position substrate 1 - 255 60
K REG_R BELT MIN Minimum value of belt 0 - 255 0 LIMIT light receiving effective
base detection level range value
L REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level 0 - 255 0
difference (Item J - Item K)
M REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level for 0 - 255 0 • MX-B400P/B380P
check
Setting Default
range value
Error name Error content
A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 208
Image density sensor PCS_K LED ADJ error
target set value
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
B LED_K OUTPUT Image density sensor 1 - 255 32
Substrate scan abnormality PCS_K GRND error
light emitting quantity
Effective difference between the upper and
set value
lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
C PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 - 255 4
outside the range
LIMIT target limit value
Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
D BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference 1 - 255 1
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of retry.
between the belt 1
Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
circuit substrate upper
scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper and
and lower limit values
lower values of the belt substrate circuit,
E BIAS_BK Bias I reference 0 - 255 0
outside the range
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
F BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL interval
G K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 4
44-4
value I
Purpose Setting H HV BK_GROUND Patch position substrate 1 - 255 60
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- LIMIT light receiving effective
range value
sity process control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. 44-6
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and Purpose Adjustment
OSA shortcut key.) Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- control forcibly.
cially required. Section Process
• MX-C400P/C380P Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display Content In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
range value
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target set 1 - 255 98 In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
value (Refer to the table below.)
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target set 1 - 255 208 In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
value
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 Result display Content description
emitting quantity set COMPLETE Normal complete
value
ERROR Abnormal end
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
emitting quantity set
value
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 - 255 4 Details of error display Content description
LIMIT target limit value CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference 1 - 255 1 BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
between the belt 1 circuit K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
substrate upper and C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
lower limit values M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) reference 0 - 255 60 Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference calculation
difference
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL interval

44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photo-conductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target display mode. (Select a display mode button,
and press [OK] key.)
Display Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV data GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(*2) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Medium speed display) GB/ GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Low speed display) GB/DV GB: 230 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL (LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 400
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP 0-4 0
MD C STEP display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power voltage 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** High density membrane decrease environment 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** GB correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment grid 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** voltage correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light 0 - 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***

Display Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range value
OTHER CRUM DESTINATION Machine side management CRUM destination - CRUM
(Main unit data) information
(*1)
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - CRUM
CRUM DEST_C information
CRUM DEST_M (*1)
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
(*1) Differs depending on the destination.

(*2) Value on the left: Voltage level after correction Value on the right: Base voltage level
Display Default
44-12 Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Operation data display PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the 6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
high density process control and the image (Page 1-2) n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor). patch 2 (n=6-10)
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Section Image process (Photo-conductor/Develop- patch 3 (n=6-10)
ing) n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Operation/Procedure patch 4 (n=6-10)
1) Select a display mode. (Select a display mode button, and • BK only
press [OK] key.) n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 5 (n=6-10)
Display Default • BK only
range value
TARGET CARB DATA Calibration plate 0 - 255 108
(1 page) detection level
SEAL ADJ Jig patch seal 1 - 255 108 44-13
DATA detection level when Purpose Adjustment/Setup
executing SIM 44-13
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor
ADK_SL (K) Development -9.99 - 0
(image registration sensor F) calibration.
characteristics 9.99
gradient coefficient Section
(High density process Operation/Procedure
control operation)
ADK_INT(K) Development -999.9 - 0
characteristics 999.9 The shutter plate of the color image density sensor (image reg-
intercept level (High istration sensor F) is opened, and the message indicating that
density process the primary transfer unit is removed is displayed.
control operation 0V)
2) Open the front cabinet of the machine and remove the waste
TARGET (K) High density process 0.00 - 0
toner box and the primary transfer unit.
control target density 255.00
level (K) 3) Install the calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) of the color image
TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0 density sensor (image registration sensor F) to the sensor
(C/M/Y) control target density 255.00 housing section.
level (C/M/Y) 4) Set the waste toner box, and close the right cover unit (sec-
PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0 ondary transfer unit section) and the front cabinet of the
1-5 control nth time patch machine.
(Page 1-2) density level 1 (n=1-
5) 5) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Calibration of the color image density sensor (image registration
patch 2 (n=1-5) sensor F) is automatically performed. After completion of the oper-
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 ation, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] button is
patch 3 (n=1-5) returned to the normal display.
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 4 (n=1-5) Setting Default
• BK only range value
n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate 1 - 255 108
patch 5 (n=1-5) sensor value
• BK only B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
emitting quantity
adjustment value
Error display Content

SEN ADJ ERR Color sensor adjustment error
SHUTTER OPEN ERR Separation operation error
ERROR Forcible stop

44-14 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Operation data display
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- (M) development after completion of
perature and humidity sensor. adjustment SIM25-02
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ value (at the medium
LSU (At the speed)
medium
Operation/Procedure speed)
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine ALL (M) All the Correction reference
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. correction value which
reference calculated all the
Item/Display Content Display range values correction values for
TH_UM Fusing upper heat roller Temperature: (At the the auto
thermistor (center section) 0 - 255qC (r1qC) medium development
detection temperature (qC), AD value: 0 - 1023 speed) adjustment value
differential input AD value (at the medium
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper heat roller Temperature: speed)
thermistor compensation 0.0 - 255.0qC (r0.2qC) AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value
sensor (center section) AD value: 0 - 1023 (L) development after completion of
detection temperature (qC), adjustment SIM25-02
AD value value (at the low speed)
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper heat roller AD value: 0 - 1023 (At the low
thermistor detection sensor speed)
(center section) AD value ALL (L) All the Correction reference
TH_LM Fusing lower heat roller Temperature: correction value which
thermistor (side section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC) reference calculated all the
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023 values correction values for
(At the low the auto
TH_EX1 Fusing external heat roller Temperature:
speed) development
thermistor (center section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
adjustment value
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023
(at the low speed)
TH_EX2 Fusing external heat roller Temperature:
AREA Area Correction value for -127 - 0
thermistor (side section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
correction the environment 127
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023
value area
TH_M Temperature sensor A/D Temperature:
HUD Humidity Correction value for
value, temperature (qC) -40.0qC - 60.0 (r1qC)
correction change in humidity
AD value: 0 - 1023
value
HUD_M Temperature sensor A/D Humidity:
PRINT RATE Print ratio Correction value for
value, humidity (%) 5.0 - 90.0% (r0.1%)
correction document print ratio
AD value: 0 - 1023
value
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 A/D value, Temperature:
PROCON Process Correction value for
temperature (qC) 5.0 - 60.0qC (r0.1qC)
control high density process
AD value: 0 - 255
correction control result
value
LIFE Life Correction value for
correction the developer life
44-16 value
Purpose Operation data display SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Correction for the 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control correction toner density
value sensitivity
data.
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control 1 - 255 128
Section Developing system VO (M) development voltage value after
Operation/Procedure adjustment completion of
control SIM25-02
1) Select a target color.
voltage (at the medium
The toner density control data are displayed. (at the speed)
Select [NEXT] button and press [OK] key to switch the display medium
category. speed)
ALL VO (M) All the Control voltage
Item/ Setting Default correction reference value
Content reference which calculated all
Display range value
TONER The current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129 control the correction values
DEN_LT (M) output value (final value) at the voltages for the auto
medium speed (at the development
TONER The current toner density reference 128 medium adjustment value
speed) (at the medium
DEN_ST (M) value display (including all the
speed)
correction values) at the medium
speed AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control
VO (L) development voltage value after
TONER The current toner density sensor 129
adjustment completion of
DEN_LT (L) output value (final value) at the low
control SIM25-02
speed
voltage (at the low speed)
TONER The current toner density reference 128
(at the low
DEN_ST (L) value display (including all the
speed)
correction values) at the low speed

Setting Default
Item/Display Content 44-22
range value
ALL VO (L) All the Control voltage 1 - 255 128 Purpose Operation data display
correction reference value Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
reference which calculated all level in the halftone process control opera-
control the correction values tion.
voltages for the auto
(at the low development Section Process
speed) adjustment value Operation/Procedure
(at the low speed)
The toner patch density level made in the halftone process control
AREA VO Area Control voltage -127 - 0
operation is displayed.
correction correction value for 127
control the environment
voltage area
ID_n Patch data display (n=1-16)
HUD VO Humidity Control voltage
correction correction value for BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
control change in humidity BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
voltage
PRINT RATE Print ratio Control voltage
VO correction correction value for
control the document print 44-24
voltage ratio Purpose Operation data display
PROCON VO Process Control voltage
control correction value for Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
correction the high density the correction level in the halftone process
control process control control operation.
voltage result Section Process
LIFE VO Life Control voltage
correction correction value for
Operation/Procedure
value control the developer life 1) Select a target display color.
voltage 2) Select [NEXT] button and press [OK] key to switch the display
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Control voltage 1 - 999 500 category.
VO correction correction value for
control the toner density Category Item/Display Content
voltage sensor
Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
ENV VO Environment Control voltage -127 - 0 formula of the minimum density
correction correction value for 127
[LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
control the high humidity
formula of the low density
voltage environment
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the approximation
formula of when connecting the low
Setting Default density and the medium density
range value [MID] Coefficient of the approximation
AUTO DEVE Area in the Humidity area 1 - 14 8 formula of the medium density
AREA auto display in the [HIGH] Coefficient of the approximation
development automatic developer formula of the high density
adjustment adjustment [CONNECT POINT] Each density section connection
AREA Current area Current humidity output ratio
area display Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control reference
value value
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control correction
value value
44-21 For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
Purpose Adjustment/Setup correction value
[PRINTER_BASE Printer halftone process control
Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
_DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
get.
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT Printer auto density adjustment
Section Process _VALUE] correction value
Operation/Procedure Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process control
correction value
value
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
are displayed.
NOTE: Though the simulation can be executed, the machine is not
affected by the simulation operation. 44-25
In this machine, this simulation is not required. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
Display Content correction value for the halftone process
COMPLETE Normal complete control.
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Section Process
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity Operation/Procedure
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error 1) Select a target adjustment color.
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK] 2) Select a target adjustment density level.
OTHER Other errors
OSA shortcut key.)

INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
cially required.
COMPLETE Normal complete
Setting Default value ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color sensor adjustment error
Item/Display Content ADJUSTMENT
range K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 2 ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor adjustment error
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression ADJUSTMENT
data lower limit value [YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 40 OTHER Other error
UPPER LIMIT approximate expression
data upper limit value
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 15
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression 44-27
data lower limit value
Purpose Data clear
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 144
UPPER LIMIT approximate expression Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
data upper limit value tone process control.
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7 7 Section Process
POINT highlight correction
Operation/Procedure
amount
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
44-26
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con- 44-28
trol compulsorily. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Process Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
Operation/Procedure conditions.
Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. Section Process
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data Operation/Procedure
are displayed.
OSA shortcut key.)
cially required.
• MX-C400P/C380P
Default
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process control 0-3 0 3
clearing shut-off.) Enable
Process control Disable 1
BK process control 2
Enable
Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgment is based on
the setting value of item
K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process control 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can Enable
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control Disable 1
Enable
K, L.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Color process control 0-2 0 0
ON the power and after passing TIME. Enable
Process control Disable 1
Enable

Default
value
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Color process control 0-2 0 0
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only during a Enable
setting job for every 2hours (set by item N). Process control Disable 1
When the changes in the temperature BK process control 2
and the humidity are greater than the Enable
specified level (the set value of item O)
in comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO BK or M position OPC unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning the power.
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO BK position OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level from execution of the
previous density correction.
H REV2_CL YES The accumulated traveling distance of M Enable 0-1 0 0
NO position OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
I REFRESH MODE YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
(Not used) NO control key with key operation Key operation NO 1
display
Process control J DAY When the next warm-up if there is no Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
conditions setting color job after a color job after passing days judgment
the specified days from execution of the 1 - 999 days passing 1 - 999
previous color process control
K PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
L PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
M INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
N HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
O HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution 1-9 2
of the previous process control of "HUM”
P BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK 1-999 15
position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
Q M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum traveling 1-999 10
distance of "REV2_CL” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
R COLOR BORDER Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M BK process control is 0 - 999 0 20
position OPC drum traveling distance executed without
when executing the BK process control judgment of ratio of the
M OPC drum traveling
distance. (Addition)
1 - 999(%) 1 - 999
S BK ONLY Disable/Enable setting and setting of the Enable 5 time 0-6 0 5
number of repetition of the BK process Disable 1-5 times 1-5
control when monochrome print is Inhibit 6
continued.
T HT_DIF Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT process 1 - 255 40
control
Registration U RG_ON_SYNC CL Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON process 0-2 0 0
adjustment ALL control 1
setting CL/BK 2
V RG_TEMP_TIMER Execution timing setting after turning ON the power 0 - 240 (MINUTE) 0
W RG_PERM_TIMER Span setting from execution Disable to Enable 0 - 15 (HOUR) 1
X RG_HOUR_TIMER Span setting of timer execution 0-15 (Above)+(HOUR) 5
Secondary Y 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 200
transfer cleaning value 1
setting Z 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 300
value 2
AA 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 500
value 3

• MX-B400P/B380P
Default
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
clearing shut-off.) BK process control 2
Enable
K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can BK process control 2
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Enable
K, L.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
ON the power and after passing TIME. BK process control 2
Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
the machine are monitored only during a BK process control 2
job for every 2hours (set by item N). Enable
When the changes in the temperature
and the humidity are greater than the
specified level (the set value of item O)
in comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO BK or M position OPC unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning the power.
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO BK position OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
H REFRESH MODE YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
(Not used) NO control key with key operation Key operation NO 1
display
I DAY When the next warm-up if there is no job Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
after a job after passing the specified days judgment
days from execution of the previous 1 - 999 days passing 1 - 999
process control
Process control J PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
conditions setting entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
K INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
L HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
M HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution 1-9 2
of the previous process control of "HUM”
N BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK 1-999 15
position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
O HT_DIF Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT process 1 - 255 40
control
Secondary P 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 200
transfer cleaning value 1
setting Q 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 300
value 2
R 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold 1 - 999 500
value 3

44-29 44-31
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
process control during a job. ual adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P)
Section Process Section Process
1) Select an item to be set. NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
OSA shortcut key.) 1) Select item A.
2) Set the set value corresponding to the adjustment pattern.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (Enter the set value and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut
value
A PRINTER During print job 0-4 0: No execution 4 key.)
1: HV only 3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. (The adjust-
B SELF During self 2: HV o PHT 4 ment pattern is printed out.)
PRINT print 3: HV o HT
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
4: HV o PHT o HT
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C, M, Y colors.
HV: High density process control 5) Select item B.
HT: Halftone process control 6) Set the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
PHT: Not operate dure 4). (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA
shortcut key.)
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet print) 1 1-3 3
degrees (1)0q (2)45q (3)90q(4)135q (5)180q (6)225q (7)270q (8)315q (SET VALUE)
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
90deg 90 Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet print) 2
degrees (1)0q (2)90q (3)180q (4)270q
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
SET SET Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) 3
VALUE VALUE
B COLOR Phase adjustment Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1-8 1
value BKoCL 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
C PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 1-5 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color.
OSA shortcut key.)
2) Select a target item.
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
operation, this simulation is used.
• MX-C400P/C380P
Item/Display Default value

Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Current DV Bias Low speed mode less than 300[v] A A 0 0 0-5
voltage Heavy paper mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] B B 0 0 (*1)
450[v] or more C C 0 0
Middle speed mode less than 300[v] D D 0 0
300[v] or more, less than 450[v] E E 0 0
450[v] or more F F 0 0
High speed mode less than 300[v] G - 0 -
Monochrome mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] H - 0 -
450[v] or more I - 0 -

Item/Display Default value
Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Time (T) from Low speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB J G 4 4 1-12
termination of Heavy paper mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] K H 3 3
continuous outputs 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] L I 1 1
to start of the next 240 [sec] or more M J 1 1
output operation
Middle speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB N K 4 4
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] O L 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] P M 1 1
240 [sec] or more Q N 1 1
High speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB R - 4 -
(Not used) 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] S - 3 -
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] T - 1 -
240 [sec] or more U - 1 -
<Use example>
(*1)
Make multi print of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi print of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.
• MX-B400P/B380P
Display
Item/ Default Variable Item/Display Content
range
Display value range
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing unit identification 0 - 255
Current DV less than 300[v] A 0 0-5 (*1)
number AD value
Bias voltage 300[v] or more, less than B 0
G DVCH_AD_M M color developing unit identification 0 - 255
450[v]
number AD value
450[v] or more C 0
H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing unit identification 0 - 255
Time (T) from Less than 10 [sec] & D 4 1-12 (*2)
number AD value
termination after process control
of continuous JOB
outputs to 10 [sec] or more, less E 3
• MX-B400P/B380P
start of the than 60 [sec]
next output 60 [sec] or more, less F 1 Display
operation than 240 [sec] Item/Display Content
range
240 [sec] or more G 1 A DVCH KIND K Development unit identification number 1-9
B DVCH_AD_K Developing unit identification number 0 - 255
<Use example>
AD value
(*1) The default of A/B/C is "0" and this function is set to OFF.
When 10 sheets are copied in the multi copy mode and if the 10th
sheet is lighter than the 1st sheet, set to the range of 1 - 5. The
greater the value is, the darker the density of the 10th sheet is. 44-61
(*2) The correction amount is adjusted by the length of the leaving time. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When (*1) is 1 - 5, the greater the value of (*2), the greater the density
when starting printing is. Function (Purpose) Used to set the calibration data of the color
image sensor (image registration sensor F).
Section
44-43 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data display 1) Select an item to be set.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
tion of the developing unit. OSA shortcut key.)
Section Developing system The set value is indicated on the label attached to the registra-
tion sensor unit.
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the Setting Default
developing unit are displayed. range value
• MX-C400P/C380P A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108
value
Display B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
Item/Display Content emitting quantity
range
A DVCH KIND K K color development unit identification 1-9 adjustment value
number
NOTE: This simulation is executed when the registration sensor
B DVCH KIND C C color development unit identification 1-9
unit is replaced. When only the color image density sensor
number
is replaced, use SIM44-13 to perform calibration.
C DVCH KIND M M color development unit identification 1-9
number When the set value is changed with this simulation, the
D DVCH KIND Y Y color development unit identification 1-9 newly changed set value of this simulation is written over
number the calibration value set with SIM44-13.
E DVCH_AD_K K color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value

• MX-C400P/C380P
46 Setting Default
Item/Display Content Mode Select
range value
46-21 A RRM Resist Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
Purpose Adjustment motor Mono MONO
correction chrome
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual value Heavy HEAVY 46
adjustment) paper
Section B DVM_K Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
Operation/Procedure K motor Mono MONO
correction chrome
NOTE: This simulation does not work in this model. value Heavy HEAVY
The adjustment result of this simulation does not affect the paper
other operations on the print quality, etc. C FSM Fusing Color COLOR 1 - 99 20
1) Select an adjustment target color. motor Mono MONO
correction chrome
2) Select a target adjustment item. value Heavy HEAVY 23
3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and paper
OSA shortcut key.) D DVM_CL Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each CL motor Heavy HEAVY
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. correction paper
value
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
E PFM Paper transport motor COLOR 1 - 99 50
increased, and vice versa.
correction value.
Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, the check pattern in F POM Paper exit motor COLOR 1 - 99 45
printed in the color balance and density corresponding to the correction value
adjustment value. E FUSER Fusing speed select HEAVY 1 - 99 50
SETTING timing
Density level Default F RRM RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 90
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value START increasing start timing
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 G RRM END RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 30
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 increasing end timing
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 • MX-B400P/B380P
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 Setting Default
Item/Display Content Mode Select
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 range value
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 A RRM Resist Mono- MONO 1 - 99 52
motor chrome
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
correction Heavy HEAVY 46
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
value paper
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
B DVM_K Developing Mono- MONO 1 - 99 52
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
K motor chrome
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 correction Heavy HEAVY
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 value paper
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 C FSM Fusing Mono- MONO 1 - 99 20
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 motor chrome
correction Heavy HEAVY 23
value paper
D PFM Paper transport motor MONO 1 - 99 50
48 correction value.
E POM Paper exit motor MONO 1 - 99 45
correction value
48-6 D FUSER Fusing speed select HEAVY 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment SETTING timing
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each E RRM RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 90
START increasing start timing
motor.
F RRM END RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 30
Section increasing end timing
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
1) Select an adjustment target mode.
cially required.
2) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image
OSA shortcut key.) quality trouble may occur.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.

49-3
49
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
49-1
HDD.
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Insert the USB memory with the E-Operation Manual data files
Operation/Procedure in it.
1) Insert the USB memory with the firmware files in it. * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAGE E-
2) Select a target firmware file for update. MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When OSA shortcut
All firmware can be selected with [ALL] button. key is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select
menu 1.
2) Select the folder which stores the Operation Manual data files,
and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key. (The display is
The selected firmware is updated. shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
When the operation normally completed, "COMPLETE" is dis- The current version and the update version are displayed.
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Item/Display Content [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] button
CONFIG Configuration data becomes active from gray out.
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half 4) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main 5) The operation manual is updated.
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
LANGUAGE Language support data program (General term)
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section 50
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
50-1
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section
OPU (BOOT) OP Boot section Purpose Adjustment
OPU (MAIN) OP Main section Function (Purpose) Print image position, image loss adjustment
ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
Section
PDL_FONT PDL font
ANIMATION Animation data
Operation/Procedure
IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data 1) Select a target adjustment item.
COLOR PROFILE Color profile 2) Enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key and OSA
WEB HELP WEB help shortcut key.
UNICODE UNICODE table
Setting Default
List of error displays in case of abnormal end Item/Display Content
range value
A Lead edge RRCB- Resist Standard 1 - 99 60
Item/Display Content adjustment CS1 motor Tray
CONF Configuration data B value RRCB- ON Desk 1 - 99 50
ICUM ICU Main section former half DSK timing
ICUBM ICU Boot section main C RRCB- adjust- Manual 1 - 99 60
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN MFT ment paper
LANG Language support data program (General term) feed
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD D RRCB- ADU 1 - 99 50
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD ADU
PCUB PCU Boot section E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
PCUM PCU Main section adjustment adjustment
DESKB Desk unit BOOT section F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
FINB Inner finisher BOOT section
REAR area adjustment
FINM Inner finisher MAIN section
H Sub DENB- Manual feed 1 - 99 50
OPUB OPU Boot section
scanning MFT correction value
OPUM OPU Main section direction
I DENB- Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
ESCP ESC/P font print area CS1 value
PDL PDL font J correction DENB- Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
ANIME Animation data value CS2 value
IMGDT Image ASIC data K DENB- Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
CORP Color profile CS3 value
WEBHP WEB help L DENB- Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
UNICD UNICODE table CS4 value
M DENB- ADU correction 1 - 99 50
ADU value

A - D. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image
50-5
position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the Purpose Adjustment
value is increased, the timing is advanced. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
E. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ position. (PRINTER MODE)
step) Section
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. Operation/Procedure
F. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ 1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C).
step) 2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. OSA shortcut key.)
G. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of 3) Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) ment check pattern is printed. At the sate time, the set value is
fixed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.0r2.0mm
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 30 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
J MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
K PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
L DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item.
OSA shortcut key.)
3) Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
ment check pattern is printed. At the sate time, the set value is
fixed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 65
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 65
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - F are not properly
adjusted, this adjustment cannot be executed properly.
H SUB-MFT Resist motor ON timing Manual paper feed 1 - 99 60
I SUB-CS1 adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 60
J SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
K SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1) setting
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - G: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
Item B - G: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjust-
1) Select a target adjustment item. ment check pattern is printed. At the sate time, the set value is
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and fixed.
OSA shortcut key.)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A CYAN (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (F side) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment
B CYAN (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (R side) 1 - 199 100 Item List
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(FRONT) (F side)
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(REAR) (R side)
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (F side) 1 - 199 100
(FRONT)
F YELLOW (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (R side) 1 - 199 100
G CYAN(SUB) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
I MAGENTA(SUB) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment
H YELLOW(SUB) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100 Item List
J MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 199 1 Adjustment
K PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual paper feed 2 pattern print
CS1 2 Tray 1 conditions
CS2 3 Tray 2 setting
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
L DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection 0 Select 1
NO 1 Not select
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item. 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ALL The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning direction ment data are displayed.
and the sub scanning direction) and the OPC drum phase
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
adjustment are automatically performed.
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
REGIST The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction) is automatically performed.
DRUM The OPC drum phase adjustment (automatic adjustment) is
POS automatically performed.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
ALL REGIST MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
Image (Auto image direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) 199.0
registration registration M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
adjustment/ adjustment) direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) 199.0
OPC drum Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
phase direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) 199.0
adjustment MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) 199.0
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) 199.0
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) -99.9 - - If the value is plus, R is
99.9 displayed to left side of
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) -99.9 - - numerical value. If the
99.9 value is minus, L is
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) -99.9 - - displayed to left side of
99.9 numerical value.
When the value is -4 -
+4, "(OK)" is place at
the back of the value.
For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
DRUM POS PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-
(Auto OPC adjustment 0q(1) o 45q(2) o 90q(3) o 135q(4) o 180q(5) o 225q(6) 31.
drum phase value BK o 270q(7) o 315q(8)
adjustment) o CL
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.

<Error displays in case of abnormal end > Error
Error display Error content Description
Error code
Error display Error content Description Sub 31 SUB Pitch error sub The pitch data are
code
Forcible - SUSPENDED Door open Door open during scanning MAGENTA scanning color not within the
end end operation adjust- FRONT 31 (Magenta) F allowable range.
error ment 32 SUB Adjustment The calculation
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed
error MAGENTA value number result value is not
during operation
FRONT 32 error sub within the
- - OFF end Unconfirmed
scanning color allowable range.
operation during
(Magenta) F
operation
(Power OFF) 33 SUB Result value The variation in the
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
Basic 1 TONNER Toner Empty BK or ALL Color
FRONT 33 scanning color value is above the
error EMPTY 01 toner EMPTY
(Magenta) F allowable range.
detection
35 SUB Number of The pitch data
2 BEFORE Other Other condition
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
BEHAVIOR 02 condition
REAR 35 scanning color specified value.
4 SENSOR Calibration The target is not
(Magenta) R
CALIBRATION error reached by 3 times
36 SUB Pitch error sub The pitch data are
04 of retry of F or R
MAGENTA scanning color not within the
5 TIME OVER Time error No data are
REAR 36 (Magenta) R allowable range.
05 obtained for 90sec
37 SUB Adjustment The calculation
from data
MAGENTA value number result value is not
acquisition
REAR 37 error sub within the
7 PROCESS Process Process control
CONTROL 07 control error error detection
(Magenta) R
Sub 10 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data
38 SUB Result value The variation in the
scanning FRONT 10 error sub number are not the
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
adjust- scanning color specified value.
REAR 38 scanning color value is above the
ment (Black) F
(Magenta) R allowable range.
error 11 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are
40 SUB YELLOW Number of The pitch data
FRONT 11 scanning color not within the
FRONT 40 lines error sub number are not the
(Black) F allowable range.
scanning color specified value.
15 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data are (Yellow) F
REAR 15 error sub not within the
41 SUB YELLOW Pitch error sub The pitch data are
scanning color specified range.
FRONT 41 scanning color not within the
(Black) R
(Yellow) F allowable range.
16 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are
42 SUB YELLOW Adjustment The calculation
REAR 16 scanning color not within the
FRONT 42 value number result value is not
(Black) R allowable range.
error sub within the
20 SUB CYAN Number of line The pitch data scanning color allowable range.
FRONT 20 error sub number are not the (Yellow) F
43 SUB YELLOW Result value The variation in the
(Cyan) F
FRONT 43 error sub calculation result
21 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are scanning color value is above the
FRONT 21 scanning color not within the (Yellow) F allowable range.
(Cyan) F allowable range.
45 SUB YELLOW Number of The pitch data
22 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation REAR 45 lines error sub number are not the
FRONT 22 value number result value is not scanning color specified value.
error sub within the (Yellow) R
46 SUB YELLOW Pitch error sub The pitch data are
(Cyan) F
REAR 46 scanning color not within the
23 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the (Yellow) R allowable range.
FRONT 23 error sub calculation result
47 SUB YELLOW Adjustment The calculation
scanning color value is above the
REAR 47 value number result value is not
(Cyan) F allowable range.
error sub within the
25 SUB CYAN Number of The pitch data scanning color allowable range.
REAR 25 lines error sub number are not the (Yellow) R
48 SUB YELLOW Result value The variation in the
(Cyan) R
REAR 48 error sub calculation result
26 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are scanning color value is above the
REAR 26 scanning color not within the (Yellow) R allowable range.
(Cyan) R allowable range.
Main 50 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data
27 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation scanning FRONT 50 lines error number are not the
REAR 27 value number result value is not adjust- main scanning specified value.
error sub within the ment color (Black) F
scanning color allowable range. error 51 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are
(Cyan) R
FRONT 51 main scanning not within the
28 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the color (Black) F allowable range.
REAR 28 error sub calculation result
55 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data are
scanning color value is above the
REAR 55 lines error not within the
(Cyan) R allowable range.
main scanning specified range.
30 SUB Number of The pitch data color (Black) R
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
56 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are
FRONT 30 scanning color specified value.
REAR 56 main scanning not within the
(Magenta) F
color (Black) R allowable range.

Error Error
Error display Error content Description Error display Error content Description
code code
Main 60 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data Main 82 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
scanning FRONT 60 lines error number are not the scanning YELLOW value error result value is not
adjust- main scanning specified value. adjust- FRONT 82 main scanning within the
ment color (Cyan) F ment color (Yellow) allowable range.
error 61 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are error F
FRONT 61 main scanning not within the 83 MAIN Result value The variation in the
color (Cyan) F allowable range. YELLOW error main calculation result
62 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation FRONT 83 scanning color value is above the
FRONT 62 value number result value is not (Yellow) F allowable range.
error main within the 85 MAIN Number of The pitch data
scanning color allowable range. YELLOW lines error number are not the
(Cyan) F REAR 85 main scanning specified value.
63 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the color (Yellow)
FRONT 63 error main calculation result R
scanning color value is above the 86 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
(Cyan) F allowable range. YELLOW main scanning not within the
65 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data REAR 86 color (Yellow) allowable range.
REAR 65 lines error number are not the R
main scanning specified value. 87 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
color (Cyan) R YELLOW value error result value is not
66 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are REAR 87 main scanning within the
REAR 66 main scanning not within the color (Yellow) allowable range.
color (Cyan) R allowable range. R
67 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation 88 MAIN Result value The variation in the
REAR 67 value error result value is not YELLOW error main calculation result
main scanning within the REAR 88 scanning color value is above the
color (Cyan) R allowable range. (Yellow) R allowable range.
68 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the Others 99 OTHER 99 Other errors Other errors
REAR 68 error main calculation result
scanning color value is above the When an error occurs, try the adjustment again. If an error still
(Cyan) R allowable range. occurs, there may be an abnormality in the process section. Check
70 MAIN Number of The pitch data the process section for any abnormality.
MAGENTA lines error number are not the
FRONT 70 main scanning specified value.
color
50-24
(Magenta) F
71 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
MAGENTA main scanning not within the market.)
FRONT 71 color allowable range. Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
(Magenta) F
50-20 and 22.
72 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
MAGENTA value number result value is not Section
FRONT 72 error main within the Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color of data display.
(Magenta) F
73 MAIN Result value The variation in the 2) Use [BACK], [NEXT] buttons and [OK] key to select the display
MAGENTA error main calculation result category.
FRONT 73 scanning color value is above the NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and
(Magenta) F allowable range. is not necessary for the market.
75 MAIN Number of The pitch data
MAGENTA lines error number are not the Item
REAR 75 main scanning specified value. Setting Related
classific Display Item content
color range SIM
ation
(Magenta) R Regist- REG_EXE_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22
76 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are ration executions of
MAGENTA main scanning not within the adjust- the registration
REAR 76 color allowable range. ment adjustment
(Magenta) R status (Auto
77 MAIN Adjustment The calculation check execution)
MAGENTA value error result value is not REG_SUC_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22
REAR 77 main scanning within the success of the
color allowable range. registration
(Magenta) R adjustment
78 MAIN Result value The variation in the (Auto
MAGENTA error main calculation result execution)
REAR 78 scanning color value is above the REG_CNT Registration 0 - 99999999 -
(Magenta) R allowable range. adjustment
80 MAIN Number of The pitch data registration
YELLOW lines error number are not the counter
FRONT 80 main scanning specified value. Error ERROR Error record - 50-22
color (Yellow) record HISTORY status check
F status
81 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are check
YELLOW main scanning not within the
FRONT 81 color (Yellow) allowable range.
F

51
51-1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
secondary transport voltage.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Default value
1) Select a target adjustment item. A TC2 ON Secondary transfer voltage ON timing 40
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and TIMING setting
OSA shortcut key.) B TC2 OFF Secondary transfer voltage OFF 60
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim- TIMING timing setting
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the resist roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode.
OSA shortcut key.)
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
C MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Small size)
D MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 50
(Plain paper/Large size)
E MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 90
(Heavy paper/Small size)
F MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 90
(Heavy paper/Large size)
G MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 90
H MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 90
I ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 20
J ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
K DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 30
L DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
<Note on "Large size" and "Small size"> <Adjustment value>

"Small size": The paper length in the transport direction is LT size When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
(216mm) or less. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
"Large size": The paper length in the transport direction is greater amount is decreased.
than LT size (216mm). When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is
changed by 0.1mm.

55 5) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
Data transfer is performed
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
55-1
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
(Machine with the DSK installed)
required.)
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
2) Select a transfer mode.
control operations. (SOFT SW)
3) Select a target transfer file.
Section
4) Enter the password.
5) Select [SET] button, and press [OK] key.
55-3 6) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially 7) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
required.) Data transfer is performed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control- When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
ler operation. (SOFT SW) displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
<Data list outside the backup targets>
Section
(EEPROM/SRAM)
PWB Type Content NOTE

Controller Machine serial No.
56 Product key information
Various counter
Trouble history
56-1
PCU Machine serial No.
Purpose Data backup (Data transfer) Various counter Maintenance counter
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP Machine adjustment execute history
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the Trouble history
PWB.)
Section (HDD)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target content of data transfer. Classification Content NOTE
User User pixel counter
authentication
3) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. Japanese FEP User dictionary
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed. Job end list Job end list display data
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is (The image send series include
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB
ALL o HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. is enable.
HDD o ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the New N/A • Print history information
memories. • JAM history information
EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD • Trouble history information
• Same position continuous jam
HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
count value
SRAM o HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD.
• Charging information
(Including the FAX memory)
• Life information
When the FAX memory or an option memory
Operation manual E-manual
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the
memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. Program Main program data
HDD o SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM
(including the FAX memory)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the 56-3
FAX memory are also transferred to HDD. Purpose Data backup (Data transfer)
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the print hold data (docu-
ment filling data) to the USB memory.
56-2 Section
Purpose Data backup (Data transfer) Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
SRAM, and HDD to the USB memory. (Cor- 2) Select a transfer mode.
responding to the device cloning and the 3) Select a target transfer file.
storage backup.) 4) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
Section 5) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure Data transfer is performed.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
2) Select a transfer mode. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
3) Select a target transfer file.

Setting Default
56-4 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Data backup (Data transfer) B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the OF ROW 12BIT width 1
USB memory. 13BIT 2
Section C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
Operation/Procedure COLUMN 10BIT 2
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 11BIT 3
2) Select [JOB LOG EXPORT]. 12BIT 4
3) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
5CLOCK 3
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. SETTING 5CLOCK 1
VALUE 6CLOCK 2
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3
60 SETTING
VALUE
7CLOCK 1
8CLOCK 2
9CLOCK 3
60-1 10CLOCK 4
Purpose Operation test/check G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
of the MFP PWB memory.
5CLOCK 3
Section H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
Operation/Procedure SETTING 3CLOCK 1
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Start the test. 5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
Result display Description SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
OK Success VALUE - -
NG Error 20CLOCK 13
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
INVALID Execution disable LATENCY CL=2.5 1
CL=3 2
K TTL NUM NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
SLOT Description
OF MB 128M total capacity 1
SLOT1 System memory (expansion) DIMM2
ONBOARD BYTE
SLOT2 System memory (standard) DIMM1 DDR 256M 2
SLOT3 Local memory (MFP expansion) DIMM4
BYTE
SLOT4 Local memory (MFP standard) DIMM3
L NUM OF NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
SLOT5 Local memory (Codec standard) DIMM5 ONBD- bunk number
1CHIP 1
DDR CS- 2CHIP 2
BANK
60-2
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the MFP PWB on-board
61
SDRAM.
Section 61-1
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Select an item to be set. Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
2) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and tion and laser detection.
OSA shortcut key.) Section LSU
NOTE: Set to the default value. Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display Content When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
range value
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0
ENABLE setting setting
Display Content
change of On-
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
flag board
SPD LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
ENABLE DDR 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
setting
of B or
later

Set- De- Desti-
61-3
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value linkage
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power PR600 O LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
POWER laser power 255
Section LOW (Y1) (Low speed/
Operation/Procedure Y1)
1) Select a target mode for adjustment. P LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
LOW (Y2) (Low speed/
3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and Y2)
OSA shortcut key.) Q LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are POWER laser power 255
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(BW1) BW1)
line images are increased.
R LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
• MX-C400P/C380P POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/
Set- De- Desti- (BW2) BW2)
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
S LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
range value linkage
PR600 A LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ LOW (Low speed/
POWER laser power 255 (BW1) BW1)
T LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
(K1) K1)
B LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ LOW (Low speed/
POWER laser power 255 (BW2) BW2)
U LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(K2) K2)
DUTY select middle 255
C LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ MIDDLE speed (K)
POWER laser power 255 (K)
V LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(C1) C1)
D LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ MIDDLE speed (C)
POWER laser power 255 (C)
W LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(C2) C2)
E LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ MIDDLE speed (M)
POWER laser power 255 (M)
X LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(M1) M1)
F LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ MIDDLE speed (Y)
POWER laser power 255 (Y)
Y LOW (K) Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(M2) M2)
select low 255
G LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ speed (K)
Z LOW (C) Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
select low 255
(Y1) Y1)
speed (C)
H LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
AA LOW (M) Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
select low 255
speed (M)
(Y2) Y2)
AB LOW (Y) Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
I LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
select low 255
speed (Y)
LOW (K1) (Low speed/
AC LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
K1)
J LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
MIDDLE speed (BW)
(BW)
LOW (K2) (Low speed/
AD LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
K2)
DUTY select low 255
K LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
LOW (BW) speed (BW)
PR1200 A LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
LOW (C1) (Low speed/
C1)
L LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
(K1) K1)
B LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
C2)
M LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
(K2) K2)
C LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
LOW (M1) (Low speed/
M1)
N LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
(C1) C1)
LOW (M2) (Low speed/
M2)

Set- De- Desti- Set- De- Desti-
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
range value linkage range value linkage
PR1200 D LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ PR1200 V LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
POWER laser power 255 DUTY select middle 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ MIDDLE speed (C)
(C2) C2) (C)
E LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ W LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ MIDDLE speed (M)
(M1) M1) (M)
F LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ X LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ MIDDLE speed (Y)
(M2) M2) (Y)
G LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ Y LOW (K) Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
POWER laser power 255 select low 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ speed (K)
(Y1) Y1) Z LOW (C) Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
H LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ select low 255
POWER laser power 255 speed (C)
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ AA LOW (M) Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
(Y2) Y2) select low 255
I LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ speed (M)
POWER laser power 255 AB LOW (Y) Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
LOW (K1) (Low speed/ select low 255
K1) speed (Y)
J LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ AC LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
LOW (K2) (Low speed/ MIDDLE speed (BW)
K2) (BW)
K LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ AD LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
POWER laser power 255 DUTY select low 255
LOW (C1) (Low speed/ LOW (BW) speed (BW)
C1)
L LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕
POWER laser power 255 • MX-B400P/B380P
C2) Setting Default
M LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ range value
POWER laser power 255 PR600 A LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
LOW (M1) (Low speed/ POWER laser power (Middle
M1) MIDDLE (BW1) speed/BW1)
N LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ B LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
POWER laser power 255 POWER laser power (Middle
LOW (M2) (Low speed/ MIDDLE (BW2) speed/BW2)
M2) C LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
O LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ POWER LOW laser power (Low
POWER laser power 255 (BW1) speed/BW1)
LOW (Y1) (Low speed/ D LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
Y1) POWER LOW laser power (Low
P LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ (BW2) speed/BW2)
POWER laser power 255 E LASER DUTY Laser DUTY select 0 - 255 0
LOW (Y2) (Low speed/ MIDDLE (BW) middle speed/BW
Y2) F LASER DUTY Laser DUTY select 0 - 255 0
Q LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ LOW (BW) low speed/BW
POWER laser power 255 PR1200 A LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ POWER laser power (Middle
(BW1) BW1) MIDDLE (BW1) speed/BW1)
R LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ B LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
POWER laser power 255 POWER laser power (Middle
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ MIDDLE (BW2) speed/BW2)
(BW2) BW2)
C LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
S LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ POWER LOW laser power (Low
POWER laser power 255 (BW1) speed/BW1)
LOW (Low speed/
D LASER Used to set the 0 - 255 128
(BW1) BW1)
POWER LOW laser power (Low
T LASER Used to set the 0- 128 ✕ (BW2) speed/BW2)
E LASER DUTY Laser DUTY select 0 - 255 0
LOW (Low speed/
MIDDLE (BW) middle speed/BW
(BW2) BW2)
F LASER DUTY Laser DUTY select 0 - 255 0
U LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 ✕
LOW (BW) low speed/BW
MIDDLE speed (K)
(K)

61-4 62-6
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
ment pattern. (LSU unit) hard disk.
Section Section
1) Select a target item. 1) Select the self diag area.
2) Set the print conditions of the adjustment pattern. (Enter the 2) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key.) The self diag operation is performed.
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
Default SHORT S.T Partial area diag

value EXTENDED S.T All area diag
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
CS1 selection 2 Tray 1 (CS1) normal display.
CS2 3 Tray 2 Normal completion o "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed.
CS3 4 Tray 3 Abnormal end o "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
CS4 5 Tray 4
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.
62 62-7
62-1 Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
Operation/Procedure
(except operation manual area).
Section
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
Operation/Procedure
the result is printed.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. normal display.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the 62-8
normal display. Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
the system area and the operation manual
62-2 area)
Purpose Operation test/check Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk Operation/Procedure
(partial). 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
Section 2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure Used to execute the hard disk format.
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
62-3 NG" is displayed.
62-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas). Purpose Data clear
Section Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
Read/write operations are performed. 2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
Used to delete the job log data.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.

62-11 62-13
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the print hold data (docu- Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
ment filing data). operation manual area)
Section Section
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key. 2) Select [YES] button, and press [OK] key.
Used to delete the print hold data. The operation manual data are deleted.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display. normal display.
62-12
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
data storage area (device cloning data, etc.), only the system data
storage area is cleared.
A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
64
64-1
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
(MX-C400P/C380P)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be print condition.
2) Set the print conditions. (Enter the set value, and press [OK]
key and OSA shortcut key.)
3) Select a target print color.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) (Self 1-255 1
print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THR Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CH/PC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CH/PR Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PR PC Printed Photo 5
PR PP Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STD D Dither without correction 8

G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern Pattern generating

Content NOTE
No. section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4E) density print Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan)
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): MFP ASIC • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
Sub scan • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): • The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
Main scan
17 All background (halftone) Halftone When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) (MFP ASIC rear • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
19 256 gradations pattern (For text dither) process) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback
is made, and the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi
64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be print condition.
2) Set the print conditions. (Enter the set value, and press [OK]
key and OSA shortcut key.)
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THR Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CH/PC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CH/PR Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PR PC Printed Photo 5
PR PP Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STD D Dither without 8
correction

G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) Print of each color is made for every 1/4 of the sub scanning
paper size.
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): MFP ASIC • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
Sub scan • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): • The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
Main scan
17 All background (halftone) Halftone -
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) (MFP ASIC after -
19 256 gradations pattern (For text dither) process) -
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi
64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 grada-
tions)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be print condition. 3) Select a target print color.
2) Set the print conditions. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] 4) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
key and OSA shortcut key.) The test print (self print) is performed.
• MX-C400P/C380P

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0-1 0 0 (LOW)
HIGH High line number 1
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard 0-2 0 1
HIGHQUALITY setting Fine image quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine text 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 1 (Straight)
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content

1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 4-color background, dot print (Sub scanning)
• MX-B400P/B380P

B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard 0-2 0 1
HIGHQUALITY setting Fine image quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine text 2
F DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 1 (Straight)
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content

1 256 gradations pattern
2 Half tone pattern
3 Background, dot print (Sub scanning)
64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be print condition. 3) Select a target print color.
• MX-C400P/C380P

B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0-1 0 0 (LOW)
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-2 0 1
HIGHQUALITY setting Fine image quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0 (SHARP)
STANDARD For Photo image 1

I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0-4 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (Gamma1.6)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE mode 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content

1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
• MX-B400P/B380P

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-2 0 1
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content

1 B/W
64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be print condition. 3) Select a print color.
• MX-C400P/C380P

CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5

E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone Photograph 0-1 0 0 (LOW)
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-2 0 1
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0 (SHARP)
STANDARD For Photo image 1
I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0-5 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (GAMMA1.6)
TONER SAVE Gamma 0.6 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K CMY INK OFF Ink simulation OFF 0-3 0 0 (OFF)
SIMULATION SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content

1 COLOR
2 B/W
• MX-B400P/B380P

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-2 0 1
F PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content

1 B/W
64-7 Setting Default

Item/Display Content Writing
Purpose Operation test/check range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No
Function (Purpose) Used to the test print. (Self print). (This B PROC YES 0 The halftone 0-1 1 Yes
function is not used in the market.) ADJ process control
Section correction
value is
Operation/Procedure
reflected.
1) Select an item to be print condition. NO 1 The halftone
2) Set the print conditions. process control
correction
value is not
reflected.

3) Enter the adjust number of the adjustment pattern patch which
65 was found in procedure 2) as the adjustment value.
Select the adjustment density area (LOW, MID, HIGH), and
select the adjustment target color (K, C, M, Y), and enter the
65-5
adjustment number as the adjustment value and press OSA
Purpose Operation check/test shortcut key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input. Adjustment density area Adjustment target color
LOW K, C, M, Y
Section
MID K, C, M, Y
Operation/Procedure HIGH K, C, M, Y
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen. 4) Select [EXECUTE] button on the display, and press [OK] key.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key 5) Press [STOP] key to cancel SIM67-22.
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
67-23
67 Function (Purpose) Used to print the printer color balance
check sheet. (MX-C400P/C380P)
67-17 Section Printer
Purpose Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the printer controller. 1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key.
Section Printer (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the color
balance check pattern is printed.)
Operation/Procedure
67-25
The setting data related to the printer are deleted. (including
the data related to the network) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
normal display. adjustment)/Printer density and gradation
adjustment (Manual adjustment)
67-21 Section Printer
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Simplified 1) Select an adjustment target color.
adjustment) (MX-C400P/C380P) 2) Select a target adjustment density level.
Section Printer 3) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
Operation/Procedure OSA shortcut key.)
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. * By using buttons, the set value of each item can be
(A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the sim- collectively changed.
plified color balance adjustment pattern is printed.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
2) Find out the patch which is nearest to the neutral gray among increased, and vice versa.
the printed patches of the simplified color balance adjustment Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the check pat-
pattern. tern is printed in the color balance and the density corresponding to
3) Enter the X and Y coordinate values of the patch found in pro- the adjustment value.
cedure 2) as the adjustment values and press OSA shortcut (At the same time, the adjustment value is saved.)
key.
Setting Default
4) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. Item/Display
range value
5) Press [STOP] key to cancel SIM67-21. A POINT1 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 1 - 99 50
67-22 C POINT3 1 - 99 50
D POINT4 1 - 99 50
E POINT5 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual F POINT6 1 - 99 50
adjustment)/Printer density and gradation G POINT7 1 - 99 50
adjustment (Manual adjustment) H POINT8 1 - 99 50
Section Printer I POINT9 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure J POINT10 1 - 99 50
K POINT11 1 - 99 50
L POINT12 1 - 99 50
(A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected and the
M POINT13 1 - 99 50
adjustment pattern is printed.)
N POINT14 1 - 99 50
2) Find out the patch which is closest to the patch reference den- O POINT15 1 - 99 50
sity of the color chart (UKOG-0331FCZZ) in the Low Density P POINT16 1 - 99 50
area, the Mid Density area, and the High Density area among Q POINT17 1 - 99 50
the patches of printed adjustment pattern.

67-30 Display Content
Purpose Data transfer SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of printer cali-
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
bration data transfer. (Though this simula-
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics
tion menu is displayed, it does not work.)
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1 bit Photo
Section Printer SCREEN6 1200dpi 1 bit Graphics
Operation/Procedure SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1 bit
1) Select the set value, and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4 bit
key. SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1 bit
SCREEN10 Toner Save B/W
0 Printer calibration data transfer Enable HEAVY PAPER Printer paper kind manual gamma
1 Printer calibration data transfer Disable correction (Heavy paper)
NOTE: The adjustment value can be reset to the default value with
SIM67-25.
67-31
Purpose Data clear
67-34
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
Operation/Procedure
printer high density section. (Support for
1) Select [EXECUTE] button, and press [OK] key. the high density section tone gap)
Section Printer
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
Operation/Procedure
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and
OSA shortcut key.)
0 Enable
67-33 1 Disable
• MX-C400P/C380P
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
screen. (for PCL/PS) Setting Default
range value
Section Printer
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest density 0-1 0
Operation/Procedure (0: ENABLE correction mode : Enable
1) Select a target change color. 1: DISABLE) 1 CMY engine highest density
2) Select a target screen. correction mode : Disable
B K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
To select the kind of SCREEN, select [SCREEN] button and
(0: ENABLE correction mode : Enable
press [OK] key. Every time when [OK] key is pressed, the kind 1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
of SCREEN is switched. correction mode : Disable
3) Select a target adjustment density level. C CYAN MAX Target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
4) Set the set value. (Enter the set value, and press [OK] key and TARGET maximum density correction
OSA shortcut key.) D MAGENTA Target value for MAGENTA 0 - 999 500
MAX TARGET maximum density correction
Select [EXECUTE] button and press [OK] key, and the adjustment
E YELLOW Target value for YELLOW 0 - 999 500
pattern corresponding to the adjustment value is printed.
MAX TARGET maximum density correction
F BLACK MAX Target value for BLACK 0 - 999 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content TARGET maximum density correction
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128 • When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128 A and B to "0."
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128 The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128 gap is reduced.
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
items A and B to "1."
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128 The tone gap may occur in high density part.
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128

• MX-B400P/B380P
67-70
Setting Default Purpose Data clear
range value
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable Section MFP PWB
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density Operation/Procedure
correction mode: Disable
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for BLACK 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set item When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns
A to "0". to the normal display.
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
gap is reduced. NOTE: When replacing the MFP PWB and the HDD, if data
backup cannot be made with SIM56-1 and 56-2, perform
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set
this simulation after replacement of the MFP PWB and the
item A to "1".
HDD.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: When the value of item B is changed, the density in the
high density section is changed.
67-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
sity section.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
OSA shortcut key.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
67-52
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the printer color balance
adjustment (adjustment for each dither) to
the default value. (The set values of SIM67-
33 is set to the default values.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to reset the adjustment values of SIM67-33
to the default values.
1) Select an item to be reset to the default (for each dither).
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
Select item
Content
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode (When 1200dpi mode is frequently used)
600dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 600dpi,
1bit mode.
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
ALL Select all the items

The adjustment values of SIM67-33 are reset to the default values.

[6]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE

MX-C400P C. Self diag operation
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, may not be stopped.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning
࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others - ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 6 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
a. Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Judgment Operation mode
Kind of trouble Trouble code
block Print List print
HDD trouble MFP E7 (03, 04) ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC self test trouble
OPU communication trouble E7 (80) { {
A0 (02)
PCU communication trouble E7 (90) ✕ ✕
A0 (01)
Power controller trouble L8 (20) ✕ ✕
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) ✕ ✕
Controller fan motor trouble L4 (30) ✕ ✕
Connection trouble (MFP detection) E7 (60, 61, 65) ✕ ✕
A0 (10-12, 15, 20)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30) ✕ ✕
Serial vendor trouble U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕
Memory error (included not installed the expansion RAM) U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 24) ✕ ✕
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (01, 06, 08, 09, 05) ✕ ✕
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 21, 28, 29), L6 (10) ✕ ✕
*10
Connection trouble (PCU detection) E7 (50, 55) ✕ ✕
A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles (motor, fusing, etc.) C1 (10, 14) ✕ ✕
C4 (00) *10
F2 (11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 26,
27, 28, 29, 40, 64, 70, 74)
H2 (00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05)
H3 (00, 01, 02, 04, 05)
H4 (00, 01, 02, 04, 30)
H5 (01)
H7 (10, 11, 12, 14)
H8 (00)
L4 (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 12, 16, 29, 31, 32, 34, 35,
50, 51)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91)
PCU color system troubles E7 (21, 22, 23) ✕ ✕
F2 (23, 24, 25, 41, 42, 43, 65, 66, 67, 71, 72, 73, *19 *10
75, 76, 77) *19
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) U3 U3
*10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble U6 (01) U3 U3
*10
*10
*10
Paper feed tray other troubles U6 (00,10,50) U 11 U 11
*10
Staple trouble F1 (10) U4 U4
*10
After-process trouble F1 (00, 03, 15, 19, 20, 29, 37, 21) ✕ ✕4
*10
Other troubles EE (EL, EU, EC) { {
Process control trouble (PCU detection) F2 (39, 49, 50, 51, 58, 78) { {
Only history is left (PCU detection) F2 (45) { {
{ : Operation enabled, ✕ : Operation disabled

U 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
* 10 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 11 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
*19 :When use of the color mode is disabled in "Color mode use disable" setting of the system setting, an operation in the Black and White
mode is enabled.

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing on, check is made in each
and data are sent to the MFP PWB. Communication of trouble status block.
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP.
U2 Saved in each block.
PF Saved in the MFP.
Sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 16, 17 (To the corre-
sponding block)
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
inhibition) cancel is initialized.)
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel status
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel is communicated.
(3) Error cancel method for each error code
Simulation Error code

SIM13 U1
SIM14 H3, H4, H5
SIM16 U2
SIM17 PF
Power OFF - ON Errors other than above

2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Mechanism Option Electricity Supply
detection
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble (BK) PCU {
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU {
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU {
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP {
03 HDD trouble MFP {
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP {
05 Standard memory/expansion memory read/write error (MFP PWB) MFP {
06 Image data decode error MFP {
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) MFP {
09 Standard memory size/Expansion memory size error (MFP PWB) MFP {
20 LSU laser detection error (K) (*1) PCU {
21 LSU laser detection error (C) (*1) PCU {
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU {
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU {
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU {
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU {
50 Engine connection trouble PCU {
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU {
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP {
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP {
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP {
80 MFP-OPU PWB communication error MFP {
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP {
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/139 - 178) PCU {
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU {
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU {
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU {
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU {
10 Staple operation trouble PCU {
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU {
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU {
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU {
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU {
29 Finisher PWB fan trouble PCU {
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU {
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU {
F2 11 Developing unit initial detection (K) PCU {
12 Developing unit initial detection (C) PCU {
13 Developing unit initial detection (M) PCU {
14 Developing unit initial detection (Y) PCU {
15 Drum unit initial detection trouble (K drum) PCU {
16 Drum unit initial detection trouble (C drum) PCU {
17 Drum unit initial detection trouble (M drum) PCU {
18 Drum unit initial detection trouble (Y drum) PCU {
19 Primary transfer unit initial detection trouble PCU {
21 Secondary transfer unit initial detection trouble PCU {
22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU {
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU {
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU {
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU {
26 Auto toner density control level setting trouble (K) PCU {
27 Auto toner density control level setting trouble (C) PCU {
28 Auto toner density control level setting trouble (M) PCU {
29 Auto toner density control level setting trouble (Y) PCU {
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU {
40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN) PCU {
42 Toner density sensor trouble (MAGENTA) PCU {
43 Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW) PCU {
45 K image density sensor trouble PCU {
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU {
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU {
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble PCU {
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU {
(*1): In the case of monochrome model: E7-20/21

In the case of color model: E7-20/21/22/23

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
F2 64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK) PCU {
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU {
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU {
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU {
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK) PCU {
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN) PCU {
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA) PCU {
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW) PCU {
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK) PCU {
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN) PCU {
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA) PCU {
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW) PCU {
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU {
(Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU {
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Sub thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU {
03 Compensation thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU {
04 Thermistor open (TH_EX1) PCU {
05 Thermistor open (TH_EX2) PCU {
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
04 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_EX1) PCU {
05 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_EX2) PCU {
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
04 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_EX) PCU {
30 Thermistor input circuit trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU {
H7 10 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2). PCU {
11 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
12 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US) PCU {
14 Low temperature trouble (TH_EX) in reset operation after JOB stop due to a fall PCU {
in the fusing temperature during a JOB.
H8 00 Fusing unit initial detection trouble PCU {
L4 02 Paper feed motor lock trouble PCU {
03 Fusing motor lock trouble PCU {
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU {
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU {
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU {
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU {
29 HDD fan trouble PCU {
30 MFP PWB fan trouble PCU {
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU {
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU {
34 LSU fan trouble PCU {
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU {
50 Process fan trouble PCU {
51 Process fan 2 trouble PCU {
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU {
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU {
02 Full wave signal error PCU {
20 MFP PWB - Mother board communication error MFP {
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP {
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP {
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP {
10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP {
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP {
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP {
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP {
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU {
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU {

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
U6 00 PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error PCU {
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU {
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU {
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU {
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP {
02 OPU PWB ROM error MFP {
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP {
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP {
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - OPU) MFP {
15 DSK boot ROM error PCU {
20 MFP firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency MFP {
21 PCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency PCU {
3. Details of trouble code
C1-10 Main charger trouble (BK) E7-01 MFP image data error
Detail PCU Detail MFP

Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly. Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. MFP PWB trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Breakage of the high voltage harness. of the MFP PWB.
MC/DV PWB trouble. Replace the MFP PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB. E7-03 HDD trouble
connector. /Replace.
Replace the MC/DV PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail MFP
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) abnormality (FAT breakage).
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the
Detail PCU harness of the MFP PWB and HDD.
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of
properly. the HDD.
There is an abnormality in the main charger. Replace the HDD.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Replace the MFP PWB.
Breakage of the high voltage harness. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
MC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB
connector. /Replace. Detail MFP
Replace the MC PWB. Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON booting.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
C4-00 PTC trouble
Detail PCU
E7-05 Standard memory/expansion memory
Cause The PTC unit is not properly installed. read/write error (MFP PWB)
PTC unit trouble.
TC PWB trouble. Detail MFP
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Garbled memory data.
Check & Remedy Clean the PTC with the PTC cleaner. The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Replace the PTC unit.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Replace the secondary transfer PWB.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of
Replace the PCU PWB.
the memory.
Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the expansion memory.
harness.
Replace the MFP PWB.

E7-06 Image data decode error E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M)
Detail MFP Detail PCU

Cause Compressed image data abnormality. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed. trouble.
Image data compression/transfer data garble. Harness and connector trouble between the LD
MFP PWB trouble. PWB and the LSU cnt PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON the LSU.
Replace the LSU.
E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error
(MFP PWB)
E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y)
Detail MFP
Detail PCU
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
MFP memory slot.
trouble.
DIMM trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD
Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM.
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB.
Replace the DIMM.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in
the LSU.
Replace the LSU.
E7-09 Standard memory size/Expansion Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
memory size error (MFP PWB)
(*1): In the case of monochrome model: E7-20/21
Detail MFP In the case of color model: E7-20/21/22/23
Cause A DIMM other than below is installed to the default
throttle.
• 38-sheet machine/40-sheet machine E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error
System memory: 1GB
Local memory: 512MB
• 31-sheet machine Detail PCU
System memory: 512MB Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
Local memory: 512MB PWB and the control ASIC.
DIMM trouble. Improper connection of the communication
Insufficient memory size. connector between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM. PWB (interface PWB).
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB or LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB)
trouble
E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K) (*1) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the
harness between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt
Detail PCU PWB (interface PWB).
Cause Optical axis shift. Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Replace the PCU PWB.
trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
BD PWB trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB. E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in
Detail PCU
the LSU.
Replace the LSU. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator
and the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU
ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C) (*1)
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode E7-50 Engine connection trouble
trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in by the machine specifications is detected in the
the LSU. PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU. PCU PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.

E7-55 PWB information sum error E7-90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error
(Engine detection)
Detail MFP
Detail PCU Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble.
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU PWB motherboard connection trouble.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Replace the mother board.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
PWB, and the mother board.
Check the earth line.
E7-60 Combination error between the MFP Replace the mother board.
PWB and other PWB, firmware Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
machine specifications is detected in the MFP error
PWB. (Sampling level 76 - 117/139 - 178)
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary. Developing unit trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit.
E7-61 Combination error between the MFP Replace the PCU PWB.
PWB and the PCU PWB
Detail MFP EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment

Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the error (Over toner)
PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
and the PCU PWB. Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
Replace the MFP PWB. density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device. error (Under toner)
Malfunction due to noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB. Detail PCU
Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-80 MFP-OPU PWB communication error Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Detail MFP
Cause OPU PWB connector connection trouble.
OPU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
OPU PWB mother board connection trouble.
OPU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the OPU PWB, the MFP
PWB, and the mother board.
Check the earth line.
Replace the OPU PWB.

F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
error
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the
Over-current to the motor.
harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Strong external noises. alignment motor F.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
R
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
operation trouble Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Detail PCU Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor.
Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Finisher control PWB trouble. alignment motor R.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the paper alignment motor R.
exit roller lift motor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
harness.
Replace the home position sensor. F1-21 Finisher fan trouble
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Detail PCU
Cause Finisher fan motor trouble.
F1-10 Staple operation trouble Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Staple motor trouble. Check connection between the finisher control
Finisher control PWB trouble. PWB and the fan.
Home position sensor trouble. Replace the fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Replace the staple motor.
harness. F1-29 Finisher PWB fan trouble
Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher PWB fan lock.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation harness.
trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM 3-3 to check the operation of the control
PWB cooling fan (FBCF).
Replace the finisher PWB fan.
Detail PCU
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Finisher control PWB trouble. harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
exit tray lift motor.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher
control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)

F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error F2-14 Developing unit initial detection (Y)
Detail PCU Detail PCU

Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is
model is installed. conducted for the specified time. (Y)
Finisher control PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-51 to check the operations of the
[DVCRU Y] fuse blowing circuit.
F2-11 Developing unit initial detection (K) Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU Y] initial
detection input signal.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is Check connection of the connector and the
conducted for the specified time. (K) harness.
Developing unit trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
PCU PWB trouble.
harness. F2-15 Drum unit initial detection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-51 to check the operation of the [DVCRU
K] fuse blowing circuit.
(K drum)
Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU K] initial
detection input signal. Detail PCU
Replace the developing unit. Cause When the newly installed drum is driven for the
Replace the PCU PWB. specified time after installation, the new state is not
Check connection of the connector and the canceled. (K)
harness. Detection switch [DRCRU-K] trouble
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Process cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-12 Developing unit initial detection (C) harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the
[DRCRU-K] switch.
Detail PCU
Replace the process (drum) cartridge.
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is
conducted for the specified time. (C)
Developing unit trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
[DVCRU C] fuse blowing circuit.
F2-16 Drum unit initial detection trouble
Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU C] initial (C drum)
Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the Cause When the newly installed drum is driven for the
harness. specified time after installation, the new state is not
canceled. (C)
Detection switch [DRCRU-C] trouble
Process cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-13 Developing unit initial detection (M) Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is [DRCRU-C] switch.
conducted for the specified time. (M) Replace the process (drum) cartridge.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
harness. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
[DVCRU M] fuse blowing circuit.
Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU M] initial
harness.

F2-17 Drum unit initial detection trouble F2-21 Secondary transfer unit initial
(M drum) detection trouble

Cause When the newly installed drum is driven for the Cause When the newly installed secondary transfer unit is
specified time after installation, the new state is not driven for the specified time after installation, the
canceled. (M) new state is not canceled.
Detection switch [DRCRU-M] trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Process cartridge trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
PCU PWB trouble. harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Secondary transfer UN initial detection mechanism
harness. trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the Initial detection electrode trouble
[DRCRU-M] switch. Secondary transfer unit trouble.
Replace the process (drum) cartridge. Check & Remedy Check conduction of the initial detection electrode
Replace the PCU PWB. plate and the initial detection GND electrode plate.
Check connection of the connector and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Check connection of the connector and the
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON harness.
Replace the secondary transfer unit.
F2-18 Drum unit initial detection trouble
(Y drum)
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause When the newly installed drum is driven for the
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
specified time after installation, the new state is not
canceled. (Y) (K) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
Detection switch [DRCRU-Y] trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Process cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check the harness and the connector.
harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
[DRCRU-Y] switch.
Replace the process (drum) cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)
harness.
Detail PCU
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
(C) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
F2-19 Primary transfer unit initial PCU PWB trouble.
detection trouble Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
Check the harness and the connector.
Detail PCU
Cause When the newly installed primary transfer unit is
driven for the specified time after installation, the
new state is not canceled.
1TUD K sensor trouble
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)
Primary transfer initial operation clutch mechanism
trouble Detail PCU
Primary transfer unit initial detection level trouble Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
PCU PWB trouble. (M) and the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Primary transfer belt unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the 1TUD-K Check the harness and the connector.
sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Use SIM6-3 to check the switching operation of the Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
primary transfer unit.
Check to confirm that the initial detection level is
inclined.
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
harness. Detail PCU
Replace the primary transfer unit. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON (Y) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Check the harness and the connector.

F2-26 Auto toner density control level F2-29 Auto toner density control level
setting trouble (K) setting trouble (Y)

Cause The toner density sample level is not in the Cause The toner density sample level is not in the
specified range when the automatic toner density specified range when the automatic toner density
control level is set. (K) control level is set. (Y)
Toner density sensor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Check & Remedy When the power is turned OFF/ON, the automatic Check & Remedy When the power is turned OFF/ON, the automatic
developer adjustment is executed again. developer adjustment is executed again.
Replace the developer cartridge. Replace the developer cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the Check connection of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
F2-27 Auto toner density control level F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
setting trouble (C)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
Cause The toner density sample level is not in the
PCU PWB trouble
specified range when the automatic toner density
control level is set. (C) Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Toner density sensor trouble. Check connection of the harness and the
Developing unit trouble. connector.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
harness.
Check & Remedy When the power is turned OFF/ON, the automatic
developer adjustment is executed again. F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)
Replace the developer cartridge.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
harness.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
F2-28 Auto toner density control level Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
setting trouble (M) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause The toner density sample level is not in the
specified range when the automatic toner density
control level is set. (M)
Toner density sensor trouble.
F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN)
PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
harness. level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
Check & Remedy When the power is turned OFF/ON, the automatic Connection trouble of the connector and the
developer adjustment is executed again. harness.
Replace the developer cartridge. Developing unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Check connection of the connector and the Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
harness. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Replace the developing unit.

F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble
(MAGENTA)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
Drum drive section trouble.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
PCU PWB trouble
harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Developing unit trouble. Replace the drum phase sensor.
PCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Repair the drum drive section.
Replace the PCU PWB. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble

F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble
(YELLOW) Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. (DHPCL)
Detail PCU Drum drive section trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample PCU PWB trouble.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above). Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of
Connection trouble of the connector and the "DHPD_CL".
harness. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Developing unit trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the
PCU PWB trouble. harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Repair the drum drive section.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the developing unit. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble
F2-45 K image density sensor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Cause K image density sensor sensitivity adjustment PCU PWB trouble.
trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
K image density sensor trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the
Harness and connector connection trouble. harness.
K image density sensor dirt. Replace the PCU PWB.
Calibration plate dirt.
Calibration plate solenoid trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the K image density sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK)
harness.
Clean the K image density sensor. Detail PCU
Replace the calibration plate. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Replace the calibration plate solenoid. Toner density sensor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector/harness trouble.
Use SIM44-2 to adjust the process control sensor PCU PWB trouble.
sensitivity. Toner cartridge trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble Connector/harness trouble.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU
Cause The LSU detection temperature is outside of -28qC
- 78qC.
LSU thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU thermistor.
harness.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.

F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection
(CYAN)
Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble. Detail PCU
Toner density sensor trouble.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Connector/harness trouble.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
PCU PWB trouble
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection
(MAGENTA)
F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) Detail PCU
Detail PCU unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Cause Toner motor trouble. specification.)
Toner density sensor trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Developing unit trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Connector/harness trouble. F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection
(YELLOW)
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Detail PCU
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner density sensor trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
PCU PWB trouble
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Replace the toner density sensor. Detail PCU
Connector/harness trouble. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner cartridge. Connector/harness trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
(BLACK)
F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Detail PCU
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
specification.) PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector/harness trouble.

F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error H2-00 Thermistor open trouble
(MAGENTA) (TH_UM_AD2)

Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Connector/harness trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Fusing unit not installed.
Connector/harness trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error
(YELLOW)
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
F2-78 Registration image density sensor
trouble (Transfer belt substrate
reflection rate abnormality) H2-02 Sub thermistor open trouble (TH_US)

Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor Cause Thermistor trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble). PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
harness. Fusing unit not installed.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean or replace the transfer belt. H2-03 Compensation thermistor open
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Detail PCU

PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time. harness.
CLUD1 sensor trouble Fusing unit not installed.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
connector of LUD1.
Replace the lift-up unit.
H2-04 Thermistor open (TH_EX1)
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.

H2-05 Thermistor open (TH_EX2) H3-04 Fusing section high temperature
trouble (TH_EX1)
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified
level.
harness.
Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Replace the PCU PWB. harness.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Power unit trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Replace the power unit.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature Harness and connector connection trouble.
trouble (TH_UM) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Error cancel method SIM14
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified H3-05 Fusing section high temperature
level.
Thermistor trouble. trouble (TH_EX2)
PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the Detail PCU
harness.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified
Power unit trouble.
level.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermistor trouble.
heater lamp. PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Replace the thermistor. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Power unit trouble.
Replace the power unit.
Error cancel method SIM14 Harness and connector connection trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature Error cancel method SIM14
trouble (TH_LM)
Detail PCU
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
level.
Thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.Harness and connector
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the
connection trouble.
specified level within the specified time from
Power unit trouble.
turning ON the power relay.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermistor trouble.
heater lamp. Heater lamp trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Thermostat trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Power unit trouble.
Replace the power unit. Interlock switch trouble.
Error cancel method SIM14 Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature Replace the thermostat.
trouble (TH_US) Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Detail PCU Replace the interlock switch.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
level. heater lamp.
Thermistor trouble. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Error cancel method SIM14
harness.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Replace the thermistor.

H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H4-04 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_LM) trouble (TH_EX)

Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the Cause The specified temperature is not reached within the
specified level within the specified time from specified time from starring warm-up.
turning ON the power relay. Thermistor trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Power unit trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the operation of the heater
Power unit trouble. lamp.
Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp. Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the thermostat. Replace the heater lamp.
Check connection of the connector and the Replace the power unit.
harness. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the power unit. Error cancel method SIM14
Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. H4-30 Thermistor input circuit trouble
(TH_UM)
Detail PCU
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature Cause The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do
trouble (TH_US) not exceed the specified value (50 counts in AD
value) within the specified time from turning ON the
HL_UM.
Detail PCU Thermistor trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the Heater lamp trouble.
specified level within the specified time from PCU PWB trouble
turning ON the power relay. Thermostat trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Power unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Interlock switch trouble
Thermostat trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the heater lamp.
Power unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermostat.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the heater lamp. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit.
Replace the thermostat. Replace the interlock switch.
Check connection of the connector and the Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
harness. heater lamp.
Replace the power unit. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the interlock switch. Error cancel method SIM14
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
jam
Detail PCU
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam
paper remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
harness.

H7-10 Fusing low temperature recovery H7-12 Fusing low temperature recovery
trouble (TH_UM_AD2). trouble (TH_US)

Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the
specified level within the specified time from specified level within the specified time from
stopping a job due to fall in the fusing temperature. stopping a job due to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermistor trouble. Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Power unit trouble. Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble. Interlock switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat. Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the Check connection of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Replace the power unit. Replace the power unit.
Replace the interlock switch. Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. heater lamp.
H7-11 Fusing low temperature recovery H7-14 Low temperature trouble (TH_EX) in
trouble (TH_LM) reset operation after JOB stop due to
a fall in the fusing temperature during
Detail PCU a JOB.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the
specified level within the specified time from
stopping a job due to fall in the fusing temperature. Detail PCU
Thermistor trouble. Cause The specified temperature is not reached within the
Heater lamp trouble. specified time in reset operation of the fusing
PCU PWB trouble temperature.
Thermostat trouble. Thermistor trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Power unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Interlock switch trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the heater lamp. Power unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the operation of the heater
Replace the thermostat. lamp.
Check connection of the connector and the Replace the thermistor.
Replace the power unit. Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the interlock switch. harness.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Replace the heater lamp.
heater lamp. Replace the power unit.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H8-00 Fusing unit initial detection trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is
conducted for the specified time.
Fusing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
[FUCRU] fuse blowing circuit.
Use SIM30-1 to check the [FUCRU] initial detection
input signal.
Replace the fusing unit.
harness.

L4-02 Paper feed motor lock trouble L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble

Cause The paper feed motor lock signal is not detected Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble.
within 1 sec in warming up. PCU PWB trouble.
Paper feed motor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Harness connection trouble between the PCU harness.
PWB and the paper feed motor. Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Check & Remedy Use Sim6-1 to check the operation of the paper Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of
feed motor. the transfer unit.
Check the harness and connector between the Install the primary transfer belt unit.
PCU PWB and the paper feed motor. Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Replace the paper feed motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Replace the transfer unit separation clutch.
L4-03 Fusing motor lock trouble

L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Detail PCU
the fusing motor. Cause A change in the state of the separation sensor is
Fusing motor trouble. not detected in the specified time during separating
PCU PWB trouble. operation of the secondary transfer unit.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Secondary transfer unit separation mechanism
harness. trouble
Check & Remedy Use Sim6-1 to check the operation of the fusing Secondary transfer unit separation motor trouble.
motor. Secondary transfer unit separation sensor trouble.
Replace the fusing motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Check connection of the connector and the PCU PWB trouble.
harness. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the secondary transfer unit
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON separation mechanism.
Replace the secondary transfer unit separation
motor.
L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) Replace the secondary transfer unit separation
sensor.
Detail PCU harness.
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Replace the PCU PWB.
the developing motor. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Developing motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
developing motor. Detail PCU
Replace the developing motor. Cause No change in the fusing pressure release sensor
Check connection of the connectors and the signal is detected within the specified time after
harness. turning ON the fusing pressure release solenoid.
Replace the PCU PWB. Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Replace the developing motor. Fusing pressure release solenoid trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Fusing pressure release level F, R trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON PCU PWB trouble.
Fusing motor trouble.
L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Replace the fusing pressure release solenoid.
Detail PCU Replace the fusing pressure release lever F, R.
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Replace the PCU PWB.
the developing motor. Fusing motor trouble.
Developing motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
PCU PWB trouble
developing motor.
Replace the developing motor.
harness.
Replace the developing motor.

L4-29 HDD fan trouble L4-34 LSU fan trouble

Cause The fan lock signal is detected during rotation of Cause The fan rotation signal is not detected in the
the HDD fan. specified time during operation of the LSU fan.
HDD fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
MFP PWB trouble. harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the LSU fan trouble.
harness. LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan Check & Remedy Use Sim6-2 to check the operation of the fan.
motor. Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the HDD fan. harness.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the LSU fan.
Replace the connector or the harness. Replace the LSU control PWB.
L4-30 MFP PWB fan trouble L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble

Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
the MFP PWB fan. specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation.
MFP PWB fan trouble. Fusing cooling fan trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the MFP PCU PWB trouble
PWB and the fan motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the
MFP PWB trouble. harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
motor. fan.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Check the harness and connector between the Replace the PCU PWB.
MFP PWB and the fan motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the MFP PWB fan. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
L4-50 Process fan trouble

L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the process fan operation.
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan Process fan trouble.
operation. PCU PWB trouble
Paper exit cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
PCU PWB trouble harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
harness. power.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the Replace the process fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the Harness and connector connection trouble.
fan. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON L4-51 Process fan 2 trouble
Detail PCU
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the process fan 2 operation.
Detail PCU Process fan trouble.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the PCU PWB trouble.
specified time in the power cooling fan operation. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Power cooling fan trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Connection trouble of the connector and the power.
harness. Replace the process fan 2.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the Replace the PCU PWB.
fan. Check connection of the connector and the
Replace the power cooling fan. harness.
Check/replace the connector or the harness.

L6-10 Polygon motor trouble U1-01 Battery trouble

Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 7 Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
sec after starting rotation of the polygon motor. 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Polygon motor trouble. Check & Check to confirm that the battery voltage is
LSU control PWB trouble. Remedy about 2.0V or above.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Use SIM13 to cancel the trouble.
harness. Error cancel method SIM13
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
harness.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU. Detail MFP
Replace the LSU control PWB. Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Detail PCU Check the power environment.
Cause No full wave signal is detected. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. inconsistency
Check connection of the connectors and the Detail MFP
harness. Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON before turning OFF the power is installed.
HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
L8-02 Full wave signal error Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device
cloning), import it.
Detail PCU
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is Error cancel method SIM16
detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
45Hz or less.)PCU PWB trouble. U2-10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication
Power unit trouble. index check sum error
harness.
Power frequency, waveform abnormality. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
Replace the power unit. basic data) check sum error.
Check connection of the connectors and the MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
harness. Strong external noises.
Check the power waveform. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Transfer the user index information data in the
HDD to the SRAM.
L8-20 MFP PWB - Mother board Error cancel method SIM16
communication error
U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
Detail MFP sum error
Cause Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Detail MFP
Replace the mother board. Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and EEPROM socket contact trouble.
the MFPC PWB. MFP PWB trouble.
Check the earth line of the main unit. Strong external noises.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Replace the mother board. Replace the MFP PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Error cancel method SIM16

U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user U6-00 PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit
authentication counter check sum communication error
error
Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Error when testing the communication line after
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB Replace the desk control PWB.
manufacturing No. data inconsistency Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No.
saved in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB,
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB Detail PCU
before replacement is not mounted on the new Cause D1ULD does not turn ON within the specified time
PWB. when lift-up operation.
MFP PWB trouble. D1ULD sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Lift unit trouble.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was Connection trouble of the connector and the
mounted on the PWB before replacement is harness.
mounted on the new PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Check & Remedy Replace the D1ULD sensor.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the lift unit.
Error cancel method SIM16 Harness and connector connection trouble.
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Detail PCU U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble

Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause D2ULD does not turn ON within the specified time
EEPROM socket contact trouble. when lift-up operation.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. D2ULD sensor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Lift unit trouble.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Connection trouble of the connector and the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter harness.
data and the adjustment values. PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the D2ULD sensor.
Error cancel method SIM16 Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
U6-03 Desk paper feed tray 3 lift trouble
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Cause The D3ULD sensor is not turned ON within the
Replace the PCU PWB. specified time during lift-up operation.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. D3ULD sensor trouble.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Desk control PWB trouble.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter Lift unit trouble.
data and the adjustment values. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. harness.
Error cancel method SIM16 PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the D3ULD sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
harness.

U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency
motor trouble (MFP - PCU)

Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
rpm abnormality, over-current to the motor). the PCU.
Desk control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the PCU.
harness. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
transport motor.
Replace the desk control PWB. A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. (MFP - OPU)
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble the OPU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
OPU.
Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
the desk.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit A0-15 DSK boot ROM error
mode.
Replace the desk control PWB. Detail PCU
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Cause A ROM different from the DSK boot ROM is
installed to the DSK machine.
A boot ROM which is not of DSK type is installed to
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error the machine to which DSK is installed.
Check & Remedy Install a proper DSK boot ROM.
Detail MFP Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-20 MFP firmware version and EEPROM
ROM trouble. data version inconsistency
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
ROM trouble. Detail MFP
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-02 OPU PWB ROM error Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP A0-21 PCU firmware version and EEPROM

Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
data version inconsistency
operation, etc.
ROM trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
again. and the EEPROM data version.
ROM trouble. Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).

[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
* Firmware types
1. Outline
Display item Item description
A. Cases where update is required MAIN BODY CONFIG Configuration data
ROM update is required in the following cases: ICU(MAIN) First half of the ICU main section
ICU(BOOTM) ICU boot section main
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
ICU(BOOTCN) ICU boot section CN
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the LANGUAGE Data program for language support
machine. GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
repair to the machine. OPU(BOOT) OPU boot section
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be OPU(MAIN) OPU main section
repaired. ESCP_FONT ESCP/P font
PDL_FONT PDL font
B. Notes for update ANIMATION Animation data
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
WEB HELP WEB help
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
UNICODE UNICODE table
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
OPTION DESK(BOOT) Desk unit boot section
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware DESK(MAIN) Desk unit main section
FIN(BOOT) Inner finisher boot section
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
FIN(MAIN) Inner finisher main section
1) Firmware update using media
FAX(BOOT) FAX1 boot section
2) Firmware update using FTP FAX(MAIN) FAX1 main section
3) Firmware update using Web page
4) Emergency update (in case of an HDD breakdown)
2. Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media *1
Firmware.sfu Adapter
Firmware.sfu + USB Host & on the go
Firmware.sfu USB Memory The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
Manual Data
Firmware.sfu
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx.sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P FIRMWARE UPDATE 7 – 1

(1) Firmware update procedure from the USB memory 4) With [ALL] selected, press [OK] key.
The firmware update executes by SIM49-01. When all the firmware files are selected, all the firmware items
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware are highlighted.
into the main unit. (Use the USB I/F of the operation panel sec- * Normally select all the firmware programs and execute
tion.) updating.
2) Enter the SIM49-01 mode. * In this case, the firmware which does not exit on the
Select the file to be updated. machine side is ignored. (Example: The firmware of an
option which is not installed cannot be updated.)
Enter the number indicated on the left of the target firmware
file, and press [OK] key and [OSA shortcut] key. To update a certain firmware only, enter the number indi-
cated on the left of the target firmware file with 10-key, and
0$,1 press [OSA shortcut] key.
.(< * When the firmware key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is
grayed out and the operation is not accepted.
5) Select [EXECUTE] with the scroll key, and press [OK] key.
0$,1
.(<
&
If the target firmware file is in the folder directory, enter the

number indicated on the left of the folder and press [OK] key
and [OSA shortcut] key.
&
With the above procedure, the folder with the target firmware
file in it is selected.
6) Select [YES] with the scroll key, and press [OK] key.
0$,1
The update of the selected firmware is executed.
.(<
The process status is indicated with "*" mark under "FIRM-
WARE UPDATE" of the title section.
Meaning of mark: S: Start, E: End
0$,1
.(<
&
* When entering the SIM49-01 mode, if no media or no USB

memory is inserted, or if connection is defective, the mes-
sage of "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE CONTAINING
MFP FIRMWARE" is displayed on the screen.
In this case, insert the USB memory or check the connec-
tion. During the update operation, the above screen is displayed,
Insert the media or USB memory and press [OSA shortcut] but the version and the firmware select key are not displayed.
key, and the file is opened. 7) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
If [OSA shortcut] key is pressed without inserting the media, played.
the screen does not transfer and remains in the standby 0$,1
mode for entry. .(<
3) The current version number and the version number to be
updated will be shown for each kind of firmware respectively.
The current version is indicated on the right of NOW, and the
update version on the right of UP TO.
NOTE: It may take several seconds until content is displayed in
procedure 2.
0$,1
.(<
8) Turn OFF the power, and turn ON the power again and exe-
cute SIM22-05 to check that the firmware has been updated.
* When the power supply is turned off due to a black out etc. while
updating or when the update terminated abnormally, a part of the
main program stored in HDD may be damaged and may not
booted normally.
In this case, the firmware must be installed again by the emer-
& gency firmware update procedures described in section D.
(Refer to Chapter 11, Section 4, Item c)

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 2
10.36.112.8 10.36.113.6
Firmware.sfu
Machine 3 Machine 4
FTP client
10.36.114.2
10.36.101.5
C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the firmware.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
special firmware upgrade page appears. pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
MX-C400P
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
D. Emergency update (in case of an HDD

3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
breakdown)
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro- The HDD of this machine stores the main program along with the
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." sophisticated variations.
appears. When, therefore, the HDD breaks down, or when the HDD must be
replaced with another HDD, or when the main program in the HDD
is damaged by turning OFF the power during the firmware updat-
ing, the firmware (main program) must be reinstalled into the HDD
or revised by the Boot mode.
(Refer to Chapter 11, Section 4, Item c.)

CN-3
CN-9 BU14P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) BM06B-CZSS-1-TF
MX-C400P
B16B-CZHK-B-1 1 D-GND 14 1 D-GND

D-GND 16 2 5VO 13 2 5VO
5VO 15 3 nWU_LED 12 3 nWU_LED
nINFO_LED 14 4 nPOW_LED 11 4 nPOW_LED
nWU_LED 13 5 nWU_KEY 10 5 nWU_KEY
nPOW_LED 12 6 nPWR_SW 9 6 nPWR_SW
nWU_KEY 11
nPWR_SW 10 CN-8 CN-4
nLCD_DISP 9 BM10B-CZSS-1-TF FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
nPOF_SCN 8 7 nLCD_DISP 8 1 nLCD_DISP D-GND 40 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 7 8 nPOF_SCN 7 2 nPOF_SCN D-GND 39 D-GND
nRES_SCN 6 9 nRES_SCN 6 3 nRES_SCN 2.5V_LCD 38 2.5V
nRTS_SCN 5 10 nRTS_SCN 5 4 nRTS_SCN 2.5V_LCD 37 2.5V
TXD_SCN 4 11 TXD_SCN 4 5 TXD_SCN R0 36 R0
and for displaying the status.

CTS_SCN 3 12 CTS_SCN 3 6 CTS_SCN R1 35 R1
RXD_SCN 2 13 RXD_SCN 2 7 RXD_SCN R2 34 R2
D-GND 1 14 D-GND 1 8 D-GND R3 33 R3
1. Operation panel
9 (NC) R4 32 R4
10 (NC) R5 31 R5
R6 30 R6
R7 29 R7
CN-6 G0 28 G0
B. Operational descriptions
CN-8 501190-2017 G1 27 G1
B34B-PHDSS-B DF1B-18DES-2.5RC + DF1B-18DEP-2.5RC 20 D-GND G2 26 G2
D-GND 34 18 D-GND G3 25 G3
D-GND 33 18 D-GND 18 4 D-GND G4 24 G4
LCD_DATA3+ 32 16 LCD_DATA3+ 16 2 LCD_DATA3+ G5 23 G5
SCANDATA3+ 31 14 LCD_DATA3- 14 1 LCD_DATA3- G6 22 G6
LCD_DATA3- 30 12 D-GND 12 3 D-GND G7 21 G7
A. Electrical and relation diagram
SCANDATA3- 29 10 LCD_CLK+ 10 5 LCD_CLK+ B0 20 B0

D-GND 28 8 LCD_CLK- 8 7 LCD_CLK- B1 19 B1
D-GND 27 6 D-GND 6 10 D-GND B2 18 B2
LCD_CLK+ 26 4 SCANCLKOUT+ 4 8 SCANCLKOUT+ B3 17 B3
SCANCLKOUT+ 25 2 SCANCLKOUT- 2 6 SCANCLKOUT- B4 16 B4
OPE CNT PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation key.
LCD_CLK- 24 17 D-GND 17 9 D-GND B5 15 B5
SCANCLKOUT- 23 15 LCD_DATA2+ 15 11 LCD_DATA2+ B6 14 B6
LSU MOTHER PWB

D-GND 22 13 LCD_DATA2- 13 13 LCD_DATA2- B7 13 B7
D-GND 21 11 D-GND 11 15 D-GND D-GND 12 D-GND
LCD_DATA2+ 20 9 LCD_DATA1+ 9 17 LCD_DATA1+ CK 11 CK
SCANDATA2+ 19 7 LCD_DATA1- 7 19 LCD_DATA1- DISP2 10 DISP
LCD_DATA2- 18 5 D-GND 5 16 D-GND Hsync 9 Hsync
SCANDATA2- 17 3 LCD_DATA0+ 3 14 LCD_DATA0+ Vsync 8 Vsync
D-GND 16 1 LCD_DATA0- 1 12 LCD_DATA0- (NC) 7 (NC)
D-GND 15 S P 5V_LCD 6 5V
LCD_DATA1+ 14 5V_LCD 5 5V
SCANDATA1+ 13 (NC) 4 (NC)
The operation panel unit is composed of the PRT OPE PWB, the
color LCD, which is used for operations and settings of the machine
The operation panel of this machine is provided with an 4.3 inch
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
LCD_DATA1- 12 (NC) 3 (NC)

SCANDATA1- 11 D-GND 2 D-GND
D-GND 10 D-GND 1 D-GND
D-GND 9
OPE CNT PWB

LCD_DATA0+ 8
SCANDATA0+ 7 CN-3
LCD_DATA0- 6 046298004000883+
SCANDATA0- 5 5V_LCD 1
LCDSEL3 4 (NC) 2
LCDSEL1 3 (NC) 3
LCDSEL2 2 FB 4
LCDSEL0 1
CN-2 CN-1
BM10B-CZSS-1-TF BM10B-CZSS-1-TF
D-GND 1 10 D-GND
/BZR 2 9 /BZR
CN-7 /F0D1 3 8 /F0D1
BU08P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) BM08B-CZSS-1-TF SEG1LEDCPR 4 7 SEG1LEDCPR
PRT OPE PWB
1 LCDSEL3 8 1 LCDSEL3 SEG2D0 5 6 SEG2D0

2 LCDSEL2 7 2 LCDSEL2 /F1D2 6 5 /F1D2
BACK LIGHT
3 LCDSEL1 6 3 LCDSEL1 D-GND 7 4 D-GND

4 LCDSEL0 5 4 LCDSEL0 /KEYIN 8 3 /KEYIN
CN-203 5 3.3V 4 5 3.3V 3.3V_EXT 9 2 3.3V_EXT
B5P-VH-B SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N 6 5VN 3 6 5VN /F3G1 10 1 /F3G1
12V 3 1 12V 1 7 12V 2 7 12V
LCD
2 5VN 2 8 D-GND 1 8 D-GND

5GTXKEG/CPWCN
CN-204 3 3.3V 3
B7P-VH-B 4 D-GND 4
5VN 5 P R
(NC)
CN-205
B4P-VH-B
D-GND
3.3V 3
D-GND 4
3
2
nPWRSW 1
BM03B-PASS-1-TFT
CN-2
HL DCDC PWB
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 8 – 1

D-GND
PWRSW
nPWRSW
OPE CNT PWB
3
2
1
2. Manual paper feed section
4
MPFS
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
1 24V3 1
3
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
2 /MPFS 2
MPED
P R
5
MPWS
179228-3
CN-17 33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 3 5VNPD(R˄)
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) 2 D-GND
1 /MPED
24V3 B-1 A-17 24V3 A-1
/MPFS B-2 A-16 /MPFS A-2
5VNPD(R˄) B-3 A-15 5VNPD(R˄) A-3
D-GND B-4 A-14 D-GND A-4
/MPED B-5 A-13 /MPED A-5 SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N
5VNPD(R˄) B-6 A-12 5VNPD(R˄) A-6 1 5VNPD(R˄) 1
D-GND B-7 A-11 D-GND A-7 2 D-GND 2
/MPLD B-8 A-10 /MPLD A-8 3 /MPED 3 PHR-3
5VN B-9 A-9 5VN A-9 4 F-GND 4 3 5VN
MPWD B-10 A-8 MPWD A-10 P R 2 MPWD
D-GND B-11 A-7 D-GND A-11 1 D-GND
TH_M B-12 A-6 TH_M A-12
HUD_M B-14 A-4 HUD_M A-14 SMP-06V-NC + SMR-06V-N
5VN B-15 A-3 5VN A-15 1 5VNPD(R˄) 1
A-2 F-GND A-16 2 D-GND 2
A-1 (NC) A-17
3 /MPLD 3
R P 4 5VN 4
5 MPWD 5 179228-3
6 D-GND 6 3 5VNPD(R˄)
P R 2 D-GND
1 /MPLD

MPLD1
PCU PWB
CPFM
CN-15
B20B-PNDZS S6B-XH-A-1
CPFM_OUT_A 9 1 CPFM_OUT_A
24V_CPFM 11 2 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 13 3 CPFM_OUT_/A
CPFM_OUT_B 15 4 CPFM_OUT_B
CPFM_OUT_/B 19 6 CPFM_OUT_/B
š56 HB UNI
Signal name Name Function and operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Detects paper empty in the manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper feed clutch solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed clutch.
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
No. Name Function and operation

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation sheet Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
3 Paper feed tray lift cam Lifts the paper feed lift plate.
4 Paper feed lift plate Presses paper on the top onto the paper feed roller.
5 Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper feed roller.
Power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted to the paper
feed cam by the paper feed clutch to lift the paper feed lift plate so
that paper on the top is pressed onto the paper feed roller and the
paper feed roller is rotated to feed paper on the manual paper feed
tray to the paper transport section.
Every time when one sheet of paper is fed, the paper feed roller
rotates one turn and the paper feed lift plate performs lifting once.
The separation sheet is provided to prevent double-feed.
ON/OFF of paper feed operation is controlled by the manual paper
feed clutch solenoid.
The paper size is detected by the paper width detector (MPWS)
and the paper length detector (MPLD1).
Relationship between paper size detection and the paper width
detector (MPWS) and the paper length detector (MPLD1)
MPWS
detection width MPLD1 Metric series Inch series NOTE
(mm)
207.9 – 221 ON FC (8.5" x 13") 8.5" x 14"
207.9 – 221 – 8.5" x 11"
202 – 218 A4 -
176.2 – 192.2 7.25" x 10.5"
174 – 190 B5
140.5 – 156.5 A5
131.7 – 147.7 5.5" x 8.5"
94 – 108 Postcard Japan only

CN-15
S6B-XH-A-1 B20B-PNDZS
5
CPFC
24V_CPFM 17 24V_CPFM
š56 HB UNI
CPFM
1 /CPFC 1
2 24V3 2 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
P R 1 /CPUC1 1 12 /CPUC1
2 24V3 2 14 24V3
CPUC1
3 /CPFC 3 16 /CPFC
4 24V3 4 18 24V3
R P
1 /CPUC1 1
2 24V3 2
P R
PAP-02V-S SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N
P-GND 1 1 P-GND 1
/CLUM 2 2 /CLUM 2
3 5VNPD 3
CLUM
179228-3 4 /CSPD1 4

5VNPD 1 5 D-GND 5
/CSPD1 2 6 (NC) 6
D-GND 3 7 (NC) 7
8 (NC) 8
P R
5
CPFD1
CSPD1
DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC CN-8
+ DF1B-20DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS
1 P-GND 1 5 P-GND
2 /CLUM 2 7 /CLUM
CLUD1
3 5VNPD 3 9 5VNPD
CN-1
PPD1
4 /CSPD1 4 11 /CSPD1
S04B-PASK-2 5 D-GND 5 13 D-GND
D-GND 1 6 D-GND 6 15 D-GND
/CSS13 2 7 /CSS13 7 17 /CSS13
/CSS12 3 8 /CSS12 8 19 /CSS12
/CSS11 4 9 /CSS11 9 21 /CSS11
10 /TRC_DSK 10
11 RES_DSK 11 12 /TRC_DSK
12 DSR_DSK 12 14 RES_DSK
13 /DTR_DSK 13 16 DSR_DSK
12
14 RXD_DSK 14 18 /DTR_DSK
9
15 TXD_DSK 15 20 RXD_DSK
1
16 D-GND 16 22 TXD_DSK
4
17 (NC) 17 24 D-GND
18 24V_DSK 18
3
19 P-GND 19
20 5VN 20
P S
CPED1 2
10
6
11
PCU PWB
179228-3
1 5VNPD
3 D-GND
2 /PPD1
04XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
1 5VNPD 4
3
3 D-GND 2
1
03XR-6H-P
2 /CPED1
2 /CPFD1
1 5VNPD
1 5VNPD
292254-4
3 D-GND
3 D-GND
1 5VNPD
3 D-GND
2 /CLUD
4 F-GND
2 /PPD1
8
179228-4
3. Paper feed tray section
9
14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF)(SN)
7
14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL(LF)(SN)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPED1
/CPFD1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
F-GND
/CLUD
/PPD1
(NC)
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN)
A-15
A-14
A-13
A-12
A-11
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
CN-13
B30B-CZWHK-B-1
A-2 /CPED1
A-5 /CPFD1
A-4 5VNPD
A-1 5VNPD
A-7 5VNPD
A-10 5VNPD
A-3 D-GND
A-6 D-GND
A-9 D-GND
A-12 D-GND
A-13 F-GND
A-14 F-GND
CZHR-15V-S
A-8 /CLUD
A-15 5VNPD
A-11 /PPD1
A-15 (NC)
A-14 /CPED1
A-13 D-GND
A-12 5VNPD
A-11 /CPFD1
A-10 D-GND
A-9 5VNPD
A-8 /CLUD
A-7 D-GND
A-6 5VNPD
A-5 /PPD1
A-4 D-GND
CLUD1 Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
CLUM Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
CPED1 Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector Detects paper empty in the paper feed tray 1.
CPFC Paper feed tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller 1 in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPFD1 Paper transport detector 1 Detects paper pass in the paper transport roller 1. Detects a paper jam.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the rollers (the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, the paper
transport roller 2) in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CSPD1 Paper remaining quantity detector Detects the paper remaining quantity in the paper feed tray 1.
PPD1 Paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the paper transport roller 2. Detects a paper jam.

1 Paper transport roller 2 Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the resist roller.
2 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1) Picks up paper on the top and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
3 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
4 Paper separation roller (Paper feed tray 1) Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
5 Paper transport roller 1 Transports paper from the paper feed tray section to the transport roller 2.
6 Paper size detection block The paper size is detected by the paper size detection PWB by utilizing that the concave and
the convex positions of the block which is in contact with the paper size detection PWB
detector are changed according to the paper length.
7 Paper guide (Longitudinal direction) When the position is changed according to the paper length, the concave and the convex
positions of the paper size detection block which is in contact with the paper size detection
PWB detector are changed by the paper size detection block drive gear.
8 Paper size detection block drive gear Transmits the paper guide (longitudinal direction) position to the paper size detection block
position in order to perform paper size detection.
9 Paper guide (Lateral direction) The guide plate to prevent paper feed skew.
10 Lift plate Lifts up paper, and maintains the contact pressure between paper on the top and the paper
pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
11 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size by using combination of ON/OFF of three switches and the concave
and the convex sections of the paper size detection block whose position is changed in
connection with the paper guide (longitudinal direction).
12 Paper remaining quantity detection actuator The lift plate position is changed according to the paper remaining quantity and the paper
remaining quantity detection actuator position is also changed. The paper remaining detector
detects the changes to recognize the paper remaining quantity.
B. Paper lifting operation D. Paper size detection operation

Set paper in the paper feed tray and insert the paper feed tray into Detects the paper size by using combination of ON/OFF of three
the machine. The lift plate lifts up. switches and the concave and the convex sections of the paper
Paper is lifted by the lift motor (CLUM). size detection block whose position is changed in connection with
the paper guide (longitudinal direction).
When the paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector (CLUD1) detects
the top of paper, the lift motor (CLUM) stops and the contact pres- When the paper guide (longitudinal direction) position is changed,
sure between paper on the top and the paper pickup roller the concave and convex sections of the paper size detection block
becomes the proper level when paper is picked up. which are in contact with the paper size detection PWB detector
are changed by the paper size detection block drive gear.
When the paper remaining quantity is decreased, the lift plate lifts
up in each case to maintain the contact pressure between paper on Relationship between paper size detection and the paper size
the top and the paper pickup roller at the proper level when paper is detector (paper size detection PWB switch)
picked up.
SW1 SW2 SW3 Metric series Inch series
C. Paper feed operation ON – 8.5" x 14"
ON B5 7.25" x 10.5"
The paper feed motor (CPFM) is turned ON, and then the paper
ON A4 –
feed clutch (CPUC1) is turned ON.
ON ON A5 5.5" x 8.5"
The power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted through ON ON FC (8.5" x 13") –
the paper feed clutch (CPUC1) to the paper pickup roller and the ON ON – 8.5" x 11"
paper feed roller.
The paper pickup roller descends to pick up paper on the top and E. Paper remaining quantity detection operation
feed it to the paper feed roller. There are four levels of the paper remaining quantity: 3 levels of
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section. remaining quantity and paper empty.
At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent double-feed. Paper empty:
The paper tray 1 paper empty detector (CRPED1) is turned ON.
When the paper remaining quantity is 2/3 - 3/3:
The paper remaining quantity detector (CSPD1) is not turned ON
when paper on the paper feed tray is lifted up and the paper feed
tray upper limit detector (CLUD) detects paper on the top and lifting
is stopped.

When the paper remaining quantity is 1/3 - 2/3:
The paper remaining quantity detector (CSPD1) is turned ON when
paper on the paper feed tray is lifted up and the paper feed tray
upper limit detector (CLUD) detects paper on the top and lifting is
stopped.
When the paper remaining quantity is 1/3 or less:
The paper remaining quantity detector (CSPD1) is turned ON once,
and then turned OFF.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Lift plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

FUM
ADUC1

APPD1
APPD2
DSW-R
TH/HUD
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
2 P-GND +(R)
3 (NC) 1 1
CN-16 2 PWM(Brw) 2
4 /FUM_CK
-(BIk)
B18B-PNDZS 3 3
3
5 /FUM_D
1 4 Lock(W) 4
2
INT24V2
POFM
6 (NC)
P-GND 3 7 FUM_LD R P
/FUM_CK 5
/FUM_D 7
/FUM_LD 9
4
/ADUC1 14 1 /ADUC1 1
24V3 16 2 24V3 2
P R
179228-3
1 /APPD1
4. Paper transport and switchback section
CN-1 2 D-GND
B2P-VH 3 5VNPD(R˄)
PS-187
+24V1 1 1 +24V1 179228-3
DSW_R(24V) 2 1 /APPD2
PS-187 2 D-GND
1 DSW_R(24V) 3 5VNPD(R˄)
PHR-4
RRM
4 TH_M
PCU PWB
3 D-GND
33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 2 HUD_M
CN-17 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN)
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 1 5VN
POFM_V A-15 B-1 POFM_V B-16
/POFM_CNT A-14 B-2 /POFM_CNT B-15
P-GND A-13 B-3 P-GND B-14
/POFM_LD A-12 B-4 /POFM_LD B-13
/APPD1 A-11 B-5 /APPD1 B-12
D-GND A-10 B-6 D-GND B-11
5VNPD(R˄) A-9 B-7 5VNPD(R˄) B-10
/APPD2 A-8 B-8 /APPD2 B-9
5VNPD(R˄) A-6 B-10 5VNPD(R˄) B-7
TH_M B-12 A-6 TH_M A-12
HUD_M B-14 A-4 HUD_M A-14
5VN B-15 A-3 5VN A-15
A-2 F-GND A-16
A-1 (NC) A-17
R P
CN-15
B20B-PNDZS B4B-PH-K
RRM_OUT_/B 1 1 RRM_OUT_/B
RRM_OUT_/A 3 2 RRM_OUT_/A
RRM_OUT_B 5 3 RRM_OUT_B
RRM_OUT_A 7 4 RRM_OUT_A
1
CN-13
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) 179228-3
5VNPD B-13 B-3 5VNPD B-13 1 5VNPD
/PPD2 B-14 B-2 /PPD2 B-14 2 /PPD2
D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND B-15 3 D-GND
PPD2
CZHR-15V-S
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the paper transport section and the switchback section.
PPD2 Paper transport detector 3 Detects paper pass in front of the resist roller, and controls the stop timing of paper at the
resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Controls ON/OFF of the resist roller. Controls the relationship between images and paper.
ADUC1 Switchback transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the switchback section.
DSW-R Right door open/close detection switch Detects open/close of the right door.
APPD1 Switchback paper transport detector 1 Detects paper pass in the switchback section. Detects a paper jam.
APPD2 Switchback paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the switchback section. Detects a paper jam.
TH/HUD Temperature and humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity to use them as process control parameters.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the paper exit section.

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section.
2 Paper transport roller 4 Transports paper in the switchback section.
3 Paper transport roller 5 Transports paper in the switchback section.
4 Switchback guide Guides paper to the switchback section.
B. Functions and operations of the resist roller

The resist roller is driven by the resist motor (RRM). By changing
the OFF/ON timing of the motor, the relationship between images
and paper is controlled.
The transport roller 2 is stopped after passing a certain time from
when the paper transport detector 3 (PPD2) detects passing of the
paper lead edge and the paper lead edge reaches the resist roller
position.
Due to this time lag, paper is warped between the paper transport
roller 2 and the resist roller.
This warp is intentionally made to make the paper lead edge push
onto the resist roller, reducing variations in the relationship between
the paper and images.
Then, the paper transport roller and the resist roller rotate to trans-
port the paper to the transfer section.
C. Paper transport to the switchback section

When printing is made on the back surface of paper in the duplex
mode, the images on the front surface are transferred and the
paper passes the fusing section, and then the paper is switched
back in the paper exit section, and the paper is transported to the
switchback section by the switchback guide.

5. LSU section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
10
CN-13
CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) B30B-CZWHK-B-1
A-15 5VNPD A-1 A-15 5VNPD
A-14 /CPED1 A-2 A-14 /CPED1
A-13 D-GND A-3 A-13 D-GND
9 A-12
A-11
5VNPD
/CPFD1
A-4
A-5
A-12 5VNPD
A-11 /CPFD1
11 A-9
A-8
5VNPD
/CLUD
A-7
A-8
A-9 5VNPD
A-8 /CLUD
9 A-5
A-4
/PPD1
D-GND
A-11
A-12
A-5 /PPD1
A-4 D-GND
A-3 F-GND A-13 A-3 1TCSET
4 11 A-2
A-1
F-GND
(NC)
A-14
A-15
A-2 /1TCCRU
A-1 D-GND
B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND

9 B-2 DRSET
B-3 D-GND
B-14
B-13
B-2
B-3
DRSET
D-GND
B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y
B-5 /DRCRU_M B-11 B-5 /DRCRU_M
CN1 CN-1
4 11 B-6 /DRCRU_C
B-7 /DRCRU_K
B-10
B-9
B-6
B-7
/DRCRU_C
/DRCRU_K
B05B-PASK-1 SM05B-PASS-1 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
TH 1 1 TH
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 1 +(R) 1 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
BD 3 3 BD 9 2 -(Blk)
3 Lock(W) 3
2 B-11 P-GND
B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-5
B-4
B-11
B-12
P-GND
/LSUFM_LD
D-GND 4
5VLD 5
4 D-GND
5 5VLD
11 4 P R B-13 5VNPD
B-14 /PPD2
B-3
B-2
B-13
B-14
5VNPD
/PPD2
LSUFM B-15 D-GND
CZHR-15V-S
B-1 B-15 D-GND
1
6 PCU PWB
4
6 2
5 5 8 CN-10 CN-7
B22B-CZWHK-B-1 B22B-CZWHK-B-1
6 2 7 nRES_PCU
5VNPD
A-1
A-2
A-11 PCU_RES
A-10 5VNPD
nRTS_PCU A-3 A-9 PCU_DTR
nCTS_PCU A-4 A-8 PCU_DSR
nPOF_PCU A-5 A-7 /POF
5 LSUASIC_RST A-6
nSCK_LSU
A-6 LSU_RST
A-7 A-5 SCK
nRSV_DAT A-8 A-4 RSV_DAT
TH_LSU A-9 A-3 TH1_LSU
D-GND A-10 A-2 D-GND
12 (NC) A-11 A-1 (NC)
5 D-GND
TXD_PCU
B-11
B-10
B-1
B-2
D-GND
PCU_TxD
RXD_PCU
PGM1 3 nINFO_LED
B-9
B-8
B-3
B-4
PCU_RxD
/FAX_LED
nTRANS_RST B-7 B-5 TRANS_RST
nTRANS_DAT B-6 B-6 TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT B-5 B-7 JOBEND_INT
nPCU_TRG B-4 B-8 (/PCU_TRG)
D-GND B-3 B-9 D-GND
D-GND B-2 B-10 D-GND
5 INT5V B-1 B-11 INT5V
LSU MOTHER
5 PWB
CN-4
5
CN-3 CN-17
SM06B-PASS-1 179228-5 TX24-60R-6ST-H1E
TX25-60P-6ST-H1E
24V 1 5 24V CNCHK 1 CNCHK
2 P-GND 1
P-GND 4 LD_CHK_4 31 LDCHK_1 2 2 LDCHK_1 31 LD_CHK_4
nSTART 3 3 nSTART LD_CHK_3 32 DT_C1+ 3 DT_C1+ 32 LD_CHK_3
4 3
LOCK 2 LOCK LD_CHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 4 DT_C1- 33 LD_CHK_2
CLK 5 1 CLK nLDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 DT_C2+ 34 nLDERR_Y
(NC)BRAKE 6
5
nLDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 6 DT_C2- 35 nLDERR_C
VREF_C1 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1
nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C
nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
nSH_C1 40 D-GND 11 11 D-GND 40 nSH_C1
VREF_K1 42 DT_Y1+ 13 13 DT_Y1+ 42 VREF_K1
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nENB_K 44 DT_Y2+ 15 15 DT_Y2+ 44 nENB_K
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2
VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2
VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2
VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2
VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1
VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2
nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M
nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD
D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND
D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
+5VLD 55 D-GND 26 26 D-GND 55 +5VLD
P-GND 56 nBRAKE 27 27 nBRAKE 56 P-GND
P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 28 nPOLY_CK 57 P-GND
+24V1 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29 29 nPOLY_LOCK 58 +24V1
+24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+3.3V 60 60 +3.3V

LSUFM LSU fan Cools the LSU high voltage PWB section.
PGM 1 Polygon motor Rotates at a constant speed to scan laser beams.

1 LD PWB Converts video data into laser beams. Controls laser beams and laser power.
2 Collimator lens Forms laser beams.
3 fI lens 1 Uniformizes laser beam dot interval in the main scanning direction.
4 fI lens 2 (Equalizes the laser dot interval at the peripheral section and that at the center of the OPC drum.)

5 Mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
6 Incident cylindrical lens Forms laser beams.
7 Condenser lens for BD Condenses laser beams onto the BD PWB.
8 BD PWB Detects the laser scan timing. Detects the temperature in the LSU.
(The temperature in the LSU is detected by the temperature sensor to correct the LSU temperature distortion.)
9 Filter glass Prevents dust and toner from entering the LSU.
10 Shutter Closes the exposure opening in conjunction with the shutter when the waste toner bottle is removed.
11 Laser skew adjustment plate Adjusts laser skew in the main scanning direction for the OPC drum.
12 BD mirror Guides laser beams to the BD (Beam Detector).
13 Filter glass Prevents dust and toner from entering the polygon motor.
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
10
CN-13
A-11 /CPFD1 A-5 A-11 /CPFD1
A-8 /CLUD A-8 A-8 /CLUD
A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1
A-2 F-GND A-14 A-2 /1TCCRU
A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND

B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y
B-5 /DRCRU_M B-11 B-5 /DRCRU_M
B-6 /DRCRU_C B-10 B-6 /DRCRU_C
CN1 CN-1 B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
B05B-PASK-1 SM05B-PASS-1 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
TH 1 1 TH
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 1 +(R) 1 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
BD
D-GND 4
3 3 BD
4 D-GND
11 9 2 -(Blk)
3 Lock(W) 3
2 B-11 P-GND
B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-5
B-4
B-11
B-12
P-GND
/LSUFM_LD
P R B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD
5VLD 5 5 5VLD B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2
LSUFM CZHR-15V-S
1
PCU PWB
4
6
5 5 8
2 CN-10
B22B-CZWHK-B-1
CN-7
B22B-CZWHK-B-1
13 7 nRES_PCU
5VNPD
A-1
A-2
A-11 PCU_RES
A-10 5VNPD
nCTS_PCU A-4 A-8 PCU_DSR
5 nPOF_PCU A-5
LSUASIC_RST A-6
A-7 /POF
A-6 LSU_RST
nSCK_LSU A-7 A-5 SCK
12 (NC) A-11 A-1 (NC)

TXD_PCU B-10 B-2 PCU_TxD
RXD_PCU
PGM1 3 nINFO_LED
B-9
B-8
B-3
B-4
PCU_RxD
/FAX_LED
nPCU_TRG B-4 B-8 (/PCU_TRG)
D-GND B-3 B-9 D-GND
INT5V B-1 B-11 INT5V
5
LSU MOTHER
PWB
CN-4
CN-3 CN-17
SM06B-PASS-1 179228-5 TX24-60R-6ST-H1E
TX25-60P-6ST-H1E
24V 1 5 24V CNCHK 1 CNCHK
2 P-GND 1
P-GND 4 LD_CHK_4 31 LDCHK_1 2 2 LDCHK_1 31 LD_CHK_4
nSTART 3 3 nSTART LD_CHK_3 32 DT_C1+ 3 DT_C1+ 32 LD_CHK_3
4 3
LOCK 2 LOCK LD_CHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 4 DT_C1- 33 LD_CHK_2
CLK 5 1 CLK nLDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 DT_C2+ 34 nLDERR_Y
(NC)BRAKE 6
5
nLDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 6 DT_C2- 35 nLDERR_C
VREF_C1 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1
nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C
nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2
VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2
VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2
VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2
VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1
VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2
nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M
nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD
D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND
D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
+24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+3.3V 60 60 +3.3V

LSUFM LSU fan Cools the LSU high voltage PWB section.
PGM 1 Polygon motor Rotates at a constant speed to scan laser beams.

1 LD PWB Converts video data into laser beams. Controls laser beams and laser power.
2 Collimator lens Forms laser beams.
3 fI lens 1 Uniformizes laser beam dot interval in the main scanning direction.
4 fI lens 2 (Equalizes the laser dot interval at the peripheral section and that at the center of the OPC drum.)
5 Mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
6 Incident cylindrical lens Forms laser beams.
7 Condenser lens for BD Condenses laser beams onto the BD PWB.
8 BD PWB Detects the laser scan timing. Detects the temperature in the LSU.
(The temperature in the LSU is detected by the temperature sensor to correct the LSU temperature distortion.)
9 Filter glass Prevents dust and toner from entering the LSU.
10 Shutter Closes the exposure opening in conjunction with the shutter when the waste toner bottle is removed.
11 Laser skew adjustment plate Adjusts laser skew in the main scanning direction for the OPC drum.
12 BD mirror Guides laser beams to the BD (Beam Detector).
13 Filter glass Prevents dust and toner from entering the polygon motor.
B. Laser scan operation

(1) MX-C400P/C380P
The image data sent from the MFP PWB are converted into video data by the ASIC in the LSU mother PWB, and then converted into laser
beams by the LD PWB to be radiated on the OPC drum surface, forming electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum surface.
In this model, the 2-beam laser system is employed where two laser beams for each color are generated.
Laser beam generating section Laser beam generating section (Scanning image on paper)
Paper exit direction
Rear
Scanning
direction
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1
Front
Laser beam generating section (TOP)

Laser beam generating section (SIDE)
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
The image data sent from the MFP PWB are converted into video data by the ASIC in the LSU mother PWB, and then converted into laser
beams by the LD PWB to be radiated on the OPC drum surface, forming electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum surface.
In this model, the 2-beam laser system is employed.
Laser beam generating section Laser beam generating section (Scanning image on paper)
Paper exit direction

Rear
Scanning
direction
LD2 LD1
Front
Laser beam generating section (TOP)

Laser beam generating section (SIDE)
C. Shutter operation
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
Toner may drop when the toner cartridge is removed therefore a
shutter mechanism will close to prevent toner from contaminating
the filter.
The machine is also provided with the mechanism to adjust skews
of laser beams of each color.
By shifting the front frame section of the fI lens 2 with the cam
mechanism, the laser skew adjustment can be made in the main
scanning direction for the OPC drum.
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
Toner may drop when the toner cartridge is removed therefore a
shutter mechanism will close to prevent toner from contaminating
the filter.
By shifting the front frame section of the fI lens 2 with the cam
mechanism, the laser skew adjustment can be made in the main
scanning direction for the OPC drum.
D. LSU specifications
Effective scan width 220mm
Resolution 1200dpi
Beam diameter Main scan = 50 - 75Pm, Sub scan = 50 - 75Pm
Laser power Max. 0.3mw
LD wavelength 750 - 800nm
Number of mirrors 8 surfaces
Rotation speed 39,862rpm

(1)
CPFM
1TNFD
CN-6
DHPD_K
B20B-PNDZS SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N
DHPD_CL
PROFM1_V 8 1 PROFM1_V 1
Signal name
/PROFM1_CNT
10 2 /PROFM1_CNT 2
P-GND 12 3 P-GND 3
/ROFM1_LD 14 4 /ROFM1_LD 4
P R
CN-13 SMR-12V-N +
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN)
SMP-12V-NC
3
D-GND B-1 B-15 D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1
DRSET B-2 B-14 DRSET B-2 2 DRSET 2
/DRCRU_Y B-4 B-12 /DRCRU_Y B-4 4 /DRCRU_Y 4
/DRCRU_M B-5 B-11 /DRCRU_M B-5 5 /DRCRU_M 5
DRCRU_Y
/DRCRU_C B-6 B-10 /DRCRU_C B-6 6 /DRCRU_C 6 179228-2
/DRCRU_K B-7 B-9 /DRCRU_K B-7 7 /DRCRU_K 7 1 /DRCRU_Y
PROFM1
/1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 8 /1TNFD 8
MX-C400P/C380P
2 D-GND
LSUFM_V B-10 B-6 LSUFM_V B-10 10 F-GND 10 179228-2
DRCRU_M
P-GND B-11 B-5 P-GND B-11 11 (NC) 11 1 /DRCRU_M
/LSUFM_LD B-12 B-4 /LSUFM_LD B-12 12 (NC) 12 2 D-GND
Paper feed motor

5VNPD B-13 B-3 5VNPD B-13 R P
3
/PPD2 B-14 B-2 /PPD2 B-14 179228-2
4
1
D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND B-15
D-GND 1 /DRCRU_C
CZHR-15V-S 2 D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 179228-2
D-GND 1 /DRCRU_K
Waste toner full detector

D-GND
DF11-6DS-2C +
2 D-GND
1 2 3 4 56
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
Name
1
6. Photo-conductor section
PCU PWB
Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector

Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector
179228-2
MC
DRCRU_C
1TNFD
1 /1TNFD
2
2 D-GND
1
FPS-187
CN-12 MC-CMY #1 MC-CMY #1
MC
B20B-CZHK-B-1 51065-0300 FPS-187
3
PWB
D-GND 1 1 D-GND MC-CMY 2# MC-CMY 2#

DL_Y# 2 2 (NC) CN-1
D-GND 3 3 DL_Y# FPS-187
B09B-PASK SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N
DL_M# MC-K MC-K
MC
2
4 51065-0300
D-GND MC_BK_ERR 9 1 MC_BK_ERR 1
5
DRCRU_K
4
1 D-GND MC_CL_ERR 8 2 MC_CL_ERR 2
DL_C# 6 2 (NC) GB-Y HV_REM# 7 3 HV_REM# 3

D-GND 7 3 DL_M# /HV_LD1# 6 4 /HV_LD1# 4
DL_BK# 8 GB-M
/HV_CLK# 5 5 /HV_CLK# 5
PROFM2_V 9 GB-C /HV_DATA# 4 6 /HV_DATA# 6
1
/PROFM2_CNT 10 51065-0300
P-GND 3 7 P-GND 7
P-GND 11 1 D-GND GB-K INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8
PROFM2_LD 12 2 (NC) F-GND 1
(from page 5) 3 DL_C# P R
51065-0300
2
1 D-GND
MC
2 (NC)
3 DL_BK#
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 +(R) 1
4
DL_Y
CN-15 2 PWM(Brw) 2
B20B-PNDZS 3 -(Blk) 3
RRM_OUT_/B 1 4 Lock(W) 4
DHPD_CL
4
RRM_OUT_/A 3 R P
RRM_OUT_B 5
RRM_OUT_A 7 S6B-XH-A-1
MC
š56 HB UNI
INT24V2 2
Detects the waste toner full state.

P-GND
DL_M
4
/DVM_K_CK 6
/DVM_K_D 8 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
DVM_K_LD 10
/CPUC1 12 1 /CPUC1 1
24V3 14 2 24V3 2 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
/CPFC 16 3 /CPFC 3 1 /CPFC 1
24V3 18 4 24V3 4 2 24V3 2
DL_C
(NC) 20 R P P R
179228-3
1 DHPD_K
2 D-GND
3 5VNPD(R˄)
DVM_CL
B7B-PASK-1
CPFC
1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
(NC)
DL_BK
3
4 /DVM_K_CK
Detects the rotating state of the color drum cartridge.

5 /DVM_K_D
Detects the rotating state of the black drum cartridge.

CN-9 6 (NC)
B15B-CZHK-B-1 DVM_K_LD
7
INT24V2 1
P-GND 2

CPFM
/DVM_CL_CK 3
Function and operation

DHPD_K
/DVM_CL_D 4
DVM_CL_LD 5
5
PROFM2
DHPD_CL 6
D-GND 7
5VNPD(R˄) 8 B7B-PASK-1
/1TURC_2 9 1 INT24V2
+24V3 10 2 P-GND
DVM_K
DHPD_K 11 3 (NC)
Drives the waste toner transport screw and the paper feed section.
D-GND 12 4 /DVM_CL_CK
5VNPD(R˄) 13 5 /DVM_CL_D
/1TURC_1 14 6 (NC)
+24V3 15 7 DVM_CL_LD
CN-12
B20B-CZHK-B-1 179228-3
MC_BK_ERR 13
1 DHPD_CL
MC_CL_ERR 14
2 D-GND
HV_REM# 15 3 5VNPD(R˄)
/HV_LD1# 16
/HV_CLK# 17
/HV_DATA# 18
P-GND 19
INT24V1 20
(2)
5
4
3
2
1
DL
MC
No.
CN-6 DVM_K
DRCRU
DVM_CL
PROFM2
PROFM1
(Y,M,C,K)
B20B-PNDZS SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N

PROFM1_V 8 1 PROFM1_V 1
Signal name
/PROFM1_CNT 10 2 /PROFM1_CNT 2
P-GND 12 3 P-GND 3
/ROFM1_LD 14 4 /ROFM1_LD 4
P R
CN-13 SMR-12V-N +
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN)
SMP-12V-NC
DRSET B-2 B-14 DRSET B-2 2 DRSET 2
(NC) B-4 B-12 (NC) B-4 4 (NC) 4
(NC) B-5 B-11 (NC) B-5 5 (NC) 5
(NC) B-6 B-10 (NC) B-6 6 (NC) 6 179228-2
/DRCRU_K
Ozone filter
B-7 B-9 /DRCRU_K B-7 7 /DRCRU_K 7 1 /DRCRU_K
/1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 8 /1TNFD 8 2 D-GND
MX-B400P/B380P
4
PROFM1
Process fan 2
Process fan 1
9 D-GND 9
LSUFM_V B-10 B-6 LSUFM_V B-10 10 F-GND 10
Cleaning blade
P-GND B-11 B-5 P-GND B-11 11 (NC) 11
/LSUFM_LD B-12 B-4 /LSUFM_LD B-12 12 (NC) 12
5VNPD B-13 B-3 5VNPD B-13 R P
/PPD2 B-14 B-2 /PPD2 B-14
OPC drum (Y,M,C,K)
CZHR-15V-S
Main charger (Y,M,C,K)
Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK)
Name
Name
Waste toner transport screw

Developing drive motor (Color)
Developing drive motor (Black)
PCU PWB
179228-2
1TNFD
1 /1TNFD
2 D-GND
OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector
CN-12
B20B-CZHK-B-1
(NC) 1
OPC drum installation detection contact (Y,M,C,K)
(NC) 2
(NC) 3
(NC) 4
DRCRU_K
3
(NC) 5
(NC)
51065-0300
6
D-GND 7 1 D-GND
DL_BK# 8 2 (NC)
PROFM2_V 9 3 DL_BK#
1
/PROFM2_CNT 10
P-GND 11
PROFM2_LD 12
2
MC
1 +(R) 1
2 PWM(Brw) 2
PWB
3 -(Blk) 3
4 Lock(W) 4 FPS-187 CN-1
R P MC-K B09B-PASK SMP-07V-NC + SMR-07V-N
MC-K
MC_BK_ERR 9 1 MC_BK_ERR 1
(NC) 8 2 HV_REM# 2
CN-15 HV_REM# 7
B20B-PNDZS 3 /HV_LD1# 3
4
/HV_LD1# 6
RRM_OUT_/B 1 4 /HV_CLK# 4
/HV_CLK# 5
RRM_OUT_/A 3 /HV_DATA#
5 /HV_DATA# 5
4
RRM_OUT_B 5 P-GND 3 6 P-GND 6
MC
RRM_OUT_A 7 S6B-XH-A-1 GB-K INT24V1 7 INT24V1 7
2
Cools the process section.
CPFM_OUT_A 9 1 CPFM_OUT_A F-GND 1 P R

š56 HB UNI
Forms electrostatic latent images.
INT24V2 2
P-GND 4
/DVM_K_CK 6
/DVM_K_D 8
Detects installation of the OPC drum.
DVM_K_LD 10
/CPUC1 12 1 /CPUC1 1
24V3 14 2 24V3 2 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
/CPFC 16 3 /CPFC 3 1 /CPFC 1
24V3 18 4 24V3 4 2 24V3 2
Charges the OPC drum surface negatively.
(NC) 20 R P P R
B7B-PASK-1
CPFC
1 INT24V2
Transports waste toner to the waste toner bottle.
Drives the color developing unit/color OPC drum.
2 P-GND
Drives the black developing unit/black OPC drum.
(NC)
DL_BK
Cleans residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3
4 /DVM_K_CK
Discharges ozone generated in the process section.
Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
5 /DVM_K_D
6 (NC)
7 DVM_K_LD
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
CPFM

5
PROFM2
DVM_K
CN-12
B20B-CZHK-B-1
MC_BK_ERR 13
(NC) 14
HV_REM# 15
/HV_LD1# 16
Radiates light on the discharge lens to discharges the OPC drum surface
/HV_CLK# 17
/HV_DATA# 18
P-GND 19
INT24V1 20
1TNFD Waste toner full detector Detects the waste toner full state.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the waste toner transport screw and the paper feed section.
DL Discharge lamp Radiates light on the discharge lens to discharges the OPC drum surface
DRCRU OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
DVM_K Developing drive motor Drives the developing unit/OPC drum.
MC Main charger Charges the OPC drum surface negatively.
PROFM1 Process fan 1 Cools the process section.
PROFM2 Process fan 2 Discharges ozone generated in the process section.

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 OPC drum installation detection contact Detects installation of the OPC drum.
4 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the waste toner bottle.
5 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
B. Charging, electrostatic latent image forming, When laser beams are radiated on the OPC drum CGL, posi-
discharging tive and negative charges are generated.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively by the main charger, The positive charges generated in the CGL are attracted and
shifted to the negative charged on the OPC drum surface.
and laser beams are radiated to the LSU unit to form electrostatic
latent images. Meanwhile, the negative charges are attracted and shifted to
the positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
1) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively by the main
Therefore, on the surface and in the aluminum layer of the
charger.
OPC drum, the positive charges and the negative charges are
Aluminum neutralized each other, reducing the amount of positive and
layer negative charges to reduce the OPC drum surface potential.
CGL For the areas where laser beams are not radiated, electric
CTL charges remain unchanged.
As a result, electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
OPC drum
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
Screen grid High voltage unit CTL CTL
Main corona unit

Lens
The screen grid is attached to the main charger unit, and the
OPC drum is charged at a voltage which virtually same as the
voltage applied to the screen grid. When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the discharge
2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the lens, the light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images. surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
Aluminum CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
OPC drum layer
The positive charges generated in the CGL are attracted to the
CGL
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. Meanwhile, the
CTL
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
aluminum layer in the OPC drum.
OPC drum Therefore, on the OPC drum surface, the positive and the neg-
ative charges are neutralized each other, reducing the amount
of positive and negative charges to reduce the surface poten-
tial of the OPC drum.
Laser beams

C. Cleaning operation
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
After completion of the transfer operation, residual toner on the OPC drum is removed by the cleaning blade.
The residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the waste toner bottle by the waste toner transport screw, which is
driven by the paper feed motor (CPFM).
CPFM
1TNFD
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
After completion of the transfer operation, residual toner on the OPC drum is removed by the cleaning blade.
The residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the waste toner bottle by the waste toner transport screw, which is
driven by the paper feed motor (CPFM).
CPFM
1TNFD

D. Waste toner full detection operation E. OPC drum rotation control
The waste toner bottle section is provided with the waste toner full The OPC drum (K) is driven by the K developing drive motor
detection mechanism. When the waste toner quantity is increased (DVM_K), and the rotation speed is monitored by the OPC drum
to the full state, the rotation load of the waste toner transport screw (BK) rotation sensor (DHPD_K).
is increased, and the waste toner transport screw drive coupler The color OPC drums (C, M, Y) are driven by the CL developing
gets stranded, and the waste toner full detector (1TNFD) is turned drive motor (DVM_CL), and are monitored by the CL OPC drum
ON. rotation sensor (DHPD_CL).
When the waste toner full detection switch is kept ON for 1 sec or According to signals monitored by the above two sensors, the rota-
more, it is judged as near end and the message that the waste tion speed and the rotation phase of the K OPC drum and the color
toner bottle must be replace soon. When 500 counts are exceeded OPC drums are controlled.
from that time, the machine recognizes as the waste toner full and
the message that the waste toner bottle must be replaced is dis-
played. (Paper exit of one sheet is counted 1, and one process
control operation is counted 10.)
1TNFD (OFF) 1TNFD (ON)
F. OPC drum initial operation/ OPC drum installation detection operation

When a new OPC drum is installed, the OPC drum initial detector (DRCRU) is turned ON by the OPC drum initial actuator. When, thereafter,
the drum rotates, the drum initial actuator position is changed to turn OFF the detector. By this series of operations, the drum is initialized and
the OPC drum counter is reset.
NOTE: The initial operation means detection of a new unit, occurrence of a trigger for start of use, and resetting of the counter.
• MX-C400P/C380P
New state Used state
DRCRU_K
Drum initial detector
DR SET
DRCRU_C
Drum installation detector
DRCRU_M
DRCRU_Y
D-GND

• MX-B400P/B380P
New state Used state
DRCRU_K
Drum initial detector
DR SET
Drum installation detector

D-GND
In the OPC drum positioning unit, there is a contact to detect installation of the OPC drum. If there is no OPC drum installed, it is detected and
the message is displayed on the operation panel to show that there is no OPC drum installed.

7. Toner supply section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 TNM_Y_1 1
2 TNM_Y_2 2
R P
TSHR-04V-K
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM_Y_CK# 2
TNM_Y CRM_Y_DT# 1
1 TNM_M_1 1
2 TNM_M_2 2
TNM_M R
TSHR-04V-K
P
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM_M_CK# 2
CRM_M_DT# 1
TNM_C
CRM-Y
CRM-M TNM_K CN-14

B28B-PNDZS
1 TNM_K_1
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC 3 TNM_K_2
CRM-C 1 TNM_C_1 1
2 TNM_C_2 2
5 TNM_C_1
7 TNM_C_2
R P 9 TNM_M_1
11 TNM_M_2
TSHR-04V-K 13 D-GND
15 5VN
CRM-K D-GND
5VN
4
3
17 CRM_K_CK#
19 CRM_K_DT#
CRM_C_CK# 2
CRM_C_DT# 1
21 D-GND
23 5VN
25 CRM_M_CK#
27 CRM_M_DT#
1 TNM_K_1 1 2 TNM_Y_1
2 TNM_K_2 2 4 TNM_Y_2
R P 6 (NC)
TSHR-04V-K 8 HLOUT_EX
10 HLOUT_MAIN
D-GND 4 12 HLOUT_LOW
5VN 3 14 D-GND
CRM_K_CK# 2
16 5VN
CRM_K_DT# 1 18 CRM_C_CK#
1 20
22
CRM_C_DT#
D-GND
24 5VN
26 CRM_Y_CK#
28 CRM_Y_DT#
1
2
1
2
1 PCU PWB
2
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
2 1 D-GND 1
2 DVTYP_Y 2
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
4 DVCRU_V 4
5 ATC_V 5
6 TCS_Y 6
7 D-GND 7
8 TSG_Y 8
S P CN-11
B32B-CZWHK-B-1
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
A-16 D-GND
1 D-GND 1 A-15 DVTYP_Y
2 DVTYP_M 2 A-14 /DVCRU_Y
3 /DVCRU_M 3 A-13 DVCRU_V
4 DVCRU_V 4 A-12 ATC_V
5 ATC_M 5 A-11 TCS_Y
6 TCS_M 6 A-10 D-GND
7 D-GND 7 A-9 TSG_Y
8 TSG_M 8 A-8 D-GND
S P A-7 DVTYP_M
A-6 /DVCRU_M
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) A-5 DVCRU_V
A-4 ATC_V
1 D-GND 1 A-3 TCS_M
2 DVTYP_C 2 A-2 D-GND
3 /DVCRU_C 3 A-1 TSG_M
4 DVCRU_V 4
5 ATC_C 5 B-1 D-GND
6 TCS_C 6 B-2 DVTYP_C
7 D-GND 7 B-3 /DVCRU_C
8 TSG_C 8 B-4 DVCRU_V
S P B-5 ATC_V
B-6 TCS_C
B-7 D-GND
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) B-8 TSG_C
1 D-GND 1 B-9 D-GND
2 DVTYP_K 2 B-10 DVTYP_K
3 /DVCRU_K 3 B-11 /DVCRU_K
4 DVCRU_V 4 B-12 DVCRU_V
5 ATC_K 5 B-13 ATC_V
6 TCS_K 6 B-14 TCS_K
7 D-GND 7 B-15 D-GND
8 TSG_K 8 B-16 TSG_K
S P

TNM (Y,M,C,K) Toner motor (Y,M,C,K) Drives the toner transport screw in the toner cartridge to supply toner to the developer cartridge.
CRM (Y,M,C,K) Crum Stores data related to control of the toner cartridge. Detects a new toner cartridge.

1 Toner transport/mixing screw Mixes and transports toner in the toner cartridge.
2 Toner transport pipe Used to supply toner from the toner cartridge to the developer cartridge.

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
TNM_K
CN-14
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC B28B-PNDZS
1 TNM_K_1 1 1 TNM_K_1
2 TNM_K_2 2 3 TNM_K_2
R P 5 (NC)
7 (NC)
9 (NC)
11 (NC)
13 D-GND
15 5VN
CRM-K 17
19
CRM_K_CK#
CRM_K_DT#
21 (NC)
23 (NC)
TSHR-04V-K 25 (NC)
D-GND 4 27 (NC)
5VN 3
CRM_K_CK# 2
2 CRM_K_DT# 1
PCU PWB
CN-11
B16B-CZWHK-B-1
A-8 (NC)
A-7 (NC)
A-6 (NC)
A-5 (NC)
A-4 (NC)
A-3 (NC)
A-2 (NC)
A-1 (NC)
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
1 D-GND 1 B-1 D-GND
2 DVTYP_K 2 B-2 DVTYP_K
3 /DVCRU_K 3 B-3 /DVCRU_K
4 DVCRU_V 4 B-4 DVCRU_V
5 ATC_K 5 B-5 ATC_V
6 TCS_K 6 B-6 TCS_K
7 D-GND 7 B-7 D-GND
1 8 TSG_K
S
8
P
B-8 TSG_K

TNM Toner motor Drives the toner transport screw in the toner cartridge to supply toner to the developer cartridge.
CRM Crum Stores data related to control of the toner cartridge. Detects a new toner cartridge.

1 Toner transport/mixing screw Mixes and transports toner in the toner cartridge.
2 Toner transport pipe Used to supply toner from the toner cartridge to the developer cartridge.
When the toner density sensor in the developing unit detects a fall in the toner density, the toner motor drives the toner transport screw in the
toner cartridge to supply toner to the developer cartridge.
The toner motor is turned ON/OFF according to the output of the toner density sensor.

QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
1 D-GND 1
(1)
2 DVTYP_Y 2
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
TCS
4 DVCRU_V 4
2
5 ATC_V 5
DVM_K
6 TCS_Y 6
7 D-GND 7
DVM_CL
3
2
1
8 TSG_Y 8
No.
S P
CN-11
B32B-CZWHK-B-1
D-GND A-16
Signal name
DVTYP_Y A-15
/DVCRU_Y A-14 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
2
DVCRU_V A-13 1 D-GND 1
ATC_V A-12 2 DVTYP_M 2
TCS_Y A-11 3 /DVCRU_M 3
D-GND A-10 4 DVCRU_V 4
TSG_Y A-9 5 ATC_M 5
D-GND A-8 6 TCS_M 6
2
DVTYP_M A-7 7 D-GND 7
/DVCRU_M A-6 8 TSG_M 8
DVCRU_V
MX-C400P/C380P
A-5 S P
ATC_V A-4
TCS_M A-3
2
D-GND A-2
Mixing roller
TSG_M A-1
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1
DVTYP_C B-2 2 DVTYP_C 2
Developing roller
/DVCRU_C B-3 3 /DVCRU_C 3
Name
Name
DVCRU_V B-4 4 DVCRU_V 4
8. Developing section
ATC_V B-5 5 ATC_C 5

TCS_C B-6 6 TCS_C 6
Developing connector
2
D-GND B-7 7 D-GND 7
TSG_C B-8 8 TSG_C 8
D-GND B-9 S P
DVTYP_K B-10
3
/DVCRU_K B-11
2
DVCRU_V B-12
TCS_Y
ATC_V B-13
Developing drive motor (Color)

Developing drive motor (Black)
TCS_K B-14
Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K)

QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
D-GND B-15 1 D-GND 1
TSG_K B-16 2 DVTYP_K 2
3 /DVCRU_K 3
4 DVCRU_V 4
1
5 ATC_K 5
6 TCS_K 6
7 D-GND 7
TCS_M
3
CN-12 8 TSG_K 8
2
B20B-CZHK-B-1 S P
D-GND 1
DL_Y# 2
D-GND 3
DL_M# 4
D-GND 5
DL_C# 6
1
D-GND 7
DL_BK# 8
PROFM2_V 9
/PROFM2_CNT 10
3
P-GND 11 CN-1
TCS_C
PROFM2_LD 12 B09B-PASK
MC_BK_ERR 13 1 MC_BK_ERR 1 9 MC_BK_ERR
MC_CL_ERR 14 2 MC_CL_ERR 2 8 MC_CL_ERR
HV_REM# 15 3 HV_REM# 3 7 HV_REM#
/HV_LD1# 16 4 /HV_LD1# 4 6 /HV_LD1#
PCU PWB
/HV_CLK# 17 5 /HV_CLK# 5 5 /HV_CLK#
/HV_DATA# 18 6 /HV_DATA# 6 4 /HV_DATA#
1
P-GND 19 7 P-GND 7 3 P-GND
detect initializing of the DV unit.

INT24V1 20 8 INT24V1 8 2 INT24V1
P R 1 F-GND
3
TCS_K
BS-K
Mixes and charges developer and toner.

BS-C
BS-M
1
BS-Y
MC PWB
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1 B7B-PASK-1
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
Detects the toner density in the developer cartridge.

/DVM_CL_CK 3 3 (NC)
Drives the color developer cartridge/color OPC drum.

/DVM_CL_D 4 4 /DVM_CL_CK
DVM_CL_LD 5 5 /DVM_CL_D
DHPD_CL 6 6 (NC)
D-GND 7 7 DVM_CL_LD
5VNPD(R˄) 8
/1TURC_2 9
+24V3 10 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
1 /1TURC_2 1
2 +24V3 2

DVM_CL
P R
CN-15

B20B-PNDZS
INT24V2 2
Converts electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
P-GND 4
Drives the black developer cartridge/black OPC drum/primary transfer belt.

/DVM_K_CK 6
/DVM_K_D 8
DVM_K_LD 10
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
(NC)
DVM_K
3
4 /DVM_K_CK
5 /DVM_K_D
6 (NC)
1TURC_2
7 DVM_K_LD
Directly connected with the resistor and the fuse which identify the kind of the developer cartridge and
(2)
TCS
DVM_K
3
2
1
No.
Signal name
MX-B400P/B380P
Mixing roller
Developing roller
CN-11
Name
Name
B16B-CZWHK-B-1
Toner density sensor

(NC) A-8
Developing connector
(NC) A-7
Developing drive motor

(NC) A-6
(NC) A-5
(NC) A-4
(NC) A-3
2
(NC) A-2
(NC) A-1
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1
DVTYP_K B-2 2 DVTYP_K 2
/DVCRU_K B-3 3 /DVCRU_K 3
ATC_V B-5 5 ATC_K 5
TCS_K B-6 6 TCS_K 6
D-GND B-7 7 D-GND 7
TSG_K B-8 8 TSG_K 8
2
S P
CN-12
B20B-CZHK-B-1
(NC) 1
(NC) 2
(NC) 3
(NC) 4
(NC) 5
(NC) 6
D-GND 7
DL_BK# 8
PROFM2_V 9
/PROFM2_CNT 10
11 CN-1
P-GND
PROFM2_LD 12 SMP-07V-NC + SMR-07V-N B09B-PASK
MC_BK_ERR 13 1 MC_BK_ERR 1 9 MC_BK_ERR
(NC) 14 2 HV_REM# 2 8 (NC)
HV_REM# 15 7 HV_REM#
detect initializing of the DV unit.

3 /HV_LD1# 3
/HV_LD1# 16 6 /HV_LD1#
4 /HV_CLK# 4
PCU PWB
/HV_CLK# 17 5 /HV_CLK#
3

7 INT24V1 7 2 INT24V1
TCS_K
INT24V1 20
P R 1 F-GND
Mixes and charges developer and toner.

1
BS-K
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1
MC PWB
(NC) 1
Dummy 2
Detects the toner density in the developer cartridge.

(NC) 3
(NC) 4
(NC) 5
(NC) 6
Dummy 7
(NC) 8
(NC) 9
(NC) 10
(NC) 11
Drives the developer cartridge OPC drum/primary transfer belt.

Dummy 12

(NC) 13
/1TURC_1 14 1 /1TURC_1 1
+24V3 15 2 +24V3 2
P R

Converts electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
1TURC_1
CN-15 B7B-PASK-1
B20B-PNDZS
1 INT24V2
INT24V2 2 2 P-GND
(NC)
DVM_K
P-GND 4 3
/DVM_K_CK 6 4 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D 8 5 /DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD 10 6 (NC)
7 DVM_K_LD
Directly connected with the resistor and the fuse which identify the kind of the developer cartridge and
B. Developing operations
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit (laser image beams) are converted into visible
images by toner.
Toner and carrier in the developer cartridge are mixed and trans-
ported by the stirring roller.
When toner and carrier are stirred and transported, toner is nega-
tively charged by mechanical friction with carrier.
In addition, the developing bias voltage (AC component of negative
DC component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attached to the exposed area (high
potential area) on the OPC drum by the developing bias voltage.
On the other hand, the potential of the unexposed area on the OPC
drum is lower than the developing bias voltage and toner is not
attached to it.
C. Toner density control

The toner density in the developer cartridge is detected by the
toner density sensor in order to keep the toner density control level
which is set in the initial operation of the developer cartridge.
When the toner density is lowered, the toner motor is rotated to
supply toner from the toner cartridge to the developer cartridge.
D. Developer cartridge initial operation

When the developer cartridge is installed, the state of the fuse of
the connector in the developer cartridge is checked.
When the state that the fuse is not blown off is detected, the devel-
oping unit is judged as a new one, blowing off the fuse.
Simultaneously with this operation, setting of the toner density con-
trol level and reset of the developing counter are automatically per-
formed.
NOTE: The initial operation means detection of a new unit, occur-
rence of a trigger for start of use, and resetting of the
counter.

(1)
1TC (K)
1TUD_BK
1TC (C,M,Y)
Signal name
CN-13
(BK)
A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1
MX-C400P/C380P

11
A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND
1 D-GND 1 B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND
9. Transfer section
2 DRSET 2 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1
5
4 /DRCRU_Y 4 B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y
5 /DRCRU_M 5 B-5 /DRCRU_M B-11 B-5 /DRCRU_M
6 /DRCRU_C 6 B-6 /DRCRU_C B-10 B-6 /DRCRU_C
Name
6
7 /DRCRU_K 7 B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
/1TNFD 1 8 /1TNFD 8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
D-GND 2 9 D-GND 9 B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
10 F-GND 10 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
Primary transfer output (K)

11 (NC) 11 B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
12 (NC) 12 B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD
2
R P
B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2
CZHR-15V-S
Primary transfer output (C, M, Y)
Primary transfer belt position sensor

3 3
14
1TC-K
CN-6
1TC-C SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N B20B-PNDZS
CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND
1TC-M
3
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(R˄) 3 5 5VNPD(R˄)
PTC_ERR 2 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR
1TC-Y HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM#
4
/TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD#
9
/TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK#
1TNFD
еᩉ
6
/TC_DATA# 6 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA#
VCASE INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1
8
11 F-GND 11
P R
FPS-187
2-TC
TC
FPS-187
7
PWB
PTC
179228-3
1TUD_CL 1
PCU PWB
D-GND 2
5VNPD(R˄) 3
CN-18
DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS
1 (NC) 1 1 (NC)
3 REGS_R 3 3 REGS_R
5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5 REGS_R_LED#
7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND
12
9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F
4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F
6 REGS_F_LED# 6 15 REGS_F_LED#
8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
179228-3 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD
5VNPD(R˄) 3 11 5VNPD(R˄) 11 21 (NC)
D-GND 2 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC)
1TUD_K 1 13 1TUD_K 13
Primary transfer high voltage output (K)

14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(R˄)
1TUD_CL
4 D-GND
10
P S
6 1TUD_K
Primary transfer high voltage output (C,M,Y)

13
CN-9

SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N B15B-CZHK-B-1
1 /1TURC_2 1 9 /1TURC_2
2 +24V3 2 10 +24V3
1TUD_K
1TURC_2 P R
1 /1TURC_1 1 14 /1TURC_1
2 +24V3 2 15 +24V3
P R
CN-15
B20B-PNDZS
B7B-PASK-1 9 CPFM_OUT_A
INT24V2 1 11 24V_CPFM
P-GND 2 13 CPFM_OUT_/A
(NC) 3 15 CPFM_OUT_B

1TURC
/DVM_K_CK 4 17 24V_CPFM
/DVM_K_D 5 19 CPFM_OUT_/B
(NC) 6
DVM_K_LD 7 2 INT24V2

4 P-GND
6 /DVM_K_CK
8 /DVM_K_D
10 DVM_K_LD
16 /CPFC
S6B-XH-A-1 18 24V3
CPFM_OUT_A 1
24V_CPFM
DVM_K
CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 3
CPFM_OUT_B 4
24V_CPFM 5
CPFC
33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) CPFM_OUT_/B 6 CN-17
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N 16CZ-6H CZHR-16V-S š56 HB UNI B30B-PCZWHK-B-1
1 D-GND 1 B-6 D-GND B-11 A-5 D-GND
2 /2TCCRU 2 B-5 /2TCCRU B-12 A-4 /2TCCRU
P R P R
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 /CPFC 1 3 /CPFC 3
2 24V3 2 4 24V3 4
P R R P
Detects the primary transfer belt position (BK) in combination with the 1TUD_BK and 1TUD_CL output.
(2)
2TC
PTC
1TURC
DVM_K
1TURC_2
1TUD_CL
/1TNFD 1
D-GND 2
Signal name
CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) CN-13

B30B-CZWHK-B-1
(CL)

MX-B400P/B380P
PTC output

A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1
11
A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND
2 DRSET 2 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1
Name
5
4 (NC) 4 B-4 (NC) B-12 B-4 (NC)
5 (NC) 5 B-5 (NC) B-11 B-5 (NC)
6 (NC) 6 B-6 (NC) B-10 B-6 (NC)
7 /DRCRU_K 7 B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
Secondary transfer output
8 /1 TNFD 8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD

Developing drive motor (K)

10 F-GND 10 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
11 (NC) 11 B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
12 (NC) 12 B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
R P B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD
B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2
2
CZHR-15V-S
Primary transfer mode select clutch
Primary transfer mode select clutch
Primary transfer belt position sensor
14
CN-6
SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N B20B-PNDZS
CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND
3
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(with R) 3 5 5VNPD(with R)
1TC-K
9
PTC_ERR 2 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR
HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM#
4
/TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD#
Separation /TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK#
1TNFD
6
/TC_DATA# 6 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA#
VCASE INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1
8
11 F-GND 11
P R
FPS-187
TC
2-TC
FPS-187
7
PWB
PTC
179228-3
1TUD_CL 1
PTC high voltage output
PCU PWB
D-GND 2
5VNPD(with R) 3
CN-18
DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS
1 (NC) 1 1 (NC)
3 REGS_R 3 3 REGS_R
5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5 REGS_R_LED#
7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND
12
9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD
2 (NC) 2 11 (NC)
4 (NC) 4 13 (NC)
6 (NC) 6 15 (NC)
8 (NC) 8 17 (NC)
179228-3 10 (NC) 10 19 (NC)
Secondary transfer high voltage output
5VNPD(with R) 3 11 5VNPD(with R) 11 21 (NC)

D-GND 2 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC)
1TUD_K 1 13 1T UD_K 13
1TUD_CL
14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(with R)
10
P S 4 D-GND
6 1TUD_K
13
1TUD_K
CN-9
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N B15B-CZHK-B-1
1 /1TURC_1 1 14 /1TURC_1
2 +24V3 2 15 +24V3
P R
CN-15
Drives the transfer belt. (Also drives the K developing unit.)
B20B-PNDZS
B7B-PASK-1 9 CPFM_OUT_A
INT24V2 1 11 24V_CPFM
P-GND 2 13 CPFM_OUT_/A
(NC) 3 15 CPFM_OUT_B
/DVM_K_CK 4 17 24V_CPFM
/DVM_K_D 5 19 CPFM_OUT_/B
1TURC1
(NC) 6

DVM_K_LD 7 2 INT24V2
4 P-GND
6 /DVM_K_CK
8 /DVM_K_D
10 DVM_K_LD
16 /CPFC
S6B-XH-A-1 18 24V3
CPFM_OUT_A 1
DVM_K 24V_CPFM 2
CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 3
CPFM_OUT_B 4
24V_CPFM 5
CPFC
33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) CPFM_OUT_/B 6 CN-17
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N 16CZ-6H CZHR-16V-S 56 HB UNI B30B-PCZWHK-B-1
1 D-GND 1 B-6 D-GND B-11 A-5 D-GND
2 /2TCCRU 2 B-5 /2TCCRU B-12 A-4 /2TCCRU
primary transfer mode. (The primary transfer mode select cam is rotated clockwise.)
P R P R
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 /CPFC 1 3 /CPFC 3
2 24V3 2 4 24V3 4
P R R P
primary transfer mode. (The primary transfer mode select cam is rotated counterclockwise.)
Transports the developing motor (K) power to the primary transfer mode select cam to select the
Transports the developing motor (K) power to the primary transfer mode select cam to select the
Detects the primary transfer belt position (CL) in combination with the 1TUD_CL and 1TUD_BK output.
1TC (K) Primary transfer output Primary transfer high voltage output
1TUD_BK Primary transfer belt position sensor (BK) Detects initialization of the primary transfer unit.
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt position sensor (CL) Detects the primary transfer belt position.
1TURC 1 Primary transfer mode select clutch Transports the developing motor power to the primary transfer mode select cam to select the
primary transfer mode.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage output
2TC Secondary transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage output
DVM_K Developing drive motor Drives the transfer belt. (Also drives the developing unit.)

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Cleans residual toner on the intermediate transfer belt.
2 Transfer belt Transfers toner images on the OPC drum.
3 Primary transfer roller Applies the transfer high voltage to transfer toner images on the OPC drum to the transfer belt.
Cleans the transfer belt.
4 Transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt. Applies the transfer high voltage to transfer toner images on the
transfer belt to paper.
5 Transfer roller follower roller Follows the transfer belt.
6 Transfer belt tension roller Applies a tension to the transfer belt.
7 PTC unit Reduces positive charges on the primary transfer belt to increase the transfer efficiency.
8 PTC opposing roller Used to flow the PTC current.
9 Transfer belt cleaning brush Cleans the back surface of the transfer belt.
10 Cleaning blade Cleans residual toner on the transfer belt surface.
11 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the transfer belt to paper. Connected to GND to flow the secondary
transfer high current.
12 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the waste toner bottle.
13 Paper separation electrode Applies a high negative voltage to discharge paper which is positively charged after transfer
operation.
14 Mode select knob Used to set the primary transfer unit to the free state.
(Used to turn the mode select cam manually.)
B. Transfer operation Then, a high transfer voltage is applied to the transfer belt drive
roller to transfer toner imaged on paper. The secondary transfer
Secondary transfer output roller is connected to GND to flow the secondary transfer current.
C. Transfer belt cleaning operation

A high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer roller to
attach unnecessary toner of the transfer belt onto the OPC drum,
Constant current and clean with the OPC drum cleaning blade.
Constant power
voltage Constant voltage
power power
Constant current
power
Constant
voltage
power
Constant Constant current
voltage power
power
Separation
output
PTC output
MC grid output
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred onto the primary
transfer belt by applying a high positive voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charges are generated by the PTC unit to weaken posi- MC grid output
tive charged on the transfer belt and to reduce the attracting force
between the primary transfer belt and toner.
With this operation, the transfer efficiency in secondary transfer is
improved.

D. Secondary transfer roller cleaning operation Relationship between the transfer belt mode (state) and the
A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt drive transfer belt mode sensor
roller to attach unnecessary toner of the primary transfer roller onto Sensor state
Mode (State)
the transfer belt. The toner is cleaned with the transfer belt cleaning 1TUD CL 1TUD K
blade and transported to the waste toner section. Color print mode OFF ON
Free position ON OFF
Monochrome print mode ON ON
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
There are two modes of the transfer belt; the free position and the
Constant current monochrome print mode.
power
Constant voltage
power Free position The OPC drum is separated from the transfer belt.
Print mode The OPC drum is in close contact with the transfer belt.
The mode is switched by the developing motor and the primary

transfer mode select clutch (1TURC1). The operations: the primary
transfer mode select clutch (1TURC1) is turned ON to rotate the
transfer cam clockwise, separating the roller.
Free position
E. Transfer belt mode switch operation

(1) MX-C400P/C380P
The transfer belt is in the three modes: the free position, the color
print mode, and the monochrome print mode.
Free position The OPC drums are separated from the transfer belt.
Color print mode All the OPC drums are in close contact with the Print mode
transfer belt.
Monochrome The K OPC drum is in close contact with the transfer
print mode belt. F. Primary transfer belt initial operation
The mode is switched by the developing motor (K) and the mode (1) MX-C400P/C380P
switch clutches (1TURC 1, 1TURC 2). When the roller separation When a new primary transfer unit is installed, the mode sensor
clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the transfer cam is rotated to shift the (1TUD CL) and the both mode sensors (1TUD K) are ON with the
primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm in the arrow primary transfer unit at the free position. This state is recognized as
direction in conjunction with the cam, separating the roller. a new unit.
In the normal mode, with the primary transfer unit at the free posi-
tion, the mode sensor (1TUD CL) is ON and both mode sensors
(1TUD K) are OFF.
The mode sensor (1TUD CL) and both mode sensors (1TUD K) are
ON with a new unit because the sensors (1TUD K) are turned ON
by the actuator.
Then the primary transfer unit performs the initial operation.
Free position
By rotation of the mode switch cam in the transfer unit, the primary
transfer unit is shifted to the free position, the color print mode posi-
tion, the monochrome print mode position, and the free position
(home position).
The K position detection actuator of the primary transfer unit is
shifted by the mode switch cam, and the initial actuator of the pri-
mary transfer unit falls down.
When the primary transfer unit returns to the free position (home
Color print mode position), the mode sensor (1TUD CL) is turned ON and both mode
sensors (1TUD K) are turned OFF.
With the above operations, the primary transfer counter is automat-
ically reset.
counter.
Monochrome print mode

Relationship between the primary transfer unit position (2) MX-B400P/B380P
(mode) and the transfer position sensor Normally a new unit is in the free position but the initial actuator is
Primary transfer Sensor status up. When, therefore, a new primary transfer unit is installed, 1TUD
unit position K and 1TUD CL are turned ON together.
1TUD CL 1TUD K
(mode) When, next, the mode switch cam in the transfer unit is rotated, the
Color print mode: OFF ON primary transfer unit is shifted from the free position to the mono-
All the OPC drums
chrome print mode position.
and the transfer
belt are in contact. At that time, the movement of the mode switch cam puts the initial
Free position: The ON OFF actuator down to turn OFF 1TUDK, and on this timing the machine
OPC drum is recognizes that a new unit is installed.
separated from
the transfer belt.
(Home position)
Monochrome print ON ON
mode: The K OPC
drum is in contact
with the transfer
belt.
Initial operation ON o OFF ON o ON If the primary transfer
(When a new o ON o o ON o unit is a new one,
primary transfer ON OFF immediately after turning
1TUD K
unit is installed.) ON the power, both
sensors are ON. Then
the status is changed as Initial
shown in the left. actuator
Primary transfer unit position (mode) shift and sensor status

in the initial operation (when a new primary transfer unit is
installed)
1TUD K (ON) 1TUD K (OFF)
Free position Color Monochrome Free position Initial state State after initial detection
Sensor (Home print print mode (Home
position) mode position) NOTE: The initial operation means detection of a new unit, occur-
1TUD CL ON OFF ON ON rence of a trigger for start of use, and resetting of the
1TUD K ON ON ON OFF counter.
Normal primary transfer unit position (mode) shift and sensor Relationship between the primary transfer unit position
(mode) and the transfer position sensor
status
Primary transfer Relationship between the primary transfer unit
Free position Color Monochrome Free position
unit position position (mode) and the transfer position sensor
Sensor (Home print print mode (Home
(mode) 1TUD CL 1TUD K
position) mode position)
1TUD CL ON OFF ON ON Shift from the ON
free position to p The transfer cam rotates.
1TUD K OFF ON ON OFF
the print mode ON
When the transfer cam
rotates for about 0.2 sec (0.4 OFF
sec for heavy paper) from the
free mode, the position is
recognized as the print
position.
Shift from the ON
print mode to the p The transfer cam rotates.
free position OFF
p The transfer cam rotates.
ON
p The transfer cam rotates.
ON
OFF
When 1TUD_CL turns ON
and rotates for about 0.1 sec
(about 0.2 sec for heavy
paper), the position is
recognized as the free mode.
(*1)
Initial operation ON Initial detection is
(when a new made when the state
primary transfer shifts from ON to
New state Used state unit is installed) OFF.
*1: During transition process from the print mode to the free
position, 1TUD_CL turns OFF once, but it turns ON again when
transition to the free mode is completed.
That is, 1TUD_CL itself does not indicate the primary transfer
unit position (mode) but it only serves as the base point to
control the rotating time of the transfer cam.

G. Secondary transfer unit initial operation
In a new secondary transfer unit, the initial detection electrode is
closed by the initial detection actuator. (On state)
When a new secondary transfer unit is installed to the machine, the
initial detection actuator lock release lever A is in contact with the
machine frame rib.
Consequently, the initial detection actuator lock lever B is pushed in
the arrow direction X to release the lock of the initial detection actu-
ator.
Direction
X
Lock lever A
Lock lever B Initial detection actuator
When the secondary transfer roller rotates, the secondary transfer

unit initial detection actuator is shifted in the arrow direction Y by
the drive gear.
Consequently, the initial detection electrode is opened.
When the initial electrode section is shifted from the closed state to
the open state, it is recognized as the initial operation.
The primary transfer counter is automatically reset.
counter.

1 N-HL(LOW) 1 WH CN-13 CN-201
P R B03P-VL-R B3B-PASK-1
1 Neutral_HL_EX HLOUUT_HL_LOW 3
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 WH 2 Neutral_HL_MAIN HLOUUT_HL_MAIN 2
3 Neutral_HL_LOW HLOUUT_HL_EX 1
PWB
P R
CN-11
B03P-VL
LiveHL_in 1
(NC) 2
HL DCDC
NeutralHL_in 3
HL_EX2
CN-4
B03P-VL
LiveHL_out 1
PWB
10. Fusing section
(NC) 2
AC/DC
NeutralHL_out 3
FUCRU
HL_EX
19P-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) CN-19
+19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) B18B-CZHK-B-1 CN-14
B-1 TH_MAIN_IN B-9 B28B-PNDZS
1 TH_MAIN_IN
B-2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN B-8 2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN HLOUT_EX 8
B-3 D-GND B-7 3 D-GND HLOUT_MAIN 10
B-4 TH_SUB_IN B-6 4 TH_SUB_IN HLOUT_LOW 12
B-5 D-GND B-5 5 D-GND
RTH_EX2
B-6 TH_EX1_IN B-4 6 TH_EX1_IN
HL_Main
10 TH_LOW_IN
11 D-GND
RTH_EX1
HL_Sub
A-1 TH_LOW_IN A-10 12 5VNPD
A-2 D-GND A-9 13 HLPCD
A-3 5VNPD A-8 14 D-GND
A-4 HLPCD A-7 15 24V3
A-5 D-GND A-6 16 /HLPCS#
A-6 24V3 A-5 17 FUCRU_V
A-7 /HLPCS# A-4 18 /FUCRU
A-8 FUCRU_V A-3
A-9 /FUCRU A-2
A-10 (NC) A-1
1 N_HL_EX 1
2 N_HL_MAIN 2
RDTCT_Main
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC 3 N_HL_LOW 3
RDTCT_EX
1 TH_LOW_IN 1 4 L_HL_LOW 4
2 D-GND 2 5 L_HL_MAIN 5
R P 6 F-GND 6
P R
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC
1 24V3 1
2 /HLPCS# 2
R P
179228-3
5VNPD 1
HLPCD 2
D-GND 3
RDTCT_EX2
RTH_Main
RTH_Sub
RDTCT_Low
PCU PWB
RTH_Low
1 +(R) 1
2 PWM(Brw) 2

3 -(BIk) 3
FUFM
4 Lock(W) 4
R P
CN-16
B7B-PASK-1 B18B-PNDZS
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
(NC) 3 5 /FUM_CK
/FUM_CK 4 7 /FUM_D
/FUM_D 5 9 /FUM_LD
(NC) 6 11 POM_OUT_/B
FUM_LD 7 13 POM_OUT_/A
HLPCS
15 POM_OUT_B
FUM
17 POM_OUT_A
2 FUFM_V
HLPCD
4 FUM_CNT
6 P-GND
8 FUFM_LD
10 /2TURC
12 24V3
14 /ADUC1
16 24V3
18 (NC)
FUCRU Fusing unit initial detection Detects the initial state of the fusing unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detector Detects separation of the upper and the lower heat rollers.
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure applied to the upper and the lower heat rollers in the fusing section.
RDTCT_EX External thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_EX2 External thermostat 2 Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_Low Lower thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_Main Upper thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
HL_EX External heater lamp Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_EX2 External heater lamp 2 Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_Main Upper heater lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_Sub Lower heater lamp Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
RTH_EX1 External heat roller contact thermistor 1 Detects the temperature of the external heat roller.
RTH_EX2 External heat roller contact thermistor 2
RTH_Low Lower heat roller contact thermistor Detects the temperature of the lower heat roller.
RTH_Main Upper heat roller non-contact thermistor Detects the temperature of the upper heat roller.
RTH_Sub Upper heat roller contact thermistor
B. Fusing unit drive 1) To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity
for paper.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat 2) By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused
roller gear. without deformation.
Driving by the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed according 3) An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner lay-
to the control signal sent from the PCU. ers (multi-layer structure).
C. Heater lamp drive E. Automatic pressure release system

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther- The upper and the lower heat rollers are normally pressed. When,
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the however, one of the following conditions is satisfied, they are
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to released from the pressure.
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL DCDC PWB. • When the machine shifts to the pre-heating mode.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the • When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and • When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
heating the heat roller.
• When the machine has been left in the ready state for 20 min-
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, utes.
the thermostat is provided for safety.
• When the envelope mode is used.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off. (1) Pressure release operation
When the machine is in the conditions for operating the pressure
D. Fusing operation release system, the fusing pressure release solenoid (HLPCS) is
Color toner (Y,M,C,K) on paper is subject to heat and pressure to turned ON and the pressure release drive lever is in contact with
be fused on paper. the eccentric cam section of the pressure release drive gear.
At that time, color toner of Y, M, C, and K are mixed to reproduce Under this state, when the upper heat roller gear is rotated, the
colors approximate to the document image colors. pressure release drive gear is also rotated and the pressure
The heater lamps are provided in the lower and the upper heat release drive lever is reciprocated in the arrow direction by the
roller to heat paper from the upper and the lower sides. eccentric cam.
This is because paper must be heated both from the upper side The pressure release drive lever is provided with the one-way
and from the lower side together in order to melt and fuse toner in clutch in it, and the pressure release cam shaft is rotated by recip-
the four layers on the paper. rocating operations of the pressure release drive lever.
The upper and the lower heat rollers of silicon rubber are
employed.
This is because of the following reasons.
Pressure release drive

lever
HLPCS (ON)
Pressure release cam

shaft

The pressure release cam shaft is provided with the pressure When, however, the machine power is turned ON immediately after
release cams on two positions (the front side and the rear side), installation of the fusing unit, there is no problem in installation
and these cams press down the pressure lever F/R to release the under the pressed state.
pressure. Remove the fusing unit. If the unit is stored for a long period or is
transported, be sure to set it to the pressure release state.
By executing the following procedures, the fusing unit under press-
ing state can be brought into the pressure release state even
Pressure lever R though there is no machine available.
• Shift the pressure release control lever in the arrow direction,
and keep it under that state.
Pressure lever F
• Turn the upper heat roller gear in the arrow direction.
Upper heat roller gear
The pressure release camshaft also drives the pressure release

control lever. As the pressure release operation goes on, the fusing
pressure release control lever is driven in the arrow direction and
the fusing roller pressure release detector (HLPCD) is brought into
the transmission state.
HLPCD
Pressure release
control lever
F. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edge
section of the upper heat roller, at the edge section of the lower
heat roller, and at the center and the edge section of the external
In 10ms from when the fusing roller pressure release detector heating roller.
(HLPCD) is brought into the transmission state, the fusing pressure The heat roller temperature is detected by each temperature sen-
release solenoid is turned OFF and the pressure release operation sor to control the heater lamp to maintain the temperature at the
is completed. specified level.
(2) Pressing operation In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind
When the end user performs any operation or when the machine of paper.
receives a job signal, the same operation as the pressure release (For details, refer to SIM43-01 and SIM43-02.)
operation is performed to rotate the pressure release cam shaft.
G. Fusing unit initial operation
By rotation of the pressure release cam shaft, the pressure release
When the fusing unit is installed, the fuse in the fusing unit is
cam do not press down the pressure lever F/R, applying a pres-
checked for blown or not.
sure.
If the state that the fuse is not blown is detected, it is judged as a
Similarly to the pressure release operation, by rotation of the pres-
new fusing unit, and the fuse is blown off.
sure release cam shaft, the pressure release control lever is also
driven to bring the fusing roller pressure release detector (HLPCD) Simultaneously with this operation, the fusing unit counter is auto-
into the non-transmission state. matically reset.
In 10ms from when the fusing roller pressure detector (HLPCD) is NOTE: The initial operation means detection of a new unit, occur-
brought into the non-transmission state, the fusing pressure rence of a trigger for start of use, and resetting of the
release solenoid is turned OFF to complete the pressure release counter.
operation.
(3) Note
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and leave the
machine for 20 sec (without opening the front cabinet and the right
door during this period). After that, turn OFF the main power switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF without leaving the machine
for 20 sec, the power is turned OFF before completion of the pres-
sure release operation. If the machine is left for a long time under
this state, the upper and the lower heat rollers will be deformed.
When, in addition, the fusing roller is installed again after removing FUCRU
it, be sure to install it under the pressure release state.

11. Paper exit section
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
PCU PWB 2
3
P-GND
(NC)
4 /FUM_CK
CN-18 CN-16 5 /FUM_D
179228-3 B24B-PNDZS B18B-PNDZS 6 (NC)
5VNPD 1 8 5VNPD INT24V2 1 7 FUM_LD
/POD1 2 10 /POD1 P-GND 3
D-GND 3 12 D-GND /FUM_CK 5
14 5VNPD /FUM_D 7
16 /POD2 /FUM_LD 9 B4B-PH-K
18 D-GND POM_OUT_/B 11 1 POM_OUT_/B
179228-3 SMR-03V-N + SMP-03V-NC 20 5VNPD POM_OUT_/A 13 2 POM_OUT_/A
22 /TFD2 POM_OUT_B 15 3 POM_OUT_B
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
24 D-GND
/POD2 2 2 /POD2 2 POM_OUT_A 17 4 POM_OUT_A
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
R P
179228-3 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC

5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
/TFD2 2 2 /TFD2 2
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
4 F-GND 4
R P
TFD2 POM
FUM
POD2
1
POD1

POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper transport roller in the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the paper transport roller in the paper exit section.
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Detects paper pass in the paper exit section. Detects a paper jam.
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Detects paper pass in the paper exit section. Detects a paper jam.
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Detects paper full in the paper exit tray.

1 Paper holding arm Holds paper in the paper exit tray.
2 Paper exit roller Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. Switches back paper to transport it to the switchback section.
3 Paper transport roller 3 Transports paper to the paper exit roller.
B. Paper exit operation C. Switchback operation

Paper transported from the fusing section is transported to the In the duplex print mode, the paper exit drive motor (POM) rotates
paper exit roller by the paper transport roller 3 which is driven by in the switchback direction after passing a certain time (depending
the fusing drive motor (FUM). on the paper size) from when the POD2 detects the lead edge of
Then paper is transported to the paper exit tray or the inner finisher the paper transported from the fusing section.
by the paper exit roller which is driven by the paper exit drive motor Consequently, the paper is transported to the switchback section.
(POM).

12. Process control sensor, image registration sensor section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
PCU PWB
CN-18 CN-16
179228-5 DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS B18B-PNDZS B7B-PASK-1
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
REGS_R 4
REGS_R_LED# 3
3 REGS_R
5 REGS_R_LED# 5
3 3
5
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
P-GND
/FUM_CK
3
5 3 (NC) FUM
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND /FUM_D 7 4 /FUM_CK
+5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD /FUM_LD 9 5 /FUM_D
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F /2TURC 10 6 (NC)
4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F 24V3 12 7 FUM_LD
179228-5 8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
PCS_F 5 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
REGS_F 4 P S 1 /2TURC 1
REGS_F_LED# 3 2 24V3 2
D-GND
+5VNPD
2
1
P R 2TURC
REGS_R
REGS_F

2TURC Sensor reference reflection plate Opens/closes the sensor shutter. Switches the secondary transfer roller transfer position and the non-
drive clutch transfer position.
FUM Fusing drive motor Opens/closes the sensor reference reflection plate.
REGS_F Color image density sensor/ Detects registration shift on the machine front (F) side, and detects the color toner patch density.
Image registration sensor F
REGS_R Black image density sensor/ Detects registration shift on the machine rear (rear) side, and detects the black toner patch density.
Image registration sensor R Detects open/close of the reference reflection plate, the secondary transfer roller transfer position, and
the non-transfer position.

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
PCU PWB
DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + CN-18 CN-16
179228-5 DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS B18B-PNDZS B7B-PASK-1
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
REGS_R 4
REGS_R_LED# 3
3 REGS_R 3
5 REGS_R_LED# 5
3
5
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
P-GND
/FUM_CK
3
5 3 (NC) FUM
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND /FUM_D 7 4 /FUM_CK
+5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD /FUM_LD 9 5 /FUM_D
P S /2TURC 10 6 (NC)
24V3 12 7 FUM_LD
1 /2TURC 1
2 24V3 2
P R 2TURC
REGS_R

2TURC Sensor reference reflection plate Opens/closes the sensor shutter. Switches the secondary transfer roller transfer position and the non-
drive clutch transfer position.
FUM Fusing drive motor Opens/closes the sensor reference reflection plate.
REGS_R Image density sensor/ Detects registration shift on the machine rear (rear) side, and detects the toner patch density.
Image registration sensor R Detects open/close of the reference reflection plate, the secondary transfer roller transfer position, and
the non-transfer position.

B. Image density detection and registration
detection
Image density and image registration are detected by the sensors
provided on the front frame side and the rear frame side.
(1) Functions and operations of the color image
density sensor and the image registration sensor F
(REGS F) provided on the front frame side
With one sensor, the color toner patch density is detected in the
process control, and image registration shift on the front frame side
is detected in the image registration adjustment.
The reference reflection plate is provided on the sensor. Before the
process control operation, the shutter plate is closed and the sen-
sor sensitivity is adjusted by using the reference reflection plate.
Open/close operation of the reference reflection plate is controlled
by the fusing drive motor (FUM) and the sensor reference reflection
plate drive clutch (2TURC).
This control operation is made in synchronization with the switching
operation of the secondary transfer roller transfer position and the
non-transfer position.
The non-transfer position is the home position of the secondary
transfer roller. It is switched to the transfer position at every printing
operation.
(2) Functions and operations of the black image
density sensor and the image registration sensor
R (REGSR) provided on the rear frame side
With one sensor, the black toner patch density is detected in the
process control, and image registration shift on the rear frame side
is detected in the image registration adjustment.
The sensor detects open/close of the reference reflection plate, the
secondary transfer roller transfer position, and the non-transfer
position.
When the sensor detects the reference reflection plate, it is judged
that the reference reflection plate is closed and that the secondary
transfer roller is at the transfer position.
When the sensor detects the transfer belt surface, it is judged that
the reference reflection plate is opened and that the secondary
transfer roller is at the non-transfer position.

(1)
* 100V : STANDARD BD PWB

WH PWB HDD
* EX100 / EX200 : OPTION USB 2.0(HOST)
PGM BD TH
WH SW WH1 TO : DESK UN USB 2.0(DEVICE)
FRONT
LAN RS-232C OPE PWB PRT POWER SW PWB
a. MX-C400P/C380P
USB
MSW REACTOR LD PWB KEYs LEDs BZR PWRSW
PSFM
㪁 EX200 ONLY
LCD module
MFPC PWB LSU MOTHER PWB OPE CNT PWB
4.3
System block diagram
AC/DC PWB
13. Electrical section
A. Overall block diagram
PRINTER OPERATION UN
RTH(MAIN)
ADU OPENING &
DEVE UN(K)
HL EX2 RTH(SUB) CLOSING UN
DVTYP TCS_K TNM_K
TS HL EX1 TS HL LOW RTH(LOW) APPD1 APPD2 2TCCRU 2TCSET
DEVE UN(C)
HL MAIN TS RTH(EX1) TH-HUD
TS DVTYP TNM_C MULTI UN
TCS_C
MPFS MPED
DEVE UN(M) POFM
DVTYP TCS_M TNM_M
HL DCDC PWB MULTI TRAY
RIGHT
DEVE UN(Y) DOOR MPLD1 MPWS
HLPCS
TNM_Y UN
DVTYP TCS_Y
HLPCD
PAPER FRAME FUSING UN
RTH(EX2) FUSING UN CRM-K RESI UN
OUTPUT UN
FUCRU CRM-C POD1 2TURC FUM PROCON F
PROFM2
CRM-M POD2 RESI F
ADUC1 POM
DL-K
CRM-Y TFD2 RESI R MAIN DRIVE UN
FUFM
DL-C
DVM_CL
DVM_K DHPD_CL 1TURC1 DHPD_K 1TURC2
DL-M
1TUD_K
DL-Y
1TNFD
PCU PWB RRM CPFM CPUC1 CPFC
PPD2
HDDFM PAPER FEED DRIVE UN
CPED1 CPFD1 CLUD1 PPD1

CS PAPER FEED UN
PROFM1

MC PWB
ITUD_CL TC PWB
LSUFM
OPTION CSPD1 OPTION DRCRU_Y DRCRU_M DRCRU_C DRCRU_K

CSS INNER FINISHER
DESK
SW SW HT POSITION LOCK UN DRSET
CLUM
SW
WH PWB 㶎 EX100 / EX200 : OPTION HDD BD PWB
USB 2.0(HOST)
PGM BD TH
WH SW WH1 TO : DESK UN USB 2.0(DEVICE)
LAN RS-232C FRONT OPE PWB PRT POWER SW PWB

USB LD PWB
MSW REACTOR KEYs LEDs BZR PWRSW
PSFM
b. MX-B400P/B380P
* EX200 ONLY
LCD module
MFPC PWB LSU MOTHER PWB OPE CNT PWB
4.3
AC/DC PWB
PRINTER OPERATION UN
RTH(MAIN)
ADU OPENING
HL EX2 RTH(SUB) &
TS HL EX1 TS HL LOW APPD1 APPD2 2TCCRU 2TCSET

RTH(LOW)
HL MAIN TS RTH(EX1) TH-HUD MULTI UN
TS
MPFS MPED
POFM
HL DCDC PWB MULTI TRAY
RIGHT MPLD1 MPWS
DEVE UN(K)
HLPCS DOOR
DVTYP TCS_K UN
HLPCD
RTH(EX2)
PAPER FRAME FUSING UN RESI UN
FUSING UN OUTPUT
TNM_K
FUCRU POD1 2TURC FUM
CRM-K
PROFM2 POD2 ADUC1 POM
DL-K TFD2 FUFM RESI R

MAIN DRIVE UN
1TUD_K DVM_K 1TURC1
1TNFD
PCU PWB RRM CPFM CPUC1 CPFC
PPD2
HDDFM PAPER FEED DRIVE UN
CPED1 CPFD1 CLUD1 PPD1

CS PAPER FEED UN
MC PWB PROFM1
ITUD_CL TC PWB
LSUFM
OPTION OPTION DRCRU_K DRSET

CSPD1 CSS
DESK
INNER FINISHER HT POSITION LOCK UN
SW SW
CLUM
SW
USB HOST
SATA2 TYPE-A CN
(2)
HDD (FRONT)
LCD unit OPE CNT
SATA
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
MFPC PWB
USB HOST
a. MX-C400P/C380P
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA DIP USB
SLOT Device Interface Interface SWITCH SWITCH
Controller 0 1 USB2.0
Host
Controller
DDR/ SDRAM SDRAM

Controller 64M bx2
PCU
DDR2 HDD ASIC
Giga
LAN JACK IF RTC
BitEther GMII RTC Controller
RJ45
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI-Express Interface Interface
Interface (4Lane) (x10)
SOC (4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
LCDC
Local-Bus
Controller
Controller
PCI-Express Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON. MPC8533E (4lane)
1000MHz
PCI-Express
Interrupt
Interface
Controller
Programmable
FPDLINK
(1lane)
Transmitter
256Kb
Local Bus EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART Controller
Controller
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
FPDLINK
PCI
LVDS
Express
Transmitter Receiver
Board to Board Connector
CPLD SW
PCI-
Express SCAN LSU
Interface
PCI Express ACRE

Clock ROM FLASH
Generator MFP ASIC
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video-In Memory
Out Controller
SRAM
4Mbit
I2C
PROGRAM & OPT Local Memory
FLASH DIMM DDR2 DIMM PIC
SLOT Micon.

LSU-MOTHER
Video In
Out
SMIC
HCSL
Clock Codec ASIC
79MHz
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
MFPC PWB
SATA2 USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
HDD (FRONT)
LCD unit OPE CNT
SATA
b. MX-B400P/B380P
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
USB2.0 SATA SATA DIP USB
DDR2 DIMM SPD SWITCH
Device Interface Interface SWITCH
SLOT Controller USB2.0
0 1
Host
Controller
SDRAM SDRAM
DDR/DDR2 IF Controller 64Mbx2 PCU
HDD ASIC SDRAM
GigaBit
LAN JACK RTC
Ether GMII RTC
RJ45 Controller
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
Interface Interface
PCI-Express (4Lane) (x10)
Interface
(4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
SOC Local-Bus
LCDC
Controller
Controller
PCI-Express Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C
Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON.
MPC8533E (4lane)
Interrupt
Local Bus
Controller
Controller
Programmable
FPDLINK
Transmitter
256Kb
EEPRO
I2C1
I2C2
UART M
Controller
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
FPDLINK
Board to Board Connector
LVDS
CPLD
Transmitter Receiver
PCI-
Express SCAN LSU
Interface
PCI Express ACRE

ROM FLASH
Clock
Generator
MFP ASIC
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video-In Memory
Out Controller
SRAM

4Mbit
PROGRAM & OPT
Local Memory
FLASH DIMM I2C DDR2 DIMM
PIC
SLOT Micon.
MFPC PWB LSU-MOTHER PWB

(3)
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVM_K)
CLOCK DV Motor CL (DVM_CL)
Fuser Motor (FUM)
IC29 Fuser unit
PCU PWB
IC47 or IC48 HV Stepping Motor control

I2C Bus EEPROM HL control MC/TC unit
RESET IC Pout Motor(POM)/
(64kbit) HL_MAIN/LOW/EX1(EX2) FAN Motor Control
a. MX-C400P/C380P
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)/

PS FAN (PSFM)/
Resist Motor(RRM)
Procon FAN 1 (PROFM1)/
AddressBus[20:0] Procon FAN 2 (PROFM2)/
X1 IC44 FLASH ROM PoutFAN (POFM)/
Spread DATABus[15:0] (16Mbit) Fuser FAN (FUFM)/
Xtal
19.6608MHz Spectrum LSU FAN (LSUFM)
Drum Lamp
3-wired
Not Mount IC39 (DL_K/C/M/Y)
SRAM
Write-Protect
(1Mbit)
Sensor Input
CSS11-13/POD1/APPD1/APPD2 Sensor Input
1TUD_K/1TUD_CL/(2TUHPS) COIN VENDOR
IC11 (Optional)
DC Power PWM Motor Lock Detect
PMC ASIC CV_CLCOPY/
Supply FW CLOCK FUM_LD/FAN_LD3/FAN_LD8
CV_COPY
Fuser Thermistor open detect
(THOPEN_MAIN_CS)/EX2
CRU initial detect
DVCRU_Y_in/M/C/K/DRSET
CRUM TNCRU_Y/M/C/K
To MFPC I2C Bus CRUM_K/C/M/Y HV error detect
UART IC37
Via LSU-Mother MC_BK_ERR /CL/PTC_ERR
CPU
H8S/2373 Drum Lamp open detect
DLOPEN_Y/M/C/K
IC34
To LSU-Mother CPLD Load control Output
UART
I2C Bus MPFS/CPUC1/1TURC_1/
1TURC_2/CPFC/ADUC1
/2TURC/HLPCS/
Optional DVCRU_Y/M/C/K
Load Control Output

Coin-vendor Sensor Input Sensor Input
FINISHER UART (Optional) CPED1/MPED/MPLD1 CPFD1/HPOS/PPD1/DHPD_CL/
/TFD2/1TNFD DHPD_K/POD2/DSW_F/DSW_R/
Motor Lock Detect CLUD1/CSPD1
FAN_LD1/2/DVM_CL_LD/ IC23 CRU initial detect
DVM_BK_LD D/A Conv DRCRU_Y_in/M/C/K
DESK IC49/IC50/IC51 (TCS/REGS cont)
UART Fuser Thermistor open detect
MUX
HC151x3 (THOPEN_MAIN)/LOW/SUB
CRU initial detect Load control Output
1TCCRU_in/2TCCRU_in/FUCRU_in FUCRU/1TCCRU/2TCCRU
Sensor Input /1TCSET/2TCSET/ FAN Motor Control
PPD2 TNCRU_K_in/C/M/Y HDD FAN (HDDFM)

Motor Lock Detect
FAN_LD4
Fuser Thermistor open detect Synchronous Motor
THOPEN_EX1 Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Analog Input Analog Input

Temp/hum sensor (TH_M/HUD_M) Fuser Themistor (TH_MAIN/LOW/SUB/EX1/EX2) DC Motor
IC26
LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU) Toner Cont. sensor (TCS_K/C/M/Y) 䌌ift Up Motor
Analog
DV detector (DVTYP_C/M/Y/K) Process Cont. CL sensor (PCS_CL) (CLUM)
MUX
Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD) Process Cont.BK & Resist sensor (REGS_F/R)
DC Motor Control
CLOCK DV Motor BK(DVM_K)
Fuser Motor (FUM)
IC29 Fuser unit
IC47 or IC48 HV Stepping Motor control
I2C Bus EEPROM HL control
RESET IC MC / TC Pout Motor(POM) / FAN Motor Control
(64kbit) HL_MAIN/HL_LOW/HL_E
b. MX-B400P/B380P
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM) / PS FAN (PSFM) /

Resist Motor(RRM) Procon FAN 1 (PROFM1) /
AddressBus[20:0] Procon FAN 2 (PROFM2) /
X1 IC44 FLASH PoutFAN (POFM) /
DATABus[15:0]
Xtal Spread ROM Fuser FAN (FUFM)/
19.6608MHz Spectrum LSU FAN (LSUFM)
Drum Lamp
IC39
3-wired
Not Mount (DL_K)
SRAM
Write-Protect
(1Mbit)
Sensor Input
CSS11-13 / POD1 / APPD1 /APPD2 Sensor Input
/ 1TUD_K / 1TUD_CL COIN VENDOR
IC11 Motor Lock Detect
DC Power PWM (Optional)
FW PMC ASIC FUM_LD / FAN_LD3 / FAN_LD8
Supply CLOCK CV_CLCOPY /
Fuser Thermistor open detect CV_COPY
(THOPEN_MAIN_CS) /
THOPEN_MAIN_EX2
CRU initial detect
DVCRU_K_in / DRSET
CRUM TNCRU_K
To MFPC I2C Bus CRUM_K
UART IC37 HV error detect
Via LSU-Mother
CPU PTC_ERR / MC_BK_ERR
H8S/2373 Drum Lamp open detect
DLOPEN_K
IC34
CPLD Load control Output
To LSU-Mother UART
I2C Bus MPFS / CPUC1 / 1TURC_1 /
CPFC / ADUC1
/ 2TURC / HLPCS /
Optional
DVCRU_K
Load Control Output

Coin-vendor Sensor Input Sensor Input
FINISHER UART (Optional) CPED1 / MPED / MPLD1 CPFD1 / PPD1 /
/ TFD2 / 1TNFD DHPD_K / POD2 / DSW_F / DSW_R /
Motor Lock Detect IC23 CLUD1 / CSPD1
FAN_LD1/2 / DVM_BK_LD D/A Conv CRU initial detect
DESK IC49 / IC50 / IC51 Fuser Thermistor open detect (TCS/REGS cont) DRCRU_K_in
UART
MUX (THOPEN_MAIN)/ THOPEN_MAIN_LOW /
HC151x3 THOPEN_MAIN_SUB Load control Output
CRU initial detect FUCRU
Sensor Input 2TCCRU_in / FUCRU_in FAN Motor Control
PPD2 TNCRU_K

HDD FAN (HDDFM)
Motor Lock Detect
FAN_LD4
Synchronous Motor
Fuser Thermistor open detect
Toner Motor
THOPEN_EX1
(TNM_K)
Analog Input Analog Input

IC26 Temp/Hum sensor(TH_M/HUD_M) Fuser DC Motor
Analog LSU Thermistor(TH1_LSU) Thermistor(TH_MAIN/LOW/SUB/EX1/EX2) Lift Up Motor
MUX DV detector(DVTYP_K) Toner Cont. sensor(TCS_K) (CLUM)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor(MPWD) Process Cont.BK(REGS_R)
(4)
4.3 LCD OPE-CNT PWB LSU MOTHER PWB

501190-2019 B34B-PHDSS-B
CPLD CN6 CN8
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) EPM240T100C5 R[7:0] FPD Linc 20Pin 18Pin
CN4 IC4 G[7:0] VP386 Differential signaling 18Pin
FPC R[7:0] B[7:0] IC3
G[7:0] Control signal /LVDS_PWRDWN
B[7:0]
Control signal BU90LV047-E2 SCLKOUT
/REST_CPLD ICB2 Differential signaling
+2.5V_LCD
+5V_LCD +5V_LCD CPU
Printer operation unit
H8S/2373
IC7 19.6608MHz TC74VHC74 39.3216MHz CY25812 19.6608MHz CSTCE_G
6298 IC6 IC8 X1
CN3
FPC BL TB62752AFUG CCFT
IC1 AD[20:0] ROM /RES_ROM
DA[15:0] LH28F800BJE
CCFT /RES_ROM SOCKET1
PWS DISP /CSFROM
nPWRSW /CPU_RD Vpp_MFP SSM3J09FU 3.3V
RY/BY Q1 /FWP_CPU
/WP
OPE PWB PRT BM10B-CZSS-1-TF BM10B-CZSS-1-TF /CPU_HWR BM08B-CZSS-1-TF
CN1 CN2 CN7 8Pin HL DCDC
BM3B-PASS-1-TF /KEYIN KIA393F-EL KEYIN KEYIN PNL_SEL3 8Pin PWB
CN2 ICB3_3 PNL_SEL2 8Pin
DISP_out DISP_out PNL_SEL1
DTC114YSA /KEYIN LCD_PW PNL_SEL0
Q2 +5V_LCD KIA78R05F 12V
BM08B-SRSS-TB IC2
M34282M1 480KHz CN5 AD[16:0] SRAM
IC1 X1 TMS DA[15:8] IS63LV1024_12J_TR 5V
TCK /CSSRAM IC9
TDI /CPU_RD BA25BC0FP-E2
TDO /CPU_HWR +2.5V_LCD ICB7 3.3V
SW1 LK 3.3V
SW2 UK BM06B-GHS-TBT
SW3 DK CN1
SW4 RK CPU_RXD
SW5 STK 10Pin CPU_TXD
SW6 FEK/HMK RXD_MFP_DB
SW7 OK TXD_MFP_DB BM10B-CZSS-1-TF B16B-CZHK-B-1
SW8 BACK CN8 14Pin CN9
SW9 JOB TXD_MFP TD62503F RXD_SCN 10Pin
SW11 PRK RTS_MFP ICB4 nCTS_SCN 8Pin
SW12 CUK
SW13 *K
POF TC74LCX14FT TC74LCX14FT nPOF_SCN

/F0D1 /F0 TD62503F F0 ICB6 ICB6
LED1 READY /F1D2 /F1 ICB1 F1 RXD_MFP TXD_SCN
/F3G1 /F3 F3 CTS_MFP nRTS_SCN
LED2 PSR /RES_SCN RES_SCN
LED4 JOB STATUS SEG1LEDCPR SEG1 2SB1197K /SEG1 TD62503F SEG1_CPU KRC102S
QB3 ICB4 /RES_ROM QB2
LED6 DETA /REST_CPLD
SEG2D0 SEG2 2SB1197K /SEG2 SEG2_CPU
QB4 BU4227
/RES_CPU KRC102S KRC102S IC5 3.3V
QB2 QB2
/BZR /BZR 2SC2412K /BZR_LV BZR_LV
BZ1
Q2 /BZR_PULSE BZR_PULSE
nLCD_DISP

BM06B-CZSS-1-TF
CN3
LED7 WU_LED 6Pin
ESR 6Pin
LED11 POW_LED 6Pin

PSR
SW14 nWU_KEY
ESK
nPWRSW
(5) LSU MOTHER PWB
a. MX-C400P/C380P
SCN_DATA0-3 +-
/SCN_CLK+- 10
TXD_SCN/RXD_SCN/CTS_SCN/RTS_SCN/RES_SCN
UART
LCD_DATA0-3 +-
/LCD_CLK+- 10
LCD_DISP
LCD_SEL0-3
TXD_PIC/RXD_PIC
REQ_PIC/REQ_PIC_INT/CLR_PIC
POF_SCN
O.C.
UART
WU_FAX POW_LED
MFP O.C. O.C.
POF_MFP WU_LED
O.C. O.C.
Reset
Reset Input Reset IC
OPE-
PICVPPON CNT
LCD_CLKIN LCDCLK
33.26MHz PIC PWR_KEY
PIC16F882
TXD_PCU WU_KEY
RXD_PCU
CTS_PCU
RTS_PCU
USB SW RES_PCU
USB Port UART

OSC
(Front ) (System CK) DCCNT1
O.C.
DCPS
DCCNT2
O.C.
POF
INFO_LED
Thermistor Output Thermistor

AMP
ID[0:1]
Reset
Reset Input Reset IC ASIC
CHIP- 2
Mot or Cont rol PGM_CK
PCU PGM_START
IRQ1 (PGM_BRAKE) 3
JOBEND_INT Polygon O.C.
PCU I/ F Motor Polygon
ASIC PGM_LOCK
CHIP- 2
Control Motor
Regist er
SCK
RSV_DAT
et c...
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN O.C. O.C. LSU
ASIC Cont rol FANSTABLE FAN
Synchronous Serial CHIP- 2
communication
CLK_C_EN
TRANS_DAT
CLK_M_EN
ASIC BD
CHIP- 2 CLK_A_EN
(BD/
PCU_TRG
LSU_ASIC TH)
CHIP-2
OSC SYSCLK Serial I/F
S/S
(System CK) LD Cont rol DA_CLK
DA_DT Vref YMCKx2
Serial DA_LD Serial 8
ASIC
D/A I/F D/A
CHIP- 2
ECLK ECLK nSH KCx2 4

LVDS/ Driver
HSYNC HSYNC
LD_ENB KC 2
O.C.
VSYNC_M/Y
4 VSYNC LD Control LD5V
VSYNC_K/C ASIC Horizont al Scan (APC LDERRY MCK
CHIP- 2 / Vert ical Scan /ENB)
VIDEO I/ F CK ECLK Timing Cont rol BD
HSYNC HSYNC nSHB KCx2

ASIC
CHIP- 2
FPD- LINK/ Reciver
ASIC
LD_CHK 1/2/3/4 4
CHIP- 2
35 : 5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A: K1
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B: K2
35 : 5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C: C1
DT_C2+- 2 LD
Channel D: C2
VIDEOIF_ACT
OSCCLK_C OSC CLK_C_EN

(ColorCK)
OSCCLK_M OSC CLK_M_EN

Trigger Chain (B/W CK)
OSCCLK_A OSC CLK_A_EN

(Heavy PP
CK)
ID[0:0]
MFP Reset
Motor Control
Polygon
IRQ2 Motor
PCU I/ F Control
Synchronous Serial FAN
Register
communicat ion Control
SCK etc...
RSV_DAT
TRANS_RST
TRANS_DAT
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP- 1
VSYNC_K/ C LD Cont rol
Horizont al Scan
ECLK Serial
/ Vert ical Scan
Timing Cont rol D/A I/F
HSYNC
nSH MYx2 4
LD Control LD_ENB MY 2
O.C.
(APC
/ENB) LD5V
BD
nSHB MYx2
FPD- LINK/ Reciver
35 : 5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A: M1
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B: M2
35 : 5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C: Y1
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D: Y2

b. MX-B400P/B380P
SCN_DATA0-3 +-
/SCN_CLK+- 10
TXD_SCN/RXD_SCN/CTS_SCN/RTS_SCN/RES_SCN
UART
LCD_DATA0-3 +-
/LCD_CLK+- 10
LCD_DISP
LCD_SEL0-3
TXD_PIC/RXD_PIC
REQ_PIC/REQ_PIC_INT/CLR_PIC
POF_SCN
O.C.
UART
WU_FAX POW_LED
MFP O.C. O. C.
O.C. POF_MFP WU_LED

O. C.
Reset
Reset Input Reset
IC OPE-
PICVPPON
CNT
LCD_CLKIN LCDCLK
33.26MHz PIC PWR_KEY
PIC16F882
TXD _PCU WU_KEY
RXD_PCU
CTS _PCU
USB RTS _PCU
RES _PCU
SW
USB Port UART
OSC
(Front) (System CK) DCCNT1 O.C.
DCPS
DCCNT2
O.C.
POF
INFO_LED
Thermistor Output Thermistor

AMP
ID[0:0]
Reset Input Reset Reset
IC
Motor Control
PGM_CK
PCU PGM_START
JOBEND_INT Polygon (PGM_BRAKE) 3
PCU I/F Motor
O. C.
Polygon
PGM_LOCK
Control Motor
Register
SCK
RSV_DAT etc...
3 TRANS_RST
FAN
Control
Synchronous Serial
communication
CLK_C_EN
TRANS_DAT
CLK_M_EN
BD
CLK_A_EN
(BD/
LSU_ASIC TH)
(Racoon)
OSC SYSCLK
(System CK) S/S Serial I/F

LD Control DA_CLK
DA_DT Vref K1,K2
Serial DA_LD Serial 2
D/A I/F D/A
ECLK ECLK nSH K1,K2 2

LD
LVDS/Driver
HSYNC HSYNC LD_ENB K

O. C.
VSYNC _K
4 VSYNC LD Control LD5V
Horizontal (APC
Scan LDERR K
/ENB)
/Vertical Scan
VIDEO I/F CK ECLK
Timing Control BD
HSYNC HSYNC
FPD-LINK/Receiver
LD_CHK 1/2/3/4 4
35 : 5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A: K1
MFP DT_K2+- 2
Channel B: K2
Channel C:
Channel D:
VIDEOIF_ACT
OSCCLK_C OSC CLK_C_EN

(CK C)
OSCCLK_M OSC CLK_M_EN

(CK M)
OSCCLK_A OSC CLK_A_EN

(CK A)

(6)
P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
P.U.
TxD[PIC] TxD[PIC]
nTxD_PIC
P.U. P.D.
TxD1 RxD Schmit Inv. O.C.
Serial communication
TRANS_DAT P.U.
RxD[PIC] RxD[PIC]
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_PIC
RxD1
P.U.
TxD
PIC
O.C Schmit Inv.
RSV_DAT LSU ASIC PIC16F882 P.U. P.U.
CLR[PIC] CLR[PIC]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. P.D. CLR_PIC
P.U.
SCK1 SCK O.C O.C.
SCK_LSU P.U.
REQ[PIC] REQ[PIC]
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. REQ_PIC
LSU-MOTHER O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD_FIN
O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
O.C. CPU
O.C.
P.U. P.U. M30843FWGP
I/O MFPC
DTR_FIN INNER
O.C. Schmit Inv. OPE-Cnt HDD ASIC
P.U. P.U.
I/O
FINISHER
P.U.
䋨Optional) RxD TxD[2]
nTxD_SCN
O.C. O.C.
P.U.
TxD RxD[2]
DSR_FIN
P.U. P.U. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
TxD3 RxD
TxD_DSK CPU P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
O.C. O.C. RxD RTS[2]
P.U. RTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD
RxD_DSK Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
CPU P.U.
O.C. O.C. TxD CTS[2]
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684 CTS_SCN
I/O
DTR_DS K P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
O.C. O.C. DESK

P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O (Optional)
O.C. O.C. MFPC
DSR_DSK
CPLD
A[3:0]

D[15:8] EPM240T100C5 PMC GA
uPD65946GJ
A[9:0]
D[15:8]
PCU
(1)
F301
DC POWER SUPPLY Voltage
T2AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
RC101
+
~
~
-
N/F
Power FAN
MAIN POWER SW
B. AC power line diagram
AC IN F001
Live in Live out Live1 in
+24V5
20A/250V F101 Voltage
SQ001 NR002 T2AH/250V Conversion
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Neutral out Neutral1 in

Neutral in
FW
NR102 Voltage
Generating
F201 Conversion
Circuit
F003 +24V1
+24V2
AC power line diagram (120V, Taiwan)
T2AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3

no mount +24V4
RL102 +24V5
NR003
INT24V1
Live WH
Neutral WH
/HL_PR
L101
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
L102
WH-SW
HL DCDC PWB
WH PWB
RY1 CR101 CR102 CR103

NC T1 G T1 G T1 G
WH_CNT 4 PC101 PC102 4 PC103
NO T2 T2 4 T2
HLOUT_EX HLOUT_MAIN HLOUT_LOW
1 1 1
24V3
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
Neutral EX
Live HL
Live HL
Neutral LOW
Neutral MAIN
DESK

DESK drawer
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX1
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Low
HL_MAIN HL_LOW
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX2 THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Main
FUSING UNIT
(2)
F301
DC POWER SUPPLY Reactor Voltage
T2AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
RC101
+
~
~
-
N/F Power FAN
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F001
Live in Live out Live1 in
+24V5
T10AH/250V F101 Voltage
SQ001 NR002 T2AH/250V Conversion
+12V
+5Vn
AC power line diagram (200V)
+3.3V
F002
Neutral out Neutral1 in
Neutral in
T10AH/250V
FW
NR102 Voltage
Generating
F201 Conversion
F003 F004 Circuit
+24V1
+24V2
T2AH/250V T2AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
no mount RL102 +24V5
NR003
INT24V1
Live WH
Neutral WH
/HL_PR
L101
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
L102
WH-SW
HL DCDC PWB
WH PWB
RY1 CR101 CR102 CR103

NC T1 G T1 G T1 G
WH_CNT 4 PC101 PC102 4 PC103
NO T2 T2 4 T2
HLOUT_EX HLOUT_MAIN HLOUT_LOW
1 1 1
24V3
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
Neutral EX
Live HL
Live HL
Neutral LOW
Neutral MAIN
DESK

DESK drawer
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX1
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Low
HL_MAIN HL_LOW
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX2 THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Main
FUSING UNIT
(3)
HL DCDC PWB
24V4 24V1
Interlock
DCDC
OPE PWB POWER SW 24V2
OPE-cnt PWB
PRT PWB
12V 12V 24V3
a. MX-C400P/C380P
HDD
5VL INT24V1
3.3V
INT24V2
DCDC
5VN 3.3V 12V
LSU-MOTHER
PWB MFPC PWB
INT5V
FET
POL
YSW
INT 24V2 Motors
INT24V2 PGM
FET
24V1
DVM_BK DVM_CL FUM
INTCNT INT5V
LD PWB
LD
24V3 Clutches, Solenoids and others
HLPCS ADUC1 CPUC1 DVCRU

AC/DC PWB INT24V2 INT24V2
MPFS CPFC 1TURC1 FUCRU
24V1 24V1
1TURC2 2TURC ATC
6.3A
24V3 Motors
24V2
6.3A TNM_K TNM_C CLUM
24V3 24V3 24V3 TNM_M TNM_Y
6.3A PCU PWB 24V3 Fans
24V4 24V4
PROFM2 POFM FUFM HDDFM LSUFM
6.3A INT 24V1 PWBs

INT24V1
TC PWB MC PWB
INT24V1 INT24V1
4.0A INT 24V1 Motors
24V_DSK

POM RRM CPFM
5V0
FET
INT 24V1 Fans
5VL
FET
OPTION OPTION
PROFM1
PSFM DESK INNER-FIN

DSW-R DSW-F
HL DCDC PWB
24V4 24V1
DCDC
OPE PWB POWER SW 24V2
OPE-cnt PWB
PRT PWB
12V 12V 24V3
HDD
5VL INT24V1
b. MX-B400P/B380P
3.3V
INT24V2
DCDC
5VN 3.3V 12V
LSU-MOTHER
PWB MFPC PWB
INT5V
FET
POL
YSW
INT 24V2 Motors
INT24V2 PGM
FET
24V1
DVM_BK FUM
INTCNT INT5V
LD PWB
LD
24V3 Clutches, Solenoids and others
HLPCS ADUC1
ADUC1 CPUC1 DVCRU
AC/DC PWB INT24V2 INT24V2
MPFS CPFC 1TURC1 FUCRU
24V1 24V1
6.3A
1TURC2 2TURC ATC
24V3 Motors
24V2
TNM_K
6.3A
24V3 24V3 24V3 CLUM
6.3A
PCU PWB 24V3 Fans
24V4 24V4
PROFM2 POFM FUFM HDDFM
6.3A INT 24V1 PWBs

INT24V1
TC PWB MC PWB
INT24V1 INT24V1
4.0A INT 24V1 Motors

24V_DSK
POM RRM CPFM

5V0
FET
INT 24V1 Fans
5VL
FET
OPTION OPTION
PROFM1
PSFM DESK INNER-FIN

DSW-R DSW-F
[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Necessary work for maintenance

A. Counter reset B. Toner density initial setting
When the developer cartridge, the drum cartridge, the primary When the developer cartridge is replaced, the initial setting of the
transfer unit, the secondary transfer unit, or the fusing unit is toner density is automatically executed.
replaced with a new one, the initial detection function operates after If another simulation is executed or the machine power is turned
turning ON the power to reset each counter automatically. OFF during execution of this simulation, the initial setting of the
When the machine is initialized during warming up, or when the toner density cannot be executed normally. Therefore, never oper-
simulation is executed or the machine is turned OFF and the door ate the machine until the initial setting of the toner density is com-
is opened before the machine enters the print ready state, the initial pleted (the machine enters the print ready state).
detection function may not operate normally. Therefore, never exe-
cute the simulation or never operate the machine such as turning C. Other
OFF the machine power and opening the door before the machine Perform the following items of check and work.
enters the print ready state after replacing one of the above parts • Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) (SIM61-04)
and turning ON the power. • Image registration adjustment (SIM50-22)
When the counter is not automatically reset, it must be reset manu- • Image density sensor (Image registration sensor) adjustment
ally. (SIM44-13)
Since the maintenance counter (total) and the maintenance • Firmware version check (SIM22-05) (Execute according to the
counter (color) are not automatically reset, they must be cleared by necessity.)
executing SIM24-4.
• Trouble counter and JAM counter reset (SIM24-01)
(For details, refer to the page of "2. Maintenance timing display.")
• Printer color balance adjustment (MX-C400P/C380P)
• Printer density and gradation adjustment (MX-B400P/B380P)
2. Maintenance timing display

A message of maintenance timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value.
The relationship between the kinds of messages and the counters is shown below.
A. MX-C400P/C380P
(1) Maintenance counter

Display content SIM26-38-A Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required.Code:TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Disable
Maintenance required.Code:CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Disable
Maintenance required.Code:AA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total), When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) Maintenance counter (Color) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached
Maintenance required. Code: AA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Disable
• After execution of maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (total) and the maintenance counter (color).
• When the maintenance counter (total) and the maintenance counter (color) are cleared, the above display disappears.
(2) Primary transfer unit

Display content SIM26-38-B Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance requied Code: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance requied Code: TK1 1 (Print stop) counter When 120K is reached Disable
• When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day
counter are automatically cleared.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the whole primary transfer unit is replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print
counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter of the primary transfer unit.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P MAINTENANCE 9 – 1

(3) Secondary transfer unit

Display content SIM26-38-C Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance requied Code: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print When 60K is reached Enable
Maintenance requied Code: TK2 1 (Print stop) counter When 60K is reached Disable
• When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If the above guidance does not disappear though the secondary transfer unit is replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print
counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter.
(4) Fusing unit

Display content SIM26-38-D Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance requied Code: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance requied Code: FK1 1 (Print stop) (Heat roller upper) When 120K is reached Disable
Maintenance requied Code: FK2 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance requied Code: FK2 1 (Print stop) (Heat roller lower and external) When 120K is reached Disable
• When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper
side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side
and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If a sub part is used to execute the maintenance or if the above guidance does not disappear when the whole fusing unit is replaced, SIM24-
4 must be executed to clear the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper side of the heat
roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side and the outside
of the heat roller).
(5) Drum cartridge

Display condition
Print job Enable/
Display content SIM26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: DK Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DC Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DM Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: DY Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: DK When 60K + 1K is reached Disable
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
is reached
Maintenance requied 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached by either Enable for Black/White
Code: DC/DM/DY Drum cartridge print counter (M) counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) by either counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2

Display condition
Print job
Display content SIM26-38-F
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: VK Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VC Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VM Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code: VY Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
Maintenance requied 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code: VK When 60K + 1K is reached Disable
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
is reached
Maintenance requied 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable for Black/White
Code: VC/VM/VY Developer cartridge print counter (M) Disable for Color
Developer cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) Disable for Color
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
cuted.
with the SIM25-2.
• When the initial setting of the toner density is executed, the counters are cleared.
(7) Toner cartridge

Display condition
Print job
Display content SIM26-38-A Remaining
Status Enable/Disable
set value quantity display *1
Y/M/C/BK *2 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
1 (Print stop)
0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of Enable
1 (Print stop) XX sheets. *3
Change the Toner cartridge BK 0 (Print continue) 0% When the black toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
1 (Print stop)
Change the Toner cartridge Y/M/C 0 (Display) 0% When the color toner cartridge reaches toner end. Enable for Black/White
1 (No display) Disable for Color
*4
No display — 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100-75%. Enable
Install the Toner cartridge — No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
Y/M/C/BK When a toner cartridge of a different color is installed.
Improper cartridge Code: F2-04 — No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error Code: F2-05 — No display CRUM trouble Disable
Since the life of the toner cartridge which is packed when shipping from the factory is 2.5K, the remaining quantity of the toner cartridge,
though it is a new one, is displayed as 25-0%.
*4: When the black toner cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color toner cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be

(8) Waste toner box
Display content Display condition Print job Enable/Disable

The toner collection container will When the waste toner full detection switch is ON for 1sec or more. Enable
be needed soon.
Replace used toner cartridge When 500 count is reached from the above state. Disable
needed soon. (1 count for 1 sheet output. When the process control is performed once, 10 counts are added.)
When the toner collection bottle is replaced, the display disappears.
B. MX-B400P/B380P
(1) Maintenance counter

Display content SIM26-38-A Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code:TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached Disable
• After execution of maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (total).
• When the maintenance counter (total) is cleared, the above display disappears.
(2) Primary transfer unit

Display content SIM26-38-B Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: TK1 1 (Print stop) When 120K is reached Disable
• When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day
counter are automatically cleared.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the whole primary transfer unit is replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print
counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter of the primary transfer unit.
(3) Secondary transfer unit

Display content SIM26-38-C Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print When 60K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: TK2 1 (Print stop) counter When 60K is reached Disable
• When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If the above guidance does not disappear though the secondary transfer unit is replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print
counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter.
(4) Fusing unit

Display content SIM26-38-D Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter (Heat When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: FK1 1 (Print stop) roller upper) When 120K is reached Disable
Maintenance required. Code: FK2 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: FK2 1 (Print stop) (Heat roller lower and external) When 120K is reached Disable
• When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper
side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side
and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If a sub part is used to execute the maintenance or if the above guidance does not disappear when the whole fusing unit is replaced, SIM24-
4 must be executed to clear the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper side of the heat
roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side and the outside
of the heat roller).

(5) Drum cartridge

Display content SIM26-38-E Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: DK 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: DK 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
reached

Display content SIM26-38-F Enable/
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
Maintenance required. Code: VK 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter When 72K is reached Enable
reached
cuted.
with the SIM25-2.
• When the initial setting of the toner density is executed, the counters are cleared.
(7) Toner cartridge

Display content Remaining Enable/
Status
quantity display *1 Disable
Prepare a new toner *2 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of XX sheets. *3 Enable
Change the toner cartridge 0% When the toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
No display 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100 -75%. Enable
Install the toner cartridge. No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
Improper cartridge. Code: F2-04 No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error. Code: F2-05 No display CRUM trouble Disable
(8) Waste toner box
Display content Display condition Print job Enable/Disable

The toner collection container will When the waste toner full detection switch is ON for 1sec or more. Enable
be needed soon.
Replace used toner cartridge When 500 count is reached from the above state. Disable
needed soon. (1 count for 1 sheet output. When the process control is performed once, 10 counts are added.)
When the toner collection bottle is replaced, the display disappears.

3. Maintenance list
A. Maintenance list (MX-C400P/C380P)
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300

Section Part name Remark
K K K K K K K K K K
Drum cartridge Drum cartridge (Black) Supply
Drum cartridge (Cyan) Supply
Drum cartridge (Magenta) Supply
Drum cartridge (Yellow) Supply
Developer cartridge Developer cartridge (Black) Supply
Developer cartridge (Cyan) Supply
Developer cartridge (Magenta) Supply
Developer cartridge (Yellow) Supply
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Black) Supply Replace at every toner empty. Replacement is made by
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Supply the user.
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Supply
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Supply
Waste toner Waste toner box Replace at every full detection. Replacement is made by
the user.
Secondary transfer Secondary transfer roller unit
Primary transfer Primary transfer belt 1
Primary transfer roller 4
Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner 1
PTC cleaner B 1
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Transfer tension roller
Backup shaft
Registration backup shaft
Fusing Upper heat roller unit 1
Lower heat roller unit 1
Thermistor retainer 1
External heat roller contact 1 Part with four thermistors
thermistor 1 (RTH_EX1) integrated in it
External heat roller contact
thermistor 2 (RTH_EX2)
Upper heat roller non-contact
thermistor (RTH_Main)
Upper heat roller contact
thermistor (RTH_Sub)
Lower heat roller contact 1
thermistor (RTH_Low)
Filter Ozone filter 1
Roller Paper pickup roller (Tray 1) 1 Replace as needed.
Paper feed roller 1 Reference: About 100K
Separation roller 1 or 1 year of use.
Paper feed roller 1
(Manual paper feed tray)
Manual paper feed separation 1
pad unit
Paper pickup roller unit 1

B. Maintenance list (MX-B400P/B380P)
60 72 120 144 180 216 240 288 300

Section Quantity Remark
K K K K K K K K K
Drum cartridge 1
Developer cartridge 1
Toner cartridge 1 Replace at every toner empty. Replacement is made by the user.
Toner collection box 1 Replace at every full detection. Replacement is made by the user.
Secondary transfer unit 1
Primary Intermediate transfer belt 1
transfer Primary transfer roller 1
unit Cleaning blade 1
PTC wire 1
PTC cleaner 1
PTC cleaner B 1
Transfer drive roller –
Transfer follower roller –
Transfer tension roller –
Backup shaft –
Registration backup shaft –
Fusing Upper heat roller unit 1
Lower heat roller unit 1
Thermistor retainer 1
External heat roller contact thermistor 1 1 Part with four thermistors
(RTH_EX1) integrated in it
External heat roller contact thermistor 2
(RTH_EX2)
Upper heat roller non-contact thermistor
(RTH_Main)
Upper heat roller contact thermistor
(RTH_Sub)
Lower heat roller contact thermistor 1
(RTH_Low)
Filter Ozone filter 1
Roller Paper pickup roller (Tray 1) 1 Replace as needed.
Paper feed roller 1 Reference: About 100K or 1 year
Separation roller 1 of use.
Paper feed roller 1
(Manual paper feed tray)
Manual paper feed separation pad 1
Paper pickup roller unit 1

C. Drum cartridge
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Drum cartridge (Black)
2 Drum cartridge (Cyan)
3 Drum cartridge (Magenta)
4 Drum cartridge (Yellow)
NOTE: When handling the drum cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the OPC drum surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the OPC drum surface, the cleaning blade may be reversed and defective
images may be generated. In this case, use dry cloth to clean the drum. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace
the drum with a new one.
NOTE: Avoid exposing the OPC drum surface to strong lights (sunlight, fluorescent lamp lights, incandescent lamp lights).
Remove the black protection sheet which covers the OPC drum before installing the drum cartridge to the machine.
NOTE: When putting the drum cartridge outside the machine, cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using paper, use about
10 sheets of paper to cover.)
NOTE: When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared.
NOTE: If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print ready
state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, SIM24-7 must be used to reset the counters manually.
4 3 2 1

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
No. Part name 60K 72K 120K 144K 180K 216K 240K 288K 300K Remark
1 Drum cartridge
NOTE: When handling the drum cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the OPC drum surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the OPC drum surface, the cleaning blade may be reversed and defective
images may be generated. In this case, use dry cloth to clean the drum. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace
the drum with a new one.
NOTE: Avoid exposing the OPC drum surface to strong lights (sunlight, fluorescent lamp lights, incandescent lamp lights).
Remove the black protection sheet which covers the OPC drum before installing the drum cartridge to the machine.
NOTE: When putting the drum cartridge outside the machine, cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using paper, use about
10 sheets of paper to cover.)
NOTE: When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared.
If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print ready

D. Developer cartridge
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Developer cartridge (Black)
2 Developer cartridge (Cyan)
3 Developer cartridge (Magenta)
4 Developer cartridge (Yellow)
NOTE: When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumu-
lated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically reset, and the initial setting of the toner density is automat-
ically executed.
If the counters are not automatically reset, use SIM24-4 to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When installing a new developer cartridge, be sure to install the toner cartridge in advance. If a new developer cartridge is installed
without installing the toner cartridge, the initial setting of the toner density is not executed.
NOTE: If the initial setting of the toner density is not automatically executed when the developer cartridge is replaced, SIM25-2 must be used
to execute the initial setting of the toner density.
NOTE: When handling the developer cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the developer roller
surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the developer roller surface, defective images may be generated. In this case,
use dry cloth and alcohol to clean the roller. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace the developer cartridge with a
new one.
If developer or toner is attached to the developer roller surface, never use alcohol.
4 3 2 1

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Developer cartridge
NOTE: When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumu-
lated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically reset, and the initial setting of the toner density is automat-
ically executed.
NOTE: When installing a new developer cartridge, be sure to install the toner cartridge in advance. If a new developer cartridge is installed
without installing the toner cartridge, the initial setting of the toner density is not executed.
NOTE: If the initial setting of the toner density is not automatically executed when the developer cartridge is replaced, SIM25-2 must be used
to execute the initial setting of the toner density.
NOTE: When handling the developer cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the developer roller
surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the developer roller surface, defective images may be generated. In this case,
use dry cloth and alcohol to clean the roller. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace the developer cartridge with a
new one.
If developer or toner is attached to the developer roller surface, never use alcohol.

E. Toner cartridge
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Replace at every toner empty. Replacement is made by the user.
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan)
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta)
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow)
5 Waste toner box Replace at every full detection. Replacement is made by the user.
4
3
2
1

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Toner cartridge Replace at every toner empty. Replacement is made by the user.
2 Toner collection box Replace at every full detection. Replacement is made by the user.

F. Secondary transfer section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Secondary transfer roller unit
NOTE: When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the
usage day counter are automatically reset.
If a simulation is executed or the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the
machine enters the print ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
NOTE: When handling the secondary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the secondary
transfer roller surface.

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Secondary transfer unit
NOTE: When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the
usage day counter are automatically reset.
If a simulation is executed or the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the
machine enters the print ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
NOTE: When handling the secondary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the secondary
transfer roller surface.

G. Primary transfer section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Primary transfer belt
2 Primary transfer roller
3 Cleaning blade
4 PTC wire
5 PTC cleaner
6 PTC cleaner B
7 Primary transfer drive coupling
8 Transfer drive roller
9 Transfer follower roller
10 Transfer tension roller
11 Backup shaft
12 Registration backup shaft
NOTE: When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically reset.
NOTE: When a sub part is used to execute the maintenance, SIM24-4 must be used to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When handling the primary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the transfer belt sur-
face.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the transfer belt surface, defective images may be generated. In this case, use
dry cloth and alcohol to clean the belt. When alcohol is used, wipe with dry cloth carefully.
9 3 1 7
11
10
11
2
8
2
12
2 6
4 5

NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints or oily dirt on the transfer belt surface. (Do not put the transfer belt on a place where there is oily dirt or
dust.)
NOTE: When replacing the transfer belt, hold the edge section (within 8mm from the edge) of the transfer belt.
NOTE: When rotating the transfer belt manually, use a screwdriver to rotate the drive gear section.
NOTE: To install or remove the primary transfer unit, hold the grip.
NOTE: When installing or removing the primary transfer unit, be careful not to touch the section marked with a red circle in the figure below.
When opening the right door, be careful not to touch the exposed section of the transfer belt.
Procedures when the primary transfer belt is touched mistakenly

1) Clean and remove oily dirt from the transfer belt surface with alcohol.
2) Wipe out alcohol taint with waste cloth. (If not, alcohol taint may be printed on a copy image.)
3) To prevent against reversing of the cleaning blade, apply KYNAR to the primary transfer belt.
4) Make three continuous multi-print copies of half tone images on the whole surface of A4R (8.5" x 11"R), and check to confirm that there are
no fingerprints or alcohol taint on the copy images. If there are fingerprints or alcohol taint, repeat the procedure again.

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Intermediate transfer belt
2 Primary transfer roller
3 Cleaning blade
4 PTC wire
5 PTC cleaner
6 PTC cleaner B
7 Primary transfer drive coupling
8 Transfer drive roller
9 Transfer follower roller
10 Transfer tension roller
11 Backup shaft
12 Registration backup shaft
NOTE: When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically reset.
NOTE: When handling the primary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the transfer belt sur-
face.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the transfer belt surface, defective images may be generated. In this case, use
dry cloth and alcohol to clean the belt. When alcohol is used, wipe with dry cloth carefully.
9 3 1 7
11
10
12
2 6
4 5

H. Fusing section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Upper heat roller unit
2 Lower heat roller unit
3 External heating unit
4 Separation pawl lower
5 Separation pawl lower spring
6 Thermistor retainer
7 External heat roller contact Part with four thermistors
thermistor 1 (RTH_EX1) integrated in it
External heat roller contact
thermistor 2 (RTH_EX2)
Upper heat roller non-contact
thermistor (RTH_Main)
Upper heat roller contact
thermistor (RTH_Sub)
8 Lower heat roller contact
thermistor (RTH_Low)
NOTE: When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the
upper side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on
the lower side and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically reset.
2
7
6 8
4
5
4
5

(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Upper heat roller unit
2 Lower heat roller unit
3 External heating unit
4 Separation pawl lower
5 Separation pawl lower spring
6 Thermistor retainer
7 External heat roller contact thermistor 1 Part with four thermistors
(RTH_EX1) integrated in it
(RTH_EX2)
(RTH_Main)
(RTH_Sub)
8 Lower heat roller contact thermistor
(RTH_Low)
NOTE: When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the
upper side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on
the lower side and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically reset.
2
7
6 8
4
5
4
5

I. Filter section
(1) MX-C400P/C380P
1 Ozone filter
(2) MX-B400P/B380P
1 Ozone filter

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Descriptions on icons in the disassembly and assembly procedures flowchart

Maintenance work
: Check : Adjust
: Clean : Lubricate
: Replace
Part kind U 10-00 Page of detailed
U : Unit M : Maintenance parts 8.5 inch operation panel unit procedures
E : Electrical parts P : Parts
Unit or part name
1. External view
External view
P 10-1 P 10-2
Paper exit tray Left cabinet upper
P 10-1 P 10-2
Left cabinet MFP ROM cover
P 10-2
Left cabinet lower
P 10-2 P 10-3
Front cabinet upper Upper cabinet right
P 10-3
Rear cabinet
A. Paper exit tray B. Left cabinet

1) Open the front cover. 1) Remove the stopper. Slide the left cabinet to the front side to
remove.
2) Remove the coin screw, and remove the paper exit tray.
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

C. Left cabinet upper E. Left cabinet lower
1) Open the front cover. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet lower.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet upper.

F. Front cabinet upper
1) Open the front cover.
2) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
D. MFP ROM cover

1) Remove the screw, and remove the MFP ROM cover.

3) Remove the screw, and slide the front cabinet upper to the 3) Tilt up the upper cabinet right to remove the connectors and
right to remove. the snap band.
G. Upper cabinet right

H. Rear cabinet
1) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and remove the rear
cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and slide the upper cabinet right to the
front side.

2. Operation panel section
Operation panel section

P 10-3 U 10-4
Upper cabinet right Operation panel unit
E 10-4 E 10-5
Operation panel power switch PRT OPE PWB
E 10-5 E 10-6
Flash PWB OPE CNT PWB
E 10-6
LCD
A. Operation panel unit 3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the operation panel unit.
1) Remove the screw, and slide the upper cabinet right center to
remove.
2) Remove the screw, and slide the paper exit port cabinet upper
to remove.
(1) Operation panel power switch
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
operation panel power switch.

(2) PRT OPE PWB (3) Flash PWB
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and the earth 1) Remove the connectors and the snap band. Remove the har-
sheet, and remove the PRT OPE PWB. ness from the clamp and the edge holder.
NOTE: After connecting the connectors, get the harnesses NOTE: After connecting the connectors, get the harnesses
together at the center of the PRT OPE PWB. together at the center of the PRT OPE PWB.
2) Remove the screw, and the earth sheet, and remove the panel
mounting plate.
2) Turn the cross key boss through the hole in the PRT OPE
PWB to remove it.

3) Release the lock, and remove the Flash PWB. (5) LCD
NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the Flash PWB is 1) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD holder. Remove the
securely locked. LCD.
(4) OPE CNT PWB

OPE CNT PWB.
NOTE: When the OPE CNT PWB is disassembled, the earth plate
is also disassembled. Be careful to install the earth plate
when installing the OPE CNT PWB.

3. Manual paper feed section
Manual paper feed section

M 10-7 M 10-8
Paper feed roller Manual feed separate pad unit
U 10-14
ADU open/close PG unit
P 10-15 U 10-8 U 10-9

ADU tray lower cabinet Manual paper feed tray unit Manual paper feed unit
E 10-9
Paper pickup solenoid
E 10-9
Manual feed paper empty detector
E 10-8 E 10-8
Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor Manual feed paper length detector 1
A. Paper feed roller 3) Slide the collar to the front side and the rear side.
1) Remove the cover.
4) Slide the paper feed roller to the front side to remove.
2) Disengage the pawl, and slide the roller stopper to the front
side and the rear side.

B. Manual feed separate pad unit 4) Slide the cover, and remove the shaft. Then remove the man-
1) Remove the manual feed separate pad unit. ual paper feed tray unit.
(1) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor

1) Remove the arm.
C. Manual paper feed tray unit
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
2) Slide the tray and turn it back.
2) Remove the cover, and remove the shaft.
3) Disconnect the connector. Disengage the pawl, and remove

the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
3) Slide the tray, and remove the screw.
(2) Manual feed paper length detector 1

1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.

2) Set the extension tray in the storage state, and remove it. (1) Paper pickup solenoid
1) Remove the E-ring, and remove the collar and the gear.
Remove the spring. Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear.
3) Remove the actuator. Disconnect the connector, and remove

the manual feed paper length detector 1.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper pickup solenoid.
Remove the screw from the paper pickup solenoid, and
remove the fixing plate.
D. Manual paper feed unit (2) Manual feed paper empty detector
1) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the 1) Remove the spring, and deflect the actuator to remove.
connector.
2) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl. Remove

2) Remove the screw, and remove the manual paper feed unit, the manual feed paper empty detector. Remove the holder
and pull out the harness. from the manual feed paper empty detector.

4. Tray paper feed section
Tray paper feed section

M 10-10
Paper pickup roller
U 10-10 M 10-10 M 10-11

Tray Separation roller Paper feed roller
U 10-14 U 10-11 E 10-11

Right door Tray paper feed unit Tray 1 paper empty detector
U 10-11 E 10-11
Paper feed reverse unit Tray 1 upper limit detector
E 10-12
Paper transport detector 1
E 10-11
A. Tray C. Separation roller

1) Pull out the tray, and lift and remove it. 1) While disengaging the pawl, remove the separation roller.
B. Paper pickup roller

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper pickup roller.

D. Paper feed roller a. Paper transport detector 2
1) While disengaging the pawl, remove the paper feed roller. 1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper transport
detector 2.
(2) Tray 1 paper empty detector

1) Remove the tray 1 paper empty detector. Disconnect the con-
nector.
E. Tray paper feed unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. Remove the
screw, and remove the tray paper feed unit.
(1) Paper feed reverse unit (3) Tray 1 upper limit detector
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
paper feed reverse unit.
NOTE: When installing, pinch the band with the paper feed reverse
unit and install.

2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear. Remove the paral- 5) While pulling the lever, remove the holder.
lel pin.
3) Slide the shaft, and remove the parallel pin.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray 1 upper limit

detector.
4) Remove the shaft. Remove the gear, the holder, and the bear-
ing.
(4) Paper transport detector 1

1) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Disconnect the
connect. Remove the screw from the holder, and remove the
paper transport detector 1.

5. Paper transport, switchback section
Paper transport, switchback section

E 10-14
Paper exit cooling fan motor
P 10-13
ADU cabinet upper
E 10-14 U 10-14
ADU transport path detector 1 ADU open/close PG unit
M MX-C400P/C380P: 10-27 E 10-15

MX-B400P/B380P: 10-33 ADU transport path detector 2
Secondary transfer unit
P 10-15
ADU tray lower cabinet
U 10-14
Right door
E 10-15
Temperature humidity sensor
U 10-11 U 10-15
Tray paper feed unit PS unit
E 10-15
A. ADU cabinet upper 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet upper.
1) Pull the lever, and release the lock, and open the right door.

B. Paper exit cooling fan motor D. Right door
1) Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor, and disconnect the 1) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
connector.
NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces down.
2) Remove the screw on the rear side, and remove the arm from
the right door. Remove the band on the front side, and remove
the right door.
C. ADU transport path detector 1

1) Remove the screw, and turn the lever. Disengage the pawl,
and remove the cover.
NOTE: When placing the right door, place so that the secondary
transfer unit faces up.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU transport path

detector 1.
(1) ADU open/close PG unit

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire and the spring. (2) ADU tray lower cabinet
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the ADU tray lower cabinet.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band, and pull
out the harness. (3) Temperature humidity sensor
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the temperature humidity
sensor, and disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the holder and remove the
ADU open/close PG unit. E. PS unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the PS unit.
a. ADU transport path detector 2

1) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and remove the
paper guide. Remove the ADU transport path detector 2.
F. Paper transport detector 3

paper transport detector 3.

6. LSU section
U 10-62 LSU section

MFPC unit
U 10-16
LSU
U 10-66
HDD cooling fan motor unit
E 10-16
Polygon motor 1
A. LSU • MX-B400P/B380P
1) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU.
NOTE: When installing the LSU, be sure to remove the waste

toner box.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the polygon motor 1.
(1) Polygon motor 1
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or dirt the mirror section of the
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the LSU, and remove polygon motor. Do not touch the movable section and the
the weight plate and the mounting plate, and disconnect the mirror surface of the polygon motor
connector.
NOTE: When installing, tighten the screw which is marked with a
circle ({) first.
• MX-C400P/C380P

7. OPC drum section
MX-C400P/C380P
OPC drum section M 10-21 M 10-18

Developer cartridge Drum cartridge
M 10-17
Waste toner box
U 10-18 E 10-19
Waste toner fulcrum holder unit Drum cartridge detection switch
U 10-10
Tray
E 10-18
Waste toner full detection switch
MX-B400P/B380P
U MX-C400P/C380P: 10-47 E 10-20
MX-B400P/B380P: 10-56 Discharge lamp
Main drive unit
A. Waste toner box 3) Turn the lock lever until it stops to release the lock, and
1) Open the front cover. remove the waste toner box.
• MX-C400P/C380P
2) Check to confirm that the belt tension of the primary transfer

unit is released (the separation lever of the primary transfer
unit is under the state shown in the figure).
If the belt tension is not released, turn the separation lever to
the state shown in the figure. • MX-B400P/B380P

B. Drum cartridge 2) Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner fulcrum holder
1) Put your finger on the drum cartridge lever, and pull it out unit, and disconnect the connector.
straight and horizontally.
• MX-C400P/C380P
(1) Waste toner full detection switch

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the waste toner drive holder.
• MX-B400P/B380P
2) Remove the spring and the lever. Remove the waste toner full
detection switch from the lever.
C. Waste toner fulcrum holder unit

1) Remove the band, and remove the front cover.

D. Drum cartridge detection switch 3) Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
1) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and open the
drum positioning plate unit.
• MX-C400P/C380P
4) Remove the holder. Disconnect the connector, and remove the

drum cartridge detection switch.
• MX-C400P/C380P
• MX-B400P/B380P
2) Remove the screw, and remove the drum positioning plate

unit, and disconnect the connector. • MX-B400P/B380P
• MX-C400P/C380P
• MX-B400P/B380P

E. Discharge lamp A. Toner cartridge
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the discharge lamp, and dis- 1) Open the front cover.
connect the connector.
• MX-C400P/C380P
Y
M
K C
2) Hold the handle of the toner cartridge, and pull it out straight.
• MX-C400P/C380P
• MX-B400P/B380P
8. Toner supply section

MX-C400P/C380P MX-B400P/B380P
NOTE: Do not install a toner cartridge of a different color. Be sure
to install a toner cartridge of the same color.
NOTE: When installing, do not insert with great force. Put your
hand until it is completely inserted.
[Arrangement of toner cartridge colors]
YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN BLACK
Toner supply section

• MX-B400P/B380P
M 10-20
Toner cartridge

9. Developing section 2) Open the lock cover of the developer cartridge.
Developing section
3) Hold the handle of the developer cartridge, and pull it out
M 10-17 M 10-21
straight.
Waste toner box Developer cartridge
• MX-C400P/C380P
A. Developer cartridge
1) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and open the
drum positioning plate unit.
• MX-C400P/C380P
• MX-B400P/B380P
• MX-B400P/B380P

10. Transfer section (MX-C400P/C380P)
Transfer section
M 10-26
M 10-26
Primary transfer roller
U 10-24 M 10-25 M 10-26

Transfer follower roller unit Primary transfer belt Transfer tension roller
M 10-24 M 10-26
Transfer follower roller Backup shaft
M 10-26
M 10-17
Waste toner box
U 10-23
Primary transfer unit
M 10-23 U 10-24
Primary transfer drive coupling Cleaner unit
P 10-23 M 10-24
Transfer front cover Cleaning blade
M 10-27 U 10-27
Secondary transfer unit PTC unit
U 10-64 M 10-27
High voltage PWB holder unit PTC cleaner B
M 10-27 M 10-27
E 10-27 PTC wire PTC cleaner
Transfer belt separation detection CL

A. Primary transfer unit NOTE: When the primary transfer unit is removed, place several
1) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door. sheets of paper on the drum cartridge in order to protect
the drum from being exposed.
(1) Primary transfer drive coupling
1) Press the primary transfer drive coupling, and remove the
screw.
2) Remove the primary transfer drive coupling, and remove the

parallel pin.
3) Hold the handle, push the lock on the left side of the primary
transfer unit and remove the primary transfer unit.
(2) Transfer front cover

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation lever.

2) Remove the blue screw. Slide the transfer front cover to the left (4) Transfer follower roller unit
to remove. Remove the handle. 1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the guide.
(3) Cleaner unit

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the guide.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the frame.
3) Remove the blue screw. Remove the holder and remove the
transfer follower roller unit.
2) Remove the blue screw. Turn the cleaner unit downward to
remove.
a. Cleaning blade
a. Transfer follower roller
1) Remove the spring. Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the
cleaning blade. 1) Remove the polyslider, the E-ring, the collar, and the bearing.
Remove the transfer follower roller.

(5) Primary transfer belt
1) Remove the primary transfer belt from the frame.
NOTE: Use enough care not to scratch, bend, or smear the
primary transfer belt.
NOTE: When handling the primary transfer belt, use gloves not to
put fingerprints or oil on its surface.
When replacing the transfer belt, perform the following procedures

and observe the note in order to prevent reversion or meandering
of the cleaning blade, or any trouble.
a. Transfer belt direction

When installing the transfer belt, arrange so that the red mark at
the edge of the transfer belt is on the rear frame side. If it is
installed in the wrong direction, the cleaning blade may be reversed
or another trouble may occur.
NOTE: * Use enough care not to scratch the transfer belt.

* The procedure to rotate the transfer belt must be exe-
cuted on a flat surface. If not, the transfer belt may
meander.
* When starting rotation of the transfer belt, carefully and
slowly rotate in order not to apply a sudden great load to
the cleaner blade.
2) Install the transfer cleaner unit.
Red mark
At that time, check to confirm that setting powder is applied to
NOTE: * Use enough care not to scratch or bend the transfer belt. the contact section between the cleaner blade and the transfer
belt.
* Use enough care not to put fingerprints or foreign materi-
als on the transfer belt surface. (Be sure to use gloves.)
b. Application of setting powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ)

When the transfer belt is replaced, apply setting powder (UKOG-
0123FCZZ) according to the following procedures.
1) Place the transfer unit with the transfer cleaner unit removed
on a flat surface. Shake the bag of setting powder slightly, and
apply setting powder evenly to the whole surface of the trans-
fer belt.
Cleaner unit
Use a screwdriver to rotate the transfer belt drive gear in the
transfer unit slowly in the arrow direction, changing the appli-
cation position so that setting powder is applied evenly to the
whole surface of the transfer belt.
(Key points for applying setting powder)
* Apply setting powder by using the weight of the setting pow-
der bag so that setting powder is evenly applied to the sur-
face.
* Use care to apply evenly to the edge of the transfer belt so
that it is evenly applied in the F/R direction.

3) Use a screwdriver to rotate the transfer belt drive gear slowly 2) Remove the bearing side of the primary transfer roller, and
in the arrow direction until setting powder is cleaned and remove the primary transfer roller. Remove the bearing from
removed from the transfer belt by the cleaner. the primary transfer roller.
NOTE: When installing the primary transfer roller, be careful of the
direction of the concave section of the bearing.
NOTE: * The procedure to rotate the transfer belt must be exe- (8) Transfer tension roller
1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Remove the E-ring. Slide
meander.
the transfer tension roller to the front side to remove. Remove
* When starting rotation of the transfer belt, carefully and the bearing from the transfer tension roller.
the cleaner blade.
* When setting powder is completely removed, stop rota-
tion of the belt. Do not rotate it unnecessarily.
* Do not rotate reversely with the blade installed.
4) After installing the transfer unit, make three prints of half-tone
or black background on A4 (11 x 8.5) paper, and check to con-
firm that there is no scratch or dirt on the transfer belt.
(6) Transfer drive roller
1) Remove the E-ring. Remove the bearing. Remove the transfer
drive roller unit.
NOTE: When installing the transfer drive unit, fit the collar slit with
the frame rib. (9) Backup shaft
1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Remove the bearing side
of the backup shaft, and remove the backup shaft. Remove the
bearing from the backup shaft.
NOTE: When installing the backup shaft, be careful of the direction
of the concave section of the bearing.
2) Remove the collar, the gear, and parallel pin, and the collar
from the transfer drive roller.
(10) Registration backup shaft

of the registration backup shaft. Remove the bearing from the
registration backup shaft.
(7) Primary transfer roller
1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Turn the gear to lift the pri-
mary transfer roller.

(11) PTC unit 2) Slide the cleaner holder to the front side to remove. Remove
1) Pull out the PTC unit from the frame and remove it. the PTC cleaner from the cleaner holder.
a. PTC cleaner B
1) Remove the PTC cleaner B. B. Secondary transfer unit
NOTE: When installing, pinch the PTC wire and install it. 1) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
b. PTC wire
1) Remove the spring on the front side of the PTC wire. Remove
the rear side and remove the PTC wire.
NOTE: Do not touch the wire section of the PTC wire with a bare
hand. 2) Release the lock, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the PTC wire is on the

PTC cleaner.
C. Transfer belt separation detection CL

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the transfer belt sepa-
ration detector CL.
c. PTC cleaner
1) Remove the cleaner rod. Disengage the pawl, and remove the
holder.

11. Transfer section (MX-B400P/B380P)
Transfer section
M 10-32
M 10-32
Primary transfer roller
U 10-30 M 10-31 M 10-32

Transfer follower roller unit Primary transfer belt Transfer tension roller
M 10-30 M 10-32
Transfer follower roller Backup shaft
M 10-32
M 10-17
Waste toner box
U 10-29
M 10-29 U 10-30
Primary transfer drive coupling Cleaner unit
P 10-30 M 10-30
Transfer front cover Cleaning blade
M 10-33 U 10-33
Secondary transfer unit PTC unit
U 10-64 M 10-33
High voltage PWB holder unit PTC cleaner B
M 10-33 M 10-33
E 10-33 PTC wire PTC cleaner
Transfer belt separation detection CL

A. Primary transfer unit NOTE: When the primary transfer unit is removed, place several
1) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door. sheets of paper on the drum cartridge in order to protect
the drum from being exposed.
(1) Primary transfer drive coupling

1) Press the primary transfer drive coupling, and remove the
screw.
2) Remove the primary transfer drive coupling, and remove the

3) Hold the handle, push the lock on the left side of the primary parallel pin.
transfer unit and remove the primary transfer unit.

(2) Transfer front cover (4) Transfer follower roller unit
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation lever. 1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the guide.
2) Remove the blue screw. Slide the transfer front cover to the left
to remove. Remove the handle.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the frame.
3) Remove the blue screw. Remove the holder and remove the
transfer follower roller unit.
(3) Cleaner unit
1) Remove the blue screw. Turn the cleaner unit downward to
remove.
a. Transfer follower roller

1) Remove the polyslider, the E-ring, the collar, and the bearing.
a. Cleaning blade Remove the transfer follower roller.
1) Remove the spring. Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the
cleaning blade.

(5) Primary transfer belt
1) Remove the primary transfer belt from the frame.
NOTE: Use enough care not to scratch, bend, or smear the pri-
mary transfer belt.
NOTE: When handling the primary transfer belt, use gloves not to
put fingerprints or oil on its surface.
When replacing the transfer belt, perform the following procedures

and observe the note in order to prevent reversion or meandering
of the cleaning blade, or any trouble.
a. Transfer belt direction

When installing the transfer belt, arrange so that the red mark at
the edge of the transfer belt is on the rear frame side. If it is
installed in the wrong direction, the cleaning blade may be reversed
or another trouble may occur.
NOTE: * Use enough care not to scratch the transfer belt.

* The procedure to rotate the transfer belt must be exe-
meander.
the cleaner blade.
2) Install the transfer cleaner unit.
At that time, check to confirm that setting powder is applied to
Red mark
the contact section between the cleaner blade and the transfer
belt.
NOTE: * Use enough care not to scratch or bend the transfer belt.
* Use enough care not to put fingerprints or foreign materi-
als on the transfer belt surface. (Be sure to use gloves.)
b. Application of setting powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ)

When the transfer belt is replaced, apply setting powder (UKOG-
0123FCZZ) according to the following procedures.
1) Place the transfer unit with the transfer cleaner unit removed
on a flat surface. Shake the bag of setting powder slightly, and
apply setting powder evenly to the whole surface of the trans- Cleaner unit
fer belt.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the transfer belt drive gear in the
transfer unit slowly in the arrow direction, changing the appli-
cation position so that setting powder is applied evenly to the
whole surface of the transfer belt.
(Key points for applying setting powder)
* Apply setting powder by using the weight of the setting pow-
der bag so that setting powder is evenly applied to the sur-
face.
* Use care to apply evenly to the edge of the transfer belt so
that it is evenly applied in the F/R direction.

3) Use a screwdriver to rotate the transfer belt drive gear slowly 2) Remove the bearing side of the primary transfer roller, and
in the arrow direction until setting powder is cleaned and remove the primary transfer roller. Remove the bearing from
removed from the transfer belt by the cleaner. the primary transfer roller.
NOTE: When installing the primary transfer roller, be careful of the
direction of the concave section of the bearing.
(8) Transfer tension roller

NOTE: * The procedure to rotate the transfer belt must be exe- 1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Remove the E-ring. Slide
cuted on a flat surface. If not, the transfer belt may the transfer tension roller to the front side to remove. Remove
meander. the bearing from the transfer tension roller.
the cleaner blade.
* When setting powder is completely removed, stop rota-
tion of the belt. Do not rotate it unnecessarily.
* Do not rotate reversely with the blade installed.
4) After installing the transfer unit, make three prints of half-tone
or black background on A4 (11 x 8.5) paper, and check to con-
firm that there is no scratch or dirt on the transfer belt.
(6) Transfer drive roller
1) Remove the E-ring. Remove the bearing. Remove the transfer
drive roller unit.
(9) Backup shaft
NOTE: When installing the transfer drive unit, fit the collar slit with
the frame rib.
of the backup shaft, and remove the backup shaft. Remove the
bearing from the backup shaft.
2) Remove the collar, the gear, and parallel pin, and the collar
from the transfer drive roller.
(10) Registration backup shaft

of the registration backup shaft. Remove the bearing from the
registration backup shaft.
(7) Primary transfer roller of the concave section of the bearing.
1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Turn the gear to lift the pri-
mary transfer roller.

(11) PTC unit 2) Slide the cleaner holder to the front side to remove. Remove
1) Pull out the PTC unit from the frame and remove it. the PTC cleaner from the cleaner holder.
a. PTC cleaner B
1) Remove the PTC cleaner B. B. Secondary transfer unit
NOTE: When installing, pinch the PTC wire and install it.
b. PTC wire
1) Remove the spring on the front side of the PTC wire. Remove
the rear side and remove the PTC wire.
NOTE: Do not touch the wire section of the PTC wire with a bare
hand. 2) Release the lock, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the PTC wire is on the
PTC cleaner.
C. Transfer belt separation detection CL

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the transfer belt sepa-
ration detector CL.
c. PTC cleaner
1) Remove the cleaner rod. Disengage the pawl, and remove the
holder.

12. Fusing section
Fusing section M 10-35

Separation pawl lower
M 10-35
Separation pawl lower spring
E 10-35
Upper thermostat
E 10-36
Lower thermostat
M 10-36
Lower heat roller contact thermistor
U 10-35
Fusing unit E 10-36
External heater lamp
M 10-36
P 10-35 External heating unit
Fusing cover E 10-36
External heater lamp 2
M 10-37
M 10-37
M 10-37
Thermistor retainer
M 10-37
M 10-37
E 10-39
Upper heater lamp
U 10-38 M 10-40
Pressure release mounting plate unit Upper heat roller unit
E 10-39
Lower heater lamp
M 10-40
Lower heat roller unit
E 10-38
Fusing roller pressure release detector
E 10-38
Fusing pressure release solenoid

A. Fusing unit (2) Separation pawl lower / Separation pawl lower
1) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door. spring
1) Disengage the hook of the spring. Slide the paper guide to the
front side and remove it.
2) Pull the lever and remove the fusing unit.
2) Disengage the hook of the separation pawl lower spring, and

remove the separation pawl lower. Remove the separation
pawl lower spring from the separation pawl lower.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to engage the hook of the separa-
tion pawl lower spring with the paper guide rib.
(1) Fusing cover

1) Remove the screw, disengage the pawl, and remove the fusing
upper cover.
(3) Upper thermostat

1) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
screw and the washer, and remove the upper thermostat.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing lower cover.

(4) Lower thermostat 2) Remove the screw of the holder on the front side, and remove
1) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the the holder. Remove the external heater lamp and the external
screw and the washer, and remove the lower thermostat. heater lamp 2.
NOTE: Do not touch the glass section of the heater lamp with a
bare hand.
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the white harness of the
heater lamp comes on the front side.
(5) Lower heat roller contact thermistor

lower heat roller contact thermistor.
(7) External heating unit

1) Remove the screw, and disconnect the terminal. Remove the
harness.
White harness
Black harness
(6) External heater lamp / External heater lamp 2

1) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the har-
ness.
2) Remove the clip. Remove the screw, and remove the external
heat roller contact thermistor 1 and the external heat roller
contact thermistor 2.

3) Remove the spring. Lift the external heating unit slightly and 2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper heat roller contact
remove it. thermistor and the upper heat roller non-contact thermistor.
3) Remove the clip. Remove the screw, and remove the external
heat roller contact thermistor 1 and the external heat roller
(8) Thermistor retainer
1) Remove the screw, and remove the drawer. Remove the ther-
mistor retainer.
NOTE: When installing the thermistor retainer, push it until it clicks.
NOTE: When installing the drawer, push the harness with a tube
first, then install the drawer so that the harness is not
pinched.
4) Remove the harness of the upper heat roller contact ther-

mistor, the upper heat roller non-contact thermistor, the exter-
nal heat roller contact thermistor 1, the external heat roller
(9) Upper heat roller contact thermistor /

Upper heat roller non-contact thermistor /
External heat roller contact thermistor 1 /
1) Remove the screw from the upper thermostat, and remove the
terminal.

5) Remove the harness of the upper heater lamp and the lower 2) Disconnect the connector of the fusing roller pressure release
heater lamp. detector, and remove the clip. Remove the screw, and remove
the pressure release mounting plate unit.
6) Remove the harness of the upper heat roller contact ther- a. Fusing roller pressure release detector
mistor, the upper heat roller non-contact thermistor, the exter-
1) Remove the fusing roller pressure release detector.
nal heat roller contact thermistor 1, the external heat roller
contact thermistor 2, and disconnect the connector from the
drawer.
NOTE: When removing the fusing roller pressure release detector

once, and then installing it again, apply screw lock to the
pawl section.
b. Fusing pressure release solenoid
1) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release
solenoid.
NOTE: When installing the fusing pressure release solenoid,
(10) Pressure release mounting plate unit engage the solenoid plunger with the groove in the lever.
1) Disconnect the connector of the fusing pressure release sole-

noid, and remove the harness from the wire saddle.

(11) Upper heater lamp (12) Lower heater lamp
1) Disconnect the connector on the front side of the upper heater 1) Disconnect the connector on the front side of the upper heater
lamp. lamp. Remove the screw, and remove the fixing plate.
2) Remove the screw of the upper thermostat, and remove the 2) Remove the screw of the lower thermostat, and remove the
terminal. Remove the harness. terminal. Remove the harness.
3) Remove the holder, and remove the upper heater lamp. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the fixing plate. Remove the
NOTE: Do not touch the glass section of the heater lamp with a lower heater lamp.
bare hand. NOTE: Do not touch the glass section of the heater lamp with a
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the white harness of the bare hand.
heater lamp comes on the front side. NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the white harness of the
heater lamp comes on the front side.

(13) Upper heat roller unit (14) Lower heat roller unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. Release the 1) Release the pressure, and remove the fulcrum plate and the
pressure, and remove the fulcrum plate and the spring. spring.
2) Remove the screw, and open the fusing unit.

2) Remove the screw, and open the fusing unit.
3) Remove the stopper from the step screw, and remove the
upper heat roller unit.
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the heat roller. 3) Remove the lower heat roller unit.
NOTE: When installing the upper heat roller unit, check to confirm NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the heat roller.
that the bearing ring is outside of the frame.

13. Paper exit section
Paper exit section

U 10-35 U 10-41 E 10-41
Fusing unit Fusing rear PG unit Fusing rear detector
P 10-3
Upper cabinet right
P 10-1
Paper exit tray
U 10-41 U 10-42
Paper exit lower PG unit Paper exit upper PG unit
P 10-2
Front cabinet upper
E 10-42 E 10-42
Paper exit detector Paper exit tray full detector
A. Fusing rear PG unit C. Paper exit lower PG unit

1) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing rear PG unit. 1) Slightly lift the operation panel unit, and remove the front con-
nection cabinet.
B. Fusing rear detector

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing rear detec- 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, disengage the
tor. pawl, and remove the paper exit lower PG unit.

(1) Paper exit detector
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit detector.
D. Paper exit upper PG unit

paper exit upper PG unit.
(1) Paper exit tray full detector

1) Remove the paper exit tray full detector, and disconnect the
connector.

14. Drive section (MX-C400P/C380P)
Drive section
U 10-10 U 10-44
Tray Paper tray lift-up drive unit
E 10-44
Tray 1 detector
P 10-44
Lift-up cover
E 10-44
Paper tray lift-up motor
E 10-44 E 10-45
Fusing drive motor ADU transport clutch 1
E 10-44
Secondary transfer separation clutch
E 10-46
Paper exit drive motor
E 10-46
Developing drive motor (K)
P 10-3
Rear cabinet
E 10-46
Developing drive motor (CL)
E 10-46
Resist motor
E 10-46
Paper feed motor
U 10-23
Primary transfer unit U 10-47
Main drive unit
E 10-48
M 10-18
Primary transfer separation clutch 1
Drum cartridge U 10-47
Belt separation frame unit
E 10-48
Primary transfer separation clutch 2
E 10-48
Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector
E 10-49
Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector
U 10-49
Paper feed drive unit
E 10-51
Paper feed clutch
P 10-1 P 10-49
Paper exit tray Paper feed drive frame
E 10-51
Tray vertical transport clutch
M 10-20 E 10-51
Toner cartridge Toner motor
U 10-63
PCU PWB unit

A. Paper tray lift-up drive unit (3) Paper tray lift-up motor
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper tray lift-up drive unit. 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor, and disconnect the con-
Disconnect the connector. nector. Remove the gear from the paper tray lift-up motor.
B. Fusing drive motor

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and slightly
(1) Lift-up cover slide the fusing drive motor and rotate and remove it.
1) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the lift-up cover.
C. Secondary transfer separation clutch

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
(2) Tray 1 detector wire saddle. Remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and
remove the holder. Remove the bearing and the secondary
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray 1 detector. transfer separation clutch unit.
NOTE: When installing, fit the turn-stopper of the clutch.

2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the secondary transfer sepa- 3) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
ration clutch.
D. ADU transport clutch 1

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band, and wire saddle. Remove the ADU transport clutch 1 unit. Remove
remove the harness from the wire saddle. Remove the screw, the bearing.
and remove the earth wire.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing drive frame unit.
NOTE: When the fusing drive frame unit is removed, the bearing
and the shaft may easily come off. Be careful not to lose
them.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Remove the parallel
pin. Remove the E-ring, and remove the ADU transport clutch
1.

E. Paper exit drive motor H. Resist motor
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
paper exit drive motor. resist motor.
• 100V series
F. Developing drive motor (K)

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and slightly turn
the developing drive motor (K) and remove it.
• 200V series
G. Developing drive motor (CL)

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle, and remove the wire saddle.
I. Paper feed motor

paper feed motor.
• 100V series
2) Remove the screw, and slightly turn the developing drive motor
(CL) and remove it.

• 200V series 3) Remove the screw, and remove the main drive unit.
NOTE: When removing the main drive unit, be careful not to
deform the earth plate (marked with {).
NOTE: When placing the main drive unit, place so that the motor
J. Main drive unit side comes down or place on an open box so that no load
NOTE: is applied to the gear inside the unit.
• Before removing the main drive unit, pull out the primary transfer
unit, the drum cartridge, and the developer cartridge about 10cm.
• Use care not to expose the drum cartridge to lights during the
work.
• Take great care not to scratch the tooth surfaces of the main
drive unit gear and not to pinch a foreign material.
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band, and
remove the harness from the wire saddle. Remove the screw,
(1) Belt separation frame unit

pin.
* When removing the belt separation frame unit, this proce-
dure is not required. When, however, removing the primary
transfer separation clutch 1 and the primary transfer separa-
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
tion clutch 2 are removed, this procedure must be performed
Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire.
in advance.

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the (2) Primary transfer separation clutch 1
belt separation frame unit. 1) Remove the belt. Remove the primary transfer separation
clutch 1 unit. Remove the bearing.
3) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and

remove the belt separation frame unit.
NOTE: When the belt separation frame unit is removed, the bear-
ing may easily come off. Be careful not to lose it.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the primary transfer separa-
tion clutch 1.
(3) Primary transfer separation clutch 2

1) Remove the primary transfer separation clutch 2 unit. Remove
the bearing.
a. Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the drum cartridge (BK)
rotation detector.

2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the primary transfer separa- 2) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
tion clutch 2.
(4) Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector

1) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and remove the DV
drive frame unit.
NOTE: When the DV drive frame unit is removed, the bearing may
come off easily. Be careful not to lose it.

remove the paper feed drive unit.
NOTE: When placing the removed paper feed drive unit, place so
that the motor is on the lower side.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the drum cartridge (CL)

rotation detector.
(1) Paper feed drive frame

paper feed drive frame.
• 100V series
K. Paper feed drive unit

wire saddle.

• 200V series • 200V series
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the parallel pin and the collar.
Remove the E-ring. Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear
and the parallel pin.
• 100V series

remove the cover.
NOTE: When the paper feed drive frame is removed, the bearing
may come off easily. Be careful not to lose it.

a. Paper feed clutch 2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
1) Remove the belt. Remove the harness from the wire saddle, clutch.
and remove the paper feed clutch unit. Remove the bearing.
L. Toner motor
1) Push the coupling and rotate it 90q and remove the coupling
and the spring.
2) Remove the spring. Disconnect the connector, and remove the

2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
stopper and the toner motor.
b. Tray vertical transport clutch

1) Remove the gear. Remove the harness from the wire saddle,
and remove the tray vertical transport clutch unit. Remove the
bearing.

15. Drive section (MX-B400P/B380P)
Drive section
U 10-10 U 10-53
Tray Paper tray lift-up drive unit
E 10-53
Tray 1 detector
P 10-53
Lift-up cover
E 10-53
Paper tray lift-up motor
E 10-53 E 10-54
Fusing drive motor ADU transport clutch 1
E 10-53
Secondary transfer separation clutch
E 10-55
Paper exit drive motor
P 10-3 E 10-55
Rear cabinet Developing drive motor
E 10-55
Resist motor
E 10-55
Paper feed motor
U 10-29
Primary transfer unit U 10-56
Main drive unit
M 10-18
Drum cartridge U 10-56 E 10-57
Belt separation frame unit Primary transfer separation clutch 1
U 10-57
Paper feed drive unit
E 10-59
Paper feed clutch
P 10-1 P 10-58
Paper exit tray Paper feed drive frame
E 10-59
Tray vertical transport clutch
M 10-20 E 10-60
Toner cartridge Toner motor
U 10-63
PCU PWB unit

A. Paper tray lift-up drive unit (3) Paper tray lift-up motor
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper tray lift-up drive unit. 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor, and disconnect the con-
Disconnect the connector. nector. Remove the gear from the paper tray lift-up motor.
B. Fusing drive motor

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and slightly
(1) Lift-up cover slide the fusing drive motor and rotate and remove it.
1) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the lift-up cover.
C. Secondary transfer separation clutch

(2) Tray 1 detector wire saddle. Remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and
remove the holder. Remove the bearing and the secondary
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray 1 detector. transfer separation clutch unit.

2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the secondary transfer sepa- 3) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
ration clutch.
D. ADU transport clutch 1

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band, and wire saddle. Remove the ADU transport clutch 1 unit. Remove
remove the harness from the wire saddle. Remove the screw, the bearing.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing drive frame unit.
NOTE: When the fusing drive frame unit is removed, the bearing
and the shaft may easily come off. Be careful not to lose
them.
pin. Remove the E-ring, and remove the ADU transport clutch
1.

E. Paper exit drive motor • 200V series
paper exit drive motor.
F. Developing drive motor

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and slightly turn H. Paper feed motor
the developing drive motor (K) and remove it. 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed motor.
• 100V series
G. Resist motor
resist motor.

I. Main drive unit NOTE: When placing the main drive unit, place so that the motor
side comes down or place on an open box so that no load
NOTE:
is applied to the gear inside the unit.
• Before removing the main drive unit, pull out the primary transfer
unit, the drum cartridge, and the developer cartridge about 10cm.
• Use care not to expose the drum cartridge to lights during the
work.
• Take great care not to scratch the tooth surfaces of the main
drive unit gear and not to pinch a foreign material.
remove the harness from the wire saddle. Remove the screw,
(1) Belt separation frame unit

pin.
* When removing the belt separation frame unit, this proce-
dure is not required. When, however, removing the primary
transfer separation clutch 1 is removed, this procedure must
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band. be performed in advance.
Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the main drive unit.

NOTE: When removing the main drive unit, be careful not to
deform the earth plate (marked with {).
belt separation frame unit.

3) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and J. Paper feed drive unit
remove the belt separation frame unit. 1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
NOTE: When the belt separation frame unit is removed, the bear- wire saddle.
ing may easily come off. Be careful not to lose it.
(2) Primary transfer separation clutch 1

1) Remove the belt. Remove the primary transfer separation
clutch 1 unit. Remove the bearing.

remove the paper feed drive unit.
NOTE: When placing the removed paper feed drive unit, place so
that the motor is on the lower side.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the primary transfer separa-

tion clutch 1.

(1) Paper feed drive frame 2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the parallel pin and the collar.
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the Remove the E-ring. Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear
paper feed drive frame. and the parallel pin.
• 200V series
• 200V series

3) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (4 positions), and 2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
remove the cover.
NOTE: When the paper feed drive frame is removed, the bearing
may come off easily. Be careful not to lose it.
b. Tray vertical transport clutch

1) Remove the gear. Remove the harness from the wire saddle,
and remove the tray vertical transport clutch unit. Remove the
bearing.
a. Paper feed clutch

1) Remove the belt. Remove the harness from the wire saddle,
and remove the paper feed clutch unit. Remove the bearing.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport

clutch.

K. Toner motor
1) Push the coupling and rotate it 90q and remove the coupling
and the spring.
2) Remove the spring. Disconnect the connector, and remove the

stopper and the toner motor.

16. PWB
PWB
U 10-10 E 10-61
Tray Paper size detection PWB
P 10-1 U 10-62
Left cabinet MFPC unit
E 10-62
MFPC PWB
U 10-66 U 10-62
HDD cooling fan motor unit LSU mother PWB unit
E 10-62
LSU mother PWB
E 10-62
AC/DC power PWB
P 10-3 E 10-63
Rear cabinet PCU PWB
P 10-2 U 10-63 E 10-63

Left cabinet upper PCU PWB unit HL PWB
U 10-67 U 10-64
AC/DC power unit MC PWB holder unit
M 10-20 E 10-64
Toner cartridge MC PWB
P 10-1
Paper exit tray
U 10-64
High voltage PWB holder unit
P 10-2
MFP ROM cover
E 10-65
TC PWB
U MX-C400P/C380P: 10-23
MX-B400P/B380P: 10-29
A. Paper size detection PWB 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
PWB.
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
Remove the spring from the paper size detection PWB.
holder. Disconnect the connector.

B. MFPC unit C. LSU mother PWB unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the controller cover. 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
LSU mother PWB unit.
2) Remove the screw, and slide the MFPC unit to the rear side
and disconnect the connector which is connected to the LSU
mother PWB. Remove the MFPC unit.
(1) LSU mother PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU mother PWB.
(1) MFPC PWB

1) Remove the hex screw and the screw. Remove the MFPC
PWB.
D. AC/DC power PWB

saddle.

2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the F. PCU PWB unit
duct. Remove the screw, and remove the AC/DC power PWB. 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle. Remove the snap band.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the PCU PWB unit.
E. PCU PWB
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw and the earth
wire. Remove the hex screw, and disconnect the connector for
the inner finisher connection.
G. HL PWB
saddle.

PCU PWB.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the HL PWB. 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the MC PWB.
H. MC PWB holder unit

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the OK NG
earth wire. Disengage the pawl, and remove the MC PWB
holder unit. NOTE: When installing the PWB, check to confirm that there is no
NOTE: When installing, check to confirm that there is no deforma- shift between the PWB terminal and the terminal on the MC
tion or tilt in the high voltage terminal spring on the PWB holder side.
machine frame side.
I. High voltage PWB holder unit
the high voltage PWB holder unit.
• MX-C400P/C380P
NOTE: After installing the high voltage PWB holder unit,

check to confirm that the high voltage terminal in
this section is not deformed.
Checking can be made from the installing section
of the primary transfer unit.
(1) MC PWB
remove the harness.
• MX-B400P/B380P
NOTE: After installing the high voltage PWB holder unit,

check to confirm that the high voltage terminal in
this section is not deformed.
Checking can be made from the installing section
of the primary transfer unit.
NOTE: When installing, engage the rear side of the high voltage
PWB holder unit first, and then lower the front side to
engage.

(1) TC PWB • MX-B400P/B380P
the cover.
OK NG
NOTE: When installing the PWB, check to confirm that there is no

shift between the PWB terminal and the terminal on the
high voltage PWB holder side.
NOTE: When installing the high voltage

PWB holder unit to the machine,
check to confirm that there is no
deformation or tilt of the terminal.

the TC PWB.
• MX-C400P/C380P
OK NG

17. Fan
Fan
U 10-15 E 10-66
PS unit LSU cooling fan motor
P 10-2 E 10-66
MFP ROM cover Process fan motor 1
P 10-1 U 10-66
Left cabinet HDD cooling fan motor unit
U MX-C400P/C380P: 10-47 E 10-66

MX-B400P/B380P: 10-56 HDD cooling fan motor
Main drive unit
E 10-67
U 10-64
Process fan motor 2
MC PWB holder unit
P 10-3 E 10-67
Rear cabinet Fusing cooling fan motor
P 10-2 U 10-67
Left cabinet lower AC/DC power unit
E 10-67
Power cooling fan motor
A. LSU cooling fan motor C. HDD cooling fan motor unit

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD cooling fan motor
LSU cooling fan motor. unit, and disconnect the connector.
NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces outside.
(1) HDD cooling fan motor

1) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD cooling fan motor.
B. Process fan motor 1 NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces inside.
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process fan motor
1.
NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces inside.

D. Fusing cooling fan motor (1) Power cooling fan motor
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
fusing cooling fan motor. duct. Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan
motor.
NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces outside.
NOTE: When installing, install so that the fan label faces to the
PWB side.
E. AC/DC power unit

1) Disconnect the connector from the WH PWB, and remove the
harness from the wire saddle.
F. Process fan motor 2

1) Remove the ozone filter. Disengage the pawl, and remove the
ozone duct cover.
NOTE: When installing the ozone filter, install so that the knob
whose corner is cut faces to the front side.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and disengage

the pawl, and remove the AC/DC power unit.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the ozone duct.

3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 18. Filter
process fan motor 2.
Filter
M 10-68
Ozone filter
A. Ozone filter
1) Remove the filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
NOTE: When installing the ozone filter, install cut corner (illus-
trated) facing toward front.
19. Process control sensor, registration sensor
U MX-C400P/C380P: 10-23 Process control sensor,

MX-B400P/B380P: 10-29 registration sensor
U 10-68
Registration sensor unit
U 10-35
Fusing unit
E 10-69
Registration sensor
Process control sensor
A. Registration sensor unit 2) While pressing the cover which comes on the registration sen-
sor unit bottom, pull out the lever.
1) Push the lever on the front side. The shutter of the registration
sensor unit is closed, and the cover comes to the registration
sensor unit bottom.

3) Lift the rib at the center of the lever and remove the levers on 2) Slide the shaft to the front side, and remove the parallel pin.
the front side and the rear side.
3) Remove the shutter spring. Pull the cam on the rear side to the
harness side, and remove the shaft. Remove the cam on the
front side.
4) Release the lock. Disconnect the connector, and remove the

snap band. Remove the registration sensor unit.
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the sensor, and disconnect

the connector.
NOTE: Use care not to touch the light receiving section and the
PWB section of the sensor.
• MX-C400P/C380P
(1) Registration sensor
1) Turn the gear to fit the parallel pin on the front side with the
hole in the frame.
• MX-B400P/B380P

20. Other
Other
P 10-2 E 10-70
MFP ROM cover Front door open/close switch
P 10-3 E 10-70
Upper cabinet right Right door open/close switch
P 10-3
Rear cabinet
U 10-70
Power switch unit
P 10-2
Left cabinet lower
E 10-71
Main switch
P 10-1 E 10-71
Left cabinet HDD
A. Front door open/close switch C. Power switch unit

1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Disconnect the connector from the AC/DC PWB. Remove the
front door open/close switch. screw, and remove the power switch unit.
B. Right door open/close switch 2) Disconnect the connector from the main switch.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the right door open/close NOTE: When connecting the connector, be sure to fit with the
switch, and disconnect the connector. engraved mark inside the mounting plate.
Wire color
Connector
color
W
W
R
OFF
ON
W
R

(1) Main switch
1) Disengage the pawl and remove the main switch.
NOTE: When installing the main switch, match the “ON” and “OFF”
marks on the main switch with the “ON” and “OFF” marks
inside the mounting plate, and be careful of the installing
direction.
OFF ON
W
W
R
OFF
ON
W
R
D. HDD
1) Disconnect the connector. While disengaging the pawl,
remove the HDD unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD.

NOTE: When installing, match the connector side of the HDD with
the mark of “CN n” on the fixing plate.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the HDD, and use care and handle
gently.
CN
CN

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD

A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼䋩㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㪽㪽㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫅㪼㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷
㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪥㪦
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷
㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪈㪀㪖
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷
㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪥㪦
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㫊㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪉㪀㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪰㪜㪪
㪈㪉㪊
㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪈㩷㩽㩷㪉㪕㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪊㪕
㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫂㪼㪼㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㪹㫌㫋㩷
㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪅㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪺㪸㫅㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㪃㩹㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤
㩷㩷㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋
㪈㩷㩷㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼
㩷㩷㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪁㩷㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㪃㩷㪹㫃㪸㫅㫂㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪜㪯㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫋㫆㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪅
㪉㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪠㪤㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤
㩷㩷㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊㩿㪈㪀㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫉㫆㫇㫉㫀㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪺㫆㪻㪼㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪍㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪼㫊㩷㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㪝㪘㪯㪀㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫊㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㪸㫏㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪉㪀㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪎㪄㪎㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㪅
㩿㪊㪀㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩹㩷㪸㫋㩷㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩹㩷㫆㫇㪼㫅㩷㩹㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩹㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㪋㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪙㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㫀㫅㪺㪿㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷㪠㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫋㫆㫉㪸㪾㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㪀㩷㫆㫉㩷㪻㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪺㫃㫆㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪀㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪽㪸㫀㫃㫌㫉㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㪸㫊㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter

• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
• HDD replacement and firmware installation (version up)
• Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Backup Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Disable of
means procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable SIM49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Not available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Not available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, Storage backup Storage backup
etc.)
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
information
10 Input profile (Printer) Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with Service
(Registration from user WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE. or User
WEB page)
11 Output profile (Printer) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
(Registration from Service WEB PAGE.
WEB page)
12 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
13 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
14 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
15 Main program Available Available Disable Not available Enable Emergency update Service
procedures of the
firmware
16 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using SIM49-3 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be 3) Then the following message is displayed to indicate that a
backed up HDD trouble occurred.
a. Work contents and procedures

Version Check
When a new HDD IcM:HDD Trouble
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
When the above messages are displayed, the HDD is broken
is normal but a program model) is used *
down. Turn OFF the main power and replace the HDD with a
error occurs in it is used.
new one.
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) b. Work contents and procedures
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB When a new HDD
memory.) (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User is normal but a program model) is used *
authentication data) error occurs in it is used.
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User Step 1 Reinstall the firmware Use SIM49-1 to reinstall
or servicing) (program) in the boot mode. the firmware (program).
Back up the data to PC with Web page. Step 2 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14 and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data, Input profile) o Formatting is automatically complex machine.
Step 3 Replace the HDD. performed.
Step 4 Reinstall the firmware Use SIM49-1 to reinstall Step 3 The trouble code, U2-05,
(program) in the boot mode. the firmware (program). is displayed. o Cancel
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex with SIM16.
o Formatting is automatically machine. Step 4 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
performed. automatically formatted, there the HDD.
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, is no need to perform
is displayed. o Cancel formatting procedure with SIM.
with SIM16. Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
automatically formatted, there the HDD. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
is no need to perform prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
formatting procedure with SIM. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Fax models.)
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet shipping.
Fax models.)
(4) HDD replacement and firmware installation
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
(version up)
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup a. Operations and displays after HDD replacement
to import.
When a new HDD without the main program in it or a normal HDD
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User with abnormal main program data in it is installed to the machine
authentication data) and the main power is turned ON, the following operations and dis-
Step 11 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in plays are made.
Step 2. 1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is dis-
Import enable data: Document filing data, Input profile, played.
Output profile, User font, Use macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.) Main Program Error!!
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage

data cannot be backed up due to breakdown 2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the fol-
a. Display when HDD breakdown lowing message is displayed.
When the machine is booted with the HDD broken down, the fol-
lowing operation and the display are made. Emergency Prog Init
1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is dis- Please wait
played.
3) The machine enters the boot mode which indicates that there
Main Program Error!! is an error in the main program.
Version Check
2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the fol- IcM:UNUSUAL
lowing message is displayed.
Emergency Prog Init

Please wait

b. Operations in the boot mode c. Firmware install and version-up procedures in the boot
When the machine is booted in the boot mode, the firmware ver- mode
sion check, the firmware install, and the version-up operation can 1) Boot the machine in the boot mode. When the Version Check
be performed. display is indicated, press [MENU] key, and the machine
When a HDD is installed to the machine and the above operation is enters the Firm Update mode.
performed, the firmware must be installed.
* In the boot mode, the following keys are used for operation. Note Firm Update
that the functions of the keys in the boot mode differ from those From USB Memory
in the normal mode.
b-1. Key functions and operations in the boot mode 2) Insert the USB memory which includes the update firmware file
(SFU file) into the USB port of the machine, and press [OK]
key.
Firm Update
> 0100P200.sfu
SFU file display

3) Select the firmware file (SFU file) of the target.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to select the target file.
When [OK] key is pressed with the directory name displayed,
[BACK] key
BACK OK READY the control can enter the lower level directory. (However, one-
[UP] key
PRINT
DATA
[OK] key step lower level)
[DOWN] key JOB
STATUS When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower level directory, the
control can return to the upper level directory.
[MENU] key SYSTEM 4) Press [OK] key.
SETTINGS
LOGOUT The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. (It takes about 1
minute.)
Key name in the Key name in the

Function Firm Update
normal mode boot mode
[OK] key [OK] key Performs the selected item or Reading Data
function.
[SYSTEM [MENU] key Selects a menu. Display of reading file data
SETTINGS] key 5) After completion of reading, the firmware is installed (updated).
[BACK] key [BACK] key Selects a menu. (Serves as a (It takes about 5 - 6 minutes.)
cancel key in the execution
check screen.)
[PRINT] key [UP] key Selects an item.
Firm Update
[JOB STATUS] key [DOWN] key Selects an item. IcuM
Display of firmware install (Update) process

b-2. Functions in the boot mode * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is currently
The following two functions are available in the boot mode. installed (updated) is displayed sequentially.
* The screen may flash instantaneously during the install
Function Content (update) process. This is a normal operation.
Firmware version Displays the firmware version of the ICU PWB, the
6) Check the result of install (update) of the firmware.
check function OPU PWB, the PCU PWB, and the FAX PWB.
Firmware install Installs (revises) the firmware by transmitting data Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to check the results of install
(update) function from the PC which is connected to the ICU PWB, the (update) of all the firmware programs.
OPU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and other
options with the USB memory or the USB cable. Firm Updat Firm Updat Firm Updat
IcuM IcuM IcuM
b-3. Selection of functions in the boot mode
There are two functions available in the boot mode. These modes Display of firmware update results
can be selected by pressing [MENU] key and [BACK] key. OK: Update success
NG: Update failed
Version Check Not Update: The update process is not executed.
IcM:UNUSUAL Cause of Update process not executed:
The option unit for the target firmware is not connected.
7) Turn OFF the power to terminate the boot mode.
MENU key BACK key BACK key
MENU key
Firm Update
From USB Memory

(5) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD
storage Operation Manual data
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on
the web site (Tech-DS home page).
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
the file hierarchy.
(To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
are copied.)
NOTE:
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
• The file size is different.
• The time stamp is different.
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
2) Insert the USB memory into the machine and enter the SIM49-
3 mode.
0$,1
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/

&
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAGE

EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When OSA shortcut
key is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select
menu 1.
3) Select the folder which stores the Operation Manual data files,
and press [OK] key and OSA shortcut key. (The display is
shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] button
becomes active from gray out.
6) The operation manual is updated.
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played.
When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.

[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
MX-C400P
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page
exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item Function and content

Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden
Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting
contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and
other resources are downloaded to the HDD
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)
Output Profile Settings Used to add or delete the output profile, and set
the default.
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting
information in XML format. By importing the NOTE:
export file to the other device, the setting values
and setting contents of the device can be The password can be optionally changed in the Password Set-
copied to another device. This function is useful ting menu.
to set the same setting to two or more machines If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
efficiently. reset the password to the default.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data
in the unit of folder. B. Password Setting
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user
management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the
serviceman. (Select among preset items.) MX-C400P
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.

Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
*1 Settings
Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
Settings
Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data.
Syslog
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.

When submission of the log data file is requested in order to
troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
file to the client PC. * The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-
dures.
2. Details and operation procedures 1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program. C. Output of Test Page
2) Enter
"http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/login.html?/service_testpage.html"
on the address column of the browser, and press ENTER key.
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the machine.
3) Enter the password to log in. MX-C400P
Default Password: service
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1

1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed. E. Output Profile Settings
When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download MX-C400P
MX-C400P
(1) Download procedures of custom output profile

1) Click "Refer" button to select the output profile.
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro
2) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
3) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
The added profile is displayed on the list. For the output A pro-
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
file and the output B profile, the newly added profile becomes
3) Click "Download" button. valid.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button. When no profile is added, the default output profile in the firm-
The file is downloaded to the HDD. ware of the machine set when shipping from the factory is
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the valid.
HDD are displayed. For the output C profile, the custom profile is valid.
(2) Delete of downloaded font Output A profile / Output B profile: Commonly used.
(Procedures to delete a file separately) Output C profile: PS mode, for CMYK simulation (Custom)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files, Pantone Table: For PS mode
and click "Delete" button. (2) Procedures to delete the custom output profile and
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press return to the default output profile
Yes key.
1) Clock "Delete" button of the output profile to be deleted.
2) Click "Update" button.
The file in the HDD is deleted.
The custom output profile is deleted and the default output pro-
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time file in the firmware of the machine becomes valid.
1) Click "Initialize" button.
F. Device Cloning
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect. MX-C400P

(1) Export 1) Enter the password to log in.
1) Select an item to be backed up. Default Password: admin
2) Click "Execute" button to execute backup. The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
(File name: *****.bin) I. User Control 2
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up MX-C400P
file. (File name: *****.bin)

2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
G. Filing Data Backup
MX-C400P
Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
(The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
mode for servicing work.
J. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
(1) Export
1) Select the folder to be backed up. MX-C400P
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the

index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
name: *****.bin)
(2) Import
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button.
The target file is imported.
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
H. User Control
Log to save it.
MX-C400P

(2) View Job Log L. Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
MX-C400P
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-C400P
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. Set to the default.
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
K. Update of Firmware
MX-C400P
MX-C400P
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Submit" (registration) but-
ton.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now
processing..." is displayed.

(2) Storage/Send Settings (4) View Syslog
Keep all the items selected.
MX-C400P
MX-C400P
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
MX-C400P
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.

[13] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-C400P (7) Engine speed (ppm)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
a. Tray 1 - 4 (Tray 2 - 4: Option)

1. Basic specifications Paper size Monochrome Color
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" 32 32
A. Base engine
A4R 38 38
(1) Type 8.5" x 11"R, B5R, 7.25" x 10.5R", 16KR 40 40
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5R" 40 40
MX-C400P/C380P MX-B400P/B380P Extra 28 28
Type Desktop
Color support Full color Monochrome b. Manual paper feed tray
(2) Engine composition Paper size Monochrome Color

8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" 28 26
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter:I30mm) A4R 33 30
Black x 1, Color x 3 (MX-C400P/C380P) A5R, 5.5" x 8.5R" 40 37
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 8.5" x 11"R, B5R, 7.25" x 10.5R", 16KR 35 31
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush Extra 28 26
development OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 16 15
Charging system Corona discharge system Envelope (Monarch, Com-10, DL, C5) 12 12
Primary transfer system Intermediate transfer system Heavy paper 16 15
Secondary transfer system Transfer roller system (A4R, A5R, 8.5" x 11"R, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16KR)
Cleaning system Counter blade Heavy paper (Postcard High) 16 16
Fusing system Heat roller Heavy paper (Postcard Low) 13 13
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner Heavy paper (Other sizes than above) 13 13
bottle system
Toner supply during Disable (8) Power source
operation
Color of the external view Warm white, woodgrain 100V series 200V series
Voltage 100-127V 12A (120V 15A) 220 - 240V 8A +/- 10%
(3) Dimensions / Weight +/- 10%
Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Outer dimensions 560 x 438 x 610 mm Power source Fixed type Inlet
Dimensions occupied by Machine (State of 868 x 438mm code (Direct connection)
the manual paper feed tray is expansion.) Power switch 2 positions (Primary side switch: Left side of the machine,
Weight Machine weight (with OPC drum) Approx. 39kg Secondary side switch: Operation panel)
(Without Consumable parts) (MX-C400/C380)
Approx. 36kg (9) Power consumption
(MX-B400/B380)
Consumable parts Approx. 44kg 100V series 200V series
(with developer cartridge, toner (MX-C400/C380) Max. Rated Power Consumption *1 1.44kW 1.84kW
cartridge) Approx. 37kg
(MX-B400/B380) *1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification
heater is OFF.
(4) Warm-up
B. Controller, Interface
Warm-up time 90 sec or less
(Room temperature 23qC, rated voltage, (1) Controller board
excluding registration adjustment, process
control, and toner supply) CPU MX-C400P/C380P:
Pre-heat Yes Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (1GHz)
MX-B400P/B380P:
recovery time from jam * 45 sec. or less
Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (800MHz)
* Condition: After the door is kept open for 60 seconds, the stan- Interface
dard conditions, the polygon motor halt. IEEE 1284 Parallel No
Ethernet 1 port
The warm-up time must be measured under the stable power
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
voltage.
Support TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/SPX,
(5) Engine resolution Protocol NetBEUI, EtherTalk
USB 2.0 (High speed) 1 port (Either on the front section or rear section)
Writing resolution Writing: (Host) For connection of USB memory, USB keyboard or
1200 x 1200dpi USB hab
Smoothing No USB 2.0 (High speed) 1 port
Gradation Writing: (Device)
(Monochrome/Color) 600 x 600 (4bit) (Default) / 600 x 600 (1bit) / USB authentication No
1200 x 1200 (1bit) acquisition
Video I/F (For EFI) No
(6) Printable area Serial I/F 1 port
(For new coin vendor)
A4R 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
Memory slot MX-C400P/C380P:
B5R 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm System 2 slots (Empty 1)
A5R 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm Local 1 slot
Executive R 180 x 260mm 8.5" x 11"R 212 x 272mm Codec memory 1 slot
Postcard 96 x 141mm 5.5" x 8.5R" 136 x 209mm MX-B400P/B380P:
8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm 16KR 191 x 263mm System 2 slots (Empty 1)
Local 1 slot
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 1

(2) Memory capacity, HDD capacity
Memory for copy (Local memory) Memory for printer (System memory) Codec memory
Model HDD
Standard Expansion Max. Standard Expansion Max. Standard Expansion Max.
MX-C400P/C380P 512MB — 512MB 1GB 1GB 2GB 256MB — 256MB 80GB *1
MX-B400P/B380P 512MB 1.5GB — —
*1: The HDD capacity may vary depending on the production date.
C. Operation panel (4) Duplex

(1) Display device System Non-stack system
Feedable paper size / weighing Refer to the "Table of paper feed/
4.3 Inch LCD capacity exit limitations".
Type Dot matrix LCD Logo paper support YES
Display dot number 480 x 272 dots
LCD drive display area (W x D) 95.04 x 53.856mm (5) Paper exit section
LCD back-light LED
Brightness adjustment YES Paper exit section Center section of the main unit
Angle/Position adjustment Disable Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system
Paper exit capacity 250 sheets (When A4R, 8.5x11R,
color recommended paper is used)
Paper exit paper size/weight Refer to the table of paper feed/exit
D. Paper feed, transport, paper exit section limitations.
(1) Paper feed section Shifter function NO
Discharged paper detection NO
Type Standard: 1-stage paper feed tray + Multi manual Paper exit full detection YES
feed
Max.: 4-stage paper feed tray + Multi manual feed
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit)
(2) Paper feed tray section (main unit), manual paper

feed tray
Tray Tray 1 Manual paper feed tray

Paper capacity Standard 500 sheets 100 sheets
paper (80g/m2)
Paper size Refer to the "Table of paper feed/exit
limitations".
Paper size detection Refer to the "Table of paper feed/exit
limitations".
Paper type setting YES (Refer to the "Table of paper feed/exit
limitations".)
Paper size change Changed by the user
method
Paper size setting when NO because of auto detection
factory shipping
Paper remaining 3 steps (100%, Paper empty detection
quantity detection 67%, 33%, none) only
Tray hold section No —
forward/backward
support
(3) Manual paper feed tray special paper capacity
Manual paper feed tray

Paper type Capacity
Postcard 20 sheets
Envelope 20 sheets
OHP 20 sheets
Heavy paper 40 sheets
Glossy paper 20 sheets —
Other special paper 1 sheet

(6) Table of paper feed/exit limitations
Paper feed section Paper exit section

Tray 1 Manual feed tray Paper exit tray
Auto Auto
Manual Auto detection Auto detection Manual
detection detection Normal
setting AB series inch series setting Duplex
AB series inch series paper exit
Size setting User setting User setting
8.5" x14" (Legal) 216 x 356 No Yes No No 8.5" x 14" No Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.4"
8.5" x 13.4" One of the above
8.5" x 13.4"
216 x 340 No No Yes 8.5" x 13.5" No Yes Yes
(Mexican Legal) can be selected.
8.5" x 13" Default: 8.5" x 14"
One of the above
8.5" x 13.5"
216 x 343 No No Yes can be selected. No No Yes Yes
(Asian Legal)
Default: 8.5" x 13"
8.5" x 13" (Foolscap) 216 x 330 Yes No No No No Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R (Letter R) 216 x 279 No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R
140 x 216 No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
Paper (Invoice R)
size 7.25" x 10.5"
184 x 266 No Yes No No Yes No Yes No
(Executive R)
A4-R 210 x 297 Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Postcard 100 x 148 No No No No No No - -
Monarch 98 x 191 No No No No No Yes Yes No
COM10 105 x 241 No No No No No Yes Yes No
DL 110 x 220 No No No No No Yes Yes No
C5-R 162 x 229 No No No No No Yes Yes No
Indeterminate form setting No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Yes
Custom size setting No No No No Yes Yes No
*1
100
Main scan min No No 132 No No 98 -
(5_1/2)
(Inch in the
216
parentheses) max No No 216 No No 216 -
Custom (8_1/2)
range 148
Sub scan min No No 210 No No 148 -
(5_1/2)
(Inch in the
356
parentheses) max No No 356 No No 356 -
(14)
Thin paper 55-59g/m2 No Yes Yes No
Plain paper 60-79g/m2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 80-105g/m2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 106-209g/m2 No Yes Yes No
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letterhead Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punched paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper Printed paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
type Envelope monarch 99 x 191 No Yes Yes No
Envelope Com-10 105 x 241 No Yes Yes No
Envelope DL 110 x 220 No Yes Yes No
Envelope C5 162 x 229 No Yes Yes No
Label sheet No Yes Yes No
OHP No Yes Yes No
Glossy paper No Yes Yes No
Yes
User type 1-7 Yes Yes Yes
*2
*1: Switch ON/OFF with SIM. Default is OFF.

*2: Follows the paper type registration setting.
* For the option paper feed tray, refer to the separate Service Manual (MX-CSX1/CSX2).

(7) Inhibited paper (3) PDL emulation
• Special paper for ink-jet printers (Fine paper/Glossy paper/
Glossy film/Postcard, etc.)
PCL5c compatibility Compatible with PCL —
• Carbon paper/Heat sensitive paper of Hewlett-Packard.
• Irregular form paper PCL5e compatibility — Compatible with PCL
• Paper with glue, staplers, or clips of Hewlett-Packard.
PCL6 compatibility — Compatible with PCL
• Wet paper
of Hewlett-Packard.
• Folded paper, curled paper, broken paper PCL XL compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard.
• Paper wrinkled with humidity PostScript 3 compatibility Compatible with PS3 of Adobe Systems.
• OHP for oil feed (Example: S4BG746)
(4) Font
• Inhibited OHP SF4A6CS, SF4A6FS
• Thin paper less than 55g/m2 (15lbs Bond) and heavy paper of Emulation Built-in fonts Option font
209g/m2 (56lbs Bond) or above (Thin paper of 55 - 59g/m2 (15 - PCL5e compatibility, Roman outline fonts Font for bar code
16lbs Bond) and heavy paper of 106 - 209g/m2 (28 - 56lbs Bond) PCL6 compatibility = 80 fonts = 28 fonts
are limited to manual paper feed.) Line printer font (BMP)
= 1 font
• Paper with printing on the reverse side with the other printer or
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts —
the copier
compatibility = 136 fonts
• Pre-print paper printed with the other printer or the copier
• Tracing paper (5) Print channel
(8) Paper which is not recommended USB USB1.1: Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / Server
Heat transfer paper 2003 / XP / Vista only
USB2.0 (High-Speed): Windows 2000 /
Perforated paper
Windows Server 2003 / Windows XP /
Return postcard with folding line Windows Vista / Windows Server 2008 /
Windows 7
E. Printer function
PSERVER/RPRINT for PSERVER/RPRINT used in the NetWare
(1) Platform NetWare environment environment
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command compatible
• IBM PC/AT IPP IPP1.0 conforming print channel
• Macintosh PAP: EtherTalk (Apple Talk) Macintosh environment
FTP Data received through the built-in FTP
(2) Support OS server
NOTE: The providing method differs depending on the content. NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible
Raw Port(Port9100) Supporting 9100 TCP port (Raw Port).
Custom Custom Custom HTTP (Web Submit Print) Yes
OS PPD
PCL6 PCL5c PS POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Yes
Windows 98 / Me
NT 4.0 SP5 or later IPP, HTTP and POP3 support SSL.
Yes
2000 (6) Environment setting
XP
XP x 64 No Setting item General
Server 2003 Yes Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the
Server 2003 x 64 number of copies and the print direction
Server 2008 PCL setting Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
No
Server 2008 x 64 PS setting Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a
Yes Yes Yes
Server 2008R2 PS error, setting of binary data outputting
Vista Yes
Vista x 64
Windows 7
Windows 7 x 64
Windows Server No
2008
Windows Server
2008 x64
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9
X 10.4 - 10.4.11 No No No Yes
X 10.5-10.5.8
X 10.6
Mac OS 10.6-10.6.1

F. Print hold function G. Ambient conditions
(1) Basic function (1) Working environment
Document filing Standard folder 38GB (Humidity)

capacity User folder N/A
Temporary N/A 85%
save folder
Number of pages and Standard folder 5,500 pages or 3,000 files 60%
files which can be filed (Sharp standard document)
Reference of pages which can be filed:
Color Monochrome
20%
Document Greg fruit Test Sheet C
10 30 35
(Temperature)
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 qC

conditions Humidity 65 r 5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 qC
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Atmospheric 590 – 1013 hPa
pressure (height: 0 – 2000m)
Quality Guarantee Period Toner and Developer: 24 months from the
Number of 38GB 2,000 10,000 production month (unopened)
pages which Drum: 36 months from the production month
can be filed
(2) Data operation by each function
Job MX-C400P/C380P/B400P/B380P
Printer Yes
Direct print (FTP pull) Yes
Direct print (FTP push) Yes
Direct print (USB pull) Yes
Direct print (e-mail push) Yes
Direct print (Web push) Yes
Direct print (SMB pull) Yes
(3) Reprint operation limitations
Job kind Color print B/W print

Printer Color Yes No
B/W No Yes
"Color" includes "Color and B/W mixed."
Function Number of prints, finish, paper

setting for specification, duplex,
Basic function
reprint document control data (when the data
security kit is installed)

[14] SIGNAL LIST
MX-C400P
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. MX-C400P/C380P
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects waste toner full. Empty Full CN13 B8 PCU
[Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation Detects the primary transfer – – CN6 1 PCU
CL detection [Transmission type] unit position.
Detects initialization of the
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation Detects the primary transfer – – CN18 6 PCU
BK detection [Transmission type] unit position.
Detects initialization of the
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch Controls the primary transfer Separation – CN9 14 PCU
1 [Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode. select
2 [Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode. (The mode select
is reversed.)
2TCCRU Secondary transfer initial Detects the initial state of the – – CN17 A4 PCU
detection secondary transfer unit.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation Controls the secondary Separation – CN16 10 PCU
clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] transfer separation mode. select
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN16 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the ADU.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN17 A11 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
[Transmission type] lower stream section.
BD LSU synchronization detection Detects synchronization in the – Detection CN17 52 LSU-
signal (BD signal) main scanning direction of the Mother
LSU.
BRAKE Polygon motor brake signal Stops the polygon motor. – Brake CN17 27 LSU-
Mother
CLUD Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift Detects the tray 1 upper limit. – Upper CN13 A8 PCU
HP detection) [Transmission type] limit
CLUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN8 7 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN13 A14 PCU
[Transmission type] tray 1.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN15 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray transport detection Detects paper exit from the Pass – CN13 A11 PCU
[Reflection type] tray.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. – – CN15 9, 13, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 15, 19 4-phase signal.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN15 12 PCU
1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray remaining paper quantity Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN8 11 PCU Detects during
detection [Transmission type] quantity in the tray. quantity lifting up.
CSS11 Tray paper size detection 1 Detects the paper size in the – – CN8 21 PCU
tray.
tray.
tray.
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase. Reference – CN9 6 PCU
[Transmission type]
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BL phase. Reference – CN9 11 PCU
[Transmission type]
DL_BK Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN12 8 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN12 6 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN12 4 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN12 2 PCU
the OPC drum.
DRCRU_C Drum (C) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN13 B6 PCU
drum unit (C).
DRCRU_K Drum (K) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN13 B7 PCU
drum unit (K).
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P SIGNAL LIST 14 – 1

DRCRU_M Drum (M) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN13 B5 PCU
drum unit (M).
DRCRU_Y Drum (Y) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN13 B4 PCU
drum unit (Y).
DRSET Process installation detection Detects installation of the YES NO CN13 B2 PCU 4-color series
process unit. detection
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN3 8 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN1 2 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor,
LSU laser power line.
DVCRU_C Development (C) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN11 B3 PCU
[Fuse] developing unit (C).
DVCRU_K Development (K) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN11 B11 PCU
[Fuse] developing unit (K).
DVCRU_M Development (M) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN11 A6 PCU
[Fuse] developing unit (M).
DVCRU_Y Development (Y) initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN11 A14 PCU
[Fuse] developing unit (Y).
DVM_CL_ Development drive motor (CL) Controls the speed of the – – CN9 3 PCU
CK speed control development drive motor (CL).
DVM_CL_D Development drive motor (CL) Drives the development Drive Stop CN9 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor] section, the color OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_CL_ Development drive motor (CL) Detects the development drive – Lock CN9 5 PCU
LD lock detection motor (CL) lock. detection
DVM_K_CK Development drive motor (K) Controls the speed of the – – CN15 6 PCU
speed control development drive motor (K).
DVM_K_D Development drive motor (K) Drives the development Drive Stop CN15 8 PCU
[Brush-less motor] section, the black OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_K_LD Development drive motor (K) lock Detects the development drive – Lock CN15 10 PCU
detection motor (K) lock. detection
FUCRU Fusing unit initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN19 18 PCU
fusing unit.
FUFM_CNT Fusing fan motor speed control Controls the speed of the – – CN16 4 PCU Pulse (Duty)
fusing fan motor. drive
FUFM_LD Fusing fan motor lock detection Detects the fusing fan motor – Lock CN16 8 PCU
lock. detection
FUFM_V Fusing fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN16 2 PCU
FUM_CK Fusing motor speed control Controls the speed of the – – CN16 5 PCU
fusing motor.
FUM_D Fusing motor [Brush-less motor] Drives the fusing section. Drive Stop CN16 7 PCU
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. – Lock CN16 9 PCU
detection
HDDFAN Machine cooling fan motor Cools inside of the machine. Stop Drive CN14 1 LSU-
Mother
HDDFM_LD HDD fan motor lock detection Detects the HDD fan motor – Lock CN23 4 PCU
lock. detection
HDDFM_V HDD fan motor Cools the HDD unit. Stop Drive CN23 1 PCU
HLOUT_EX External heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the external OFF ON CN14 8 PCU
heater lamp 1/2.
HLOUT_ Lower heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the lower OFF ON CN14 12 PCU
LOW heater lamp.
HLOUT_ Upper heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the upper OFF ON CN14 10 PCU
MAIN heater lamp.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detection sensor Detects a change in the fusing Pressure Pressure CN19 13 PCU
[Transmission type] pressure. release applying
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Controls the fusing pressure Pressure – CN19 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] mode. select
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity. – – CN17 B14 PCU Analog
detection
LOCK_ Machine fan motor lock detection Detects the machine cooling – Lock CN14 4 LSU-
HDDFAN fan motor lock. detection Mother
LSUFM_LD LSU fan motor lock detection Detects the LSUFM lock. – Lock CN13 B12 PCU
detection
LSUFM_V LSU fan motor Cools the LSU unit. Stop Drive CN13 B10 PCU
MC_BK_ High voltage BK error detection Detects an abnormal output of Error – CN12 13 PCU Judged when a
ERR high voltage BK. detection high voltage is
outputted.
MC_CL_ High voltage CL error detection Detects an abnormal output of Error – CN12 14 PCU Judged when a
ERR high voltage CL. detection high voltage is
outputted.

MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN17 B5 PCU Manual paper
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper Pickup – CN17 B2 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] pickup roller.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the paper length in the – – CN17 B8 PCU Manual paper
[Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the – – CN17 B10 PCU Analog
width detector [Volume resistance] manual paper feed tray. detection
OFF_CNT +5VL power OFF signal Turns OFF the power of +5VL. Power ON Power CN13 8 LSU- Only 5VO is
(DC_CNT2) OFF Mother ON.
PCS_F Registration process control Detects the toner patch – – CN18 11 PCU Analog
sensor (Front, diffusion) density. detection
[Reflection type]
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass – CN18 10 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass – CN18 16 PCU
[Transmission type]
POFM_CNT Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the speed of the – – CN17 A14 PCU Pulse (Duty)
speed control paper exit cooling fan motor. drive
POFM_LD POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. – Lock CN17 A12 PCU
detection
POFM_V Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper exit unit. Stop Drive CN17 A15 PCU
POLY_CK Polygon motor clock signal Controls the speed of the – – CN17 28 LSU-
polygon motor. Mother
POLY_ Polygon motor lock signal Detects the polygon motor – Lock CN17 29 LSU- Pulse (Duty)
LOCK lock. detection Mother drive
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. – – CN16 11, 13, PCU Drives with the
PORY_ Polygon motor ON signal Drives the polygon motor of Drive Stop CN17 30 LSU-
START the LSU unit. Mother
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass – CN13 A5 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of Pass – CN13 B14 PCU
[Reflection type] the registration roller.
PROFM1_ Process fan motor 1 speed control Controls the speed of the – – CN6 10 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT process fan motor 1. drive
PROFM1_ Process fan motor 1 lock Detects PROFM1 lock. – Lock CN6 14 PCU
LD detection detection
PROFM1_V Process fan motor 1 Cools the process unit. Stop Drive CN6 8 PCU
PSFM_LD Power cooling fan motor lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN8 10 PCU
detection motor lock. detection
PSFM_V Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 8 PCU
PTC_ERR PTC high voltage error detection Detects the output abnormality Error – CN6 7 PCU Judgment at
of the PTC high voltage. detection PTC high
voltage output
PWM_ Machine cooling fan motor speed Controls the speed of the – – CN14 2 LSU- Pulse (Duty)
HDDFAN control machine cooling fan motor. Mother drive
REGS_F Registration process control Detects the registration shift – – CN18 13 PCU Analog
sensor (Front, reflection) and toner patch density. detection
[Reflection type]
REGS_F_ Registration process control Registration process control – – CN18 15 PCU Analog output
LED sensor LED (Front) [LED] sensor LED light emitting
REGS_R Registration process control Detects the registration shift – – CN18 3 PCU Analog
sensor (Rear, reflection) and toner patch density. detection
[Reflection type]
REGS_R_ Registration process control Registration process control – – CN18 5 PCU Analog output
LED sensor LED (Rear) [LED] sensor LED light emitting
RRM PS motor [Stepping motor] Drives the registration roller – – CN15 1, 3, 5, PCU Drives with the
and controls ON/OFF. 7 4-phase signal.
RY_CNT Main system power OFF signal Turns OFF the power other Power ON Power CN13 7 LSU- Only 5VL_5VO
(DC_CNT1) than +5VO and +5VL. OFF Mother is ON.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). – – CN11 B6 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). – – CN11 B14 PCU Analog
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). – – CN11 A3 PCU Analog
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). – – CN11 A11 PCU Analog

TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full – CN18 22 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TH_EX1_IN External heater lamp 1 contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 6 PCU Analog
thermistor detection
TH_LOW_ Lower heater lamp contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 10 PCU Analog
IN thermistor detection
TH_M Temperature detection Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B12 PCU Analog
detection
TH_MAIN_ Upper heater lamp non-contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 2 PCU Analog
CS_IN thermistor detection
TH_SUB_IN Upper heater lamp contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 4 PCU Analog
TH1_LSU LSU UN thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN7 A3 PCU Analog
detection
TNM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the – – CN14 5, 7 PCU
[Synchronous motor] toner cartridge to the
developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the – – CN14 1, 3 PCU
developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the – – CN14 9, 11 PCU
developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the – – CN14 2, 4 PCU
developing unit.
WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN8 1 PCU
dehumidifying heater.
2. MX-B400P/B380P
1TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects waste toner full. Empty Full CN13 B8 PCU
[Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation Detects the primary transfer – – CN6 1 PCU
detection [Transmission type] unit position.
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt initialization Detects the primary transfer – – CN18 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type] belt initialization.
1 [Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode. select
2TCCRU Secondary transfer initial Detects the initial state of the – – CN17 A4 PCU
detection secondary transfer unit.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation Controls the secondary Separation – CN16 10 PCU
clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] transfer separation mode. select
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN16 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the ADU.
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
[Transmission type] lower stream section.
BD LSU synchronization detection Detects synchronization in the – Detection CN17 52 LSU-
signal (BD signal) main scanning direction of the Mother
LSU.
BRAKE Polygon motor brake signal Stops the polygon motor. – Brake CN17 27 LSU-
Mother
CLUD Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift Detects the tray 1 upper limit. – Upper CN13 A8 PCU
HP detection) [Transmission type] limit
CLUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN8 7 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN13 A14 PCU
[Transmission type] tray 1.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN15 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray transport detection Detects paper exit from the Pass – CN13 A11 PCU
[Reflection type] tray.

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. – – CN15 9, 13, PCU Drives with the
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN15 12 PCU
1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray remaining paper quantity Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN8 11 PCU Detects during
detection [Transmission type] quantity in the tray. quantity lifting up.
tray.
tray.
tray.
DL_BK Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN12 8 PCU
the OPC drum.
DRCRU_K Drum initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN13 B7 PCU
drum unit.
DRSET Process installation detection Detects installation of the YES NO CN13 B2 PCU
process unit.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN3 8 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN1 2 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor,
LSU laser power line.
DVCRU_K Development initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN11 B11 PCU
[Fuse] developing unit.
DVM_K_CK Development drive motor speed Controls the speed of the – – CN15 6 PCU
control development drive motor.
DVM_K_D Development drive motor Drives the development Drive Stop CN15 8 PCU
[Brush-less motor] section, the OPC drum, and
the transfer section.
DVM_K_LD Development drive motor lock Detects the development drive – Lock CN15 10 PCU
FUCRU Fusing unit initial detection Detects the initial state of the – – CN19 18 PCU
fusing unit.
FUFM_CNT Fusing fan motor speed control Controls the speed of the – – CN16 4 PCU Pulse (Duty)
fusing fan motor. drive
FUFM_LD Fusing fan motor lock detection Detects the fusing fan motor – Lock CN16 8 PCU
lock. detection
FUFM_V Fusing fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN16 2 PCU
FUM_CK Fusing motor speed control Controls the speed of the – – CN16 5 PCU
fusing motor.
FUM_D Fusing motor [Brush-less motor] Drives the fusing section. Drive Stop CN16 7 PCU
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. – Lock CN16 9 PCU
detection
HDDFM_LD HDD fan motor lock detection Detects the HDD fan motor – Lock CN23 4 PCU
lock. detection
HDDFM_V HDD fan motor Cools the HDD unit. Stop Drive CN23 1 PCU
HLOUT_EX External heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the external OFF ON CN14 8 PCU
heater lamp 1/2.
HLOUT_ Lower heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the lower OFF ON CN14 12 PCU
LOW heater lamp.
HLOUT_ Upper heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the upper OFF ON CN14 10 PCU
MAIN heater lamp.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detection sensor Detects a change in the fusing Pressure Pressure CN19 13 PCU
[Transmission type] pressure. release applying
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Controls the fusing pressure Pressure – CN19 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] mode. select
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity. – – CN17 B14 PCU Analog
detection
LSUFM_LD LSU fan motor lock detection Detects the LSUFM lock. – Lock CN13 B12 PCU
detection
LSUFM_V LSU fan motor Cools the LSU unit. Stop Drive CN13 B10 PCU
MC_BK_ High voltage BK error detection Detects an abnormal output of Error – CN12 13 PCU Judged when a
ERR high voltage BK. detection high voltage is
outputted.
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN17 B5 PCU Manual paper
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPFS Manual paper pickup solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper Pickup – CN17 B2 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] pickup roller.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the paper length in the – – CN17 B8 PCU Manual paper
[Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the – – CN17 B10 PCU Analog
width detector [Volume resistance] manual paper feed tray. detection

OFF_CNT +5VL power OFF signal Turns OFF the power of +5VL. Power ON Power CN13 8 LSU- Only 5VO is
(DC_CNT2) OFF Mother ON.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass – CN18 10 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass – CN18 16 PCU
[Transmission type]
POFM_CNT Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the speed of the – – CN17 A14 PCU Pulse (Duty)
speed control paper exit cooling fan motor. drive
POFM_LD POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. – Lock CN17 A12 PCU
detection
POFM_V Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper exit unit. Stop Drive CN17 A15 PCU
POLY_CK Polygon motor clock signal Controls the speed of the – – CN17 28 LSU-
polygon motor. Mother
POLY_ Polygon motor lock signal Detects the polygon motor – Lock CN17 29 LSU- Pulse (Duty)
LOCK lock. detection Mother drive
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. – – CN16 11, 13, PCU Drives with the
PORY_ Polygon motor ON signal Drives the polygon motor of Drive Stop CN17 30 LSU-
START the LSU unit. Mother
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass – CN13 A5 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of Pass – CN13 B14 PCU
[Reflection type] the registration roller.
PSFM_LD Power cooling fan motor lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN8 10 PCU
PSFM_V Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 8 PCU
PTC_ERR PTC high voltage error detection Detects the output abnormality Error – CN6 7 PCU Judgment at
of the PTC high voltage. detection PTC high
voltage output
REGS_R Registration process control Detects the registration shift – – CN18 3 PCU Analog
sensor (Rear, reflection) and toner patch density. detection
[Reflection type]
REGS_R_ Registration process control Registration process control – – CN18 5 PCU Analog output
LED sensor LED (Rear) [LED] sensor LED light emitting
RRM PS motor [Stepping motor] Drives the registration roller – – CN15 1, 3, 5, PCU Drives with the
and controls ON/OFF. 7 4-phase signal.
RY_CNT Main system power OFF signal Turns OFF the power other Power ON Power CN13 7 LSU- Only 5VL_5VO
(DC_CNT1) than +5VO and +5VL. OFF Mother is ON.
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density. – – CN11 B14 PCU Analog
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full – CN18 22 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TH_LOW_ Lower heater lamp contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 10 PCU Analog
TH_M Temperature detection Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B12 PCU Analog
detection
CS_IN thermistor detection
TH_SUB_IN Upper heater lamp contact Detects the temperature. – – CN19 4 PCU Analog
TH1_LSU LSU UN thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN7 A3 PCU Analog
detection
TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the – – CN14 1, 3 PCU
developing unit.
WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN8 1 PCU
dehumidifying heater.

[15]
CN-1
CN-2 (NC)B05B-PASK-1
(NC)B03B-PASK-1 RSVFAN 1
MX-C400P
CN-18 1 24V1 PWM_RSVFAN 2

B31B-CSRK(LF)(SN) (reserve) 2 nFANRDY P-GND 3 (reserve)
1 D-GND 3 P-GND LOCK_RSVFAN 4
2 D-GND P-GND 5
3 3.3V_F
4 3.3V_F
5 nCNCT_FAX
6 FAXD_TXD_N
7 FAXD_TXD_P
8 5V_(off)
9 nRES_FAX
10 FAXCS_TXD_P
11 FAXCS_TXD_N
12 D-GND
13 FAXD_RXD_N CN-7
14 FAXD_RXD_P
BM10B-GHS-TBT
A. MX-C400P/C380P
15 nFAX_WUP
16 FAXCS_RXD_P D-GND 1
17 FAXCS_RXD_N D-GND 2 FRONT PANEL
18 5V_(off) D-GND 3 Interface harness PRT
19 D-GND D-GND 4
20 nFAXD_RTS D-GND 5 BU05P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) + CZHR-05V-S USB cable USB-A
21 D-GND D-GND 6 1 F-GND 5 SHELL -
22 nFAXD_CTS MFPC PWB LSU MOTHER PWB D-GND 7 2 D-GND 4 D-GND 4
23 FLVPP FPNL_USB_DP 8 3 D1+ 3 D+ 3 USB
24 nFAXCS_RTS FPNL_USB_DN 9 4 D- 2 D- 2
25 5V_A USB_VBUS 10 5 VBUS1 1 5V 1
26 nFAXCS_CTS CN-19 CN-5
27 24V TX24-120R-LT-H1 TX25-120P-LT-H1E
28 3.3V_F LCD_DATA0- 1 1 LCD_DATA0-
29 3.3V_F PNL_USB_DN 61 LCD_DATA0+ 2 2 LCD_DATA0+ 61 PNL_USB_DN
30 D-GND PNL_USB_DP 62 LCD_DATA1- 3 3 LCD_DATA1- 62 PNL_USB_DP
31 P-GND USB_VBUS 63 LCD_DATA1+ 4 4 LCD_DATA1+ 63 USB_VBUS
MT_USB_RTN_P 64 LCD_DATA2- 5 5 LCD_DATA2- 64 MT_USB_RTN_P SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
MT_USB_RTN_N 65 LCD_DATA2+ 6 6 LCD_DATA2+ 65 MT_USB_RTN_N
PICVPPON 66 LCD_CLK- 7 7 LCD_CLK- 66 PICVPPON
RXD_SCN 67 LCD_CLK+ 8 8 LCD_CLK+ 67 RXD_SCN
nCTS_SCN 68 LCD_DATA3- 9 9 LCD_DATA3- 68 nCTS_SCN
TXD_SCN 69 LCD_DATA3+ 10 10 LCD_DATA3+ 69 TXD_SCN
nLCD_DISP nLCD_DISP nRTS_SCN
1. Image process (MFPC, LSU)
nRTS_SCN 70 11 11 70
nRES_SCN 71 LCD_REFCLKIN 12 12 LCD_REFCLKIN
71 nRES_SCN CN-10 MFPC interface harness CN-7
CN-6 nRES_PCU 72 SCANDATA3+ 13 13 SCANDATA3+ 72 nRES_PCU B22B-CZWHK-B-1 B22B-CZWHK-B-1
UBR23-4K2200 RXD_PCU 73 SCANDATA3- 14 14 SCANDATA3- 73 RXD_PCU 11CZ-6Y 11CZ-6Y
nRES_PCU A-1 A-11 PCU_RES
1 VBUS nCTS_PCU 74 SCANCLKOUT+ 15 15 SCANCLKOUT+74 nCTS_PCU
TXD_PCU SCANCLKOUT- TXD_PCU
5VNPD A-2 A-10 5VNPD
USB2.0 2 D- 75 SCANCLKOUT- 16 16 75 nRTS_PCU PCU_DTR
3 D+ nRTS_PCU 76 SCANDATA2+ 17 17 SCANDATA2+ 76 nRTS_PCU A-3 A-9
(HOST) nCTS_PCU A-4 A-8 PCU_DSR
4 D-GND nPOF_MFPC 77 SCANDATA2- 18 18 SCANDATA2- 77 nPOF_MFPC
SCANDATA1+ nREQ_PIC nPOF_PCU A-5 A-7 /POF
nREQ_PIC 78 SCANDATA1+ 19 19 78 LSU_RST
CN-5 LSUASIC_RST A-6 A-6
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM
nCLR_PIC 79 SCANDATA1- 20 20 SCANDATA1- 79 nCLR_PIC

UAR27-4K5J00 nSCK_LSU A-7 A-5 SCK
TXD_PIC 80 SCANDATA0+ 21 21 SCANDATA0+ 80 TXD_PIC
1 VBUS RXD_PIC 81 SCANDATA0- 22 B to B 22 SCANDATA0- 81 RXD_PIC
USB2.0 2 D- PWM 82 CH0_N 23 23 CH0_N 82 PWM
nCNCT_FAN CH0_P nCNCT_FAN D-GND A-10 A-2 D-GND
(DEVICE) 3 D+ 83 CH0_P 24 24 83 (NC)
CH1_N nRES_PIC (NC) A-11 A-1
4 D-GND nRES_PIC 84 CH1_N 25 25 84 PCU PWB
RES_MFP 85 CH1_P 26 26 CH1_P 85 RES_MFP
PWM2 CH2_N CH2_N D-GND B-11 B-1 D-GND
86 27 27 86 PWM2 TXD_PCU B-2 PCU_TxD
CN-9 nREQ_PIC_INT CH2_P CH2_P nREQ_PIC_INT
B-10
87 28 28 87 RXD_PCU B-9 B-3 PCU_RxD
MAG_SI-51005-F TXD_FAX_D 88 CLK_N 29 29 CLK_N 88 TXD_FAX_D
RXD_FAX_D CLK_P nINFO_LED B-8 B-4 /FAX_LED
1 TRP1+ 89 30 30 CLK_P 89 RXD_FAX_D
CH3_N nRTS_FAX_D
2 TRP1- nRTS_FAX_D 90 31 31 CH3_N 90 nTRANS_DAT B-6 B-6 TRANS_DAT
3 TRP2+ nCTS_FAX_D 91 CH3_P 32 32 CH3_P 91 nCTS_FAX_D
4 TRP3+ TXD_FAX_CS 92 CH4_N 33 33 CH4_N 92 TXD_FAX_CS
LAN nPCU_TRG B-4 B-8 (/PCU_TRG)
5 TRP3- RXD_FAX_CS 93 CH4_P 34 34 CH4_P 93 RXD_FAX_CS
ECLK_LSU_N nRTS_FAX_CS D-GND B-3 B-9 D-GND
6 TRP2- nRTS_FAX_CS 94 35 35 ECLK_LSU_N 94
nCTS_FAX_CS ECLK_LSU_P ECLK_LSU_P nCTS_FAX_CS D-GND B-2 B-10 D-GND
7 TRP4+ 95 36 36 95 B-11
nRES_FAX 96 HSYNC_LSU_P 37 37 nRES_FAX INT5V B-1 INT5V
8 TRP4- HSYNC_LSU_P96 11CZ-6H 11CZ-6H
nCNCT_FAX 97 HSYNC_LSU_N 38 38 HSYNC_LSU_N97 nCNCT_FAX
nWU_FAX2 98 VSYNC_K_N 39 39 VSYNC_K_N 98 nWU_FAX2
CN-17 3R3V_ECO 99 VSYNC_K_P 40 40 VSYNC_K_P 99 3R3V_ECO
DBR30-091F100 RTS_LCDsub 100 VSYNC_C_P 41 41 VSYNC_C_P 100 RTS_LCDsub
1 (NC) +3.3VN 101 VSYNC_C_N 42 42 VSYNC_C_N 101 +3.3VN
2 232C_RXD +3.3VN 102 VSYNC_M_N 43 43 VSYNC_M_N 102 +3.3VN
3 232C_TXD +3.3VN 103 VSYNC_M_P 44 44 VSYNC_M_P 103 +3.3VN LSU UN
4 232C_DTR CTS_LCDsub 104 VSYNC_Y_P 45 45 VSYNC_Y_P 104 CTS_LCDsub
RS232C 5 D-GND +5V0 105 VSYNC_Y_N 46 46 VSYNC_Y_N 105 +5V0
6 232C_DSR USB_SEL_SW 106 LCDSEL0 47 47 LCDSEL0 106 USB_SEL_SW
7 232C_RTS LCDSEL2 107 LCDSEL1 48 48 LCDSEL1 107 LCDSEL2
8 232C_CTS LCDSEL3 108 +5VL 49 49 +5VL 108 LCDSEL3 CN-17 CN-3
9 (NC) D-GND 109 +5VL 50 50 +5VL 109 D-GND TX24-60R-6ST-H1E TX25-60P-6ST-H1E
D-GND 110 +5VL 51 51 +5VL 110 D-GND CNCHK 1 1 CNCHK
CN-20 D-GND 111 +5VL 52 52 +5VL 111 D-GND LD_CHK_4 31 LDCHK_1 2 2 LDCHK_1 31 LD_CHK_4 CN-1 CN1
X_BM05B-PASS-1-TFT D-GND 112 +5VL 53 53 +5VL 112 D-GND LD_CHK_3 32 DT_C1+ 3 3 DT_C1+ 32 LD_CHK_3 SM05B-PASS-1
1 FAN_POW 113 54 54 113 D-GND LD_CHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 33 LD_CHK_2 TH 1 TH
D-GND +5VL +5VL 4 DT_C1-
BD harness 1 B05B-PASK-1
MFPC FAN 2 3R3V D-GND 114 +5VL 55 55 +5VL 114 D-GND nLDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 5 DT_C2+ 34 nLDERR_Y D-GND 2 2 D-GND
3 D-GND D-GND 115 +5VL 56 56 +5VL 115 D-GND nLDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 6 DT_C2- 35 nLDERR_C BD 3 3 BD BD PWB
(reserve) 4 3R3V 116 +5VL 57 57 +5VL 116 D-GND VREF_C1 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
D-GND
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
5 D-GND D-GND 117 +5VL 58 58 +5VL 117 D-GND nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C 5VLD 5 5 5VLD
D-GND 118 TXD_LCDsub 59 59 TXD_LCDsub 118 D-GND nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
(NC) 119 RXD_LCDsub 60 60 RXD_LCDsub 119 (NC) VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
+24V1 120 120 +24V1 nSH_C1 40 D-GND 11 B to B 11 D-GND 40 nSH_C1
VREF_K1 42 DT_Y1+ 13 13 DT_Y1+ 42 VREF_K1 LD PWB
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2
CN-4 VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2 CN-4
MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 15 – 1

SATA cable 6SAT07P-328B-B5 VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2 SM06B-PASS-1 PGM harness 179228-5
1 D-GND VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2 24V 1 5 24V
2 SATA_TXP VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1 P-GND 2 4 P-GND
3 SATA_TXN VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2 nSTART 3 3 nSTART POLYGON
4 D-GND nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M LOCK 4 2 LOCK MOTOR
5 SATA_RXN nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD CLK 5 1 CLK
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND (NC)BRAKE 6
7 D-GND D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
CN-15 +24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+12V 15 SATA cable B4P-VH +3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
+12V 14 1 +12V
7 D-GND +12V 13 2 +5VHD
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 12 3 D-GND
5 SATA_RXN D-GND 11 4 D-GND
4 D-GND D-GND 10
3 SATA_TXN +5VHD 9
2 SATA_TXP +5VHD 8 CN-14
1 D-GND
HDD +5VHD 7 B04B-PASK-1
SATA 7Pin during 22P D-GND 6 1 HDDFAN
D-GND 5 2 PWM_HDDFAN
D-GND 4 3 P-GND
3.3V 3 4 LOCK_HDDFAN
3.3V 2
3.3V 1
SATA 7Pin during 22P
CN-1
CN-2 (NC)B05B-PASK-1
(NC)B03B-PASK-1 RSVFAN 1
CN-18 1 24V1 PWM_RSVFAN 2
B31B-CSRK(LF)(SN) (reserve) 2 nFANRDY P-GND 3 (reserve)
1 D-GND 3 P-GND LOCK_RSVFAN 4
2 D-GND P-GND 5
3 3.3V_F
4 3.3V_F
5 nCNCT_FAX
6 FAXD_TXD_N
7 FAXD_TXD_P
8 5V_(off)
9 nRES_FAX
10 FAXCS_TXD_P
11 FAXCS_TXD_N
12 D-GND
13 FAXD_RXD_N
14 FAXD_RXD_P CN-7
15 nFAX_WUP BM10B-GHS-TBT SRA-01T-3.2
16 FAXCS_RXD_P D-GND 1
B. MX-B400P/B380P
17 FAXCS_RXD_N D-GND 2
18 5V_(off) D-GND 3 FRONT PANEL
19 D-GND D-GND 4 Interface harness PRT
20 nFAXD_RTS D-GND 5 BU05P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)+ CZHR-05V-S USB cable USB-A
21 D-GND D-GND 6 1 F-GND 5 SHELL -
22 nFAXD_CTS LSU MOTHER PWB D-GND 7 2 D-GND 4 D-GND 4
23 FLVPP MFPC PWB FPNL_USB_DP 8 3 D1+ 3 D+ 3 USB
24 nFAXCS_RTS FPNL_USB_DN 9 4 D- 2 D- 2
25 5V_A USB_VBUS 10 5 VBUS1 1 5V 1
26 nFAXCS_CTS CN-19 CN-5
27 24V TX24-120R-LT-H1 TX25-120P-LT-H1E
28 3.3V_F LCD_DATA0- 1 1 LCD_DATA0-
29 3.3V_F PNL_USB_DN 61 LCD_DATA0+ 2 2 LCD_DATA0+ 61 PNL_USB_DN
30 D-GND PNL_USB_DP 62 LCD_DATA1- 3 3 LCD_DATA1- 62 PNL_USB_DP
31 P-GND USB_VBUS 63 LCD_DATA1+ 4 4 LCD_DATA1+ 63 USB_VBUS
MT_USB_RTN_P 64 LCD_DATA2- 5 5 LCD_DATA2- 64 MT_USB_RTN_P SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
MT_USB_RTN_N 65 LCD_DATA2+ 6 6 LCD_DATA2+ 65 MT_USB_RTN_N
PICVPPON 66 LCD_CLK- 7 7 LCD_CLK- 66 PICVPPON
RXD_SCN 67 LCD_CLK+ 8 8 LCD_CLK+ 67 RXD_SCN
nCTS_SCN 68 LCD_DATA3- 9 9 LCD_DATA3- 68 nCTS_SCN
TXD_SCN 69 LCD_DATA3+ 10 10 LCD_DATA3+ 69 TXD_SCN
nRTS_SCN 70 nLCD_DISP 11 11 nLCD_DISP 70 nRTS_SCN
nRES_SCN 71 LCD_REFCLKIN 12 12 LCD_REFCLKIN 71 nRES_SCN CN-7
CN-6 nRES_PCU 72 SCANDATA3+ 13 13 SCANDATA3+ 72 nRES_PCU CN-10 MFPC interface harness
B22B-CZWHK-B-1 B22B-CZWHK-B-1
UBR23-4K2200 RXD_PCU 73 SCANDATA3- 14 14 SCANDATA3- 73 RXD_PCU 11CZ-6Y 11CZ-6Y
nRES_PCU A-1 A-11 PCU_RES
1 VBUS nCTS_PCU 74 SCANCLKOUT+ 15 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 74 nCTS_PCU
5VNPD A-2 A-10 5VNPD
USB2.0 2 D- TXD_PCU 75 SCANCLKOUT- 16 16 SCANCLKOUT- 75 TXD_PCU
3 D+ nRTS_PCU 76 SCANDATA2+ 17 17 SCANDATA2+ 76 nRTS_PCU
(HOST) nCTS_PCU A-4 A-8 PCU_DSR
4 D-GND nPOF_MFPC 77 SCANDATA2- 18 18 SCANDATA2- 77 nPOF_MFPC
nPOF_PCU A-5 A-7 /POF
nREQ_PIC 78 SCANDATA1+ 19 19 SCANDATA1+ 78 nREQ_PIC
CN-5 LSUASIC_RST A-6 A-6 LSU_RST
nCLR_PIC 79 SCANDATA1- 20 20 SCANDATA1- 79 nCLR_PIC
UAR27-4K5J00 nSCK_LSU A-7 A-5 SCK
TXD_PIC 80 SCANDATA0+ 21 21 SCANDATA0+ 80 TXD_PIC
1 VBUS RXD_PIC 81 SCANDATA0- 22 22 SCANDATA0- 81 RXD_PIC
B to B TH_LSU A-9 A-3 TH1_LSU
USB2.0 2 D- PWM 82 CH0_N 23 23 CH0_N 82 PWM
3 D+ nCNCT_FAN 83 CH0_P 24 24 CH0_P 83 nCNCT_FAN
(DEVICE) (NC) A-11 A-1 (NC)
4 D-GND nRES_PIC 84 CH1_N 25 25 CH1_N 84 nRES_PIC PCU PWB
RES_MFP 85 CH1_P 26 26 CH1_P 85 RES_MFP
PWM2 86 CH2_N 27 27 CH2_N 86 PWM2
CN-9 TXD_PCU B-10 B-2 PCU_TxD
nREQ_PIC_INT 87 CH2_P 28 28 CH2_P 87 nREQ_PIC_INT
MAG_SI-51005-F RXD_PCU B-9 B-3 PCU_RxD
TXD_FAX_D 88 CLK_N 29 29 CLK_N 88 TXD_FAX_D
nINFO_LED B-8 B-4 /FAX_LED
1 TRP1+ RXD_FAX_D 89 CLK_P 30 30 CLK_P 89 RXD_FAX_D
2 TRP1- nRTS_FAX_D 90 CH3_N 31 31 CH3_N 90 nRTS_FAX_D
3 TRP2+ nCTS_FAX_D 91 CH3_P 32 32 CH3_P 91 nCTS_FAX_D
4 TRP3+ TXD_FAX_CS 92 CH4_N 33 33 CH4_N 92 TXD_FAX_CS
LAN nPCU_TRG B-4 B-8 (/PCU_TRG)
5 TRP3- RXD_FAX_CS 93 CH4_P 34 34 CH4_P 93 RXD_FAX_CS
D-GND B-3 B-9 D-GND
6 TRP2- nRTS_FAX_CS 94 ECLK_LSU_N 35 35 ECLK_LSU_N 94 nRTS_FAX_CS
7 TRP4+ nCTS_FAX_CS 95 ECLK_LSU_P 36 36 ECLK_LSU_P 95 nCTS_FAX_CS
INT5V B-1 B-11 INT5V
8 TRP4- nRES_FAX 96 HSYNC_LSU_P 37 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 96 nRES_FAX
11CZ-6H 11CZ-6H
nCNCT_FAX 97 HSYNC_LSU_N 38 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 97 nCNCT_FAX
nWU_FAX2 98 VSYNC_K_N 39 39 VSYNC_K_N 98 nWU_FAX2
CN-17 3R3V_ECO 99 VSYNC_K_P 40 40 VSYNC_K_P 99 3R3V_ECO
DBR30-091F100 RTS_LCDsub 100 VSYNC_C_P 41 41 VSYNC_C_P 100 RTS_LCDsub
1 (NC) +3.3VN 101 VSYNC_C_N 42 42 VSYNC_C_N 101 +3.3VN
2 232C_RXD +3.3VN 102 VSYNC_M_N 43 43 VSYNC_M_N 102 +3.3VN
3 232C_TXD +3.3VN 103 VSYNC_M_P 44 44 VSYNC_M_P 103 +3.3VN LSU UN
4 232C_DTR CTS_LCDsub 104 VSYNC_Y_P 45 45 VSYNC_Y_P 104 CTS_LCDsub
RS232C 5 D-GND +5V0 105 VSYNC_Y_N 46 46 VSYNC_Y_N 105 +5V0
6 232C_DSR USB_SEL_SW 106 LCDSEL0 47 47 LCDSEL0 106 USB_SEL_SW
7 232C_RTS LCDSEL2 107 LCDSEL1 48 48 LCDSEL1 107 LCDSEL2
8 232C_CTS LCDSEL3 108 +5VL 49 49 +5VL 108 LCDSEL3 CN-17 CN-3
9 (NC) D-GND 109 +5VL 50 50 +5VL 109 D-GND TX24-60R-6ST-H1E TX25-60P-6ST-H1E
D-GND 110 +5VL 51 51 +5VL 110 D-GND CNCHK 1 1 CNCHK
CN-20 D-GND 111 +5VL 52 52 +5VL 111 D-GND LD_CHK_4 31 LDCHK_1 2 2 LDCHK_1 31 LD_CHK_4 CN-1 CN1
X_BM05B-PASS-1-TFT D-GND 112 +5VL 53 53 +5VL 112 D-GND LD_CHK_3 32 DT_C1+ 3 3 DT_C1+ 32 LD_CHK_3 SM05B-PASS-1 BD harness B05B-PASK-1
1 FAN_POW D-GND 113 +5VL 54 54 +5VL 113 D-GND LD_CHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 4 DT_C1- 33 LD_CHK_2 TH 1 1 TH
2 3R3V D-GND 114 +5VL 55 55 +5VL 114 D-GND nLDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 5 DT_C2+ 34 nLDERR_Y D-GND 2 2 D-GND
(reserve) 3 D-GND D-GND 115 +5VL 56 56 +5VL 115 D-GND nLDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 6 DT_C2- 35 nLDERR_C BD 3 3 BD BD PWB
4 3R3V D-GND 116 +5VL 57 57 +5VL 116 D-GND VREF_C1 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
5 D-GND D-GND 117 +5VL 58 58 +5VL 117 D-GND nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C 5VLD 5 5 5VLD
D-GND 118 TXD_LCDsub 59 59 TXD_LCDsub 118 D-GND nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
(NC) 119 RXD_LCDsub 60 60 RXD_LCDsub 119 (NC) VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
+24V1 120 120 +24V1 nSH_C1 40 D-GND 11 B to B 11 D-GND 40 nSH_C1
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nENB_K 44 DT_Y2+ 15 15 DT_Y2+ 44 nENB_K LD PWB
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2

CN-4 VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2 CN-4
SATA cable 6SAT07P-328B-B5 VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2 SM06B-PASS-1 PGM harness 179228-5
1 D-GND VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2 24V 1 5 24V
2 SATA_TXP VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1 P-GND 2 4 P-GND
3 SATA_TXN VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2 nSTART 3 3 nSTART POLYGON
4 D-GND nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M LOCK 4 2 LOCK MOTOR
5 SATA_RXN nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD CLK 5 1 CLK
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND (NC)BRAKE 6
7 D-GND D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
CN-15 +24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+12V 15 SATA cable B4P-VH +3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
+12V 14 1 +12V
7 D-GND +12V 13 2 +5VHD
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 12 3 D-GND
5 SATA_RXN D-GND 11 4 D-GND
4 D-GND D-GND 10
3 SATA_TXN +5VHD 9
2 SATA_TXP HDD +5VHD 8 CN-14
1 D-GND +5VHD 7 B04B-PASK-1
SATA 7Pin during 22P D-GND 6 1 HDDFAN
D-GND 5 2 PWM_HDDFAN
D-GND 4 (reserve) 3 P-GND
3.3V 3 4 LOCK_HDDFAN
3.3V 2
3.3V 1
SATA 7Pin during 22P
OPERATION UN
BU14P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) CZHR-06V-S
SCN interface harness PRT 14CZ-6H 14CZ-6H OPE interface harness PRT CN-3 PSW harness PRT
CN-9 (06CZ-6H) BM06B-CZSS-1-TF CN-2
B16B-CZHK-B-1 16CZ-6H 1 D-GND 14 1 D-GND BM03B-PASS-1-TFT
D-GND 16 2 5VO 13 2 5VO nPWRSW 1 nPWRSW POWER
5VO 15 3 nWU_LED 12 3 nWU_LED (NC) 2
nINFO_LED 14 4 nPOW_LED 11 4 nPOW_LED D-GND 3 D-GND SW PWB
2. Operation section
nWU_LED 13 5 nWU_KEY 10 5 nWU_KEY

nPOW_LED 12 6 nPWR_SW 9 6 nPWR_SW
nWU_KEY 11
nPWR_SW 10 CN-8
CN-2 CN-1
nLCD_DISP 9 10CZ-6H BM10B-CZSS-1-TF OPE interface harness PRT
nPOF_SCN 8 7 nLCD_DISP 8 1 nLCD_DISP BM10B-CZSS-1-TF BM10B-CZSS-1-TF
2 nPOF_SCN D-GND 1 10 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 7 8 nPOF_SCN 7 9 /BZR
nRES_SCN 6 9 nRES_SCN 6 3 nRES_SCN /BZR 2
4 nRTS_SCN /F0D1 3 8 /F0D1
nRTS_SCN 5 10 nRTS_SCN 5 7 SEG1LEDCPR
TXD_SCN 4 11 TXD_SCN 4 5 TXD_SCN SEG1LEDCPR 4 PRT OPE PWB
6 CTS_SCN SEG2D0 5 6 SEG2D0
CTS_SCN 3 12 CTS_SCN 3 5 /F1D2
RXD_SCN 2 13 RXD_SCN 2 7 RXD_SCN /F1D2 6
8 D-GND D-GND 7 4 D-GND
D-GND 1 14 D-GND 1 3 /KEYIN
9 (NC) /KEYIN 8
10 (NC) 3.3V_EXT 9 2 3.3V_EXT
/F3G1 10 1 /F3G1
LSU MOTHER PWB OPE interface
SCN interface harness PRT CN-6
CN-8 harness PRT 501190-2017
B34B-PHDSS-B DF1B-18DES-2.5RC + DF1B-18DEP-2.5RC 20 D-GND
D-GND 34 18 D-GND
D-GND 33 18 D-GND 18 4 D-GND OPE CNT LCD UN
LCD_DATA3+ 32 16 LCD_DATA3+ 16 2 LCD_DATA3+
SCANDATA3+ 31 14 LCD_DATA3- 14 1 LCD_DATA3- PWB
LCD_DATA3- 30 12 D-GND 12 3 D-GND
SCANDATA3- 29 10 LCD_CLK+ 10 5 LCD_CLK+
D-GND 28 8 LCD_CLK- 8 7 LCD_CLK- CN-4 (FPC)
D-GND 27 6 D-GND 6 10 D-GND FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
LCD_CLK+ 26 4 SCANCLKOUT+ 4 8 SCANCLKOUT+ D-GND 40 D-GND
SCANCLKOUT+ 25 2 SCANCLKOUT- 2 6 SCANCLKOUT- D-GND 39 D-GND
LCD_CLK- 24 17 D-GND 17 9 D-GND 2.5V_LCD 38 2.5V
SCANCLKOUT- 23 15 LCD_DATA2+ 15 11 LCD_DATA2+ 2.5V_LCD 37 2.5V
D-GND 22 13 LCD_DATA2- 13 13 LCD_DATA2- R0 36 R0
D-GND 21 11 D-GND 11 15 D-GND R1 35 R1
LCD_DATA2+ 20 9 LCD_DATA1+ 9 17 LCD_DATA1+ R2 34 R2
SCANDATA2+ 19 7 LCD_DATA1- 7 19 LCD_DATA1- R3 33 R3
LCD_DATA2- 18 5 D-GND 5 16 D-GND R4 32 R4
SCANDATA2- 17 3 LCD_DATA0+ 3 14 LCD_DATA0+ R5 31 R5
D-GND 16 1 LCD_DATA0- 1 12 LCD_DATA0- R6 30 R6
D-GND 15 S P R7 29 R7
LCD_DATA1+ 14 G0 28 G0
SCANDATA1+ 13 G1 27 G1
LCD_DATA1- 12 G2 26 G2
SCANDATA1- 11 G3 25 G3
D-GND 10 G4 24 G4
D-GND 9 G5 23 G5
LCD_DATA0+ 8 G6 22 G6
SCANDATA0+ 7 G7 21 G7 LCD module
LCD_DATA0- 6 B0 20 B0 4.3
SCANDATA0- 5 B1 19 B1
LCDSEL3 4 B2 18 B2
LCDSEL1 3 B3 17 B3
LCDSEL2 2 B4 16 B4
LCDSEL0 1 B5 15 B5
B6 14 B6
OPE interface B7 13 B7
D-GND 12 D-GND
harness PRT CK 11 CK
BU08P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) CN-7 DISP2 10 DISP
CZHR-08V-S BM08B-CZSS-1-TF Hsync 9 Hsync
1 LCDSEL3 8 08CZ-6H 1 LCDSEL3 Vsync 8 Vsync
2 LCDSEL2 7 2 LCDSEL2 (NC) 7
3 LCDSEL1 6 3 LCDSEL1 (NC)
5V_LCD 6 5V
4 LCDSEL0 5 4 LCDSEL0 5V_LCD 5 5V
CN-203 5 3.3V 4 5 3.3V (NC) 4 (NC)
B5P-VH-B 6 5VN 3 6 5VN (NC) 3
12V 3 7 12V 2 7 12V (NC)
SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N D-GND 2 D-GND
8 D-GND 1 8 D-GND D-GND 1
CN-204 1 12V 1 D-GND
2 5VN 2
B7P-VH-B
3 3.3V 3

HL DCDC PWB 5VN 5 4 D-GND 4 CN-3
P R 046298004000883+ (FPC)
CN-205 5V_LCD 1
B4P-VH-B (NC) 2 BACK
3.3V 3 (NC) 3
D-GND 4 FB 4 LIGHT
Power harness PRT
PAPER FEED DRIVE UN
CN-15
179228-3 TC PWB harness B20B-PNDZS Paper feed drive harness B4B-PH-K
1TUD_CL 1 RRM_OUT_/B 1 1 RRM_OUT_/B
D-GND 2 RRM_OUT_/A
1TUD_CL 5VNPD(with R) 3 3 2 RRM_OUT_/A
RRM_OUT_B 5 3 RRM_OUT_B RRM
VHPGP1S73P+-18 RRM_OUT_A 7 4 RRM_OUT_A
CPFM_OUT_A 9 φ42 PM BI
24V_CPFM 11
Wire jumper CPFM_OUT_/A 13
Spring 1TC-K CPFM_OUT_B 15 S6B-XH-A-1
Wire jumper CN-6 24V_CPFM 17 1 CPFM_OUT_A
TC PWB SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N Power harness PRT B20B-PNDZS CPFM_OUT_/B 19 2 24V_CPFM
Spring 1TC-C CPFM_OUT_/A
CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 3
Wire jumper INT24V2 2 4 CPFM_OUT_B
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND CPFM
Spring 1TC-M P-GND 4 5 24V_CPFM
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(with R) 3 5 5VNPD(with R) /DVM_K_CK CPFM_OUT_/B
Wire jumper 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR 6 6
To TC UN PTC_ERR 2 /DVM_K_D 8
Spring 1TC-Y HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM# 56 HB UNI
DVM_K_LD 10 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
Wire jumper /TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD# /CPUC1 12 1 /CPUC1 1 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
A. MX-C400P/C380P
Spring /TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK# 24V3

Separation 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA# 14 2 24V3 2 1 /CPUC1 1
/TC_DATA# 6 16 3 /CPFC 3
Wire jumper P-GND 7 9 P-GND 9 17 P-GND /CPFC 2 24V3 2 CPUC
24V3 18 4 24V3 4
Spring VCASE INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1 (NC) P R
20 R P
11 F-GND 11
P R 2 INT5V SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
PS-187 FPS-187 4 (NC) 1 /CPFC 1
2-TC 2-TC F.G HL DCDC PWB CPFC
6 INTCNT 2 24V3 2
PS-187 FPS-187 SRA-01T-3.2 8 PROFM1_V P R
PTC PTC
10 /PROFM1_CNT Paper feed drive clutch harness
12 P-GND
14 /ROFM1_LD
16 (NC)
PTC harness 18 (NC) MAIN DRIVE UN
20 INT24V1
SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N B7B-PASK-1

1 INT24V2
1 PROFM1_V 1
2 P-GND
2 /PROFM1_CNT 2 3 (NC)
PROFM1 3 P-GND 3 4 /DVM_K_CK DVM_K
4 /ROFM1_LD 4 /DVM_K_D
5
P R PCU PWB 6 (NC)
60 x 25 axial-flow PWM 7 DVM_K_LD
DC brushless motor
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1 Main drive harness B7B-PASK-1
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK 3 3 (NC)
Paper feed UN /DVM_CL_D 4 4 /DVM_CL_CK DVM_CL
Paper feed transport DVM_CL_LD 5 5 /DVM_CL_D
CS PAPER FEED UN DHPD_CL 6 6 (NC)
interface harness harness D-GND 7 7 DVM_CL_LD
CN-13 5VNPD(with R) 8
14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF)(SN) CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) B30B-CZWHK-B-1 DC brushless motor
03XR-6H-P /1TURC_2 9
14CZ-6H
Paper feed UN harness 14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL(LF)(SN) 14CZ-6H 15CZ-6Y 15CZ-6Y 15CZ-6Y
5VNPD 1 14 5VNPD 1 A-15 5VNPD A-1 A-15 5VNPD +24V3 10
/CPED1 2 13 /CPED1 2 A-14 /CPED1 A-2 A-14 /CPED1 DHPD_K 11 179228-3
CPED1 D-GND 3 12 D-GND 3 A-13 D-GND A-3 A-13 D-GND D-GND 12 1 DHPD_CL
VHPGP1A73A+-18 11 5VNPD 4 A-12 5VNPD A-4 A-12 5VNPD 5VNPD(with R) 13 2 D-GND DHPD_CL
03XR-6H-P 10 /CPFD1 5 A-11 /CPFD1 A-5 A-11 /CPFD1 /1TURC_1 14 3 5VNPD(with R)
5VNPD 1 9 D-GND 6 A-10 D-GND A-6 A-10 D-GND +24V3 15 VHPGP1S73P+-18
CPFD1 /CPFD1 2 8 5VNPD 7 A-9 5VNPD A-7 A-9 5VNPD
D-GND 3 7 /CLUD 8 A-8 /CLUD A-8 A-8 /CLUD SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
VHPGP2A230L-1 6 D-GND 9 A-7 D-GND A-9 A-7 D-GND AC/DC power source mounting plate 1 /1TURC_2 1
03XR-6H-P 5 5VNPD 10 A-6 5VNPD A-10 A-6 5VNPD 2 +24V3 2 1TURC2
5VNPD 1 4 /PPD1 11 A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1 P R
/CLUD 2 3 D-GND 12 A-4 D-GND A-4 D-GND F.G F.G
CLUD1 A-12
D-GND 3 2 F-GND 13 A-3 F-GND A-13 A-3 1TCSET SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 179228-3
VHPGP1A73A+-18 292254-4 1 (NC) 14 A-2 F-GND A-14 F. G A-2 /1TCCRU 1 DHPD_K
179228-3 179228-4 04XR-6H-P A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND 2 D-GND DHPD_K
5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 1 SRA-01T-3.2 3 5VNPD(wtih R)
Process positioning plate R
PPD1 /PPD1 2 3 /PPD1 2 F.G B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND VHPGP1S73P+-18
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 3 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1 F-GND 4 SRA-21T-4 B-3 D-GND B-3 D-GND F.G F.G SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
VHPGP1A73A+-18 B-13
B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 1 /1TURC_1 1
PPD1 harness B-5 /DRCRU_M B-11 B-5 /DRCRU_M 2 +24V3 2 1TURC1
B-6 /DRCRU_C B-10 B-6 /DRCRU_C P R
F.G B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
SRA-01T-3.2 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD CN-12
HT POSITION LOCK UN B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2 B20B-CZHK-B-1
CZHR-20V-S DV interface harness
B-15 D-GND B-1 B-15 D-GND D-GND 1
3. Paper feed transport, Process drive, Front, High voltage
15CZ-6H 15CZ-6H DL_Y# 2

SMP-12V-NC CZHR-15V-S
D-GND
Process INT interface harness SMR-12V-N1 +D-GND D-GND 3
1 DL_M# 4
2 DRSET 2 D-GND 5
MC_BK harness BK
SRA-01T-3.2 3 D-GND 3 FPS-187
DRSET DL_C# 6
4 /DRCRU_Y 4 Ozone duct UN MC-K MC-K Blade spring Drum
DRSET /DRCRU_M D-GND 7
5 5 8 cartridge
DL_BK#
6 /DRCRU_C 6 PROFM2_V 9 MC PWB
SRA-01T-3.2 7 /DRCRU_K 7 /PROFM2_CNT 10 MC_CL harness
179228-2 8 /1TNFD 8 11 CN-1 FPS-187
9 D-GND 9 P-GND Blade
1 PROFM2_LD 12 SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N B09B-PASK MC-CMY #1 CL
DRCRU_Y /DRCRU_Y 10 F-GND 10 MC_BK_ERR 13 MC_BK_ERR
MC-CMY #1 spring
D-GND 2 (NC) 1 MC_BK_ERR 1 9 FPS-187 Drum
11 11 MC_CL_ERR 14 2 MC_CL_ERR 2 8 MC_CL_ERR Blade
QSW-B0017QSZZ 12 (NC) 12 MC-CMY 2# MC-CMY 2#
179228-2 HV_REM# 15 3 HV_REM# 3 7 HV_REM# spring cartridge

/DRCRU_M 1 R P /HV_LD1# 16 4 /HV_LD1# 4 6 /HV_LD1#
DRCRU_M D-GND 2 /HV_CLK# 17 5 /HV_CLK# 5 5 /HV_CLK#
QSW-B0017QSZZ
SRA-01T-3.2 /HV_DATA# 18 6 /HV_DATA# 6 4 /HV_DATA# Wire jumper
179228-2 F.G P-GND 19 7 P-GND 7 3 P-GND GB-K Spring
/DRCRU_C 6 5 4 3 2 1 INT24V1 20 8 INT24V1 8 2 INT24V1
DRCRU_C D-GND 21 P R 1 F-GND Wire jumper
QSW-B0017QSZZ GB-C Spring
179228-2 Wire jumper Drum cartridge
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
/DRCRU_K 1 GB-M Spring
DRCRU_K D-GND 2 F. G
Wire jumper
QSW-B0017QSZZ DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DP-SP1(05) SRA-01T-3.2 GB-Y Spring
179228-2 MC PWB harness Wire jumper

/1TNFD 1 BS-K Spring
1TNFD D-GND 2 Wire jumper
QSW-B0017QSZZ BS-C Spring
Wire jumper Developer cartridge
SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N BS-M Spring
1 +(R) 1 Wire jumper
LSUFM 2 -(Blk) 2 Spring
3 Lock(W) 3 BS-Y
P R
60 x 25 axial-flow 179228-3
5VNPD 1
PPD2 /PPD2 2
D-GND 3
VHPGP2A200L-1
179228-3 TC PWB harness
1TUD_CL 1
1TUD_CL D-GND 2
5VNPD(with R) 3
VHPGP1S73P+-18
TC PWB PAPER FEED DRIVE UN

CN-6 CN-15
Wire jumper SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N Power harness PRT B20B-PNDZS B20B-PNDZS Paper feed drive harness B4B-PH-K
Spring 1TC-K CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL RRM_OUT_/B 1 1 RRM_OUT_/B
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND RRM_OUT_/A 3 2 RRM_OUT_/A
Wire jumper
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(with R) 3 5 5VNPD(with R) RRM_OUT_B 5 3 RRM_OUT_B RRM
Spring Separation
B. MX-B400P/B380P
To TC UN PTC_ERR 2 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR RRM_OUT_A 7 4 RRM_OUT_A

Wire jumper HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM# CPFM_OUT_A 9 φ42 PM BI
Spring VCASE /TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD# 24V_CPFM 11
/TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK# CPFM_OUT_/A 13
/TC_DATA# 6 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA# CPFM_OUT_B 15 S6B-XH-A-1
P-GND 7 9 P-GND 9 17 P-GND 24V_CPFM 17 1 CPFM_OUT_A
INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1 CPFM_OUT_/B 19 2 24V_CPFM
11 F-GND 11 3 CPFM_OUT_/A
P R 2 INT5V INT24V2 2 4 CPFM_OUT_B CPFM
PS-187 FPS-187 4 (NC) P-GND 4 5 24V_CPFM
F.G HL DCDC PWB 6 INTCNT /DVM_K_CK 6 6 CPFM_OUT_/B
2-TC 2-TC
SRA-01T-3.2 8 PROFM1_V /DVM_K_D 8 56 HB UNI
PS-187 FPS-187 10 /PROFM1_CNT DVM_K_LD 10 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
PTC PTC 1 /CPUC1 1
12 P-GND /CPUC1 12
14 /ROFM1_LD 24V3 14 2 24V3 2
1 /CPUC1 1
16 (NC) /CPFC 16 3 /CPFC 3
PTC harness 2 24V3 2 CPUC
18 (NC) 24V3 18 4 24V3 4
P R
20 INT24V1 (NC) 20 R P
SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N 1 /CPFC 1
1 PROFM1_V 1 2 24V3 2 CPFC
2 /PROFM1_CNT 2 P R
PROFM1 3 P-GND 3
Paper feed drive clutch harness
4 /ROFM1_LD 4
P R
60 x 25 axial-flow PWM
MAIN DRIVE UN
PCU PWB B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
Paper feed UN Paper feed transport 3 (NC)
4 /DVM_K_CK DVM_K
CS PAPER FEED UN interface harness BFT harness BFT 5 /DVM_K_D
6 (NC)
CN-13 CN-9
14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL(LF)(SN) 14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF)(SN) CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) 7 DVM_K_LD
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 B15B-CZHK-B-1
15CZ-6Y 15CZ-6Y DC brushless motor
03XR-6H-P Paper feed UN harness
5VNPD 1
14CZ-6H 14 5VNPD 1 14CZ-6H A-15 5VNPD A-1
15CZ-6Y A-15 5VNPD (NC) 1 ACDC power source mounting plate
CPED1 /CPED1 2 13 /CPED1 2 A-14 /CPED1 A-2 A-14 /CPED1 Dummy 2
D-GND 3 12 D-GND 3 A-13 D-GND A-3 A-13 D-GND (NC) 3 F.G F.G
VHPGP1A73A+-18 11 5VNPD 4 A-12 5VNPD A-4 A-12 5VNPD (NC) 4
03XR-6H-P 10 /CPFD1 5 A-11 /CPFD1 A-5 A-11 /CPFD1 (NC) 5 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
5VNPD 1 9 D-GND 6 A-10 D-GND A-6 A-10 D-GND (NC) 6
/CPFD1 2 8 5VNPD 7 A-9 5VNPD A-7 A-9 5VNPD Dummy 7
CPFD1 D-GND 3 7 /CLUD 8 A-8 /CLUD A-8 A-8 /CLUD (NC) 8 Process positioning plate R
VHPGP2A230L-1 6 D-GND 9 A-7 D-GND A-9 A-7 D-GND (NC) 9
03XR-6H-P 5 5VNPD 10 A-6 5VNPD A-10 A-6 5VNPD (NC) 10 F.G F.G
5VNPD 1 4 /PPD1 11 A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1 (NC) 11
/CLUD 2 3 D-GND 12 A-4 D-GND A-12 A-4 D-GND Dummy 12 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
CLUD1 D-GND 3 2 F-GND 13 A-3 F-GND A-13 A-3 1TCSET (NC) 13 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
VHPGP1A73A+-18 292254-4 1 (NC) 14 A-2 F-GND A-14 F.G A-2 /1TCCRU /1TURC_1 14 1 /1TURC_1 1
179228-3 179228-4 04XR-6H-P A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND +24V3 15 2 +24V3 2 1TURC1
5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 1 SRA-01T-3.2 P R
/PPD1 2 3 /PPD1 2 F.G B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND
Main drive harness BFT
PPD1 D-GND 3 2 D-GND 3 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1 F-GND 4 SRA-21T-4 B-3 D-GND B-13 B-3 D-GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
B-4 (NC) B-12 B-4 (NC)
PPD1 harness B-5 (NC) B-11 B-5 (NC)
B-6 (NC) B-10 B-6 (NC) CN-12
F.G B20B-CZHK-B-1
B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
(NC) 1
SRA-01T-3.2 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
(NC) 2
(NC) 3
B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
(NC) 4
B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
(NC) 5
B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
HT POSITION LOCK UN (NC) 6 DV interface harness BFT
B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD
D-GND 7 MC_BK harness
B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2
Process INT interface DL_BK# 8 FPS-187 FPS-187
B-15 D-GND B-1 B-15 D-GND MC PWB
15CZ-6H 15CZ-6H PROFM2_V 9 MC-K MC-K
harness BFT SMR-12V-N + SMP-12V-NC CZHR-15V-S /PROFM2_CNT 10
Ozone duct UN
D-GND 1 D-GND 1 P-GND 11 CN-1
2 DRSET 2 PROFM2_LD 12 B09B-PASK
SRA-01T-3.2 3 D-GND 3 MC_BK_ERR 13 SMP-07V-NC + SMR-07V-N 9 MC_BK_ERR
DRSET 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 14 1 MC_BK_ERR 1 8 (NC)
DRSET 5 (NC) 5 HV_REM# 15 2 HV_REM# 2 7 HV_REM#
6 (NC) 6 /HV_LD1# 16 3 /HV_LD1# 3 6 /HV_LD1#
SRA-01T-3.2 7 /DRCRU_K 7 /HV_CLK# 17 4 /HV_CLK# 4 5 /HV_CLK#
Wire jumper
8 /1 TNFD 8
GB-K Spring
9 D-GND 9 P-GND 19 6 P-GND 6 3 P-GND
179228-2 Wire jumper
10 F-GND 10 INT24V1 20 7 INT24V1 7 2 INT24V1 DV UN
/DRCRU_K 1 BS-K Spring
11 (NC) 11 P R 1 F-GND

DRCRU_K D-GND 2
12 (NC) 12
QSW-B0017QSZZ
R P
F.G
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
F.G
MC PWB harness BFT

179228-2
/1TNFD 1
1TNFD D-GND 2
QSW-B0017QSZZ
1 +(R) 1
LSUFM 2 -(Blk) 2
3 Lock(W) 3
P R
60 x 25 axial-flow 179228-3
5VNPD 1
PPD2 /PPD2 2
D-GND 3
VHPGP2A200L-1
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
3 (NC)
4 /FUM_CK FUM
5 /FUM_D
6 (NC)
7 FUM_LD
DC brushless motor
B4B-PH-K
1 POM_OUT_/B
2 POM_OUT_/A
3 POM_OUT_B POM
4 POM_OUT_A
CN-16 1 /2TURC 1
B18B-PNDZS Paper exit interface harness 2 24V3 2 2TURC
INT24V2 1 P R
P-GND 3 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
/FUM_CK 5
/FUM_D 1 /ADUC1 1
7
/FUM_LD 9 2 24V3 2 ADUC1
POM_OUT_/B 11 P R
POM_OUT_/A 13
POM_OUT_B 15
POM_OUT_A 17
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC Fusing fan
FUFM_V 2 1 +(R) 1
FUM_CNT 4 2 PWM(Brw) 2
P-GND 6 3 -(BIk) 3 FUFM
4. Right door, Frame fusing
FUFM_LD 8 4 Lock(W) 4
/2TURC 10 R P 80 x 25 axial-flow PWM
24V3 12
/ADUC1 14
24V3 16
(NC) 18 RIGHT DOOR UN
1 +(R) 1
PCU PWB 2 PWM(Brw) 2
3 -(BIk) 3 POFM
4 Lock(W) 4
R P 60 x 25 axial-flow PWM
179228-3
1 /APPD1
2 D-GND APPD1
3 5VNPD(with R)
CN-17 33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) VHPGP1S73P+-18
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 Paper exit interface harness Right door harness
15CZ-6Y 16CZ-6H CZHR-16V-S
POFM_V A-15 B-1 POFM_V B-16
/POFM_CNT A-14 B-2 /POFM_CNT B-15
P-GND A-13 B-3 P-GND B-14
/POFM_LD A-12 B-4 /POFM_LD B-13 179228-3
/APPD1 A-11 B-5 /APPD1 B-12 1 /APPD2
D-GND A-10 B-6 D-GND B-11 2 D-GND APPD2
5VNPD(with R) A-9 B-7 5VNPD(with R) B-10 3 5VNPD(with R)
/APPD2 A-8 B-8 /APPD2 B-9 VHPGP1S73P+-18
5VNPD(with R) A-6 B-10 5VNPD(with R) B-7 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
D-GND A-5 B-11 D-GND B-6 1 D-GND 1
/2TCCRU A-4 B-12 /2TCCRU B-5 2 /2TCCRU 2
D-GND A-3 B-13 5VNPD(with R) B-4 P R SRA-21T-4
2TCSET A-2 B-14 2TCSET B-3 2TCCRU
(NC) A-1 B-15 (NC) B-2
B-1 F. G F. G 2TCCRU harness SRA-21T-4
B-16 (NC)
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
24V3 B-1 A-17 24V3 A-1
/MPFS B-2 A-16 /MPFS A-2
5VNPD(with R) B-3 A-15 5VNPD(with R) A-3 MULTI UN
/MPED B-5 A-13 /MPED A-5 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
5VNPD(with R) B-6 A-12 5VNPD(with R) A-6 1 24V3 1
D-GND B-7 A-11 D-GND A-7 2 /MPFS 2 MPFS
/MPLD B-8 A-10 /MPLD A-8 P R Flapper solenoid
5VN B-9 A-9 5VN A-9
MPWD B-10 A-8 MPWD A-10 SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N 179228-3
D-GND B-11 A-7 D-GND A-11 1 5VNPD(with R) 1
MPED harness 3 5VNPD(with R)
TH_M B-12 A-6 TH_M A-12 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND MPED
D-GND B-13 A-5 D-GND A-13 3 /MPED 3 1 /MPED
HUD_M B-14 A-4 HUD_M A-14 4 F-GND 4 VHPGP1S73P+-18
5VN B-15 A-3 5VN A-15 P R
15CZ-6H A-2 F-GND A-16
17CZ-6Y A-1 (NC) A-17 CZHR-17V-S
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
R P
F.G

SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
MULTI TRAY
SMP-06V-NC + SMR-06V-N 179228-3
CN-1 1 5VNPD(wtih R) 1
Manual feed tray harness 3 5VNPD(with R)
B2P-VH Paper exit interface harness PS-187 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
+24V1 1 1 +24V1 3 /MPLD 3 1 /MPLD
MPLD1
DSW_R(24V) 2 4 5VN 4 VHPGP1S73P+-18
PS-187 DSW-R 5 MPWD 5 PHR-3
1 DSW_R(24V) 6 D-GND 6 3 5VN
P R 2 MPWD MPWS
1 D-GND
PHR-4
4 TH_M Temperature/
3 D-GND
2 HUD_M humidity
1 5VN detection
DEVELOPER UNIT(YELLOW)
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness Resistor
1 D-GND 1
2 DVTYP_Y 2 2KΩ1/4W
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
4 DVCRU_V 4 Fuse
5 ATC_V 5
RESI UN 6 TCS_Y 6
7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
CN-18
179228-5 DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS 8 TSG_Y 8 1 TSG_Y
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) S P 2 ATC_V
RESI REGS_R 4
RESI harness 3 REGS_R 3
Paper exit interface harness 3 REGS_R 3 TCS_Y TCS_Y
REGS_R_LED# 3 REGS_R_LED# 4 D-GND
SENSOR 5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND
R +5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F
VHPYAHA16++-1 4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F
179228-5 8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
A. MX-C400P/C380P
PCS_F 5 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD DEVELOPER UNIT(MAGENTA)

RESI REGS_F 4 11 5VNPD(with R) 11 21 (NC)
SENSOR REGS_F_LED# 3 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC)
D-GND 2 13 1TUD_K 13 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness
F Resistor
+5VNPD 1 14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(with R) 1 D-GND 1
4 D-GND 2 DVTYP_M 2 2KΩ1/4W
P S
VHPYAHA16++-1 6 1TUD_K CN-11 3 /DVCRU_M 3 Fuse
8 5VNPD B32B-CZWHK-B-1 4 DVCRU_V 4
10 /POD1 CZHR-16V-Y DV interface harness 5 ATC_M 5
D-GND D-GND A-16
12 DVTYP_Y A-15 6 TCS_M 6
179228-3 14 5VNPD 7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
/DVCRU_Y A-14
5VNPD(with R) 3 16 /POD2 DVCRU_V 8 TSG_M 8 1 TSG_M
D-GND 2 18 A-13 S P 2 ATC_V
1TUD_K D-GND ATC_V A-12
1TUD_K 1 20 5VNPD 3 TCS_M TCS_M
TCS_Y A-11
VHPGP1S73P+-18 22 /TFD2 D-GND 4 D-GND
A-10
24 D-GND TSG_Y A-9
D-GND A-8
DVTYP_M A-7
PAPER OUTPUT UN /DVCRU_M A-6
DVCRU_V A-5
179228-3 ATC_V A-4
5VNPD 1
TCS_M A-3 DEVELOPER UNIT(CYAN)
D-GND A-2
POD1 /POD1 2 TSG_M A-1
D-GND 3 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness
5. Process, DV, RESI, Paper exit
VHPLG248NL1-1 D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1 Resistor

DVTYP_C B-2 2 DVTYP_C 2 2KΩ1/4W
179228-3 SMR-03V-N + SMP-03V-NC
POD2 harness /DVCRU_C B-3 3 /DVCRU_C 3
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 Fuse
POD2 /POD2 2 2 /POD2 2 ATC_V B-5 5 ATC_C 5
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3 TCS_C B-6 6 TCS_C 6
VHPLG248NL1-1 R P D-GND 51021-0400
B-7 7 D-GND 7
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC TSG_C B-8 8 TSG_C 8 1 TSG_C
179228-3 TFD harness
5VNPD 1 D-GND B-9 S P 2 ATC_V
1 5VNPD 1 DVTYP_K B-10 3 TCS_C TCS_C
/TFD2 2 2 /TFD2 2 /DVCRU_K
TFD2 3 3 B-11 4 D-GND
D-GND 3 D-GND DVCRU_V B-12
VHPLG248NL1-1 4 F-GND 4 ATC_V B-13
R P TCS_K B-14
D-GND B-15
F.G F.G TSG_K B-16
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 CZHR-16V-S
DEVELOPER UNIT(BLACK)
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness
1 D-GND 1 Resistor
2 DVTYP_K 2 2KΩ1/4W
3 /DVCRU_K 3
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC 4 DVCRU_V 4 Fuse
1 TNM_K_1 1 5 ATC_K 5
TNM_K 2 TNM_K_2 2 PCU PWB 6 TCS_K 6
Synchronous motor R P 7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
8 TSG_K 8 1 TSG_K
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC CN-14 S P 2 ATC_V
1 TNM_C_1 1 CRUM harness B28B-PNDZS 3 TCS_K TCS_K
TNM_C 2 TNM_C_2 2 1 TNM_K_1 4 D-GND
Synchronous motor R P 3 TNM_K_2
5 TNM_C_1
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC 7 TNM_C_2
1 TNM_M_1 1 9 TNM_M_1
TNM_M 2 TNM_M_2 2 11 TNM_M_2
Synchronous motor R P 13 D-GND
15 5VN
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC 17 CRM_K_CK#
1 TNM_Y_1 1 19 CRM_K_DT# CN-12
TNM_Y 2 TNM_Y_2 2 21 D-GND B20B-CZHK-B-1 DV interface harness 51065-0300
Synchronous motor R P 23 5VN CZHR-20V-S
CRM_M_CK# D-GND 1 1 D-GND
25 DL_Y#
CRM_M_DT# 2 2 (NC) DL_Y
27 D-GND 3 3 DL_Y#
DL_M# 4
2 TNM_Y_1
D-GND 5 51065-0300
4 TNM_Y_2
DL_C# 6 1 D-GND
6 (NC)
HLOUT_EX
D-GND 7 2 (NC) DL_M
8 DL_BK# 8 3 DL_M#
HL/DCDC PWB 10 HLOUT_MAIN PROFM2_V
12 HLOUT_LOW 9
/PROFM2_CNT 10 51065-0300
14 D-GND
P-GND 11 1 D-GND
16 5VN PROFM2_LD 12 2 (NC)
18 CRM_C_CK# (from page 3)
DL_C
3 DL_C#

TSHR-04V-K 20 CRM_C_DT#
D-GND 4 22 D-GND 51065-0300
5VN 3 24 5VN
CRM-K CRM_K_CK# 2 CRM_Y_CK# 1 D-GND
26
CRM_K_DT# 1 28 CRM_Y_DT# 2 (NC) DL_BK
3 DL_BK#
TSHR-04V-K
D-GND 4 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
5VN 3
CRM-C CRM_C_CK# 2 1 +(R) 1
CRM_C_DT# 1 2 PWM(Brw) 2
3 -(Blk) 3 PROFM2
TSHR-04V-K 4 Lock(W) 4
4 R P φ94 Sirocco PWM
D-GND
5VN 3
CRM-M CRM_M_CK# 2
CRM_M_DT# 1
TSHR-04V-K
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM-Y CRM_Y_CK# 2
CRM_Y_DT# 1
RESI UN
CN-18 CN-11
179228-5 DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS B16B-CZWHK-B-1
B. MX-B400P/B380P
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) (NC) A-8 CZHR-08V-Y

RESI REGS_R 4
RESI harness BFT 3 REGS_R 3
Paper exit interface harness BFT 3 REGS_R (NC) A-7
SENSOR REGS_R_LED# 3 5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5 REGS_R_LED# (NC) A-6
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND (NC) A-5
R +5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD (NC) A-4
2 (NC) 2 11 (NC) (NC) A-3 DEVELOPER UNIT
VHPYAHA16++-1 4 (NC) 4 13 (NC) (NC) A-2
6 (NC) 6 15 (NC) (NC) A-1
8 (NC) 8 17 (NC) DV interface harness BFT QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness
179228-3 10 (NC) 10 19 (NC) D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1 RESISTOR
5VNPD(with R) 3 11 5VNPD(with R) 11 21 (NC) DVTYP_K B-2 2 DVTYP_K 2 2KΩ 1/4W
D-GND 2 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC) /DVCRU_K B-3 3 /DVCRU_K 3
1TUD_K 1TUD_K 1 13 1T UD_K 13 DVCRU_V B-4 4 DVCRU_V 4 FUSE
VHPGP1S73P+-18 14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(with R) ATC_V B-5 5 ATC_K 5 Littelfuse
P S 4 D-GND TCS_K B-6 6 TCS_K 6 0251.062MXL
6 1TUD_K D-GND B-7 7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
8 5VNPD TSG_K B-8 8 TSG_K 8 1 TSG_K
10 /POD1 CZHR-08V-S S P 2 ATC_V
12 D-GND 3 TCS_K TCS_K
14 5VNPD 4 D-GND
16 /POD2
18 D-GND
20 5VNPD
PAPER OUTPUT UN 22 /TFD2
24 D-GND
179228-3
5VNPD 1
POD1 /POD1 2
D-GND 3
VHPLG248NL1-1
179228-3 POD2 harness SMR-03V-N + SMP-03V-NC

5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
POD2 /POD2 2 2 /POD2 2
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
VHPLG248NL1-1 R P
179228-3 TFD harness SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC

5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
TFD2 /TFD2 2 2 /TFD2 2 PCU PWB
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
VHPLG248NL1-1 4 F-GND 4
R P
F.G F.G
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
CN-14 CN-12
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC CRUM harness BFT B28B-PNDZS B20B-CZHK-B-1
1 TNM_K_1 1 1 TNM_K_1 CZHR-20V-S
(NC) 1
TNM_K 2 TNM_K_2 2 3 TNM_K_2 (NC) 2
Synchronous motor R P 5 (NC) (NC) 3
7 (NC) (NC) 4
9 (NC) (NC) 5
TSHR-04V-K 11 (NC) (NC) 6 DV interface harness BFT 51065-0300
D-GND 4 13 D-GND D-GND 7 1 D-GND
5VN 3 15 5VN DL_BK# 8 2 (NC) DL_BK
CRM-K CRM_K_CK# 2 17 CRM_K_CK# PROFM2_V 9 3 DL_BK#
CRM_K_DT# 1 19 CRM_K_DT# /PROFM2_CNT 10
21 (NC) P-GND 11
23 (NC) PROFM2_LD 12 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
25 (NC) 1 +(R) 1
27 (NC) 2 PWM(Brw) 2
3 -(Blk) 3 PROFM2
2 (NC) 4 Lock(W) 4
4 (NC) R P φ94 Sirocco PWM
6 (NC)
8 HLOUT_EX
HL/DCDC PWB 10 HLOUT_MAIN
12 HLOUT_LOW

14 (NC)
16 (NC)
18 (NC)
20 (NC)
22 (NC)
24 (NC)
26 (NC)
28 (NC)
Power harness PRT SCN interface harness PRT
1 12V 1
2 5VN 2
3 3.3V 3 OPE CNT PWB
CN-203 4 D-GND 4
B5P-VH-B P R
12V 1
12V 2
12V 3
D-GND 4
D-GND 5
PS-187
1 DSW_F(24V)
CN-204 PS-187 DSW-F

B7P-VH-B 1 DSW_R(24V)
5VN 1
5VN 2
5VN 3
5VN 4
5VN 5
D-GND 6
HL DCDC PWB D-GND 7
CN-205 WH PWB
B4P-VH-B
3.3V 1
3.3V 2
3.3V 3
D-GND 4
LUM harness
SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N PAP-02V-S
1 P-GND 1 1 P-GND
2 /CLUM 2 2 /CLUM CLUM
CN-302 CN-6 3 5VNPD 3 Brush motor
B04B-PASK-1 B20B-PNDZS 4 /CSPD1 4 179228-3
INT24V1 1 20 INT24V1 5 D-GND 5 1 5VNPD
INTCNT 2 6 INTCNT CN-8 6 (NC) 6 2 /CSPD1 CSPD1
(NC) 3 2 INT5V B24B-PNDZS 7 (NC) 7 3 D-GND
INT5V 4 WH_CNT 1 DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC 8 (NC) 8 VHPGP1A73A+-18
24V3 3 + DF1B-20DES-2.5RC P R
CN-3 P-GND 5 1 P-GND 1
B8P-VH /CLUM 7 2 /CLUM 2
1 12V 5VNPD 9 3 5VNPD 3
2 D-GND /CSPD1 11 4 /CSPD1 4 CN-1
3 5VN D-GND 13 5 D-GND 5 CSS harness S04B-PASK-2
CN-301 4 D-GND D-GND 15 6 D-GND 6 1 D-GND
B3P-VH-B 5 3.3V /CSS13 17 7 /CSS13 7 2 /CSS13 CASSETE SIZE
24V2 1 6 (NC) /CSS12 19 8 /CSS12 8 3 /CSS12
P-GND 2 7 DSW_R(24V) /CSS11 21 9 /CSS11 9 4 /CSS11 DETECT PWB
INT24V2 3 8 DSW_F(24V) (NC) 23 10 /TRC_DSK 10
11 RES_DSK 11
INT24V1 2 12 DSR_DSK 12
CN-202 /HLPR 4 13 /DTR_DSK 13
B5P-VH-B FW 6 14 RXD_DSK 14
DESK (OPTION)
OV 1 PSFM_V 8 15 TXD_DSK 15
P-GND 2 PSFM_LD 10 16 D-GND 16 QR/P4-12P-C(01)
P-GND 3 /TRC_DSK 12 17 (NC) 17 + QR/P4-12S-C(01)
24V4 4 RES_DSK 14 18 24V_DSK 18 1 24V_DSK 1
24V4 5 DSR_DSK 16 19 P-GND 19 2 /TRC_DSK 2
/DTR_DSK 18 20 5VN 20 3 RES_DSK 3
CN-4 RXD_DSK 20 P S 4 DSR_DSK 4
B7P-VH TXD_DSK 22 5 /DTR_DSK 5
1 +24V4 D-GND 24 6 5VN 6
2 P-GND 7 P-GND 7 DESK
3 INT24V2 8 RXD_DSK 8
4 P-GND 9 TXD_DSK 9
5 P-GND 10 D-GND 10
6 +24V3 11 (NC) 11
7 +24V1 CN-23 Power harness PRT 12 F-GND 12
B04B-PASK-1
P S
6. Power source, Frame electrical fitting, Option
PSFM2_V 1 SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N

CN-104
/VFM_EX_CNT 2 1 +(R) 1
B05B-PASK-1 P-GND 3
INT24V1 1
PCU PWB 2 -(Blk) 2 HDD FM
PSFM2_LD 4 3 LOCK(Y) 3
/HLPR 2
FW 3 P R F. G. F.G.
PSFM_V 4 40 x 15 axial-flow SRA-21T-4
PSFW_LD 5
CN-10
B16B-PNDZS
1 24V3
CN-101 INNER FINISHER (OPTION)
2 P-GND
B9P-VH-B 3 /CV_COPY
24V_DSK 1 CN-5
4 /CV_COUNT
24V1 2 5 /CV_START B12B-PASK-1 FIN interface harness JAC-15S-3 + JAC-15P
24V1 3 RXD_FIN 1
6 /CV_CA 1 RXD_FIN 1
24V2 4 7 /CV_CLCOPY TXD_FIN 2 2 TXD_FIN 2
24V3 5 /DSR_FIN 3
TO COIN VENDOR 8 /CV_COLOR1 3 /DSR_FIN 3
24V3 6 9 /CV_STAPLE /DTR_FIN 4 4 /DTR_FIN 4
24V4 7 (OPTION)
10 /CV_COLOR0 TRC_FIN 5 5 TRC_FIN 5
24V4 8 11 /CV_DUPLEX RES_FIN 6 6 RES_FIN 6
24V4 9 5VN 7
12 5VN 7 (NC) 7 FINISHER
13 /CV_SIZE0 D-GND 8 8 (NC) 8
14 /CV_SIZE1 (NC) 9 9 5VN 9
15 /CV_SIZE2 24V4 10 10 D-GND 10
16 /CV_SIZE3 P-GND 11 11 24V4 11
AC/DC PWB (NC) 12 12 P-GND 12
13 (NC) 13
CN-102 14 (NC) 14

B10P-VH-B 15 F-GND 15
P-GND 1 P S
P-GND 2
P-GND 3
(NC) 4
P-GND 5 CN-12
F. G. F.G.
P-GND 6 B5P-VH
P-GND 7 1 12V SRA-21T-3
P-GND 8 2 D-GND
P-GND 9 3 5VN
OV 10 4 D-GND
5 3.3V
CN-13
CN-103 B8P-VH LSU MOTHER
B7P-VH-B 1 24V1
D-GND 1 2 P-GND
D-GND 2 3 D-GND PWB
5VO 3 4 5VO
5VL 4 5 5VL
5VL 5 6 5VL
DCCNT1 6 7 DCCNT1
DCCNT2 7 8 DCCNT2
CN-105
B03B-PASK-1
PSFM_V 1
PSFW_LD 2 PS FAN
P-GND 3
60 x 20 axial-flow
FUSING UNIT
RTH(MAIN)
RTH(SUB)
19P-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) CN-19
Fusing harness +19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) Fusing interface harness B18B-CZHK-B-1
7. AC, Fusing
B-1 TH_MAIN_IN B-9 1 TH_MAIN_IN

RTH(EX1) B-2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN B-8 2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN
B-4 TH_SUB_IN B-6 4 TH_SUB_IN
RTH(EX2) B-7 D-GND B-3 7 D-GND
B-9 D-GND B-1 9 D-GND PCU PWB
CZHR-09V-S 09CZ-6H 10 TH_LOW_IN
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC 11 D-GND
1 TH_LOW_IN 1 A-1 TH_LOW_IN A-10 12 5VNPD
RTH(LOW) 2 D-GND 2 A-2 D-GND A-9 13 HLPCD
R P A-3 5VNPD A-8 14 D-GND
A-4 HLPCD A-7 15 24V3 CN-14
179228-3 A-5 D-GND A-6 16 /HLPCS# B28B-PNDZS
5VNPD 1 A-6 24V3 A-5 17 FUCRU_V HLOUT_EX 8
HLPCD HLPCD 2 A-7 /HLPCS# A-4 18 /FUCRU HLOUT_MAIN 10
D-GND 3 A-8 FUCRU_V A-3 HLOUT_LOW 12
VHPLG248NL1-1 A-9 /FUCRU A-2
Fuse A-10 (NC) A-1
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC CZHR-10V-S 10CZ-6H CN-8
1 24V3 1 B24B-PNDZS
HLPCS 2 /HLPCS# 2 1 N_HL_EX 1
N_HL_MAIN 1 WH_CNT
Flapper solenoid R P 2 2 3 24V3
3 N_HL_LOW 3
EX120: YLP-01V(RD) + YLR-01VF(WH) L_HL_LOW
4 4 CRUM harness
EX200: YLP-01V(BL) + YLR-01VF(WH) 5 L_HL_MAIN 5
RD
6 F-GND 6
HL MAIN WH 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 WH P R
D1.25-M3(Ni) P R
WH CN-13 CN-201
WH B03P-VL-R B3B-PASK-1
1 Neutral_HL_EX HLOUUT_HL_LOW 3
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) SRA-51T-3 2 Neutral_HL_MAIN HLOUUT_HL_MAIN 2
3 Neutral_HL_LOW HLOUUT_HL_EX 1
D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL external Interface harness HL DCDC PWB
CN-12 CN-11
D1.25-M3(Ni) EX120:RD D1.25-M3(Ni) B03P-VL B03P-VL
EX200:BL WH 1 Live_HL LiveHL_in 1
HL EX1 2 Live_HL_MAIN (NC) 2
BK WH 3 Live_HL_LOW NeutralHL_in 3
EX120:RD
D1.25-M3(Ni) EX200:BL D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL EX2 WH
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) AC/HL harness
CN-4
B03P-VL
EX120: SLP-01V(RD) + SLR-01VF(WH) LiveHL_out 1
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) EX200: SLP-01V(BL) + SLR-01VF(WH) (NC) 2
NeutralHL_out 3
BK RD WH
HL LOW 1 N-HL(LOW) 1 WH
P R
EX200 ONLY
CN-6
B2P3-VH-B-E ELP-02V + ELR-02V
LiveR_in 1 1 LiveR_in 1
(NC) 2 2 LiveR_in 2 REACTOR
LiveR_in 3 P R
OPTION Power harness CN-3

Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement AC/DC PWB B03P-VL-R PS-250(WH) MSW
CN-3 CN-1 MSW harness
B3B-PASK-1 SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC PRT Live_out 1 Live_out
B2P3-VH (NC)
Fusing unit I/F Drawer Fusing unit I/F Drawer WH_CNT 2 PS-250(WH)
1 Neutral_WH 1 1 WH_CNT 1 Neutral_out 3 Neutral_out
WH-CS 2 NC (NC) 2 2 24V3 2
3 Live_WHout 24V3 3 R P CN-2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A10
1 2 3 3 2 1 B03P-VL PS-250(RD)
Neutral1_in
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
Neutral1_in 3
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6 (NC) 2 PS-250(RD)

Live_in 1 Live_in
View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side WH PWB
CN-4 CN-2 CN-5
B2P3-VH-BL B2P3-VH-BK WH harness B2P3-VH-B CN-1
DESK UN 1 WH-N(DESK1) Neutral_WH 1 3 Neutral_WH B03P-VL EX120
2 NC (NC) 2 2 (NC) Live_in 1
(OPTION) 3 WH-L(DESK1) Live_WH 3 1 Live_WH (NC) 2
Neutral_in 3
WH-SW
PS-187 SRA-51T-4
Live_WH
CN-1
PS-187 B03P-VL Inlet harness EX200
Live_WH Live_in 1 Live_in
(NC) 2 F-GND
Neutral_in 3 Neutral_in
INLET
SRA-51T-4
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. RESERVED.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2010 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7,
Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2010 January Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

Service Manual: Digital Full Color Printer Laser Printer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Digital Full Color Printer Laser Printer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TopPage

DIGITAL FULL COLOR PRINTER

NOTE FOR SERVICING

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

2. Warning for servicing

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

6. Note for handling the drum cartridge, the

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2 MX-CSX2

AR-PF1 MX-FR20U MX-PUX1 MX-SMX3

STD: Standard provision, OPT: Option, *1: Product key target

OPT: Option, –: No setting

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2 MX-CSX2

AR-PF1 MX-FR21U MX-PUX1 MX-SMX3

STD: Standard provision, OPT: Option, *1: Product key target

OPT: Option, –: No setting

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

1. Supply system table

(2) Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand (MX-C380P)

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

(4) SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-C380P)

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 2

(2) Europe (MX-B380P)

2. Maintenance parts list

No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 3

No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

(3) Asia/Middle East/Africa/Agency (MX-C380P)

No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 4

No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

(2) Europe (MX-B380P)

No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 5

Black drum Color drum

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 6

Numbers of printable quantity

5. Life end display

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 7

(3) Toner cartridge

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 8

Display condition Print job

(2) Developer cartridge

Display condition Print job

(3) Toner cartridge

Display condition Print job

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 9

Model Supplier Specification

B. Transit environment conditions

C. Storage environment conditions (unopened)

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 10

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

No. Name Function/Operation Note

MX-C400P/C380P, MX-B400P/B380P EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 2

No. Name Function/Operation Note

When the registration sensor unit is replaced, the calibration ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;(',)$